[R26BK01744001] [재공고/기술입찰서 제출 공고] 방폐물검사건물 건설기자재 480V 저압차단기반 및 전동기제어반(E208) 구매

===== 2-1. 기술제안서 제출 안내 공고문.hwp =====

기술제안서 제출 안내공고 (제한경쟁/규격가격분리입찰/총액입찰)

공고번호 : 나라장터 물품 입찰공고 제R26BK01744001-000호

< 이 계약은 청렴계약(서약)제가 적용됩니다 >

이 계약은 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률」 제5조의2에 따른 청렴계약제가 적용됩니다. 입찰자는 반드시 입찰서 제출시 아래 청렴계약서에 관한 내용을 숙지하여야 하며, 동 내용을 위반한 경우 발주기관의 조치에 대하여 어떠한 이의도 제기할 수 없습니다. 아울러, 입찰서를 제출한 자는 청렴계약이행서약서를 제출한 것으로 간주합니다.

「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률」 제5조의2 및 같은 조의3에 따라 이 입찰에 참여한 당사 대리인과 임직원은 입찰·낙찰, 계약체결 또는 계약이행 등의 과정(준공∙납품 이후를 포함한다)에서 아래 각호의 청렴계약조건을 준수할 것이며, 이를 위반할 때에는 입찰·낙찰을 취소하거나 계약을 해제∙해지하는 등의 불이익을 감수하고, 이에 민∙형사상 이의를 제기하지 않을 것임을 약정합니다.

1. 금품·향응 등을 요구 또는 약속하거나 수수(授受)하지 않을 것이며, 관계직원에게 금품, 향응 등을 제공하지 않겠습니다.

2. 입찰가격의 사전협의 또는 특정인의 낙찰을 위한 담합 등 공정한 경쟁을 방해하지 않겠습니다.

3. 공정한 직무수행을 방해하는 알선‧청탁을 통하여 입찰 또는 계약과 관련된 특정정보의 제공을 요구하거나 받는 행위를 하지 않겠습니다.

4. 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률 시행령」 제4조의2제1항제2호 위반 시에 아래의 손해배상액을 납부토록 하겠습니다.(국가계약법 적용 입찰 및 계약 건에 한함)

입찰자 : 입찰금액의 100분의 10, 계약상대자 : 계약금액의 100분의 10

동 입찰이 2인 이상의 유효한 입찰자가 없거나 낙찰자가 없을 경우 재입찰에 부칠 수 있으니 국가종합전자 조달시스템(나라장터)에서 개찰결과를 확인 후 공고된 일정에 따라 재입찰하시기 바랍니다.

이 입찰 설명서는 한국원자력환경공단이 집행하는 입찰에서 입찰자와 낙찰자가 숙지하고 준수하여야 할 사항을 기재한 것으로써 모든 입찰희망자는 이를 열람하여야 합니다. 이 입찰과 관련하여 추가 문의사항이 있으면 아래 담당자에게 연락하시기 바랍니다.

① 입찰참가자격 등록, 나라장터 시스템: 정부조달 콜센터(☎ 1588-0800)

② 사업 담당자: 엔지니어링팀 이수열 차장(☎ 054-750-4318)

③ 계약담당자(입찰공고, 개찰, 계약방법 등) : ESG상생팀 최준하 직원(☎ 054-750-4076)

주소: 38062 경북 경주시 충효천길 19(서악동, 한국원자력환경공단)

전자입찰 공고에 첨부된 계약조건, 입찰유의서 등을 반드시 확인·숙지하시기 바랍니다.

1. 입찰에 부치는 사항

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

관리번호 한국원자력환경공단 2026-131 입찰건명

방폐물검사건물 건설기자재 480V 저압차단기반 및 전동기제어반(E208) 구매

계약방법 제한경쟁 낙찰자결정 규격가격분리입찰(2단계 경쟁(규격가격분리)) 사업예산 3,083,355,000원(부가세 포함) 추정가격 2,803,050,000원 구매규격 구매규격서 참조 계약기간 계약체결일로부터 2028.1.5. 납품기한 납기일: `28. 1. 5 인도조건 규격서 참조 기타사항

① 가격입찰 예정일: 2026. 9월(적격업체에 한하여 개별통지)

② 하자보증기간: 닙픔일로부터 3년 (보증증권, 5%)

③ 중소기업제품 구매촉진 및 판로지원에 관한 법률 시행령 제7조(중소기업자간 경쟁입찰의 예외 등) ①항 4호 및 <제7조 ①항 4. 특정한 기술·용역이 필요한 경우> 에 의거하여 중기간 경쟁입찰 예외임을 안내드립니다.

④ 설계용역 계약에 따라, 본 입찰서의 평가는 설계사인 “(주)한국전력기술” 이 진행함을 안내드립니다.

⑤ 본 공고는 나라장터 입찰공고 제 제R26BK01719691-000호 유찰에 따른 재공고 입찰입니다.

2. 입찰 참가자격

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

① 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률」시행령 제12조 및 같은 법 시행규칙 제14조 규정에 따라 경쟁입찰 참가자격을 갖추고 같은 법 시행령 제76에 의해 제한받지 아니한 자

② 국가종합전자조달시스템 입찰참가등록규정에 의하여 국가종합전자조달시스템(나라장터)에 입찰참가자격을 등록한 자

③ 공고마감일 전일까지 공단 품질절차서 「업체평가 및 등록관리」에 따라 “480V LC&MCC(E208)“ 으로 등록된 업체

※ 상기 자격을 갖추지 못한 자의 기술제안서는 접수하지 않습니다.

※ 입찰참가자격은 계약 체결 시 까지 유지하여야 합니다.

※ 입찰 참가 전, 참가자격의 유효기간 및 갱신여부를 확인하여 주시기 바랍니다.

3. 참가등록 및 기술제안서(이하 ‘입찰서’) 제출 안내

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

가. 작성 지침 및 평가기준 열람: 국가종합전자조달(www.g2b.go.kr)에 게시

나. 참가등록 및 입찰서 제출기한

① 입찰참가자격 등록장소: 조달청(또는 서울지방조달청) 고객지원센터 또는 각 지방조달청 경영지원과(팀)

② 입찰서 제출방법: 나라장터 전자입찰 및 오프라인 제출

③ 입찰서 제출기한

1) 직접방문 제출 및 나라장터 제출: 2026.09.29.(화) 18:00

2) 우편접수: 2026.09.29.(화) 도착 분까지 인정

다. 제출 장소 : 나라장터 전자입찰 제안서제출 시스템, 오프라인

라. 제출서류( *입찰유의서 1.3.2 입찰서 구성 및 내용 확인 필수)

① 입찰참가신청 공문 1부 (1) 입찰서 제출 공문 (2) PART A 기술사항 (3) PART B 상업사항 (4) 가격명세(가격불표시분) 및 납품일정 (5) 예외사항

(6) 입찰설명서에서 요구되는 기타 도면, 기술, 일반자료 및 정보

② ①의 내용을 담은 원본 1부 전자파일(온라인), 사본 5부 오프라인 총 6부

③ 사업자 등록증 사본(원본대조필) 및 법인등기부 등본 각 1부

④ 법인인감증명원 및 사용인감계 각 1부 ⑤ 국세 및 지방세 완납 증명서 각 1부

⑥ 대리인일 경우 위임장 및 재직증명원(신분증 지참)

※ 접수 시 구비서류가 미비한 서류는 일체 접수하지 않으며 제출된 제안서는 반환하지 않습니다. 신청서류 중 사본 제출 시에는 “원본과 같음”이라고 명기하고 인감증명상의 인감으로 날인하여 제출해야 합니다.

※ 개인정보보호법에 의거 제안서 내용 중 개인식별번호(성을 제외한 이름, 주민등록번호 뒷자리 등)에 해당하는 부분은 반드시 삭제 후 제출해야 합니다.

※ 최초 입찰 시 제안서 사본 실물 제출을 완료한 업체 중, 제안서 및 부속서류의 변경이 없는 경우, 제안서 사본 실물 제출을 면제합니다.

4. 입찰참가적격자 선정 및 통지, 낙찰자결정방법

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

가. 입찰서를 평가하여 적격업체를 선정하고 적격업체에 한하여 가격투찰을 실시한 후 가격입찰서를 개봉하여 예정가격 이하 최저가 입찰자를 낙찰자로 결정합니다.

* 낙찰자결정 등 세부기준은 “국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률 시행령” 및 “기획재정부 계약예규”를 적용합니다.

나. 입찰참가적격자가 1개사인 경우 재공고를 실시합니다.

다. 입찰참가적격자, 입찰일시 및 장소 등은 선정된 자에 한하여 개별 통지합니다.

5. 입찰무효

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

가. 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률 시행령」 제39조제4항, 「같은 법 시행규칙」 제44조 및 「(계약예규) 물품구매(제조)입찰유의서」 제12조에 해당되는 입찰은 무효입니다.

나. 입찰참가자격등록증상의 상호 및 대표자(수인대표인 경우 대표자 전원의 성명을 모두 등재, 각자 대표도 해당)가 법인등기부등본상의 상호, 대표자와 다른 경우에는 입찰참가자격등록증을 변경등록하고 입찰에 참여하여야 하며, 변경등록하지 않고 참여한 입찰은 무효입찰임을 알려드리오니 주의하시기 바랍니다.(공동수급 구성원 전원 해당)

다. 입찰참가자격의 판단기준일은 입찰참가자격등록 마감일(기준일이 정해져 있는 경우에는 해당일)이며 마감일(일시가 정해져 있는 경우에는 해당일시)까지 참가자격을 갖추지 않은 경우 무효입찰임을 알려드리오니 주의하시기 바랍니다.

라. 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률 시행규칙」 제44조 및 「(계약예규) 물품입찰유의서」 제12조에 정한 입찰무효 해당여부 확인을 위하여 등록정보 확인을 위한 서류(법인등기부등본, 입찰대리인임을 확인할 수 있는 서류, 관련되는 면허 등을 증명하는 서류 등)를 요청하는 경우, 낙찰대상자는 관계서류를 공단으로 제출하여야 합니다.

6 불공정행위 금지

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

가. 입찰자 또는 계약상대자는 입찰·낙찰, 계약체결 또는 계약이행 등의 과정에서 입찰 및 계약의 공정한 질서를 저해하는 다음 각 호의 어느 하나에 해당하는 행위를 하여서는 아니 됩니다.

① 금품·향응 등의 공여·약속 또는 공여의 의사를 표시하는 행위

② 입찰가격의 사전 협의 또는 특정인의 낙찰을 위한 담합 등 공정한 경쟁을 방해하는 행위

③ 공정한 직무수행을 방해하는 알선·청탁을 통하여 입찰 또는 계약과 관련된 특정정보의 제공을 요구하는 행위

④ 하수급인 또는 자재·장비업자의 계약상 이익을 부당하게 제한하는 행위

⑤ 그 밖에 입찰 및 계약 등 과정에서 공정한 경쟁을 저해하는 행위

나. 입찰자 또는 계약상대자는 제1항각호에 따른 행위가 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률」 제5조의3 등 관계법령에 위반되는 경우 해당 입찰·낙찰이 취소되거나 계약이 해지·해제될 수 있고, 입찰참가자격 제한대상에 해당되는 경우 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률」 제27조 등 관계법령에 따라 부정당업자로 입찰참가자격 제한처분을 받을 수 있습니다.

다. 계약담당자는 제1항각호의 위반행위를 확인하기 위하여 입찰자 또는 계약상대자에게 관련 자료제출을 요청할 수 있으며, 입찰자 또는 계약상대자는 특별한 사정이 없는 한 적극 협조하여야 합니다.

라. 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률 시행령」 제76조제1항제2호의 계약 주요 조건을 위반한 경우 ‘부정당업자 입찰참가자격 제한처분’을 받을 수 있습니다.

7. 동반성장 강화를 위한 상생결제 시행안내(국내 공급사에 한함)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

가. 공단은 정부의 상생결제 확대시행 방침에 부응하고 2·3차 하위 협력사와의 상생강화를 위하여 4개은행(농협은행, 우리은행, IBK기업은행, IM뱅크)과 상생결제 약정을 체결하여 운영 중입니다.

나. 본 입찰의 계약금액 전액은 상생결제채권으로 결제(2일 이내 채권만기 도래)되며, 공단으로부터 상생결제채권을 받은 자는 공단으로부터 받은 상생결제채권액의 20% 이상을 2차 협력사에 상생채권으로 재발행(한수원 채권 만료 전까지)하여야 합니다. 이를 위하여 협력기업은 대금지급 요청 전 은행약정 가입 완료, 협력사 채권발행에 대한 계획수립(협력사 은행 약정 가입 포함) 등의 사전 절차가 필요합니다.

다. 기타 상세한 내용은 상생결재 제도 안내(www.winwinpay.or.kr) 를 확인하시거나, 결제제도 문의사항은 공단 동반성장 담당자(054-750-4072)로 문의하시기 바랍니다.

8. 기타사항

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

가. 참가등록 및 입찰서 등 관련서류 제출은 업체대표자 또는 대리인이 제출서류를 지참, 접수하여야 합니다.

나. 입찰서는 우리 공단이 교부한 입찰설명서에 따라 사실대로 작성하여야 하며, 허위사실이 발견되면 입찰참가제한 및 낙찰취소, 계약해지될 수 있습니다.

다. 입찰서 각 항목은 빠짐없이 채워야 하며 해당사항이 없을 경우에는 “해당사항 없다”는 표기를 해야 하며, 평가항목 중 기간계산은 평가기준에 별도 기재가 없는 한 공고일을 기준으로 합니다.

라. 입찰참가희망업체가 전산장비 준비부족 등의 사유로 전자입찰 등록 및 투찰이 어려운 경우에는 입찰마감 24시간 이전에 조달청 정부조달콜센터(1588-0800)로 장애해결을 위해 문의바라며, 장애발생에도 정부조달콜센터로 문의하지 않아 발생되는 모든 책임은 입찰참가자에게 있습니다.

마. 입찰에 참가하고자 하는 자는 반드시 입찰등록사항과 법인등기부등본(법인) 및 사업자등록증(개인)상 대표자(대표자가 다수인 경우 전부), 주소, 상호 등이 일치하는 지 확인하고 입찰에 참여하시기 바랍니다.

바. 입찰 및 계약과 관련하여 공단 직원이 금품, 향응 등 부당한 요구를 할 경우 공단 감사담당관에게 신고하여 주시기 바랍니다.

사. 이 입찰과 관련하여 비리·불공정행위가 있는 경우 공단 감사실(054-750-4040~4047) 및 공단 홈페이지(www.korad.or.kr → 고객참여 → 민원접수 → 민원접수)를 통하여 신고 할 수 있습니다.

아. 입찰에 제출되는 서류가 사본일 경우에는 "사실과 상위 없음"을 날인하여 제출하시기 바랍니다.

자. 제출한 서류가 허위 또는 부정한 방법으로 작성(제출)된 사실이 확인될 경우에는 관련법규에 따라 계약해지, 부정당업자제재 등의 처분을 받을 수 있습니다.

1) 이 입찰에 참가하는 자는 다음의 입찰설명서를 구성하는 공고서 및 각종 규정, 규격서 등을 반드시 열람하고 숙지하여야 하며, 숙지하지 못함에 따라 발생하는 모든 책임은 입찰자에게 있음을 알려 드립니다.

2) 규격착오 또는 규정 미숙지 등으로 입찰자가 계약을 체결하지 않거나, 계약을 체결하고 불이행할 경우 관계 법령에 따라 부정당업자로 제재되어 일정기간 입찰참여가 제한되는 등 불이익을 받을 수 있습니다.

3) 이 입찰 집행과 관련하여 입찰공고서와 규격서(제안요청서 등 입찰첨부서류 일체)의 내용이 서로 다를 경우 입찰공고서가 우선 적용됩니다.

4) 이 입찰관련 규정들은 개정될 수 있으며, 개정될 경우 개정규정 부칙의 시행일(또는 적용례)에 따라 개정 규정의 적용 여부가 결정될 수 있습니다.

5) 다음 입찰 관련 법령 및 규정의 기준일자는 입찰공고일 현재입니다.

1. 입찰공고문

2. 국가종합전자조달시스템 전자입찰특별유의서 (조달청고시)

3. 국가종합전자조달시스템 입찰참가자격등록규정 (조달청고시)

4. 물품/용역입찰유의서 (재정경제부계약예규)

5. 정부입찰·계약 집행기준 (재정경제부계약예규)

6. 물품/용역/계약일반조건 (재정경제부계약예규)

7. 협상에 의한 계약체결기준(재정경제부계약예규)

- 자료검색 방법 -

1. 법령·계약예규 등: 국가법령정보센터 홈페이지(http://www.law.go.kr) → 법령 또는 행정규칙에서 검색

2. 조달청 고시·지침 등: 조달청 홈페이지(http://pps.go.kr) → 정보제공 → 법령정보(고시, 공고 및 지침 안내 등) 또는 업무별 자료(내자구매 등)에서 검색

3. 정확한 자료 검색이 되지 않을 경우 입찰공고문의 계약담당자에게 확인하시기 바랍니다.

2026. 9. 23. 한국원자력환경공단 이사장

< 선금 및 생산자금 지원 안내 >

▣ 선금 지급

지급범위 : (1차) 최초 지급 시 계약금액의 30~50%* 범위 내 허용

(공사) 100억 원 이상 30%, 20억 원 이상 100억 원 미만 40%, 20억 원 미만 50%

(물품의 제조 및 용역) 10억 원 이상 30%, 3억 원 이상 10억 원 미만 40%, 3억 원 미만 50%

(2차~N차) 해당연도 이행금액의 최대 70%까지 가능하며, 직전차수 선금사용계획서의 적정 이행 여부 점검 후 적정판정을 받은 경우에 한하여 추가 지급 가능

※ 선금은 계약 목적 달성을 위한 용도와 수급인이 하수급인에게 배분하는 경우에만 사용할 수 있으며, 그 외의 목적으로는 사용할 수 없음

※ 선금 신청 시 공단이 제공하는 양식(공단 홈페이지 ― ‘환경ㆍ사회ㆍ투명 경영’ ― ‘S 동반성장’ ― ‘공지사항’ 17번의 계약규정 [별지 제8호 서식]의 선금지급신청서 참고)을 사용해야 하며, 신청 금액에 해당하는 채권(증권 또는 보증서)을 제출해야 함

지급불가 : 신청일 기준, 잔여 기한이 30일 이하인 경우

선금의 정산 : 기성부분 또는 기납부분의 대가 지급 시마다 선금 정산액 이상을 정산함

반환 청구 : 계약 해제ㆍ해지, 지급조건 위배 등 반환 사유 발생 시 발주자는 반환을 청구할 수 있음

세부내용 및 상기 명시하지 않은 사항은 ｢재정경제부 계약예규｣(제12장 선금의 지급 등)를 준용하여 적용

▣ 공공구매론

중소기업의 판로지원 및 경쟁력 강화를 위해 공단과 계약한 사실을 근거로 은행에서 생산/운영 자금을 대출 받을 수 있는 중소기업지원을 위한 금융서비스입니다.

신청 대상 : 공단과 계약을 체결한 중소기업

대출 한도 : 계약금액(단가계약은 발주금액)에서 선금 수령액을 제외한 금액의 최대 80%까지 신청 가능(※금융기관별 세부한도 확인 필요)

취급은행 : 5개 은행(기업, 산업, 하나, 경남, 광주)

신청 시 필수사항 : ① 공공구매정보망(www.smpp.go.kr) 회원가입, ② 신용평가등급확인서(공공기관제출용), 공단과의 계약서, ③ 취급은행 방문 및 대출심사

신청 기간 : 계약기간 내 수시 신청 가능

문의처 : 콜센터 1533-0092 │ 한국중소벤처기업유통원 디지털정보팀 02-6678-9427

< 납품대금 연동제 시행 안내 > 임직원행동강령 위반 신고 안내문

우리 원자력환경공단은 귀사와 계약업무를 수행하면서 우리 공단의 임직원행동강령에 따라 금품수수‧향응‧편의제공을 허용하지 않고 있습니다.

허용되지 않은 행위로 인하여 우리 공단이 신뢰를 잃는 일이 없도록 해 주시기 바랍니다.

특히, 우리 공단 직원이 금품‧향응‧편의 또는 사사로운 이익행위를 요구하는 경우 즉시 거부하시고 (054)-750-4020~5로 연락해 주시기 바랍니다.

신고에 따른 피해가 없도록 하겠습니다.

다만, 다음과 같은 경우는 허용하고 있습니다.

1. 직무를 수행하는 과정에서 부득이한 경우 통상적인 관례의 범위(5만원 한도)에서 제공되는 음식물 또는 편의

2. 직무와 관련된 공식적인 행사에서 주최자가 참석자에게 일률적으로 제공하는 교통‧숙박 또는 음식물

3. 불특정 다수인에게 배포하기 위한 기념품 또는 홍보용 물품

한국원자력환경공단 임직원행동강령 책임자

< ‘KORAD Pay’ 캠페인 >

협력사를 을(乙)로 생각하는 그릇된 인식을 바로 잡고, 관행화된 부당한 업무지시 등 갑을(甲乙) 문화를 타파하기 위한 캠페인입니다.

===== 2-1. 기술제안서 제출 안내 공고문.pdf =====
기술제안서 제출 안내공고
(제 한 경 쟁 /규 격 가 격 분 리 입 찰 /총 액 입 찰 )
공고번호 : 나라장터 물품 입찰공고 제R26BK01744001-000호
< 이 계약은 청렴계약(서약)제가 적용됩니다 >
이 계약은 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률」 제5조의2에 따른 청렴계약제가 적용됩니다.
입찰자는 반드시 입찰서 제출시 아래 청렴계약서에 관한 내용을 숙지하여야 하며, 동 내용을
위반한 경우 발주기관의 조치에 대하여 어떠한 이의도 제기할 수 없습니다. 아울러, 입찰서를
제출한 자는 청렴계약이행서약서를 제출한 것으로 간주합니다.
「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률」 제5조의2 및 같은 조의3에 따라 이 입찰에 참여한 당사 대리인과
임직원은 입찰·낙찰, 계약체결 또는 계약이행 등의 과정(준공∙납품 이후를 포함한다)에서 아래 각호의 청렴
계약조건을 준수할 것이며, 이를 위반할 때에는 입찰·낙찰을 취소하거나 계약을 해제∙해지하는 등의 불이익을
감수하고, 이에 민∙형사상 이의를 제기하지 않을 것임을 약정합니다.
1. 금품·향응 등을 요구 또는 약속하거나 수수(授受)하지 않을 것이며, 관계직원에게 금품, 향응 등을 제공
하지 않겠습니다.
2. 입찰가격의 사전협의 또는 특정인의 낙찰을 위한 담합 등 공정한 경쟁을 방해하지 않겠습니다.
3. 공정한 직무수행을 방해하는 알선‧청탁을 통하여 입찰 또는 계약과 관련된 특정정보의 제공을 요구하거나
받는 행위를 하지 않겠습니다.
4. 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률 시행령」 제4조의2제1항제2호 위반 시에 아래의 손해배상액을
납부토록 하겠습니다.(국가계약법 적용 입찰 및 계약 건에 한함)

입찰자 : 입찰금액의 100분의 10, 계약상대자 : 계약금액의 100분의 10

동 입찰이 2인 이상의 유효한 입찰자가 없거나 낙찰자가 없을 경우 재입찰에 부칠 수 있으니 국가종합전자 조달
시스템(나라장터)에서 개찰결과를 확인 후 공고된 일정에 따라 재입찰하시기 바랍니다.

이 입찰 설명서는 한국원자력환경공단이 집행하는 입찰에서 입찰자와 낙찰자가 숙지하고 준수하여야 할 사항을
기재한 것으로써 모든 입찰희망자는 이를 열람하여야 합니다. 이 입찰과 관련하여 추가 문의사항이 있으면 아래
담당자에게 연락하시기 바랍니다.
① 입찰참가자격 등록, 나라장터 시스템: 정부조달 콜센터(☎ 1588-0800)
② 사업 담당자: 엔지니어링팀 이수열 차장(☎ 054-750-4318)
③ 계약담당자(입찰공고, 개찰, 계약방법 등) : ESG상생팀 최준하 직원(☎ 054-750-4076)

주소: 38062 경북 경주시 충효천길 19(서악동, 한국원자력환경공단)

전자입찰 공고에 첨부된 계약조건, 입찰유의서 등을 반드시 확인·숙지하시기 바랍니다.

1. 입찰에 부치는 사항

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

관리번호 한국원자력환경공단 2026-131 입찰건명

방폐물검사건물 건설기자재 480V 저압차단기반 및 전동기제어반(E208) 구매

① 가격입찰 예정일: 2026. 9월(적격업체에 한하여 개별통지)
② 하자보증기간: 닙픔일로부터 3년 (보증증권, 5%)
③ 중소기업제품 구매촉진 및 판로지원에 관한 법률 시행령 제7조(중소기업자
간 경쟁입찰의 예외 등) ①항 4호 및 <제7조 ①항 4. 특정한 기술· 용역이 필요
한 경우> 에 의거하여 중기간 경쟁입찰 예외임을 안내드립니다.
④ 설계용역 계약에 따라, 본 입찰서의 평가는 설계사인 “(주)한국전력기술”
이 진행함을 안내드립니다.
⑤ 본 공고는 나라장터 입찰공고 제 제R26BK01719691-000호 유찰에 따른 재
공고 입찰입니다.

2. 입찰 참가자격

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

① 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률」시행령 제12조 및 같은 법 시행규칙 제14조 규정에
따라 경쟁입찰 참가자격을 갖추고 같은 법 시행령 제76에 의해 제한받지 아니한 자
② 국가종합전자조달시스템 입찰참가등록규정에 의하여 국가종합전자조달시스템(나라장터)에
입찰참가자격을 등록한 자
③

공고마감일 전일까지 공단 품질절차서

LC&MCC(E208)“ 으로 등록된 업체

「업체평가 및 등록관리」에 따라 “480V

※ 상기 자격을 갖추지 못한 자의 기술제안서는 접수하지 않습니다.
※ 입찰참가자격은 계약 체결 시 까지 유지하여야 합니다.
※ 입찰 참가 전, 참가자격의 유효기간 및 갱신여부를 확인하여 주시기 바랍니다.

3. 참가등록 및 기술제안서(이하 ‘입찰서’) 제출 안내

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

가. 작성 지침 및 평가기준 열람: 국가종합전자조달(www.g2b.go.kr)에 게시
나. 참가등록 및 입찰서 제출기한
① 입찰참가자격 등록장소: 조달청(또는 서울지방조달청) 고객지원센터 또는 각 지방조달청
경영지원과(팀)
② 입찰서 제출방법: 나라장터 전자입찰 및 오프라인 제출
③ 입찰서 제출기한
1) 직접방문 제출 및 나라장터 제출: 2026.09.29.(화) 18:00
2) 우편접수: 2026.09.29.(화) 도착 분까지 인정
다. 제출 장소 : 나라장터 전자입찰 제안서제출 시스템, 오프라인
라. 제출서류( *입찰유의서 1.3.2 입찰서 구성 및 내용 확인 필수)
① 입찰참가신청 공문 1부
(1) 입찰서 제출 공문
(2) PART A 기술사항
(3) PART B 상업사항
(4) 가격명세(가격불표시분) 및 납품일정
(5) 예외사항
(6) 입찰설명서에서 요구되는 기타 도면, 기술, 일반자료 및 정보
② ①의 내용을 담은 원본 1부 전자파일(온라인), 사본 5부 오프라인 총 6부
③ 사업자 등록증 사본(원본대조필) 및 법인등기부 등본 각 1부
④ 법인인감증명원 및 사용인감계 각 1부
⑤ 국세 및 지방세 완납 증명서 각 1부
⑥ 대리인일 경우 위임장 및 재직증명원(신분증 지참)
※ 접수 시 구비서류가 미비한 서류는 일체 접수하지 않으며 제출된 제안서는 반환하지 않습니다.
신청서류 중 사본 제출 시에는 “원본과 같음”이라고 명기하고 인감증명상의 인감으로 날인
하여 제출해야 합니다.
※ 개인정보보호법에 의거 제안서 내용 중 개인식별번호(성을 제외한 이름, 주민등록번호 뒷
자리 등)에 해당하는 부분은 반드시 삭제 후 제출해야 합니다.
※ 최초 입찰 시 제안서 사본 실물 제출을 완료한 업체 중, 제안서 및 부속서류의 변경이 없
는 경우, 제안서 사본 실물 제출을 면제합니다.

4. 입찰참가적격자 선정 및 통지, 낙찰자결정방법

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

가. 입찰서를 평가하여 적격업체를 선정하고 적격업체에 한하여 가격투찰을 실시한 후 가격입
찰서를 개봉하여 예정가격 이하 최저가 입찰자를 낙찰자로 결정합니다.
* 낙찰자결정 등 세부기준은 “국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률 시행령” 및 “기획재정부 계약예규”를
적용합니다.

나. 입찰참가적격자가 1개사인 경우 재공고를 실시합니다.
다. 입찰참가적격자, 입찰일시 및 장소 등은 선정된 자에 한하여 개별 통지합니다.

5. 입찰무효

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

가. 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률 시행령」 제39조제4항, 「같은 법 시행규칙」 제44조
및 「(계약예규) 물품구매(제조)입찰유의서」 제12조에 해당되는 입찰은 무효입니다.
나. 입찰참가자격등록증상의 상호 및 대표자(수인대표인 경우 대표자 전원의 성명을 모두 등재,
각자 대표도 해당)가 법인등기부등본상의 상호, 대표자와 다른 경우에는 입찰참가자격등록증을
변경등록하고 입찰에 참여하여야 하며, 변경등록하지 않고 참여한 입찰은 무효입찰임을
알려드리오니 주의하시기 바랍니다.(공동수급 구성원 전원 해당)
다. 입찰참가자격의 판단기준일은 입찰참가자격등록 마감일(기준일이 정해져 있는 경우에는 해당일)
이며 마감일(일시가 정해져 있는 경우에는 해당일시)까지 참가자격을 갖추지 않은 경우
무효입찰임을 알려드리오니 주의하시기 바랍니다.
라. 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률 시행규칙」 제44조 및 「(계약예규) 물품입찰유의서」
제12조에 정한 입찰무효 해당여부 확인을 위하여 등록정보 확인을 위한 서류(법인등기부
등본, 입찰대리인임을 확인할 수 있는 서류, 관련되는 면허 등을 증명하는 서류 등)를
요청하는 경우, 낙찰대상자는 관계서류를 공단으로 제출하여야 합니다.

6 불공정행위 금지

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

가. 입찰자 또는 계약상대자는 입찰·낙찰, 계약체결 또는 계약이행 등의 과정에서 입찰 및 계약의
공정한 질서를 저해하는 다음 각 호의 어느 하나에 해당하는 행위를 하여서는 아니 됩니다.
① 금품·향응 등의 공여·약속 또는 공여의 의사를 표시하는 행위
② 입찰가격의 사전 협의 또는 특정인의 낙찰을 위한 담합 등 공정한 경쟁을 방해하는 행위
③ 공정한 직무수행을 방해하는 알선·청탁을 통하여 입찰 또는 계약과 관련된 특정정보의 제공을
요구하는 행위
④ 하수급인 또는 자재·장비업자의 계약상 이익을 부당하게 제한하는 행위
⑤ 그 밖에 입찰 및 계약 등 과정에서 공정한 경쟁을 저해하는 행위
나. 입찰자 또는 계약상대자는 제1항각호에 따른 행위가 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률」
제5조의3 등 관계법령에 위반되는 경우 해당 입찰·낙찰이 취소되거나 계약이 해지·해제될 수

있고, 입찰참가자격 제한대상에 해당되는 경우 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률」
제27조 등 관계법령에 따라 부정당업자로 입찰참가자격 제한처분을 받을 수 있습니다.
다. 계약담당자는 제1항각호의 위반행위를 확인하기 위하여 입찰자 또는 계약상대자에게 관련 자료
제출을 요청할 수 있으며, 입찰자 또는 계약상대자는 특별한 사정이 없는 한 적극 협조하여야 합니다.
라. 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률 시행령」 제76조제1항제2호의 계약 주요 조건을
위반한 경우 ‘부정당업자 입찰참가자격 제한처분’을 받을 수 있습니다.

7. 동반성장 강화를 위한 상생결제 시행안내(국내 공급사에 한함)

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------가. 공단은 정부의 상생결제 확대시행 방침에 부응하고 2·3차 하위 협력사와의 상생강화를 위하여
4개은행(농협은행, 우리은행, IBK기업은행, IM뱅크)과 상생결제 약정을 체결하여 운영 중입니다.
나. 본 입찰의 계약금액 전액은 상생결제채권으로 결제(2일 이내 채권만기 도래)되며, 공단으로부
터 상생결제채권을 받은 자는 공단으로부터 받은 상생결제채권액의 20% 이상을 2차 협력사에
상생채권으로 재발행(한수원 채권 만료 전까지)하여야 합니다. 이를 위하여 협력기업은 대금지
급 요청 전 은행약정 가입 완료, 협력사 채권발행에 대한 계획수립(협력사 은행 약정 가입 포
함) 등의 사전 절차가 필요합니다.
다. 기타 상세한 내용은 상생결재 제도 안내(www.winwinpay.or.kr) 를 확인하시거나, 결제제도 문
의사항은 공단 동반성장 담당자(054-750-4072)로 문의하시기 바랍니다.

8. 기타사항

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

가.

참가등록 및 입찰서 등 관련서류 제출은 업체대표자 또는 대리인이 제출서류를 지참, 접수
하여야 합니다.

나. 입찰서는 우리 공단이 교부한 입찰설명서에 따라 사실대로 작성하여야 하며, 허위사실이
발견되면 입찰참가제한 및 낙찰취소, 계약해지될 수 있습니다.
다. 입찰서 각 항목은 빠짐없이 채워야 하며 해당사항이 없을 경우에는 “해당사항 없다”는 표기를
해야 하며, 평가항목 중 기간계산은 평가기준에 별도 기재가 없는 한 공고일을 기준으로 합니다.
라. 입찰참가희망업체가 전산장비 준비부족 등의 사유로 전자입찰 등록 및 투찰이 어려운 경우
에는 입찰마감 24시간 이전에 조달청 정부조달콜센터(1588-0800)로 장애해결을 위해 문의
바라며, 장애발생에도 정부조달콜센터로 문의하지 않아 발생되는 모든 책임은 입찰참가자
에게 있습니다.
마. 입찰에 참가하고자 하는 자는 반드시 입찰등록사항과 법인등기부등본(법인) 및 사업자등록증
(개인)상 대표자(대표자가 다수인 경우 전부), 주소, 상호 등이 일치하는 지 확인하고 입찰에
참여하시기 바랍니다.
바. 입찰 및 계약과 관련하여 공단 직원이 금품, 향응 등 부당한 요구를 할 경우 공단 감사

담당관에게 신고하여 주시기 바랍니다.
사. 이 입찰과 관련하여 비리·불공정행위가 있는 경우 공단 감사실(054-750-4040~4047) 및 공단
홈페이지(www.korad.or.kr → 고객참여 → 민원접수 → 민원접수)를 통하여 신고 할 수 있습니다.
아. 입찰에 제출되는 서류가 사본일 경우에는 "사실과 상위 없음"을 날인하여 제출하시기 바랍니다.
자. 제출한 서류가 허위 또는 부정한 방법으로 작성(제출)된 사실이 확인될 경우에는 관련법규에
따라 계약해지, 부정당업자제재 등의 처분을 받을 수 있습니다.
1) 이 입찰에 참가하는 자는 다음의 입찰설명서를 구성하는 공고서 및 각종 규정, 규격서 등을 반드시 열람
하고 숙지하여야 하며, 숙지하지 못함에 따라 발생하는 모든 책임은 입찰자에게 있음을 알려 드립니다.
2) 규격착오 또는 규정 미숙지 등으로 입찰자가 계약을 체결하지 않거나, 계약을 체결하고 불이행할 경우
관계 법령에 따라 부정당업자로 제재되어 일정기간 입찰참여가 제한되는 등 불이익을 받을 수 있습니다.
3) 이 입찰 집행과 관련하여 입찰공고서와 규격서(제안요청서 등 입찰첨부서류 일체)의 내용이 서로 다를
경우 입찰공고서가 우선 적용됩니다.
4) 이 입찰관련 규정들은 개정될 수 있으며, 개정될 경우 개정규정 부칙의 시행일(또는 적용례)에 따라 개정
규정의 적용 여부가 결정될 수 있습니다.
5) 다음 입찰 관련 법령 및 규정의 기준일자는 입찰공고일 현재입니다.
1. 입찰공고문
2. 국가종합전자조달시스템 전자입찰특별유의서 (조달청고시)
3. 국가종합전자조달시스템 입찰참가자격등록규정 (조달청고시)
4. 물품/용역입찰유의서 (재정경제부계약예규)
5. 정부입찰·계약 집행기준 (재정경제부계약예규)
6. 물품/용역/계약일반조건 (재정경제부계약예규)
7. 협상에 의한 계약체결기준(재정경제부계약예규)

자료검색 방법 1. 법령·계약예규 등: 국가법령정보센터 홈페이지(http://www.law.go.kr) → 법령 또는 행정규칙에서 검색

2. 조달청 고시·지침 등: 조달청 홈페이지(http://pps.go.kr) → 정보제공 → 법령정보(고시, 공고 및 지
침 안내 등) 또는 업무별 자료(내자구매 등)에서 검색
3. 정확한 자료 검색이 되지 않을 경우 입찰공고문의 계약담당자에게 확인하시기 바랍니다.

2026. 9. 23. 한국원자력환경공단 이사장

< 선금 및 생산자금 지원 안내 >
▣ 선금 지급

지급범위 : (1차) 최초 지급 시 계약금액의 30~50%* 범위 내 허용

* (공사) 100억 원 이상 30%, 20억 원 이상 100억 원 미만 40%, 20억 원 미만 50%
(물품의 제조 및 용역) 10억 원 이상 30%, 3억 원 이상 10억 원 미만 40%, 3억 원 미만 50%

(2차~N차) 해당연도 이행금액의 최대 70%까지 가능하며, 직전차수 선금사용계획서
의 적정 이행 여부 점검 후 적정판정을 받은 경우에 한하여 추가 지급 가능
※ 선금은 계약 목적 달성을 위한 용도와 수급인이 하수급인에게 배분하는 경우에만 사용할 수 있으
며, 그 외의 목적으로는 사용할 수 없음
※ 선금 신청 시 공단이 제공하는 양식(공단 홈페이지 ― ‘환경ㆍ사회ㆍ투명 경영’ ― ‘S 동반성장’ ―
‘공지사항’ 17번의 계약규정 [별지 제8호 서식]의 선금지급신청서 참고)을 사용해야 하며, 신청
금액에 해당하는 채권(증권 또는 보증서)을 제출해야 함

지급불가 : 신청일 기준, 잔여 기한이 30일 이하인 경우
선금의 정산 : 기성부분 또는 기납부분의 대가 지급 시마다 선금 정산액 이상을 정산함
반환 청구 : 계약 해제ㆍ해지, 지급조건 위배 등 반환 사유 발생 시 발주자는

반환을 청구할 수 있음

세부내용 및 상기 명시하지 않은 사항은 ｢재정경제부 계약예규｣(제12장 선금의

지급 등)를 준용하여 적용

▣ 공공구매론
중소기업의 판로지원 및 경쟁력 강화를 위해 공단과 계약한 사실을 근거로 은행에
서 생산/운영 자금을 대출 받을 수 있는 중소기업지원을 위한 금융서비스입니다.

신청 대상 : 공단과 계약을 체결한 중소기업
대출 한도 : 계약금액(단가계약은 발주금액)에서 선금 수령액을 제외한 금액의

최대 80%까지 신청 가능(※금융기관별 세부한도 확인 필요)

취급은행 : 5개 은행(기업, 산업, 하나, 경남, 광주)
신청 시 필수사항 : ① 공공구매정보망(www.smpp.go.kr) 회원가입, ② 신용평가

등급확인서(공공기관제출용), 공단과의 계약서, ③ 취급은행 방문 및 대출심사

신청 기간 : 계약기간 내 수시 신청 가능
문의처 : 콜센터 1533-0092 │ 한국중소벤처기업유통원 디지털정보팀 02-6678-9427

< 납품대금 연동제 시행 안내 >

임직원행동강령 위반 신고 안내문
우리 원자력환경공단은 귀사와 계약업무를 수행하면서 우리
공단의 임직원행동강령에 따라 금품수수‧ 향응‧ 편의제공을 허용
하지 않고 있습니다.
허용되지 않은 행위로 인하여 우리 공단이 신뢰를 잃는 일이
없도록 해 주시기 바랍니다.
특히, 우리 공단 직원이 금품‧ 향응‧ 편의 또는 사사로운 이익
행위를 요구하는 경우 즉시 거부하시고 (054)-750-4020~5로 연락
해 주시기 바랍니다.
신고에 따른 피해가 없도록 하겠습니다.
다만, 다음과 같은 경우는 허용하고 있습니다.
1. 직무를 수행하는 과정에서 부득이한 경우 통상적인 관례의

범위(5만원 한도)에서 제공되는 음식물 또는 편의
2. 직무와 관련된 공식적인 행사에서 주최자가 참석자에게 일률적

으로 제공하는 교통‧ 숙박 또는 음식물
3. 불특정 다수인에게 배포하기 위한 기념품 또는 홍보용 물품

한국원자력환경공단 임직원행동강령 책임자

< ‘KORAD Pay’ 캠페인 >
협력사를 을(乙)로 생각하는 그릇된 인식을 바로 잡고, 관행화된 부
당한 업무지시 등 갑을(甲乙) 문화를 타파하기 위한 캠페인입니다.

===== 2-1-2. (물품 및 가격명세서-제안서와 함께 첨부).xls =====

[시트: PDS]
E: Spec.: 0-824-E208
E: Rev. 1
A: ATTACHMENT 3-1
A: PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
D: Name of Tenderer :________________
A: PRICING DATA SUMMARY
A: No. C: Description D: On-shore(￦) E: Off-shore(US$)
A: 1 C: Equipment & Material
B: A. C: 480V Load Centers D: _________________ E:
N/A
.
B: B. C: 480V Motor Control Centers D: _________________ E:
N/A
.
A: 2 C: Special Tools
B: A. C: 480V Load Centers D: _________________ E:
N/A
.
B: B. C: 480V Motor Control Centers D: _________________ E:
N/A
.
A: 3 C: Spare Parts
B: A. C: 480V Load Centers D: _________________ E:
N/A
.
B: B. C: 480V Motor Control Centers D: _________________ E:
N/A
.
A: 4 C: Sub-Total (Sum of Items 1 through 3) D: _________________ E:
N/A
.
D: (Jobsite Loaded Price) E: (FCA Price)
A: 5 C: All Charges for Off-shore Portion;
C: - Overseas and inland freight, insurance

premium, customs duties and other

charges from FCA to Jobsite Loaded D:
N/A
. E:
N/A
.
A: 6 C: Total (Sum of Items 4 and 5) D: _________________ E:
N/A
.
D: (Jobsite Loaded Price) E: (FCA Price)
A: 7 C: Technical Supervisory Service D: _________________ E:
N/A
.
D: [By Domestic (sub)Supplier)] E: [By Foreign (sub)Supplier]
A: 8 C: Total (Sum of Items 6 and 7) D: _________________ E:
N/A
.
A: 9 C: Value-Added Tax D: _________________ E:
N/A
.
A: 10 C: Grand Total (Sum of Items 8 and 9)
C: - On-shore : Say Korea Won only
C: - Off -shore : Say U.S. Dollars only
D: ￦________________ E: US$
N/A
.
C: Authorized Signature or Seal :
E: _________________
D: Print Name : E: _________________
D: Print Title : E: _________________
D: Tenderer : E: _________________
D: Date of Submission : E: _________________

[시트: 1.0 PSD]
F: Spec.: G: 0-824-E208
F:
Rev.1
A: ATTACHMENT 3-1
A: PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
F: Name of Tenderer : _____________
A: Item No. C: Description D: Quantity E: Unit Price (￦/ US$) F: Extension (￦/US$) G: Required Site
Delivery Date
A: 1.0 C: Equipment & Material
B: 1.01 C: 480V Load Centers
B: a. C: 0-824-E-LC03 D: 1 E: ________ F: __________ G: 1/5/28
B: 1.02 C: 480V Motor Control Centers
B: a. C: 0-826-E-MC07 D: 1 E: ________ F: __________ G: 1/5/28
B: b. C: 0-826-E-MC08 D: 1 E: ________ F: __________ G: 1/5/28
B: c. C: 0-826-E-MC09 D: 1 E: ________ F: __________ G: 1/5/28
B: 1.03 C: Sub-Total
C: ◆ 480V Load Centers

(Sum of Item 1.01)
C:

On-shore, Jobsite Loaded D: N/A E: N/A F: ￦_________

Off-shore, FCA D: N/A E: N/A F: US$

N/A
.

C: ◆ 480V Motor Control Centers

(Sum of Item 1.02)
C:

On-shore, Jobsite Loaded D: N/A E: N/A F: ￦_________

Off-shore, FCA D: N/A E: N/A F: US$

N/A
.

C: - Overseas and inland freight,

insurance premium, customs

duties and other charges from

FCA to Jobsite Loaded D: N/A E: N/A F: US$
N/A
.

B: 1.05 C: Total(Sum of Item 1.03 through 1.04), Excluding V.A.T
C: - On-shore, Jobsite Loaded D: N/A E: N/A F: ￦_________
C: - Off-shore, Jobsite Loaded D: N/A E: N/A F: US$
N/A
.

B: Remark : According to buyer's request schedule date, the site delivering date can be changed.

[시트: 2.0 SPECIAL]
F: Spec.: 0-824-E208
F: Rev.1
A: ATTACHMENT 3-1
A: PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
E: Name of Tenderer :____________
A: 2.0 SPECIAL TOOLS
A: Below is a list of special tools being supplied which are required for installation(mark *), adjustment, calibration, maintenance and dismantling of the equipment. The items which are specified in Section 4, Technical Specifications, if any, shall be included in the list. If no items are required, "N/A" shall be indicated below.
A: No. B: Item D: Recom. Q'ty/Unit E: Unit Price (￦/US$) F: Extension (￦/US$) G: Site Delivery Date
B: Description
B: Material Specification (Rating, Grade, Type, etc.) G: 1/5/28
B: Part No. / Orig. Mfr's Part No.
B: Mfr's Name
A: A. Sub-Total of Special Tools
B: ◆ 480V Load Centers
B:

On-shore, Jobsite Loaded F: ￦_________________

Off-shore, FCA F: US$

N/A
.

B: ◆ 480V Motor Control Centers
B:

On-shore, Jobsite Loaded F: ￦_________________

Off-shore, FCA F: US$

N/A
.

A: B. All charges for Off-shore portion:
B:

Overseas and inland freight, insurance premium, customs

duties and other charges from FCA to Jobsite Loaded F: US$
N/A
.

A: C. Total of Special Tools(Sum of Items A and B), Excluding V.A.T
B: ◆ 480V Load Centers
B:

On-shore, Jobsite Loaded F: ￦_________________

Off-shore, FCA F: US$

N/A
.

B: ◆ 480V Motor Control Centers
B:

On-shore, Jobsite Loaded F: ￦_________________

Off-shore, FCA F: US$

N/A
.

[시트: 3.0 SPARE]
F: Spec.: 0-824-E208
F: Rev.1
A: ATTACHMENT 3-1
A: PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
E:
Name of Tenderer : _____________
A: 3.0 SPARE PARTS
A: Below is a list of spare parts including consumable parts being supplied which are required for
installation(mark *), start-up(mark **) and two(2) years operation(mark ***). The items which are specified in Section 4, Technical Specifications, if any, shall be included in the list. If no items are required, "N/A" shall be indicated below.
A: No. B: Item D: Recom. Q'ty/Unit E: Unit Price (￦/US$) F: Extension (￦/US$) G: Site Delivery Date
B: · Description
B: · Material Specification (Material,
Size, Rating, Grade or Type, etc.) G: 1/5/28
B: · Part No./Orig. Mfr's Part No.
B: · Mfr's Name
B: · Period of Replacement
A: A. Sub-Total of Spare Parts
B: ◆ 480V Load Centers
B:

On-shore, Jobsite Loaded F: ￦_________________

Off-shore, FCA F: US$

N/A
.

B: ◆ 480V Motor Control Centers
B:

On-shore, Jobsite Loaded F: ￦_________________

Off-shore, FCA F: US$

N/A
.

A: B. All charges for Off-shore portion:
B:

Overseas and inland freight, insurance premium, customs

duties and other charges from FCA to Jobsite Loaded F: US$
N/A
.

A: C. Total of Special Tools(Sum of Items A and B),

Excluding V.A.T
B: ◆ 480V Load Centers
B:

On-shore, Jobsite Loaded F: ￦_________________

Off-shore, FCA F: US$

N/A
.

B: ◆ 480V Motor Control Centers
B:

On-shore, Jobsite Loaded F: ￦_________________

Off-shore, FCA F: US$

N/A
.

[시트: 4.0 DELIVERY]
F: Spec.: 0-824-E208
F: Rev. 1
A: ATTACHMENT 3-1
A: PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
E: Name of Tenderer : ______________
A: 4.0 DELIVERY
A: 4.1 Delivery Required
A:
In case of delivery to FCA port of export, schedule date is two(2) months before site delivery

date.
A: A
Can Tenderer meet the delivery

set forth in Item 1.0 through 3.0?…………….………….…_________________________
A: B
If the answer to Item 4.1, A is "No",

Tenderer shall give schedule of

earliest dates possible ...….......……………….………….…_________________________
A: C
Shipping shall not be made earlier than one (1) month prior to the delivery date

set forth in item 1.0 through 3.0 without written approval of the Buyer.
A: 4.2
Document Submittal Schedule
A: A
Can the Tenderer meet the document submittal

schedule given in Appendix 4D? (Yes or No)

(If the answer to this question is "No", Tenderer

shall list the earliest possible submittal dates in

the appropriate column in Appendix 4D) .............................._________________________
A: B
Will the document submittal schedule in Appendix 4D

and the review period specified in Appendix 4C

permit the Tenderer to commence fabrication in

sufficient time to meet the delivery date(s) given in

Item 1.0 through 3.0?
(Yes or No)

(If the answer to this question is "No", Tenderer

shall list the required submittal dates in Appendix 4D

and/or indicate which documents will require

expedited review.) ............................................................._________________________
A: 4.0 DELIVERY (CONT.)
D: Authorized Signature
or Seal
: F: ___________________
D: Date of Submission
: F: ___________________

[시트: 5.0 TSS]
F: Spec.: 0-824-E208
F: Rev. 1
A: ATTACHMENT 3-1
A: PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
E:
Name of Tenderer :_______________
A: 5.0 TECHNICAL SUPERVISORY SERVICES(IF REQUIRED)
A: The Tenderer shall furnish the following information related to the technical supervisory
services which are required for the Equipment at the Site per Section 2, Special Terms and
Conditions, and Section 4, Technical Specifications.
A: 5.1 Number of working days and Supervisory/Technicians
A: A. Total
A: - Supervisory : [
] persons X [
] days = [
] man-days
A: - Technician
: [
] persons X [
] days = [
] man-days
A: Note : 1. The above working days shall be expected requirements based upon
A:
Tenderer's experience.
A:
2. The actual working days shall be determined when the Buyer requests
A:
such services.
A: 5.2 Rate and Expense (for a person)
E: Supervisory F: Technician
A: A. Basic rate per day for a normal

working day E: ￦/US$_________ F: ￦/US$_________
A: B. Hourly rate for overtime (including

Sunday and Holidays) E: ￦/US$_________ F: ￦/US$_________
A: C. Sojourn rate per day, excluding lodging

and local transportation E: ￦/US$_________ F: ￦/US$_________
A: D. Travel expense of round trip
A:

Domestic person : 2days / trip E: ￦/US$_________ F: ￦/US$_________

Foreign person

: 4days / trip E: ￦/US$_________ F: ￦/US$_________
A: E. Economic round trip air fare E: ￦/US$_________ F: ￦/US$_________
A: Note :
The ceiling of the air fare unit price shall be presented here.
A: 5.3 Estimated Amount of Technical Supervisory Services
A: A. Total, excluding V.A.T
A: - Portion by Supervisor F: ￦___________________
F: US$__________________
A: - Portion by Technician F: ￦___________________
F: US$__________________
A: Note : A detailed calculation sheet shall be attached hereto.
A: Authorized Signature or Seal : F: _____________________
A: Date of Submission
: F: _____________________

[시트: 5.4 CAL]
E:
Spec.: 0-824-E208
E:
Rev. 1
A: ATTACHMENT 3-1
A: PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
D: Name of Tenderer : ___________
A: 5.0
TECHNICAL SUPERVISORY SERVICES (CONT.)
A: 5.4 Detailed Calculation Sheet
A: Grade C: Supervisor D: Technician E: Total
A: Man-Days
A: Services Fee B: Rate (￦/US$)
B: Expansion (￦/US$)
A: Sojourn Allow-ance B: Rate (￦/US$)
B: Expansion (￦/US$)
A: Travel Expanses of Round Trip (￦/US$)
A: Air Fares of Round Trip (￦/US$)
A: Total (￦/US$)

===== 2-1-3. 입찰설명서 1편(입찰유의서)_F.hwp =====

방폐물검사건물 건설기자재 구매 입찰설명서

품 명: 480V Load Centers & Motor Control
Centers(E208)

차 례 제Ⅰ편 입찰유의서 제Ⅱ편 계약조건 제Ⅲ편 입찰서 양식(물품 및 가격명세) 제Ⅳ편 기술규격서 Ⅰ. 입 찰 유 의 서 차 례 제1장 일반유의사항 1.1 일반사항 1.2 입찰절차 1.3 입찰서 작성 1.4 일찰서 평가 및 계약체결 제2장 특별유의사항 2.1 구매개요 2.2 구매범위 2.3 납품일정 2.4 입찰마감일시 2.5 입찰형태 2.6 입찰참가자격 2.7 계약전 통지 2.8 입찰가격 작성기준 2.9 입찰서 평가 절차 및 기준 붙 임 A 입찰보증금 지급각서 B 청렴계약 및 공정거래 이행각서 C 공정계약 서약서 D 협력회사 인권경영 이행 서약서 제1장 일반유의사항 1.1 일반사항 1.1.1 목 적

대한민국 법률에 의해 설립되어 경북 경주시에 주소를 둔 한국원자력환경공단(이하 ‘공단’)은 중․저준위 방사성폐기물 방폐물검사건물 건설에 필요한 기기, 자재 및 용역을 구매하고자 하며, 이와 관련하여 입찰자에게 입찰절차 및 요건, 계약조건, 구매범위 및 납품일정, 기술규격 등 보다 상세한 입찰 관련 정보를 제공하기 위하여 이 입찰설명서를 발급한다.

1.1.2 입찰설명서의 준수

가. 입찰자는 ‘국가종합전자조달시스템(조달청의 나라장터)’ 전자입찰시스템을 이용하여 이 입찰에 참여하여야 하므로 ‘전자입찰유의서 및 이용약관’과 이 입찰 설명서를 숙지, 동의한 후 입찰설명서에 규정된 절차 및 요건을 엄격히 준수하여 입찰서를 작성, 제출하여야 한다. 이를 위반한 입찰서는 부적격 처리되거나 불리하게 처리될 수 있으며, 이는 입찰자의 책임이다.

나. 입찰자는 ‘전자입찰유의서 및 이용약관’과 이 입찰설명서의 모든 내용을 충분히 숙지하고 수락한 것으로 간주된다.

1.1.3 용어정의

제Ⅱ편 계약조건 제1장 일반조건 제2조에 규정된 용어의 의미는 문맥 상 다르게 해석되어지는 경우를 제외하고는 이 입찰설명서의 다른 편에 사용된 용어에도 적용된다.

1.1.4 언어

입찰설명서는 한글 또는 영어로 작성, 제공된다. 입찰서는 한글, 영어 또는 양 언어로 작성되어야 하며, 그 이외의 언어로 작성된 입찰서는 접수하지 아니한다.

1.1.5 입찰비용

입찰자는 입찰서의 작성 및 제출, 입찰참가자격 심사, 입찰평가 및 계약협상과 관련하여 자신에게 발생된 비용 및 경비를 부담하여야 한다. 어떠한 경우에도 공단은 동 비용 및 경비에 대하여 책임을 지지 아니한다.

1.1.6 입찰의 비밀유지

입찰자는 입찰서 작성과 직접 관련이 없는 제3자에게 입찰설명서를 공개하여서는 아니 된다. 공단은 정부조달협정, 법령 또는 입찰설명서에 의하여 필요한 경우 이외에는 입찰서의 보안을 유지한다.

1.1.7 입찰서의 소유권

공단에 제출된 입찰서 및 기타서류는 공단의 재산이 되며, 입찰서의 적격여부를 불문하고 입찰자에게 반환되지 아니한다.

1.1.8 입찰설명서의 변경통지

공단은 입찰설명서의 내용 중 전자입찰의 취소 등 변경사항이 있으면 입찰자에게 통보를 하며, 변경사항은 입찰설명서의 내용에 포함된다.

1.1.9 기간계산

입찰설명서에 상세히 다르게 규정되지 않는 한, 일수로 표시된 기간은 토요일, 공휴일을 포함하지 않으며 월수 또는 년수로 표시된 기간은 토요일, 공휴일을 포함한다. 이때 말일 또는 어느 특정일의 토요일, 공휴일과 겹치는 경우에는 최초 다음 영업일로 연기된다. 이 입찰설명서에 표시된 일시는 한국 표준시를 기준으로 한다.

1.1.10 입찰철회 등

공단은 입찰자에 대한 책임 없이 사업변경, 가격초과, 협상결렬, 기타 다른 사유 등으로 언제든지 이 입찰을 철회 또는 연기하거나 재입찰 또는 재공고 입찰을 실시할 수 있으며, 구매범위, 납품일정, 입찰조건 등을 변경할 수 있다. 공단은 이러한 변경, 수정, 철회, 재입찰 또는 재공고 입찰과 관련하여 입찰자에게 어떠한 배상책임도 지지 아니한다.

1.1.11 입찰의 무효

다음 각 호의 1에 해당하는 입찰은 무효로 한다.

가. 입찰 참가 자격이 없는 자가 한 입찰

나. 입찰자(법인의 경우 대표자를 말한다. 이하 같다)가 직접 입찰을 하지 아니하고 대리인을 통하여 입찰할 경우 입찰개시 시각 전까지 위임장을 제출한 대리인이 아닌 자 또는 대리권이 없는 자가 한 입찰

다. 소정일시까지 소정의 입찰보증금을 납부하지 아니하고 한 입찰

라. 입찰서가 소정의 일시까지 도착하지 아니한 입찰

마. 동일사항에 대하여 동일인(1일이 수개의 법인의 대표자인 경우 해당 수개의 법인을 동일인으로 본다)이 2통 이상의 입찰서를 제출한 입찰.
단, 대안입찰서는 예외.

바. 동일사항에 대하여 타인의 대리를 겸하거나 2인 이상을 대리한 입찰

사. 입찰서의 입찰금액 등 중요한 부분이 불분명하거나, 정정한 후 날인을 누락한 경우

아. 담합하거나 타인의 경쟁참가를 방해 또는 공단 직원의 입찰업무 집행을 방해한 자의 입찰

자. 입찰자의 기명날인이 없는 입찰(입찰자의 성명을 기재하지 아니하고 대리인 성명 또는 회사명을 기재한 경우 및 입찰참가신청서 제출 시 신고한 인감과 다른 인감으로 날인된 경우도 포함된다)

차. 입찰설명서에서 요구하는 서류, 정보, 평가 자료를 제출하지 아니한 입찰

카. 기타 공단이 판단하는 입찰 설명서의 주요 요건을 위배한 입찰

1.1.12 부정당업자의 입찰참가자격 제한

국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률 시행령 76조에 의거 경쟁의 공정한 집행 또는 계약의 적정한 이행을 해할 우려가 있거나 기타 입찰에 참가시키는 것이 부적합하다고 인정되는 자에 대하여는 1개월 이상 2년 이하의 기간을 정하여 입찰참가자격을 제한한다.

1.1.13 기타사항

입찰공고 또는 이 입찰유의서에 명시되지 아니한 기타의 사항에 대하여는 공단이 정하는 바에 따른다.

1.2 입찰절차 1.2.1 입찰참가 신청

입찰공고 또는 따로 정하는 경우를 제외하고는 이 입찰에 대한 입찰참가신청은 아래 1.2.2조에 규정된 입찰보증금 제출로 갈음한다.

1.2.2 입찰보증금

가. 입찰보증금의 납부는 면제하되 입찰보증금 지급각서를 제출하여야 한다. 신용정보관리규약에 의한 채무불이행 또는 금융질서 문란자인 경우 부가가치세를 포함한 총 입찰금액의 5% 이상의 금액을 공단에 납부하여야 한다. 입찰보증금 지급각서(붙임 A의 양식)를 제 2장 특별유의사항 제2.4조에 규정된 입찰마감일시까지 제2장 특별유의사항 2.7.1조의 주소지로 제출하여야 한다.

나. 입찰보증금 지급각서 제출방법은 전자입찰 시 정해진 서식에 따라 송신한 입찰서로 대체한다.

다. 입찰보증금은 (1) 입찰자가 입찰서의 유효기간 만료일 이전에 입찰서를 철회한 경우, 또는 (2) 낙찰자가 정당한 이유 없이 계약체결을 거부하거나 약정된 기간 내에 계약이행보증금을 납부하지 않는 경우에 공단에 귀속하며, 입찰자는 귀속사유 발생 시 공단의 요청에 따라 입찰보증금 해당금액을 현금으로 즉시 납부하여야 한다.

1.2.3 입찰서 제출 가. 가격입찰서 및 입찰보증금 지급각서

공단으로부터 기술평가 적격업체로 통보받은 입찰자는 ‘국가종합전자조달시스템(조달청의 나라장터)’ 전자상거래 홈페이지에 온라인으로 제출하여야 한다. (가격입찰서 제출일은 추후통보)

나. 기술사항 입찰서

기술제안서는 제출 안내공고문에 안내된 장소 및 제출방법을 준수하여 제출기한 내에 제출하여야 한다. 입찰서가 공단에 접수되었는지 확인 할 책임은 입찰자에게 있다.

1.2.4 입찰서 개봉

가격입찰서를 제외한 입찰서는 기재사항 확인 및 입찰평가를 위해 입찰마감 후에 즉시 개봉된다. 가격입찰서는 기술성 평가가 완료된 후 ‘국가종합전자조달시스템(조달청의 나라장터)’ 전자상거래 시스템을 이용하여 개찰되며 공단은 입찰자의 입회를 위해 가격입찰서의 개찰일시와 장소를 입찰자에게 통보한다.

1,3 입찰서 작성 1.3.1 일반사항

입찰품목은 사용되지 않은 신품이고 구매의도에 적합하여야 하며, 제Ⅲ편 물품 및 가격명세 또는 제Ⅳ편 기술규격서에 규정된 바에 따라 엄격하게 설계, 제작, 조립, 시험, 공급 또는 설치되어야 하며, 규정된 기술규격이 없는 경우에는 가장 최신의 설계에 의한 제품이고, 제작자의 통상적인 생산물품과 동일하거나 보다 우수한 제품이어야 한다.

1.3.2 입찰서 구성 및 내용

입찰서는 제Ⅲ편 입찰서 양식(물품 및 가격명세)에 따라 작성되어야 하며, 입찰설명서에서 요구하거나 충분한 입찰평가를 위하여 필요하다고 생각되는 추가 관련 자료가 첨부되어야 한다. 입찰서 양식은 모든 항목이 기재되어야 하며, 필요한 경우 입찰자는 충분한 설명과 함께 양식의 내용을 수정할 수 있다. 입찰서는 아래와 같이 구성되어야 한다.

가. 기술 및 상업사항 입찰서 (1) 입찰서 제출 공문 (2) PART A 기술사항 (3) PART B 상업사항 (4) 가격명세(가격불표시분) 및 납품일정 (5) 예외사항

(6) 입찰설명서에서 요구되는 기타 도면, 기술, 일반자료 및 정보

(7) (2)～(6)의 내용을 담은 원본(전자파일 온라인), 사본(오프라인)

나. 가격입찰서 (1) 총액가격은 온라인 제출

(2) 가격명세(가격표시분) 및 납품일정은 계약체결 시 제출

1.3.3 입찰서 포장 및 표시

오프라인으로 제출하는 기술 및 상업사항 입찰서는 겉면에 입찰번호, 물품명, 입찰자명, 입찰서번호(입찰자 부여 시)등을 명시하여야 한다.

1.3.4 입찰서 수량

기술 및 상업사항 입찰서는 원본 1부(전자파일 온라인), 사본 5부(오프라인) 총 6부를 제출한다.

1.3.5 입찰서 수정

기술 및 상업사항 입찰서는 첨자, 변경 또는 삭제 없이 작성되어야 한다. 수정이 필요한 경우에는 수정부분에 법인 또는 사용인감으로 날인하여야 한다.

1.3.6 추가서류

아래 서류를 제외하고, 공단은 입찰평가기간 중에는 어떠한 입찰서의 변경사항 또는 추가서류를 접수하지 아니한다.

가. 제출된 입찰서의 주요내용을 변경시키지 않는 입찰자의 확인사항에 관한 서류

나. 입찰서 또는 입찰보증금의 유효기간 연장에 관한 서류

다. 입찰평가를 위해 공단이 서면으로 요청한 서류

1.3.7 입찰설명서에 대한 예외사항

가. 입찰자는 제Ⅰ편 입찰유의서 및 제Ⅱ편 계약조건을 수락하여야 하며, 이에 대한 예외사항은 원칙적으로 인정하지 아니한다.

나. 입찰설명서 제Ⅳ편 기술규격서에 대한 예외사항을 제시할 때에는 입찰자는 공단이 그 타당성을 평가할 수 있도록 충분한 설명과 함께 그 차이점을 상세히 기술하여야 한다.

1.3.8 대안입찰서

입찰자는 개선사항이 있거나 보다 경제적이라고 판단되는 경우 대안입찰서를 제출할 수 있다. 대안입찰서는 원입찰서와 쉽게 구별될 수 있도록 작성되어야 하며, 가격을 포함한 모든 대안사항이 그 이점 등에 대한 충분한 설명과 함께 기술되어야 한다. 대안입찰서는 원입찰서와 동일한 절차 및 요건에 따라 제출되고 취급되어야 한다.

1.3.9 입찰서 유효기간

입찰가격을 포함한 입찰서는 확정청약으로서 구속력이 있으며 가격입찰마감일 이후 최소 8개월까지 조건 없이 유효하여야 한다. 공단은 필요한 경우 입찰자에게 입찰서 유효기간의 연장을 요청할 수 있다.

1.3.10 입찰설명서 또는 입찰서 내용의 상치

입찰설명서 또는 입찰서의 내용이나 수치가 모순되거나 상충될 경우, 공단 또는 입찰자가 달리 확인하지 않는 한, 해당 사항을 보다 구체적으로 상세히 취급한 내용이 우선한다. 입찰자가 입찰설명서의 정확한 의미 또는 해석에 의문이 있는 경우, 서면으로 공단에 확인을 요청할 수 있다. 공단은 구두로 확인한 사항에 대하여 책임을 지지 아니한다.

1.3.11 참고자료

입찰자가 달리 언급하지 않는 한, 입찰서에 참고용으로 포함된 입찰자의 홍보물, 자료 또는 정보는 공식 입찰내용으로 간주되지 아니한다.

1.3.12 도면확인

입찰설명서에 포함된 도면은 하자 또는 불일치가 있을 수 있다. 입찰자는 입찰설명서의 도면과 기술된 규격서를 대조하여야 하며, 규격서와의 일치를 위한 도면의 수정사항을 입찰서에 명시하여야 한다.

1.3.13 입찰서 기명날인 또는 서명

가. 기술 및 상업사항 입찰서에는 반드시 입찰자 성명(법인의 경우 법인명과 대표자의 성명을 같이 기재하여야 함)을 기재하고 법인인감(신고된 사용인감을 포함함)을 날인하여야 한다. 입찰서에는 인감증명서(필요시 사용인감계 포함)가 첨부되어야 한다.

나. 가격입찰서의 경우에는 입찰유의서에 따라 ‘국가종합전자조달시스템(조달청의 나라장터)’ 전자입찰시스템을 이용한다.

1.4 입찰서 평가 및 계약체결 1.4.1 입찰서 평가 기준 및 절차

공단은 제2장 특별유의사항에 명시된 입찰서 평가 기준, 절차 및 필요시 공단의 표준사업관리절차서에 따라 공정하게 평가를 실시한다.

1.4.2 입찰서 평가내용 비공개 원칙

입찰서 평가는 공단 또는 공단이 지정한 다른 기관에 의하여 수행된다. 공단이 결정한 입찰서 평가의 결과는 최종적이고 확정적이며, 정부조달협정에 의하지 아니하고는 공단은 입찰서 평가에 관한 내용을 공개할 의무가 없다.

1.4.3 낙찰자 선정

공단은 2인 이상의 유효한 입찰에 의하여 경쟁입찰이 성립된 경우, 기술규격 등 입찰설명서의 주요 요건을 충족하고 예정가격 이하로 입찰한 자 중 최저가격 입찰자를 낙찰자로 선정한다.

1.4.4 계약체결

가. 낙찰자는 공단으로부터 낙찰통지를 받은 후 7일 이내에 소정서식에 의한 구비서류(붙임 B,C,D의 양식) 및 낙찰금액의 산출내역서를 공단에 제출하고, 10일 이내에 계약을 체결한다. 단, 불가항력의 사유로 인하여 계약을 체결할 수 없는 경우에는 그 사유가 존속하는 기간은 이를 산입하지 아니한다.

나. 계약상대자는 계약 체결 시 계약보증금과 관련규정에 의하여 필요한 서류를 공단에 제출하여야 한다.

(붙임 B 청렴계약 및 공정거래 이행각서, 붙임 C 공정계약 서약서,
붙임 D 협력회사 인권경영 이행 서약서)

1.4.5 재입찰 및 재공고 입찰

가. 공단은 가격입찰서를 개찰한 결과 낙찰자를 결정할 수 없는 경우로서 기술규격 적격자가 2인 이상인 때에는 그 기술규격 적격자에 한하여 다시 가격입찰서를 제출하게 할 수 있다.

나. 그 외 재입찰 및 재공고입찰에 대한 사항은 계약예규 ‘물품 구매 입찰유의서’ 및 국가계약법에 따라 시행한다.

붙임 A 입찰보증금 지급각서 입찰번호 : 물 품 명 : 입찰일시 :

귀 공단에서 시행하는 위 구매입찰에서 본인이 입찰서 유효기간 만료일 이전에 입찰서를 철회하거나, 또는 본인이 낙찰자 또는 계약협상대상자로 선정된 후 정당한 이유 없이 계약을 체결하지 않거나 약정된 기일 내에 계약보증금을 납부하지 않아 입찰보증금의 귀 공단에 귀속사유가 발생할 경우에는 귀 공단의 요청에 따라 총 입찰금액의 100분의 5에 해당하는 금액을 귀 공단에 즉시 현금으로 납부하겠으며, 기타 입찰보증금의 귀 공단 귀속사유로 인한 어떠한 조치에 대하여도 귀 공단의 결정 또는 요구에 따를 것임을 확약합니다. 또한, 위 물품의 구매와 관련한 재공고 입찰에 본인이 참여할 경우에도 이 각서가 입찰보증금 지급각서로서 계속 유효함을 인정합니다.

20 년
월
일

대표자
인

상 호 주 소 한국원자력환경공단 이사장 귀하 붙임 B 청렴계약 및 공정거래 이행각서

당사는 한국원자력환경공단 [이하 “공단”이라 한다]이 시행하는 입찰에 참가하거나 공단과의 거래를 함에 있어 청렴계약 및 공정거래 이행이 사회발전과 국가 경쟁력 제고에 중요한 관건이 됨을 깊이 인식하고 공단의 청렴계약 및 공정거래 실천의지에 적극 호응하여 공단에서 발주하는 공사ㆍ용역ㆍ물품 등의 입찰 및 계약과 관련하여 청렴계약 및 공정거래를 이행할 것을 다음과 같이 서약합니다.

1. 어떠한 명분으로도 공단의 계약관련 업무수행자[계약부서, 수요부서 및 청구부서의 직원과 공단의 대리인 및 그 임직원을 포함한다]에게 직접 또는 간접적으로 금품ㆍ향응 등(친인척 등에 대한 부정한 취업 제공 포함) 부당한 이익을 제공하지 않겠습니다.

2. 공단의 임직원 또는 업무종사자(친인척 포함)로서 거래를 하지 않겠습니다.

3. 계약을 이행함에 있어 부실 또는 부당하게 하지 않겠습니다.

4. 독점규제 및 공정거래에 관한 법률 또는 하도급거래 공정화에 관한 법률에 위반되는 어떠한 행위도 하지 않겠습니다.

5. 산업안전보건법에 의한 안전조치 또는 보건조치를 소홀하게 하여 근로자 및 공중에게 위해가 가도록 하지 않겠습니다.

6. 이번 입찰과 관련하여 입찰가격 또는 특정인의 낙찰을 위한 담합 등 어떠한 사항에 대하여도 경쟁자들과 사전에 협의, 연락, 합의, 조정 등을 한 사실이 없음을 서약함과 동시에, 이 후에도 자유경쟁을 부당하게 저해하는 일체의 불공정한 행위를 않겠습니다.

가. 이를 위반하여 입찰집행 중 또는 입찰집행 후에 공정거래위원회의 결정 또는 법원의 판결에 따라 담합사실이 인정되는 경우에는 입찰중지, 입찰무효, 계약해제ㆍ해지, 공사 중지, 손해배상 청구, 공정거래위원회의 통지, 검찰고발 등 일체의 조치를 취하여도 민ㆍ형사상 이의를 제기하지 않겠습니다.

나. 또한 경쟁입찰과 관련한 담합으로 공단에게 손해를 입혔을 경우에는 다음 각 호의 금액을 배상하도록 하겠습니다.

① 담합에 따라 결정된 낙찰가격과 담합이 없었을 경우 형성되었으리라고 인정되는 가격의 차액

② 담합으로 인하여 입찰이 유찰된 경우 입찰공고 및 현장설명회 개최 등 재입찰절차에 따라 소요되는 각종 행정비용

③ 기타 공단이 입증하는 담합으로 인한 유․무형의 손해

다. ‘나’호에도 불구하고 구체적인 손해액을 산정하기가 곤란하거나 불가능할 경우에는 계약금액의 10%를 배상하도록 하겠습니다.

라. ‘나’, ‘다’호의 배상액은 공단이 청구한 날로부터 60일 이내에 납부하도록 하겠으며, 이 기간 내에 납부하지 못할 경우에는 공단이 당사에 지급할 타 대가에서 우선 공제하여도 민ㆍ형사상 이의를 제기하지 않겠습니다.

7. 입찰 또는 계약에 관한 서류(전자서류 포함)를 위변조하거나 부정하게 행사하거나 기타 공정한 입찰 질서를 방해하는 어떠한 행위도 하지 않겠습니다.

위 사항을 위반할 경우에는 공단의 입찰참가자격의 취소, 낙찰취소, 계약의 해제 또는 해지 및 입찰참가자격의 제한 등의 조치를 감수할 것이며, 공단의 조치와 관련하여 손해배상의 청구, 소송 등에 대해 어떠한 이의도 제기하지 않을 것을 확약합니다.

20 . . 서 약 자 기 관 명 :

대
표 :

한국원자력환경공단 이사장 귀하 붙임 C 공정계약 서약서

한국원자력환경공단[이하 “공단”이라 한다]은 공단에서 발주한 공사ㆍ용역ㆍ물품 등의 입찰 및 계약과 관련하여 낙찰된 계약상대자와 청렴계약 및 공정거래를 이행할 것을 다음과 같이 서약합니다.

1. 어떠한 명분으로도 계약상대자에게 직접 또는 간접적으로 금품ㆍ향응 등(친인척 등에 대한 부정한 취업 제공 포함) 부당한 이익을 요구하지 않겠습니다.

2. 계약상대자의 경영ㆍ인사관리 및 계약상대자가 제3자와 체결한 계약의 내용에 대해 개입하지 않겠습니다.

3. 해당 계약과 직접적인 관련이 없는 의무를 계약상대자에게 부과하거나 공단이 부담하여야 하는 계약 내용을 계약상대자에게 전가하는 행위를 하지 않겠습니다.

가. 신기술ㆍ특허공법 보유자 또는 물품공급ㆍ기술지원사와 발주 전에 기술사용(지원)협약 등을 체결하지 아니하고 낙찰자로 하여금 직접 신기술ㆍ특허 보유자 또는 물품공급ㆍ기술지원사와 체결한 사용협약서 또는 물품공급ㆍ기술지원협약서를 제출하게 하거나 이로 인해 낙찰자가 계약을 체결할 수 없는 경우에도 부정당업자로 입찰참가자격을 제한하고 입찰보증금을 귀속하지 않겠습니다.

나. 신기술ㆍ특허공법 보유자 또는 물품공급ㆍ기술지원사와 공단이 사전에 체결한 기술사용(지원)협약 등과 다르게 부당한 요구를 하여 낙찰자와 신기술ㆍ특허 보유자 또는 물품공급ㆍ기술지원사가 간 협약이 체결되지 않도록 하는 행위를 방지하겠습니다.

다. 신기술ㆍ특허공법이 사용되는 공사의 전부 또는 일부가 기술보유자의 기술력을 활용하지 아니하면 시공과 품질 확보가 불가능하거나, 기술보유자가 보유한 특수 장비 등을 직접 사용하지 아니하면 시공과 품질 확보가 불가능한 경우를 제외하고 계약상대자에게 신기술ㆍ특허공법 보유자와 하도급계약 등을 체결하도록 강요ㆍ유도하지 않겠습니다.

라. 계약체결 부대비용 등 계약체결 및 이행 과정에서 발생하는 비용 중 공단이 부담할 부분을 계약상대자에게 전가하거나, 공사용지 확보, 사업관련 민원대응 등 공단의 업무를 계약상대자에게 전가하는 행위를 하지 않겠습니다.

4. 「공기업ㆍ준정부기관 계약사무규칙」, 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률(이하, “국가계약법”이라 한다)」, 국가계약법 시행령 및 시행규칙, 재정경제부 계약예규, 공단 계약규정에 규정된 사항을 위반하여 계약상대자의 계약상 이익을 부당하게 제한하거나 의무를 부과하는 특약 또는 조건을 요구하는 어떠한 행위를 하지 않겠습니다.

가. 수의계약 시에도 규격서나 시방서 등에 명시한 수의계약 대상제품을 부득이하게 특별하여 필요한 경우를 제외하고 특정제품 규격이나 인증번호 등을 명시하여 수의계약 체결을 요구하지 않겠습니다.

나. 계약체결 이후 과업을 변경 시 계약 목적달성을 위해 필요한 최소한의 과업만을 변경하지 않고 빈번하게 과업변경을 계약상대자에게 요구하거나 계약금액 감액 시 기준, 대상, 방식에 대한 협의 없이 자의적으로 계약상대자의 적정대가를 보장하지 않는 행위를 하지 않겠습니다.

다. 국가계약법 제19조 등에 따른 계약 내용의 변경에 따른 계약금액 조정과 관련하여 계약금액의 조정 없이 추가 과업을 요구하거나 일방적으로 과업을 변경하며 정당한 이유 없이 계약금액 조정신청을 거부 또는 인정하는 행위를 하지 않겠습니다.

라. 장기계속계약의 연차별 계약기간 중 계약예규 「공사계약일반조건」제25조제3항 제1호부터 제3호까지 및 제6호ㆍ제7호에 따른 사유가 발생한 이후, 해당 연차계약을 해지하고 잔여 공사부분을 차년도 연차계약으로 이월하는 행위를 하지 않겠습니다.

5. 공단은 시장에서 거래되는 등 재산적 가치가 있는 기술지식 등을 계약상대자의 승인을 얻어 복사ㆍ이용 또는 공개하려는 경우에는 계약상대자와 협의하여 정당한 이용대가를 지급하겠습니다.

위 사항을 위반할 경우에는 공단은 계약상대자에게 계약의 해제 또는 해지 및 입찰참가자격의 제한 등의 행위를 하지 않으며, 공정거래 이행 위반에 따른 손해배상을 청구, 소송 등에 의한 어떠한 이의를 제기하지 않을 것을 서약합니다.

20 .
.
.

서 약 자
한국원자력환경공단 이사장 (인)

붙임 D 협력회사 인권경영 이행 서약서

당사는 한국원자력환경공단의 협력회사로서 근로자(하도급업체 포함)의 인권보호, 고용안정, 노동환경 등의 권리보호를 위해 다음 사항을 이행할 것을 서약합니다.

1. 당사는 근로자가 인간으로서의 존엄과 가치 및 자유와 권리를 누릴 수 있도록 인권보호를 위한 경영정책을 확립하도록 노력하겠습니다.

2. 근로자에 대하여 인종ㆍ종교ㆍ신체적 결함ㆍ성별ㆍ출생지ㆍ노동조합 가입여부 등의 이유로 고용ㆍ보상ㆍ훈련의 기회, 승진, 이직, 퇴직 등에 차별을 하거나 차별을 조장하지 않겠습니다.

3. 안전시설, 휴게시설 등을 설치하여 근로자의 노동환경을 개선하고 작업과 관련한 사고나 질병을 예방하기 위해 적절한 조치를 취하겠습니다. 특히, 근로자가 건강과 안전이 위험하다고 판단하여 작업을 거부한 경우 즉시 현장의 문제를 조사하여 조치를 취하도록 하겠습니다.

4. 근로자에게 노동력 착취적인 언어, 신체적 접촉과 성적 강압 등과 같은 행위, 정신적 강압이나 언어폭력 등은 허용하지 않고, 근로자의 개인정보나 사생활에 대한 권리를 존중하겠습니다.

5. 근로자에게 관련 규정에 부합한 노동시간 준수 및 휴일 제공으로 근로자 자신과 가족이 건강한 생활수준을 누릴 수 있게 하며, 여성근로자의 모성은 특별한 도움을 받을 권리를 보장하겠습니다.

6. 당사는 근로 중 근로자에게 발생한 문제에 대하여 「근로기준법」,「산업재해보상보험법」,「국민건강보험법」등 관련 법령을 준수하여 필요한 조치를 취하며 이를 위반할 경우에는 관계법령에 따라 책임지겠습니다.

20 .
.
.

서약자 :
대표 :

제2장 특별유의사항 2.1 구매개요

공단은 경북 경주시 문무대왕면 봉길리 일대 중저준위운영본부 내 인수/검사를 위한 방폐물검사건물(제2인수저장건물)의 건설 사업을 추진 중이다.

2.2 구매범위

이 입찰에 의한 구매범위의 상세내역은 제Ⅲ편 입찰서 양식 「가격명세 및 납품일정」및 제Ⅳ편「기술규격서」에 명시되어 있다.

2.3 납품일정

이 입찰에 의한 구매물품의 납품일정은 제Ⅲ편 입찰서 양식 「가격명세 및 납품일정」에 명시되어 있다.

2.4 입찰마감일시

입찰서는 한국시간으로 입찰공고문에 명시된 기간까지 제출되어야 한다.

2.5 입찰형태 가. 이 입찰은 국내 경쟁입찰이다.

나. 이 입찰은 규격․가격분리 (2단계 경쟁)입찰이다.

다. 이 입찰은 기술평가 적격업체 중 예정가격 이하 최저가격으로 입찰한 자를 낙찰자로 결정한다.

2.6 입찰참가자격

이 입찰에 참가할 수 있는 자는 기술제안서 제출 마감 전일 현재 공단 등록업체 관리목록의 “480V 저압차단기반 및 전동기제어반(E208)”에 등록된 업체이어야 한다.

2.7 계약전 통지

2.7.1 입찰자는 입찰관련 추가정보의 요청, 입찰참가신청 및 입찰서 제출 등 계약 절차 상 문의는 아래 주소로 하여야 한다.

경북 경주시 충효천길19 (우‐38062) 한국원자력환경공단 경영관리본부 ESG상생팀 전화번호 : (054) 750-4076

2.7.2 입찰자는 입찰설명서 기술사항 문의 또는 입찰서 기술사항 확인 등 기술 상 문의는 아래 주소로 하여야 한다.

경북 경주시 충효천길19 (우‐38062)

한국원자력환경공단 중저준위사업본부 엔지니어링팀

전화번호 : (054) 750-4318

2.7.3 위 2.7.1조 및 2.7.2조에 의한 확인요청, 문의, 추가정보 등에 대하여 공단 자신의 판단 하에 회신하지 않거나 또는 회신이 이유를 불문하고 입찰자에게 지연 도착하는 경우에도 입찰자의 지연입찰에 대하여 공단은 어떠한 책임도 지지 않는다.

2.8 입찰가격 작성기준 2.8.1 일반사항

입찰자는 입찰설명서에 규정된 요건 및 조건에 따라 공단의 구매범위에 대하여 총액 입찰가격을 제시하여야 하며(공단 선택구매항목은 별도 항목으로 제시), 제Ⅲ편 입찰서 양식 「가격명세 및 납품일정」에 명시한 바와 같이 품목별 및 단계별로 세분하여 가격명세를 제시하여야 한다.

2.8.2 입찰통화 입찰가격은 원화(￦)로 표시하여야 한다. 2.8.3 납품조건

입찰가격은 처분시설 현장하차도 조건에 의한 가격이어야 한다.

2.8.4 제세 및 공과금

입찰가격에는 물품 납품과 용역의 수행에 관련되는 부가가치세를 포함한 모든 세금과 공과금이 포함되어야한다. 부가가치세는 품목별 입찰가격에서는 제외하되 총 입찰가격에는 포함되어야 한다.

2.9 입찰서 평가 절차 및 기준 2.9.1 입찰평가 절차

가. 입찰서 평가는 2단계로 구분되어 수행된다. 제1단계는 기술성에 대한 평가이며, 제2단계는 경제성 평가이다. 제1단계 평가 시 부적격으로 평가된 입찰서는 제2단계 평가대상에서 제외된다.

나. 입찰서 평가를 위하여 공단은 서면 또는 확인회의를 통하여 입찰서 내용을 확인할 수 있다. 공단의 확인 요청에 불응 시는 입찰자에게 불리한 조건으로 평가되거나, 제2단계 평가에서 제외될 수 있으며 이것은 전적으로 입찰자의 책임사항이다.

2.9.2 입찰평가 기준 2.9.2.1 일반기준

가. 제1단계 평가에서 공단은 이의사항에 대한 수용여부를 포함하여 각 입찰서가 기술규격 등 입찰 설명서 주요요건을 충족하는지 여부를 평가한다. 1단계 평가 적격자만이 2단계 평가에 신청할 수 있다.

나. 공단은 제2단계 평가에서 1단계 평가 적격자가 제출한 입찰서 중에서 최저가 입찰서를 선정한다.

2.9.2.2 입찰평가 항목 입찰평가 주요항목은 다음과 같다 가. 기술성 평가 (1) 공급범위 및 납품일정 (2) 기술규격 차이 (3) 기기의 성능 및 신뢰성

(4) 설치, 시공 유지보수에 있어서의 편의성

(5) 품질보증 (6) 기술규격에 대한 이의 또는 예외사항 (7) 계약조건에 대한 이의 사항 (8) 기타 필요한 사항 등 2.9.3 기술성 평가 기준 가. 기술평가 유의사항

입찰서와 기타 구비서류를 검토하여 미비한 입찰자에 대하여는 상황에 따라 보완지시, 실격처리 등의 조치를 취하고 그 결과를 기술평가에 반영할 수 있다.

입찰내용에 대한 확인, 검증이 필요한 경우 입찰자에게 입증자료를 요구할 수 있으며, 입증자료를 제출하지 못할 경우 입찰내용의 이행을 할 의사가 없는 것으로 간주한다.

입찰자는 본 사업과 관련하여 취득한 내용에 대하여 제3자에게 누설하여서는 아니 된다.

입찰자가 제출한 모든 자료 및 문서는 입찰자의 권익보호를 위하여 외부에 공개하지 않음을 원칙으로 한다.

기술평가는 공단 또는 공단이 지정한 전문기관에서 수행한다.

나. 기술입찰서 작성 방법

기술입찰서는 명료하고 간결하게 작성되어야 하며 불확실하거나 추상적인 표현, 즉 「~가능할 것이다」또는「~고려하고 있다」등은 사용하지 말아야 한다.

기술입찰서는 허위 또는 예상으로 작성되지 않아야 하며 허위로 작성한 사실이 발견될 시에는 평가대상에서 제외한다.

입찰자는 사업목적을 효과적으로 달성하기 위하여 필요하다고 판단되는 사항에 대해 추가로 제안 또는 대안을 제시할 수 있다.

다. 기술평가 평가기준

입찰자는 입찰용 기술규격서의 모든 항목을 만족해야 한다. 아울러 입찰자가 제시한 각 항목에 대한 제안 또는 대안사항에 대해 평가자의 승인을 득하는 경우 만족한 것으로 본다.

입찰자는 제출한 입찰서에 대한 평가자의 질의서 또는 보완자료를 접수한 경우 2주 이내에 적정한 답변을 회신하여야 한다. 입찰자의 답변이 기간을 초과하거나, 동일한 항목에 대해 기술규격서 요건에 불만족한 답변이 3회 이상 계속되는 경우에는 기술요건을 만족시킬 수 없는 것으로 평가한다. 단, 다음의 사항에 해당되는 경우 해당 기간 동안 답변기간을 연장할 수 있다.

질의사항에 대한 상세검토가 필요하여 입찰자 전부가 기한 내 회신이 불가능하고 후속공정에 특별한 영향이 없는 경우

기타 천재지변 등의 불가항력 사항으로 인정되는 경우

===== 2-2-1. 구매규격서.pdf =====
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BUILDING

PURCHASE SPECIFICATION
Title

: 480V LOAD CENTER & MOTOR CONTROL
CENTERS

Spec. No. : 0-824-E208

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BUILDING

SPECIFICATION ISSUE SUMMARY
Title

: 480V LOAD CENTER & MOTOR CONTROL
CENTERS

Spec. No. : 0-824-E208 ● Quality Class : AQ

● Radwaste Safety Category :

KEPCO E&C JOB No. : 11G79

ISSUE STATUS
6

07/29/26 Re-issue for ITB 5 07/08/24 Addendum 5 4 11/09/21 Addendum 4 3 11/21/19 Addendum 3 2 06/25/19 Addendum 2 1 06/04/19 Addendum 1 ISSUE NO. DATE DESCRIPTION

Preparer : 황의정, Tel : 054-421-7623
SIS-1

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BUILDING
Spec. 0-824-E208

SPECIFICATION ISSUE SUMMARY
DESCRIPTION

REVISION

This specification for furnishing 480V LOAD CENTER & MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS consists of:
Section 1
Section 2
Section 3
Section 4

General Conditions
Special Conditions
Material Description and Pricing Data
Technical Specification

1
1

ATTACHMENTS
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7

Witness Point
Hold Point
Channel Base for Rollout 480V Load centers and Motor control centers
Building Structure Mounting Design and Load Summary Form
Cross-Reference Table between KEPIC and Referenced Codes & Standards
Design Drawings
Form Parent Component Design Functions and Classification Evaluation Sheet

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

APPENDICES
4A1
4B
4C
4D
4E
4H
4K5
4P
4S
4T
4U
4X

Quality Assurance Program Requirements
Quality Surveillance Requirements
General Requirements for Submittal of Documents
Drawing and Document Submittal Requirements
Quality Verification Documentation List
Documentation Requirements of Supplier Deviations
and Non-Conformances
Welding Requirement for Structural Steel (AWS)
Standard Specification for Electrical Apparatus
General Requirements for Instrumentation & Control
Requirements for Instrument Tagging
Requirements for Panel Labels
Requirements for Part Classification

양식 EP-6.10-2, 개정번호 0 SIS-2

0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BUILDING
Spec. 0-824-E208

SPECIFICATION ISSUE SUMMARY
DESCRIPTION

REVISION

ADDENDA
No.
1~5

Description Pages Affected

Incorporated into the Re-issue for Invitation to Tender

양식 EP-6.10-2, 개정 SIS-3 (Final) - 6

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. : 1

SECTION 1 – GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS

The General Terms and Conditions of this specification will be prepared and added by KORAD.

1-1 (Final)

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. : 1

SECTION 2 – SPECIAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS

The Special Terms and Conditions of this specification will be prepared and added by KORAD.

2-1 (Final)

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BUILDING

SECTION 3
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
Title

: 480V LOAD CENTER & MOTOR CONTROL
CENTERS

Spec. No. : 0-824-E208 ● Quality Class : AQ

● Radwaste Safety Category

: II

KEPCO E&C JOB No. : 11G79

ISSUE STATUS 1 07/29/26 Re-issue for ITB 0 02/15/19 Issue for ITB REV NO. DATE DESCRIPTION For

PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED

Preparer : 황의정, Tel : 054-421-7623

FORM OF PROPOSAL

SECTION 3, MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
FOR
480V LOAD CENTERS & MOTOR CONTROL
CENTERS

SPECIFICATION NUMBER
: 0-824-E208
QUALITY CLASS
: AQ
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY: II

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BUILDING

PROPOSAL NO. : TENDERER'S NAME : BUSINESS ADDRESS : TEL NO. : FAX NO. : E-MAIL ADDRESS :

SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION

TITLE
PART A - TECHNICAL INFORMATION

3A.1.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL DATA 3A.2.0

EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED
PART B - COMMERCIAL INFORMATION

3B.1.0 TENDER PRICE 3B.2.0 DELIVERY SCHEDULE 3B.3.0 PAYMENT METHOD 3B.4.0 POINT(S) OF ORIGIN 3B.5.0 PORT OF EXPORT 3B.6.0 PROPOSAL VALIDITY 3B.7.0

AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE

3B.8.0

SEAL TO BE USED (For Domestic Tenderer only)

3B.9.0

TENDERER'S DEFINITE STATEMENT

ATTACHMENT 3-1

PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA

ATTACHMENT 3-2 EXCEPTIONS TC3 - 1 (Final)

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A – TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :

3A.1.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL DATA 3A.1.1

NET WEIGHTS (not shipping weight)
(lb/kg), as follows:

A. 480V LOAD CENTERS
1. Load centers without breakers and transformers
0-824-E-LC03 ················································· ________________
2. Breaker and Transformers
Weight of 1600 amp breaker unit ··························· ________________
Weight of 4000 amp breaker unit ··························· ________________
Weight of 6900V/480V, 3 phase, 60Hz
1500/2000 kVA dry type transformer ······················ ________________

B. 480V MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
1. Maximum number of compartment
in one vertical section ········································ ________________
2. Maximum number of vertical section
as shipping unit ················································ ________________
3. Weight of heaviest vertical section
to be shipped as a unit ········································ ________________
4. Heaviest piece handled
during erection ···················································· _________________
5. Heaviest piece handled
after erection ······················································ _________________

3A-1

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A – TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :

3A.1.0

GENERAL TECHNICAL DATA(CONT,)

3A.1.2

OVERALL DIMENSIONS (in/cm)

A. 480V LOAD CENTERS
1. Overall dimensions W x H x D for ;
0-824-E-LC03 ················································· ________________

2. Largest section to be shipped as a unit ······················ ________________
3. Clear space required around assembly
Front
Rear
Sides

··················································· ________________
··················································· ________________
··················································· ________________

B. 480V MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
1. Overall dimensions W x H x D for ;
a.

Individual vertical section ······························ ________________

Wireway ·················································· ________________

Top horizontal ········································· ________________
Bottom horizontal ····································· ________________
Vertical ················································· ________________

Unit compartment
1) Size 1 combination starter nonreversing

combination starter only ························ ________________
with 1 auxiliary relay ···························· ________________
with 2 auxiliary relays··························· ________________

2) Size 1 combination starter reversing
3A-2

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A – TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :

3A.1.0

GENERAL TECHNICAL DATA(CONT,)

combination starter only ························ ________________
with 1 auxiliary relay ···························· ________________
with 2 auxiliary relays··························· ________________

3) Size 2 combination starter nonreversing

combination starter only ························ ________________
with ground fault protection ···················· ________________
with 1 auxiliary relay ···························· ________________
with 1 auxiliary relay and

ground fault protection ······················· ________________

with 2 auxiliary relays··························· ________________
with 2 auxiliary relays and

ground fault protection ······················· ________________
4) Size 2 combination starter reversing

combination starter only ························ ________________
with ground fault protection ···················· ________________
with 1 auxiliary relay ···························· ________________
with 1 auxiliary relay and

ground fault protection ······················· ________________

with 2 auxiliary relays··························· ________________
with 2 auxiliary relays and

ground fault protection ······················· ________________
5) Size 3 combination starter nonreversing

with ground fault protection ···················· ________________
with 1 auxiliary relay and

ground fault protection ······················· ________________

with 2 auxiliary relays and

ground fault protection ······················· ________________
6) Size 3 combination starter reversing

with ground fault protection ···················· ________________
with 1 auxiliary relay and

ground fault protection ······················· ________________

with 2 auxiliary relays and

ground fault protection ······················· ________________
3A-3

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A – TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :

3A.1.0

GENERAL TECHNICAL DATA(CONT,)
7) Size 4 combination starter nonreversing

with ground fault protection ···················· ________________
with 1 auxiliary relay and

ground fault protection ······················· ________________

with 2 auxiliary relays and

ground fault protection ······················· ________________
8) Size 4 combination starter reversing

with ground fault protection ···················· ________________
with 1 auxiliary relay and

ground fault protection ······················· ________________

with 2 auxiliary relays and

ground fault protection ······················· ________________
9) Size 1 combination contactor

combination contactor only ····················· ________________
with 1 auxiliary relay ···························· ________________
with 2 auxiliary relays··························· ________________

10) Size 2 combination contactor

combination contactor only ····················· ________________
with ground fault protection ···················· ________________
with 1 auxiliary relay ···························· ________________
with 1 auxiliary relay and

ground fault protection ······················· ________________

with 2 auxiliary relays··························· ________________
with 2 auxiliary relays and

ground fault protection ······················· ________________
11) Size 3 combination contactor

with ground fault protection ···················· ________________
with 1 auxiliary relay and

ground fault protection ······················· ________________

with 2 auxiliary relays and

ground fault protection ······················· ________________
12) Size 4 combination contactor

with ground fault protection ···················· ________________

3A-4

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A – TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :

3A.1.0

GENERAL TECHNICAL DATA(CONT,)

with 1 auxiliary relay and

ground fault protection ······················· ________________

with 2 auxiliary relays and

ground fault protection ······················· ________________
13) 100A, 3P frame thermal- magnetic
molded-case breaker ································ ________________
14) 100A, 3P frame thermal- magnetic
molded-case breaker with ground
fault protection ······································ ________________
15) 225A(or 250A), 3P frame thermalmagnetic molded-case breaker with
ground fault protection ····························· ________________
16) 125A, 3P frame thermal- magnetic
molded-case breaker ································ ________________
17) Auxiliary power transformer
for distribution panel
30kVA, 3Φ, 480-120/208 ························· ________________
18) Distribution panel 24 circuits
50AF, 1P, 3Φ4W, 120/208························ ________________
d.

Largest section to be shipped as a unit ··············· ________________

Clear space required around assembly
Front
Rear
Sides

3A-5

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A – TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :

3A.1.0

GENERAL TECHNICAL DATA(CONT,)

3A.1.3

SHIPPING WEIGHT & VOLUME

A. 480V LOAD CENTERS
1. Weight of heaviest switchgear to be shipped as a unit
a.

Shipping weight(lb/kg) ································· ________________

Shipping volume(ft3 /m3 )································ ________________

B. 480V MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
1. Weight of heaviest switchgear to be shipped as a unit

3A.1.4 a.

Shipping weight(lb/kg) ································· ________________

Shipping volume(ft3 /m3 )································ ________________

DRAWING AND DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS
The drawing and data submittals required by the specification are summarized in
Appendices 4D and 4E.
Electronic media submittals for drawings and documents are required by
Appendices 4C and 4D after purchase contract.

3A-6

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A – TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :

3A.1.0

GENERAL TECHNICAL DATA(CONT,)

3A.1.5

THE BUYER'S OPTIONS (IF REQUIRED)
The Tenderer agrees to furnish the following work/services as specified in (Para.
No. in Section 4) when the Buyer issues notification to exercise all or part of the
listed options.
The latest date that the said option(s) may be exercised by the Buyer is (Date).
(Specify other conditions required)
Item No.

Description Q'ty/Unit

LATER
(List Optional Items)

B. Sub-Total 3A-7

Unit Price
(￦/US$)

Extension
(￦/US$)

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A – TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :

3A.2.0 EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED 3A.2.1 TECHNICAL DATA

A. 480V LOAD CENTERS
1. Load Center Catalogue No. ······································· _________________
2. Circuit Breaker Characteristics(1600A/4000A)
1600A /4000A
a.

Manufacturer / b. Breaker Type / c. Rated Nominal Voltage, V / d. Rated Maximum Voltage, V / e.

Continuous current rating (amperes)

/ f.

Short circuit interrupting rating at 480 volts-rms

Symmetrical (kA)

With instantaneous trip
With delayed Trip

/
/

Asymmetrical (kA)

With instantaneous trip
With delayed Trip

/
/

Short-time (30 cycles) rating, Amps

Symmetrical (kA)
Asymmetrical (kA)

/
/

Maximum temperature rise over 40℃ ambient of contacts
and current carrying parts at 480 volts (℃)
/

3A-8

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A – TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :

3A.2.0

EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT,)
i.

Circuit breaker minimum dry flashover, 60 hertz,
480 volts (kV)
Stored energy operating mechanism closing coil

Type

Nominal operating voltage (V-dc)

Minimum operating voltage (V-dc)

Maximum operating voltage (V-dc)

Maximum current at 125 V-dc (amps)

Power at nominal voltage (watts)

/ - Resistance (dc) k. / /

Stored energy operating mechanism tripping coil

Type

Nominal operating voltage (V-dc)

Minimum operating voltage (V-dc)

Maximum operating voltage (V-dc)

Maximum current at 125 V-dc (amps)

Power at nominal voltage (watts)

/ - Resistance (dc) / 3A-9

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A – TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :

3A.2.0

EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT,)
l.

Stored energy charging motor (closing action)

Type

Nominal operating voltage (V-dc)

Power at nominal voltage (Watts))

Maximum current at 125 V-dc (amps)

Minimum positive operating voltage (V-dc)

Maximum operating voltage (V-dc )

/ - Resistance (dc) /

Time to charge at 125 V-dc (Sec.)

Inrush current at nominal operating voltage(amps)

m. Time from energizing closing control relay

n. /

Until main contacts complete closing, cycles

Until auxiliary switch "a" contacts close, cycles

Until auxiliary switch "b" contacts open, cycles

Time from energizing trip coil

Until main contacts part, cycles

Until auxiliary switch "a" contacts open, cycles

Until auxiliary switch "b" contacts close, cycles

/ 3A-10

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A – TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :

3A.2.0

EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT,)

Until circuit is interrupted at 25% to 100%

interrupting rating, cycles
o.

p. /

Clearing Times(cycles)

Instantaneous
Short time range

/
/

A number of auxiliary contacts for Buyer's use

Mechanically operated auxiliary contacts

specified in 4.06.B.B1.4.h

Automatic bypass auxiliary contacts

specified in 4.06.B.B1.4.i

Breaker operated cell switches specified

in 4.06.B.B1.4.j

/
/
/

Lock out relay contacts specified

in Table 4.B2.1
q.

Interrupting capability of auxiliary contacts at 125V DC,
Amperes (Inductive/Resistive)

Mechanically operated auxiliary contacts

specified in 4.06.B.B1.4.h

Automatic bypass auxiliary contacts

specified in 4.06.B.B1.4.i

Breaker operated cell switches specified

in 4.06.B.B1.4.j

Lock out relay contacts

r. Type of trip device

/
/
/
/
/

3. Ratings of Auxiliary Equipment
a.

/ Space heaters 3A-11

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A – TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :

3A.2.0

EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT,)

Number of heaters per load center ························· _________________
Manufacturer & Catalog No. ······························· _________________
Voltage rating (volts) ········································ _________________
Power rating (watts) per heater at 120 volts·············· _________________

For
51GN
b.

For
51G

For
Metering

Current Transformers

Manufacturer & Catalog No.
Type
Accuracy class
Burden rating(VA)

Potential Transformers

Manufacturer & Catalog No. ······························· _________________
Type ·························································· _________________
Accuracy class ················································ _________________
Burden rating (VA) ·········································· _________________

Manufacturer and Type of the following instruments

Voltmeter ······················································ _________________
Ammeter ······················································· _________________
Auxiliary relay ················································ _________________
Running time meter ·········································· _________________
Voltmeter selector switch ··································· _________________
Ammeter selector switch ···································· _________________
PT primary fuse··············································· _________________
Control circuit fuse ··········································· _________________

Transducers

Current Transducer

Manufacturer ················································· _________________
3A-12

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A – TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :

3A.2.0

EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT,)
Type and catalog No. ······································· _________________
Input range(A) ··············································· _________________
Output range (mA) ·········································· _________________
Adjustable range ············································· _________________
Accuracy ······················································ _________________

Voltage Transducer

Manufacturer ················································· _________________
Type and catalog No. ······································· _________________
Input range(V) ··············································· _________________
Output range (mA) ·········································· _________________
Adjustable range ············································· _________________
Accuracy ······················································ _________________

4. Heat Loss
a.

Heat loss at rated current, WATT & BTU/Hr

1600A breaker ················································ _________________
4000A breaker ················································ _________________
Transformer cubicle

1500/2000kVA, 6900/480V ······························· _________________

5. Transformer (6900V/480V, 1500/2000 kVA)
a.
b.
c.
d.

e.
f.

Manufacturer ···················································· _________________
Type ·························································· _________________
Phase ·························································· _________________
Nominal system voltage, kV (line to line)

H-Winding····················································· _________________
X-Winding····················································· _________________

Rated winding voltage, kV ··································· _________________
Insulation class, kV

H-Winding····················································· _________________

3A-13

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A – TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :

3A.2.0

EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT,)

g.
h.

X-Winding····················································· _________________

Neutral insulation class, kV ·································· _________________
Basic impulse insulation level, kV(BIL)

H-Winding····················································· _________________
X-Winding····················································· _________________

Applied potential test, kV

H-Winding····················································· _________________
X-Winding····················································· _________________

Induced potential test :

Line to neutral, kV

H-Winding···················································· _________________
X-Winding···················································· _________________

Line to line, kV

Impulse tests (Type test) :

Full wave, kV ················································· _________________
Chopped wave:

Crest, kV ······················································ _________________
Minimum time to flashover, S ··························· _________________

Conductor material of each winding
(If aluminum, state the grade)

m. Transformer connection
H-Winding
X-Winding
n.

Transformer rating above a 40℃ ambient

Full load at 60℃ rise,

Convection cooled, kVA(AA)

Full load at 60℃ rise,

3A-14

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A – TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :

3A.2.0

EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT,)
Forced cooled, kVA(FA)
o.

Tap

Above rated voltage at full kVA

capacity, Number of taps and %
volts each tap

Below rated voltage at full kVA

capacity, Number of taps and %
volts each tap

Location of taps on winding

Efficiency at unity power factor
(not including power for cooling)
guaranteed at 60℃ rise, % :

100% full rated load (AA)
75% full rated load (AA)
50% full rated load (AA)
25% full rated load (AA)
100% full rated load (FA)
75% full rated load (FA)
50% full rated load (FA)
25% full rated load (FA)

Impedance at rated voltage tap,
guaranteed :

At rated kVA
Manufacturer’s tolerance, ±%
Are the above impedance within

manufacturer’s standard range

3A-15

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A – TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :

3A.2.0

EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT,)
of impedance?, yes/no
r.

Regulation H-winding to X-winding
based on full rated(AA) at 60℃
rise on X-winding, guaranteed :

At unity power factor, %- At 0.8 power factor, %

Approximate resistance at 80℃
(per phase on rated voltage connection):
H-Winding
X-Winding

Losses guaranteed :

No-load loss (Excitation only)

At 100% voltage, kW
At 110% voltage, kW

Total loss, no-load loss plus

Load loss, at unity power factor
With loading as follows :
At full load(AA) at 60℃ rise, kW
At full load(FA) at 60℃ rise, kW

Auxiliary power loss, kW

(total power requirements for cooling)

Temperature under continuous
operation, guaranteed :

3A-16

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A – TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :

3A.2.0

EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT,)

Temp. rise at full rated load(AA/FA) :

Winding temp. rise by resistance, ℃
Hottest-spot winding temp. rise, ℃

Performance reference temperature

on which efficiency, loss and
impedance are based, ℃

Insulation system-UL class, ℃
Maximum ambient temperatures of

the surrounding air into which the
heat of the equipment is dissipated, ℃
v.

Average sound level at rated load,
with all fans running, scale “A”
slow response, at 5 feet from
transformer, dB

w. Exciting current guaranteed :

At 100% voltage, %
At 110% voltage, %

Inrush rms magnetizing current on
basis of no residual magnetism,
expressed in times full load current

Short circuit characteristics :

Short circuit current on

H-Winding, rms symmetrical A

3A-17

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A – TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :

3A.2.0

EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT,)

Maximum duration of short

circuit current on X-Winding, seconds

Maximum crest value of short

circuit current, A
z.

Radio influence voltage at 100% of
normal operating voltage, ㎶

aa. Fan, if required :

Number
Horsepower, hp(each)
Voltage and phase, V
Locked rotor current, A(each)

bb. Minimum clearance between terminals
and uninstalled metal parts of
enclosure, Inches

6. Load Centers Data :
a.

High potential test in factory on
assembled switchgear for 60 seconds, V ················· _________________

Permissible 60 seconds high potential test
in field (before cables are connected on
assemblied switchgear), V ···································· _________________

Horizontal Buses:

Continuous ampere rating, A ····························· _________________
Temperature rise above 40℃ ambient at

rated current, ℃ ············································· _________________
3A-18

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A – TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :

3A.2.0

EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT,)

Momentary rating, kA ······································ _________________
Size and shape

············································· _________________

Cross-sectional area, mm2 ································· _________________
Conductor material (if aluminum, state the grade,

temper and conductivity) ·································· _________________

Minimum clearance-between phases, mm················ _________________
Minimum clearance-phase-to-ground, mm··············· _________________
Type of bus supports ······································· _________________
Type of insulation on bus ·································· _________________
Type of plating used at bus joints and

Buyer's incoming cable connections ······················ _________________
d.

Vertical Buses:

Continuous ampere rating, A ····························· _________________
Temperature rise above 40℃ ambient

at rated current, ℃ ·········································· _________________

Momentary rating, kA ······································· _________________
Size and shape ················································ _________________
Cross-sectional area, mm2··································· _________________
Conductor material ··········································· _________________
Bus spacing, center-to-center, mm ························ _________________
Minimum clearance-between phases, mm················ _________________

3A-19

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A – TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :

3A.2.0

EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT,)

Minimum clearance-phase-to-ground, mm··············· _________________
Type of bus supports ········································· _________________
Type of insulation on bus ··································· _________________
Type of plating used at bus joint ··························· _________________

Ground bus, size and material ································ _________________

7. State the relay manufacturer, type and model proposed for load centers
a.

High dropout and pickup, hinged armature
telephone type under voltage relay.
Device 27 similar to ABB 27(411R1175)··············· _________________

Very inverse time delay ground
overcurrent relay. Devices
51G similar to ABB 51Y(443S2241) ······················· _________________

Inverse time delay ground
overcurrent relay. Devices
51GN similar to ABB 51I(443S1241) ······················ _________________

Instantaneous ground overcurrent relay.
Device 50GS similar to ABB-ITE
GR-5 202D614IUL ············································ _________________

Transformer thermal protective Relay.
device 49 ························································ _________________

Lock out relay. Device 86 similar
to Electroswitch LOR-1, 7803D ····························· _________________

B. 480V MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
1. Circuit Breakers
3A-20

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A – TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :

3A.2.0

EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT,)
Thermal Magnetic Type

Magnetic Only Type 100AF/225AF 100AF/225AF a. Manufacturer / / b. Type / /

c. Interrupting
rating at 480V
(rms sym. A)

/ /

d. Maximum design
voltage (V)

/ /

e. Shunt trip device
minimum operating
voltage (V)

/ /

f. Endurance (Number
of operation between
maintenance)

/ / a) No load / / b) Load / / c) Fault / /

g. Number of bell
alarm contact
(N.O - N.C)

/ / h. Number of auxiliary 3A-21

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A – TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :

3A.2.0

EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT,)
contact (N.O - N.C)

/ /

2. Combination Starters
NEMA - Size 1 / Size 2 / Size 3 / Size 4
a.

Circuit breaker frame size(AF)

/ / / b. Contactor manufacturer / / / c. Contactor type / / / d.

Short circuit withstand
rating at 480 volts ac
(rms symmetrical A)

/ / / - reversing / / / - Non reversing / / / f.

Control transformer fuse size (A)

/ / / g. Coil current-closing (A) / / / h. Coil current-holding (A) / / / i. Coil pick up voltage (V) / / / j. Dropout voltage (V) / / / k.

Interposing relay (Yes or No)

/ / / l.

Endurance (Number of operation)

Control transformers (VA)

3A-22

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A – TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :

3A.2.0

EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT,)

No load

/ / / - load / / / - Non reversing / / / - Reversing / / /

/
/
/

m. Number of auxiliary contacts
(N.O - N.C)

Overload protection devices

For motor loads, SSOR

Overload control contact(N.O - N.C)
Overload relay type or cat. No.
Overload relay manufacturer

3. Auxiliary Control Devices
Manufacturer / Type or Cat. No.
a.

Time delay relay / b. Auxiliary control relay / c. Indication light / d.

Under voltage monitor(27)

/ e.

Ground fault protection

For 50GS

Ground fault relay
Ground fault sensor

/
/

3A-23

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A – TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :

3A.2.0

EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT,)
4. Auxiliary Power Transformer
a.

Manufacturer ···················································· _________________

b. Type c.

Rating (kVA) ··················································· _________________

Voltage (V) and phase ········································· _________________

Temperature rise above ambient (℃) ······················· _________________

Maximum ambient temperature (℃) ························ _________________

g. Insulation class

·························································· _________________

Insulation class (℃) ·········································· _________________
Insulation BIL (kVA) ········································ _________________
Insulation material ·········································· _________________

Taps (No. and %) ············································· _________________

Percent impedance at rated kVA ··························· _________________

Connection ····················································· _________________

5. Distribution Panels
a.

NEMA Enclosure Type ······································· _________________

Circuit breaker interrupting rating

At 120 volts ac(rms symmetrical kA) ····················· _________________
At 240 volts ac(rms symmetrical kA) ····················· _________________

Continuous current rating of main bus (A) ················· _________________

Circuit breaker manufacturer / Type ························ _________________
3A-24

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A – TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :

3A.2.0

EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT,)
6. Buses and Enclosures :
a.

NEMA Enclosure Type ······································· _________________

High potential test at factory on assembled
motor control centers for 1 minute (V) ····················· _________________

Value of short circuit current which buses
are braced to withstand 480 volt ac service
(rms symmetrical kA) ········································· _________________

Minimum Clearances :

Phase to phase (mm) ········································· _________________
Phase to ground (mm) ······································· _________________
Bus spacing center to center (mm) ························ _________________
Tap spacing center to center (mm) ························ _________________

7. Main Bus :
a.

Conductor material············································· _________________

Is bus insulated ? ··············································· _________________

Size of bus (mm ×mm) ······································ _________________

Capacity of bus (A) ············································ _________________

8. Vertical Bus :
a.

Conductor material············································· _________________

Is bus insulated ? ··············································· _________________

Size of bus (cm ×cm) ········································ _________________
3A-25

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A – TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :

3A.2.0

EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT,)
d.

Capacity of bus (A) ············································ _________________

9. Ground Bus :
a.

Size of bus (cm ×cm) ········································ _________________

Capacity (A) ···················································· _________________

Material ·························································· _________________

10. Space Heater requirements per section :
a.

Voltage rating ··················································· _________________

Operating voltage ·············································· _________________

Wattage ·························································· _________________

d. Phase e.

Is the power supply necessary
after MCC installation ? (YES or NO)······················ _________________

·························································· _________________

11. Average Heat Loss per vertical section(watts) ··················· _________________
12. Terminal Blocks Manufacturer / Type ···························· _________________
13. Wire Manufacturer / Type ··········································· _________________

3A.2.2 CONSTRUCTION DATA
A. On-site Storage

State recommendations for short term

on-site storage(under 6 month) ······························· _________________

State recommendations for short term

3A-26

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A – TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :

3A.2.0

EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT,)
on-site storage(over 6 month) ································· _________________

3A.2.3

SPECIAL TOOL/TEST EQUIPMENT LIST AND THEIR DATA
In addition to the list submitted as per Paragraph 2.0 of Attachment 3-1, the Tenderer
shall submit the following technical information in its proposal for each item of the
above special tool/test equipment list.

Item description/name
Rating, Grade or Type
Usage

3A.2.4

SPARE PART LIST AND THEIR DATA
In addition to the list submitted as per Paragraph 3.0 of Attachment 3-1, the Tenderer
shall submit the following technical information in its proposal for each item of the
above spare part list.

Item description/name
Material Specification (Material, Size, Rating, Grade or Type, etc.)
Drawing Item Number
Part Number
Original Manufacturer's Part Number
Manufacturer's Name
Period of Replacement

3A-27

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A – TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :

3A.2.0

EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT,)

Recommended Quantity
Parent Item Stock Code Number
For resilient materials, year of manufacture and the recommended shelf life
One or more of the following code(s) shall be indicated in the remarks column.

3A.2.5 Codes Description A

Non-standard Items (Code 'A' is assigned to the parts whose failures will cause
a malfunction of adjacent components/ equipment and itself, and cause
significant effects on the related components/equipment.)

Standard Items (Code 'B' is assigned to off-the-shelf items, other than the
non-standard items above, which are available for general industry
application from manufacturers, or suppliers based solely on the
manufacturer's catalog description and data. When failures occur in these
components/equipment, they should be replaced with new off-the-shelf
items purchased.)

Environmental Qualification required

D UL Listed Item

ADDITIONAL PROPOSAL DATA
Tenderer shall submit the following data
with each copy of this proposal :

A. Detailed Specifications covering
construction and materials used
in the equipment ·················································
B. Drawings showing general
arrangement and principal
dimensions of equipment ·······································
3A-28

Is this data included?
Yes
/
No

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A – TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :

3A.2.0

EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT,)

C. Description of any variance
between this specification and
any code requirements ··········································
D. Summary of Equipment Qualification
Program(Dynamic) ··············································
E. Work Schedule including engineering procurement,
fabrication and delivery ········································
F.

Description and/or Catalogue of the
equipment/device ················································

G.. List of the Certificate and copy of each Certificate
according to applicable codes & standards
(KEPIC/ASME/ISO, etc)·······································

3A.2.6

APPLICATION OF KOREA ELECTRIC POWER INDUSTRY CODE (KEPIC)
Local Tenderer of ROK(Republic of Korea) shall apply KEPIC 2015 Edition (including
addenda through 2016) on the cross-reference table in the attachment 4-5 for the supply
of Goods and Services specified in this specification.

3A-29

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A – TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :

3A.2.0

EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT,)

3A.2. 7

ADDENDA
Tenderer represents that this proposal includes provisions for the following Addenda

Authorized Signature
or Seal

: Print Name : Print Title : Date of Submission : 3A-30 (Final)

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART B – COMMERCICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :
3B.1.0 TENDER PRICE

3B.1.1 The tender price is specified in Attachment 3-1, Pricing and Schedule Data.

3B.1.2 The tender price is for all the Goods and Services which shall be supplied under the
Contract.

3B.1.3 The tender price shall be fixed and firm, not subject to price adjustment for the entire
duration of contract. However, it is understood that the rates and expense for technical
supervisory services as quoted shall also be firm, and total price therefore will be fixed on
the basis of man-days actually performed until the expiration of the duration of contract.

3B.2.0 DELIVERY SCHEDULE
Delivery schedule is specified in Attachment 3-1, Pricing and Schedule Data.

3B–1

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART B – COMMERCICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :
3B.3.0 PAYMENT METHOD
3B.3.1 Payment for on-shore portion shall be made through the remittance to the Supplier's bank
account(Bank account No. shall be presented to Buyer at the time of the demand for
payment).
Payment for foreign Tenderer's on-shore portion shall be made directly to the Subsupplier
upon Supplier's request for payment. If applicable, the Tenderer shall state the
Subsupplier's name and address with the relevant items below(Bank account No. shall be
presented to Buyer at the time of the demand for payment).
Items

Company Name and Address

3B.3.2 Payment for off-shore portion shall be made through the medium of an unconfirmed
irrevocable letter of credit or by telegraphic transfer(T/T) to the Supplier's bank.
The Tenderer shall state his preference (L/C or T/T).

If the answer is "L/C", the Tenderer shall state the beneficiary's name and address on L/C
below.

If the answer is "T/T", the Tenderer shall state the Supplier's bank account below.

Payment in U.S. dollars for domestic Tenderer's off-shore portion shall be made through
the transfer to the Supplier's Resident's Account opened with a foreign exchange
bank(Resident's Account No. shall be presented to Buyer at the time of the demand for
payment).

3B–2

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART B – COMMERCICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :
3B.4.0 POINT(S) OF ORIGIN
The Point(s) of Origin and the manufacturer(s) for the Goods are indicated below with the
applicable items.

Item

Point of Origin (City/State/Country)

Manufacturer (Major Items & No.)

3B.5.0 PORT OF EXPORT
For off-shore portion, the Tenderer shall indicate Port of Export where the Goods are
shipped with the applicable items.
Item

Port of Export (City/State/Country)

3B.6.0 PROPOSAL VALIDITY
The Tenderer hereby agrees that this tender is firm for acceptance without any condition
within eight ⑻ months from the stated tender due date.
(Yes / No)

3B.7.0 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
The Tenderer shall designate below a representative who is authorized to make binding
and enforceable decisions and assume financial responsibility on behalf of the Tenderer in
all matters relating to clarification of the tender and the administration and performance of
the resultant Contract.
Title

: Name : Tel No. : Fax No. : 3B–3 _______________________

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 3 – MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART B – COMMERCICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :
3B.8.0 SEAL TO BE USED (For domestic Tenderer only)
The Tenderer shall mark the seal to be used in this tendering and for the execution of the
Contract and all legal actions relating to the performance of the Contract.

Registered Seal Seal to be used

3B.9.0 TENDERER'S DEFINITE STATEMENT
The undersigned hereby declares, as Tenderer, that the only persons or parties interested in
this Tender as principals are those named herein, that this is made without connection to
any other person or party for the same purpose, that this is in all respects fair and without
collusion or fraud, and that the Tenderer agrees that as submitted based on the
requirements, if it will be accepted, the Tenderer shall promptly execute and return to
Buyer the acceptance copy of the Contract issued by Buyer in accordance with the tender,
the contractual terms and conditions in ITT, and other documents agreed to between
Buyer and Tenderer, that the Tenderer will perform and complete the Work within the time
limit specified therein, and that Tenderer will accept in full payment therefor, the prices
quoted above.
Authorized Signature
(or Seal)

: Print Name : Print Title : Tenderer : Date of Submission :

Note: The Tenderer shall attach the Certificate of Seal Impression for the Registered Seal or the
notarized Power(s) of Attorney for the signer. In case of a partnership or joint venture, full
names of partners or joint venturers shall be given herein.

3B–4(Final)

PRICE TENDER
ITT No.

0-824-E208

Tendering Date
Goods
Tender Price
(DDP/
2nd Radwaste
Receipt/Storage
Building, Loaded)

On-shore
Portion

Say Won
(￦
※ Including V.A.T.

only
)

Off-shore
Portion

Say U.S. dollars
(US$
※ Including V.A.T.

only
)

We submit this tender in strict compliance with the provisions in Buyer's Invitation to
Tender(ITT), and hereby promise definitely that if this tender is accepted by Buyer, we will
supply the Goods and/or Services at the above Tender Price within the time limit therefore in
accordance with the terms and conditions in the resultant Contract.
Date

Authorized Signature
or Seal

: Print Name : Print Title : Tenderer : Address :

Note: If the affixed signature or seal is not identical to the presented, the tender will
become nullified.
KOREA RADACTIVE WASTE AGENCY

PT-1 (Final)

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
ATTACHMENT 3-1
PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
Name of Tenderer :________________
PRICING DATA SUMMARY
No.
1

2 3 Description Off-shore(US$) On-shore(￦)

Equipment & Material
A. 480V Load Centers

_________________ N/A .

B. 480V Motor Control Centers

_________________ N/A . A. 480V Load Centers _________________ N/A .

B. 480V Motor Control Centers

_________________ N/A . A. 480V Load Centers _________________ N/A .

B. 480V Motor Control Centers

_________________ N/A .

_________________
(Jobsite Loaded Price)

N/A
.
(FCA Price)

Special Tools Spare Parts 4

Sub-Total (Sum of Items 1 through 3)

All Charges for Off-shore Portion;

Overseas and inland freight, insurance

premium, customs duties and other
charges from FCA to Jobsite Loaded

N/A . N/A . 6

Total (Sum of Items 4 and 5)

_________________
(Jobsite Loaded Price)

N/A
.
(FCA Price)

Technical Supervisory Service

_________________
[By Domestic
(sub)Supplier)]

N/A .

[By Foreign
(sub)Supplier]

Total (Sum of Items 6 and 7)

_________________ N/A . 9 Value-Added Tax _________________ N/A . 10

Grand Total (Sum of Items 8 and 9)

On-shore : Say Korea Won only
Off -shore : Say U.S. Dollars only

3-1-1

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
ATTACHMENT 3-1
PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
Name of Tenderer :________________
PRICING DATA SUMMARY
No.

Description Off-shore(US$)

On-shore(￦)
￦________________

US$ N/A .

Authorized Signature or Seal : _________________
Print Name : _________________
Print Title : _________________
Tenderer : _________________
Date of Submission : _________________

3-1-2

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev.1
ATTACHMENT 3-1
PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
Name of Tenderer :
Item No.

1.0 Quantity

Unit Price
(￦/ US$)

Extension
(￦/US$)

Required Site
Delivery Date

1 ________ __________ __________ a. 0-826-E-MC07 1 ________ __________ __________ b. 0-826-E-MC08 1 ________ __________ __________ c. 0-826-E-MC09 1 ________ __________ __________

N/A
N/A

￦_________
US$ N/A

N/A
N/A

￦_________
US$ N/A

N/A N/A

US$ N/A
.

N/A
N/A

￦_________
US$ N/A

Description

Equipment & Material
1.01 480V Load Centers
a. 0-824-E-LC03

1.02 480V Motor Control Centers

1.03 Sub-Total
a. 480V Load Centers
(Sum of Item 1.01)

On-shore, Jobsite Loaded
Off-shore, FCA

b. 480V Motor Control Centers
(Sum of Item 1.02)

On-shore, Jobsite Loaded
Off-shore, FCA
Overseas and inland freight,

insurance premium, customs
duties and other charges from
FCA to Jobsite Loaded

1.04 Total(Sum of Item 1.03), Excluding
V.A.T

On-shore, Jobsite Loaded
Off-shore, Jobsite Loaded

Remark : According to buyer's request schedule date, the site delivering date can be changed.

3-1-3

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev.1
ATTACHMENT 3-1
PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
Name of Tenderer :____________
2.0 SPECIAL TOOLS
Below is a list of special tools being supplied which are required for installation(mark *),
adjustment, calibration, maintenance and dismantling of the equipment. The items which are
specified in Section 4, Technical Specifications, if any, shall be included in the list. If no items are
required, "N/A" shall be indicated below.

No. Item

Recom. Unit Price
Q'ty/Unit (￦/US$)

Extension
(￦/US$)

Site Delivery
Date

Description
Material Specification (Rating, Grade,
Type, etc.)
Part No. / Orig. Mfr's Part No.
Mfr's Name

A. Sub-Total of Special Tools
◆ 480V Load Centers

On-shore, Jobsite Loaded
Off-shore, FCA

◆ 480V Motor Control Centers

On-shore, Jobsite Loaded
Off-shore, FCA

￦_________________
US$
N/A
.
￦_________________
US$
N/A
.

B. All charges for Off-shore portion:

Overseas and inland freight, insurance premium, customs

duties and other charges from FCA to Jobsite Loaded

US$ N/A .

C. Total of Special Tools(Sum of Items A and B), Excluding V.A.T
◆ 480V Load Centers

On-shore, Jobsite Loaded
Off-shore, FCA

◆ 480V Motor Control Centers

On-shore, Jobsite Loaded
Off-shore, FCA

￦_________________
US$
N/A
.
￦_________________
US$
N/A
.

3-1-4

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev.1
ATTACHMENT 3-1
PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
Name of Tenderer : _____________
3.0 SPARE PARTS
Below is a list of spare parts including consumable parts being supplied which are required for
installation(mark *), start-up(mark **) and two(2) years operation(mark ***). The items which are
specified in Section 4, Technical Specifications, if any, shall be included in the list. If no items are
required, "N/A" shall be indicated below.
Item

No.

Recom.
Q'ty/Unit

Unit Price
(￦/US$)

Extension Site Delivery
Date
(￦/US$)

Description
Material Specification (Material,

Size, Rating, Grade or Type, etc.)

Part No./Orig. Mfr's Part No.
Mfr's Name
Period of Replacement

A. Sub-Total of Spare Parts
◆ 480V Load Centers

On-shore, Jobsite Loaded
Off-shore, FCA

◆ 480V Motor Control Centers

On-shore, Jobsite Loaded
Off-shore, FCA

￦_________________
US$
N/A
.
￦_________________
US$
N/A
.

B. All charges for Off-shore portion:

Overseas and inland freight, insurance premium, customs

duties and other charges from FCA to Jobsite Loaded
C. Total of Special Tools(Sum of Items A and B),
Excluding V.A.T
◆ 480V Load Centers

On-shore, Jobsite Loaded
Off-shore, FCA

◆ 480V Motor Control Centers

On-shore, Jobsite Loaded
Off-shore, FCA

3-1-5 US$ N/A .

￦_________________
US$
N/A
.
￦_________________
US$
N/A
.

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
ATTACHMENT 3-1
PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
Name of Tenderer : ______________

4.0 DELIVERY
4.1 Delivery Required
In case of delivery to FCA port of export, schedule date is two(2) months before site delivery
date.
A Can Tenderer meet the delivery
set forth in Item 1.0 through 3.0?…………….………….…_________________________

B If the answer to Item 4.1, A is "No",
Tenderer shall give schedule of
earliest dates possible ...….......……………….………….…_________________________

C Shipping shall not be made earlier than one (1) month prior to the delivery date
set forth in item 1.0 through 3.0 without written approval of the Buyer.
4.2

Document Submittal Schedule

A Can the Tenderer meet the document submittal
schedule given in Appendix 4D? (Yes or No)
(If the answer to this question is "No", Tenderer
shall list the earliest possible submittal dates in
the appropriate column in Appendix 4D) .............................._________________________

B Will the document submittal schedule in Appendix 4D
and the review period specified in Appendix 4C
permit the Tenderer to commence fabrication in
sufficient time to meet the delivery date(s) given in
Item 1.0 through 3.0? (Yes or No)
(If the answer to this question is "No", Tenderer
shall list the required submittal dates in Appendix 4D
and/or indicate which documents will require
expedited review.) ............................................................._________________________

3-1-6

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
ATTACHMENT 3-1
PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
Name of Tenderer : ______________

4.0 DELIVERY (CONT.)
Authorized Signature
or Seal
:

Date of Submission 3-1-7 ___________________ : ___________________

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
ATTACHMENT 3-1
PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
Name of Tenderer :_______________
5.0 TECHNICAL SUPERVISORY SERVICES(IF REQUIRED)
The Tenderer shall furnish the following information related to the technical supervisory
services which are required for the Equipment at the Site per Section 2, Special Terms and
Conditions, and Section 4, Technical Specifications.
5.1 Number of working days and Supervisory/Technicians
A. Total

Supervisory : [
Technician : [

] persons X [
] persons X [

] days = [
] days = [

] man-days
] man-days

Note : 1. The above working days shall be expected requirements based upon
Tenderer's experience.
2. The actual working days shall be determined when the Buyer requests
such services.
5.2 Rate and Expense (for a person)
Supervisory
A. Basic rate per day for a normal
working day
B. Hourly rate for overtime (including
Sunday and Holidays)
C. Sojourn rate per day, excluding lodging
and local transportation
D. Travel expense of round trip

Domestic person : 2days / trip
Foreign person

: 4days / trip

E. Economic round trip air fare

Technician

￦/US$_________ ￦/US$_________
￦/US$_________ ￦/US$_________
￦/US$_________ ￦/US$_________

Note : The ceiling of the air fare unit price shall be presented here.
5.3 Estimated Amount of Technical Supervisory Services
A. Total, excluding V.A.T

Portion by Supervisor

￦___________________
US$__________________

- Portion by Technician

￦___________________
US$__________________

Note : A detailed calculation sheet shall be attached hereto.
3-1-8

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
ATTACHMENT 3-1
PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
Name of Tenderer :_______________
Authorized Signature or Seal : _____________________
Date of Submission

3-1-9 : _____________________

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
ATTACHMENT 3-1
PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
Name of Tenderer : ___________
5.0 TECHNICAL SUPERVISORY SERVICES
5.4 Detailed Calculation Sheet
Grade

Supervisor Technician

Man-Days
Rate
Services (￦/US$)
Expansion
Fee
(￦/US$)
Rate
Sojourn
(￦/US$)
AllowExpansion
ance
(￦/US$)
Travel Expanses of
Round Trip (￦/US$)
Air Fares of Round
Trip (￦/US$)
Total (￦/US$)

3-1-10(Final) Total

Spec.: 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
ATTACHMENT 3-2
EXCEPTIONS
Name of Tenderer :
1.0

Tenderer hereby certifies that it agrees to all provisions of the contractual terms and
conditions and the Specifications documents, unless exceptions are specifically and clearly
listed hereafter.

A. Tenderer's printed terms and conditions are not considered specific exceptions to
Terms and Conditions of the ITT. Exceptions to Tendering Instructions and Terms and
Conditions of the ITT will not be accepted, in principle.

B. If no exceptions are taken by Tenderer, “No Exceptions” shall be indicated below.

Authorized Signature
or Seal

: Print Name : Print Title : Date of Submission : 3-2-1(Final)

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BUILDING

SECTION 4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Title

: 480V LOAD CENTER & MOTOR CONTROL
CENTERS

Spec. No. : 0-824-E208 ● Quality Class : AQ

● Radwaste Safety Category

: II

KEPCO E&C JOB No. : 11G79

ISSUE STATUS 1 07/29/26 Re-issue for ITB 0 02/15/19 Issue for ITB REV NO. DATE DESCRIPTION For

PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED

Preparer : 황의정, Tel : 054-421-7623

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION TITLE PAGE 4.01

SCOPE .............................................................................................. 4-1

4.02

ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS ............................................ 4-2

4.03

QUALITY STANDARDS.................................................................... 4-3

4.04

SUBMITTALS .................................................................................... 4-9

4.05

DESIGN CONDITIONS .................................................................... 4-11

4.06

MATERIALS AND FABRICATION .................................................. 4-16

4.07

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL REQUIREMENTS ............ 4-47

4.08

SURFACE PREPARATION AND COATING .................................... 4-47

4.09

NAMEPLATES ................................................................................... 4-51

4.10

INSPECTION AND TESTING ............................................................ 4-51

4.11

SHIPPING REQUIREMENTS ............................................................ 4-56

4.12

INSTRUCTION MANUALS ............................................................... 4-59

TC4 – 1

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)
SECTION

TITLE PAGE

ATTACHMENTS
4-1

WITNESS POINT ..................................................................................... 4-1-1

4-2

HOLD POINT .......................................................................................... 4-2-1

4-3

CHANNEL BASE FOR ROLLOUT 480V LCs AND MCCs ..................... 4-3-1

4-4

BUILDING STRUCTURE MOUNTING DESIGN AND LOAD
SUMMARY FORM ................................................................................ 4-4-1

4-5

CROSS-REFERENCE TABLE BETWEEN KEPIC AND REFERENCED
CODES AND STANDARDS .................................................................. 4-5-1

4-6

DRAWING LIST .................................................................................... 4-6-1

4-7

FORM PARENT COMPONENT DESIGN FUNCTIONS
AND CLASSIFICATION EVALUATION SHEET .................................... 4-7-1
APPENDICES

4A1

Quality Assurance Program Requirements ................................................. 4A-1

Quality Surveillance Requirements ............................................................ 4B-1

General Requirements for the Submittal of Documents .............................. 4C-1

Drawing and Document Submittal Requirements ....................................... 4D-1

Quality Verification Documentation List .................................................... 4E-1

Documentation Requirements of Suppliers Deviations
and Non-conformances .............................................................................. 4H-1

4K5

Welding Requirements for Structure Steel(AWS) ………………………. 4K5-1

Standard Specification for Electrical Apparatus ......................................... 4P-1

General Requirement for Instrumentation and Control ............................... 4S-1

Requirements for Instrument Tagging ........................................................ 4T-1

Requirements for Panel Labels .................................................................. 4U-1

Requirements for Part Classification .......................................................... 4X-1
TC4 – 2 (Final)

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.01

SCOPE
A.

WORK INCLUDED
1.

The Supplier shall design, furnish materials, fabricate, test, package and
deliver in accordance with this specification the following:
a. 480V load centers
b. 480V motor control centers
c. Terminating provisions for entering incoming or outgoing cable,
located on the top of each 480V load centers cubicle.
d. Detail quantity of the above equipment are shown in Attatchment 4-6.

The Supplier shall furnish one(1) lot of all special tools required for
adjustment, maintenance and dismantling of each equipment including
cable/connector terminal tool/kit. The test/maintenance equipment shall be
designed as a trouble shooting, modification, diagnostic and support tool for
Supplier’s system. The Equipment shall be able to simulate field inputs
including meteorological and environmental perimeter inputs. Tools shall be
new and of first class quality. Supplier shall furnish on-site programming
and debugging facilities for system firmware and software. Tools shall be
shipped in a separate suitable container clearly marked with the name of the
equipment. Tool container shall be marked for delivery in accordance with
the requirements in Section 2.

When requested by the Buyer, the Supplier shall furnish the services of
competent technical advisor(s) who shall provide technical advice, guidance
and assistance in the erection and testing of the equipment furnished under
this Specification, as required for the placement of the equipment in
successful operation by Buyer’s personnel.

The Supplier shall furnish the services of competent engineering personnel
to attend technical clarification meeting as requested by the Buyer. The
supplier and his sub-supplier shall attend a technical clarification meeting
four (4) weeks after the submittal of the general arrangement drawings. The
purpose of this meeting will be to clarify the actual Buyer/Supplier interface
points(i.e., piping thermal points, foundation information, electrical/control
cable terminal location, etc.). The Supplier may be required to attend four or
more additional technical review meetings, periodically 6 month if required
by the Buyer.

4– 1

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.01

SCOPE (CONT.)
5.

The Supplier shall furnish one(1) lot of Spare Parts required during
installation, start-up, and 2 years of normal operation. All requirements that
apply to the original parts of the specified equipment shall apply equally to
the spare parts of the specified equipment. All documentation for spare parts
shall be submitted in the same manner as for original parts.

RELATED WORK NOT INCLUDED
The following work will be by others:

4.02 1.

All external wiring not forming an integral part of Supplier's equipment.

Foundations, supporting steel and anchor bolts.

Connections to Buyer's interface.

4. Installation. 5.

125V dc electrical supply for control power.

120V, 60Hz supply for internal lighting and space heaters.

Cable pulling and raceway installation for fiber optic cables.

ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS
A.

GENERAL
In addition to definitions included in the General Conditions and Special
conditions the following shall apply:
1.

Buyer will review drawings and document submitted by the Supplier,
therefore, reference to the terms "approve," "approved," "approval" etc.,
shall be construed to mean "review" or "reviewed."

Wherever the terms "or equal" or "as agreed upon" are used in this
specification, they shall mean "as agreed upon" by "Buyer" unless otherwise
specifically stated.

4– 2

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.02

4.03

ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS (CONT.)
3.

Wherever the word "harsh environment" appears in the Specification it shall
mean an environment which experiences a significant increase in pressure,
temperature, relative humidity, or chemical environment as a result of a
design basis event or is predicted to experience a Total Integrated Dose
(TID) greater than 102 Gy (greater than 10 Gy for electronic components
such as semiconductors or electronic components containing organic
material).

KEPIC : Korea Electric Power Industry Code

Shall : Mandatory requirement.

Should/
May/Will

Recommendation or action which is advised but
not required. Will is used for all actions
to be performed by Buyer or others.

QUALITY STANDARDS
A.

GENERAL
The Supplier shall control the quality of Goods and Services to meet the
requirements of the Specification, and applicable codes and standards.

CODE AND STANDARDS
1.

KEPIC shall be the 2015 edition through 2016 addenda for KEPIC EED
1200. The cross-reference table between KEPIC and referenced codes and
standards is specified in the Attachment 4-5 of this specification. All other
codes and standards except KEPIC shall be the edition in effect as of
February 28, 2017, unless indicated otherwise.

Should conflict exist between KEPIC and the referenced codes and
standards, the referenced codes and standards take precedence over KEPIC.

Codes and standards mentioned in attachments and appendices of this
specification shall be read to mean the equipment article or subarticle of
KEPIC code[except KEPIC QAI, QAP, QAR and STB].

The work performed shall comply with the applicable codes, standards and
regulations, and in particular the following :

4– 3

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.03

QUALITY STANDARDS (CONT.)

SPONSOR NUMBER KEPIC QAP

Nuclear Quality Assurance

KEPIC ECB 1400

Specification for
Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper
Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or
Soft

KEPIC ECB 4000

Control, Thermocouple Extension,
and Instrumentation Cables

KEPIC EEC 1000

Terminal Markings and Connections
for Distribution and Power
Transformers

KEPIC EEC 3200

Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution
and Power Transformers

KEPIC EED 1100

Rating Structure for AC High-Voltage
Circuit Breakers Rated on a
Symmetrical Current Basis

KEPIC EED 1200

Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit
Breakers Used in Enclosures

KEPIC EEE 1000 Motor Control Centers KEPIC EEE 2000

Surge Withstand Capability(SWC)
Tests for Relays and Relay Systems
Associated with Electric Power
Apparatus

KEPIC EEE 4000 Panelboards KEPIC EEF 1000

Relays and Relay Systems Associated
with Electric Power Apparatus

KEPIC EEF 2000

Surge Withstand Capability (SWC)
Tests for Protective Relays and Relay
Systems

4– 4 SUBJECT

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.03

QUALITY STANDARDS (CONT.)

SPONSOR NUMBER KEPIC EMB 5100

Requirements for Instrument
Transformers

KEPIC EMC 1100

Industrial Control and Systems
General Requirements

KEPIC EMC 2101

General Standards for Manual &
Magnetic Controllers

KEPIC EMC 3100

Enclosure for Electrical Equipment
(1000 volts Maximum)

KEPIC EMD 1100

Electrical Analog Indicating
Instruments, Requirements for

KEPIC SWT

Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel

ANSI Z55.1-1967

Gray Finishes for Industrial Apparatus
and Equipment

ANSI C37.17

Standard for Trip Systems for
Low-Voltage
(1000 V and
below) AC and General Purpose
(1500 V and below) DC Power
Circuit Breakers

ANSI C57.12.10

Standard Requirements for
Liquid-Immersed Power
Transformers

ANSI C57.12.51

Guide for Mechanical
Interchangeability of Ventilated
Dry-Type Transformers

4– 5 SUBJECT

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.03

QUALITY STANDARDS (CONT.)

SPONSOR NUMBER ANSI C57.12.55

Dry type Transformers used in Unit
Installations, Including Unit
Substation - Conformance Standard

IEEE 1

General Principles Temperature
Limits in the Rating of Electric
Equipment and for the Evaluation of
Electrical Insulation

IEEE 383(2003)

Standard for Qualifying Class 1E
Electric Cables and Field Splicing for
Nuclear Power Generating Stations

IEEE C37.47

Distribution Fuse Disconnecting
Switches, Fuse Supports and Current
Limiting Fuse

IEEE C37.90.2

Standard for Withstand Capability of
Relay Systems to Radiated
E l e c t r o m a g n e t i c
Interface from Transceivers

IEEE C39.6

Electrical Instrumentation Digital
Measuring Instruments

IEEE C57.12.01

Standard for General Requirements
for Dry Type Distribution and Power
Transformers

IEEE C57.13

Standard Requirements for Instrument
Transformers

IEEE C57.13.1

Guide for Field Testing of Relaying
Current Transformers

NEMA PB 1 Panelboards NEMA ICS2

Industrial Control and Systems
Controllers Contactors and Overload

4– 6 SUBJECT

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.03

QUALITY STANDARDS (CONT.)

SPONSOR NUMBER

SUBJECT
Relays Rated 600 Volts

NEMA 250

Enclosure for Electrical Equipment
(1000 volts Maximum)

NEMA ICS 5

Industrial Control and Systems
Control-Circuit and Pilot Devices

NEMA SG-7

Manufacturers Labels for Switchgear
Assemblies

NEMA ST-20

Dry Type Transformer for General
Application

NEMA WC 53

Standard Test Methods for Extruded
Dielectric Power, Control,
Instrumentation, and Portable Cables
for Test(ICEA T-27-581)

NEMA WC 57

Standard for Control, Thermocouple
Extension, and Instrumentation
Cables (ICEA -73-532)

NEMA WC 70

Power Cables Rated 2000 V or less
for the Distribution of Electrical
Energy

SSPC PA 2

Procedure for Determining
Conformance to Dry Coating
Thickness Requirement

SSPC/NACE SP 10/No.2

Near-White Metal Blast Cleaning

SSPC VIS 1

Guide and Reference Photographs for
Steel Surfaces Prepared by Dry
Abrasive Blast Cleaning

ASTM A325

Standard Specification for High
Strength Bolts for Structural Steel
Joint

4– 7

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.03

QUALITY STANDARDS (CONT.)

C. SPONSOR NUMBER SUBJECT UL 44

Safety Thermoset-Insulated Wires and
Cables

UL 94

Safety Test for Flammability of
Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices
and Appliances

UL 489

Safety Molded-Case Circuit Breakers,
Molded-Case Switches and Circuit
Breaker Enclosures

UL 508

Safety Industrial Control Equipment

NRC RG 1.180

Guidelines for Evaluating
Electromagnetic and Radio-Frequency
Interference in Safety-Related
Instrumentation and Control System

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
This specification covers Goods and Services that have the related functions in a
radwaste disposal facility. The Supplier shall meet the specific requirements
of App. 4A1, 4B, and 4H as applicable

CONFLICT
Should conflict exist between codes, standards and the technical specification
including Attachments & Appendices, the Supplier shall notify the Buyer(A/E)
for clarification prior to proceed with the work.

SUBSUPPLIERS
A subsupplier, i.e., a foundry, forging shop, or independent testing agency, may
perform operations, tests, and examinations that require procedure submittals and
documentation of results. The organization which proposes to perform or
performs the activity shall prepare the procedure and documentation covering
that activity; however, the Supplier is solely responsible for the acquisition of
procedures and certified documents for their submittal to Buyer, and shall assure
that the subsuppliers are properly qualified in accordance with Appendix 4A1
and Appendix 4B of this specification.
4– 8

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

4.04

SUBMITTALS
A.

SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
1.

Drawings and data shall be submitted in accordance with Appendix 4C.
Drawings and data requirements and quality verification document
requirements are summarized in Appendices 4D and 4E and are augmented
by detailed requirements in this Specification.(Appendix 4C)
The Supplier shall provide a list of drawings and documents to be submitted
in accordance with Appendix 4C. The list of drawings shall be cross
referenced with those documents itemized in Appendix 4D

The supplier shall modify the revised parts in the drawing and document to
A/E by "Supplier's Drawing/Document Change Notice" attached to
Supplier's Transmittal in accordance with Appendix 4C.

DRAWINGS AND DATA
1.

The Supplier shall submit to Buyer for review, drawings, data and
information detailed in Appendix 4C.

The Supplier shall submit to the Buyer's Representative for review and
comments, certified drawing and data as herein after listed.
a.

Final drawing list and schedule for submitting drawing for approval
shall be submitted per Appendix 4D.

Drawings shall be submitted and shall include outline dimension,
weight, foundation requirements and mounting details, assembly,
wiring and connection, center of gravity of loads, cable entrance
location, single line diagrams, relay and metering diagrams, and
schematic diagrams.

The following data shall be submitted.

Current transformer excitation curves
Protective relay characteristic curves
Low voltage breaker trip characteristic curves
MCCB characteristic curves
Thermal overload relay, solid state type overload relay and ground

fault relay characteristic curves

d. Spare Part List, Special Part List, Equipment/Commponent List,
Instrument List, Terminal Block Catalogue shall be submitted per
Appendix 4D.
4– 9

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

4.04

SUBMITTALS ((CONT.)
3.

The Supplier shall complete the Building Structure Load Summary Form
and submit it for review as per Appendix 4D as follows:
a.

Seismic Category III
Building Structure Load Summary Form indicated Seismic Category
III Equipment Foundation shown in attachment 4-4.

The building structure loads resulted from all applicable loads shall be
calculated on the basis that they are all postulated to act at the geometric
center of the anchor bolt group or the weld group of equipment foundation.
4.

If the equipment contains any electronic components, devices, or parts, the
Supplier shall submit a certificate of compliance stating that the equipment
shall remain functional under the environmental conditions specified in
section 4.05.D

The Supplier shall provide welding procedure specification (WPS) and
procedure qualification record (PQR) prepared in accordance with the
requirements of KEPIC SWT or Appendix 4K5.

Other required drawings, data and procedure
a. Supplier’s work schedule including
fabrication, and delivery
b. Work progress report
c. Spare part list

7. engineering, procurement,

The Supplier shall submit Part List(s) in accordance with Appendix 4X for
information.

4 – 10

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05

DESIGN CONDITIONS
A.

GENERAL
1.

The 480V Load Centers and 480V Motor Control Centers will be installed
indoors and operated in a Radwaste Disposal Facility.

The equipment and appurtenances shall have a minimum design life of 40
years at the specified service conditions, excluding consumable items such
as packing, seals, and gaskets.

A1. 480V Load Centers
1.

The load centers will be supplied from an electrical auxiliary power
distribution system rated 6.9kV, 3-phase, 60 Hertz, wye connected. The
6.9kV system will be operated with resistance grounded neutral. The load
centers will be used for an electrical power distribution system rated at 480
volts, 3-phase, three wire, 60 Hertz, wye connected. The wye connected
distribution system shall have a solidly grounded neutral connected to
ground through a removable link on each load center transformer.

Overall dimensions of 480V load centers shall be manufactured and
standardized as follows.

Standard dimension per section (DxWxH) : 1,950 x 700 x 2,350mm
Allowable tolerance : ± 3%

A2. 480V Motor Control Centers
1.

The Buyer should confirm the actual quantity of Goods required prior to
commencement of their fabrication. The quantities are estimated and will
be adjusted upward or downward according to the actual quantity required
by the design requirements for the project.

4 – 11

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05

DESIGN CONDITIONS (CONT.)
2.

Overall dimensions of 480V motor control centers shall be manufactured
and standardized as follows.

Standard dimension per section (DxWxH) : 550 x 565 x 2,300mm
Allowable tolerance : ± 3%

A3. The equipment will be numbered and classified as follows.
Radwaste
Safety
Class

Quality
Class

Seismic
Category

480V Load Center II AQ III

480V Motor Control Center

II AQ III Equipment B.

Location.
Refer to
Single Line
Diagram
(Att. 4-6)

OPERATING AND DESIGN CONDITIONS

B1. 480V Load Centers
1.

480V Load Center Ratings
a.

Rated voltage, V 480 b. Frequency, Hz 60 c. Rated maximum voltage, V 508 d. Phases 3 e.

Rated continuous current
of main bus

Refer to Single Line diagrams
(Attachment. 4-6)

f. Breaker Ratings

Frame size
(Amperes)

Interrupting Rating RMS Symmetrical
(Amperes, 480 Vac)
With Instantaneous
With Delayed Trip
Trip

1600 50,000 50,000 4000 50,000 50,000 4 – 12

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

4.05

DESIGN CONDITIONS (CONT.)

g. h. i. j. 2.

Control voltage, V-dc
Nominal

125V-dc

Range of rated voltage
for continuous operation of dc
equipment (125V DC)
Closing Circuit
Tripping Circuit

90-140V
70-140V

Range of rated voltage
for continuous operation
of ac equipment (120 VAC)

108-132V

Primary current rating
of current transformers
and potential transformer
ratings

Refer to single line diagrams
(Attachment. 4-6)

Transformer Ratings
Each transformer shall be 3-phase, two-winding, 60 Hertz ventilated cast
resin encapsulated winding dry type for indoor location and meet the design
and test requirements of IEEE C57.12.01
a.

Output[kVA] 1500/2000 b. Temperature rise[ºC]

60ºC (above 30ºC average ambient
for 24 hrs, 40ºC max. ambient
temp.)

c. Rated voltage:

HV winding. kV
6.9

d. Connection:

Delta- Wye,
solidly grounded through a
disconnect link

Taps, no-load, full
capacity, percent;

HV winding, kV 4 – 13

LV winding, volts
480

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

4.05

DESIGN CONDITIONS (CONT.)

Above rated

voltage:

two, 2-1/2 % each

Below rated

voltage:

two, 2-1/2 % each f.

Impedance, percent
(based on self-cooled
rating)

g. Winding BIL, kV : 5.75

6.9 kV
480 V

60
10

h. Phase relationship:

Refer to Single Line Diagrams
(Attachment. 4-6)

Primary system short
circuit duty rating, kA

40 @6.9kV Cooling: AA/FA j.

B2. 480V Motor Control Centers
1.

Motor Control Center Rating
a.

Main bus:
a1. Continuous current
a2. Momentary rating
a3. Bus material

600A
Refer to Single Line Diagrams
(Attachment. 4-6)
Copper

Vertical bus:
b1.
b2.

Continuous current
Momentary rating

b3.

Bus material
4 – 14

600A
Refer to Single Line Diagrams
(Attachment. 4-6)
Copper

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

4.05

DESIGN CONDITIONS (CONT.)

c. Neutral bus None d. Main power connections e. Voltage rating

Refer to Single Line Diagrams.
(Attachment. 4-6)
480V (±10%), 3 phase, 60Hz

Min. circuit breaker interrupting
rating at 480V except for 120V
distribution panel breaker

Refer to Single Line Diagrams
(Attachment. 4-6)

Min. combination starter
assembly short circuit
withstand rating per UL 508

Refer to Single Line Diagrams
(Attachment. 4-6)

Control voltage rating
h1.
h2.
h3.

Voltage rating
Voltage range at normal operation
Voltage range at abnormal
operation (During 1 min.)
For equipment
h4. Drop out voltage of contactor
and auxiliary relay
i.

120V ac, 1 phase, 60Hz
90% to 110%

80% to 110%
Below 60%

Auxiliary power transformer
i1.
i2.
i3.

i4. i5.

Type
Output
Rated voltage

HV winding
LV winding

Connection

HV winding
LV winding

Taps, no load, full capacity

Above rated voltage
Below rated voltage

4 – 15

Ventilated dry
30kVA
480V ac
120V / 208V ac
Delta
Wye - solidly grounded
two, 2.5 %
two, 2.5 %

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

4.05

DESIGN CONDITIONS (CONT.)
C. DYNAMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
The equipment specified in this specification shall be classified as Seismic Category III
and designed in accordance with the Korea Building Code. The Supplier shall submit for
review, details and calculations demonstrating the capability of the equipment
attachment/foundation design(e.g. bolt hole size; suggested bolt type, material, and sizes;
weldment type, material, and sizes; etc) to sustain the forces resulting from the specified
seismic event.
D. ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Ambient Conditions (Indoor)

4.06 a. Altitude Lower than 1000m b. Temperature 10 C c. Relative humidity 7 to 90% to 40 C

MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A.

GENERAL
1.

Material and fabrication shall be suitable for the design and operating
conditions specified in this specification.

Materials and fabrication not specifically covered by this specification shall
be manufacturer's standard, suitable for the application.

Each load center and motor control center shall be fitted with a permanent
corrosion-resistant nameplate containing the purchase contract number,
manufacturer's name, serial number, conditions of service, equipment title
and number.

For motor control center, all circuit breakers, combination starter and
auxiliary equipment of the same type, classification and rating shipped
under the same specification shall be physically and functionally
interchangeable.

Welding for subject component fabrication shall meet the requirements of
KEPIC SWT or Appendix 4K5.
4 – 16

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06

MATERIALS AND FABRICATION (CONT.)
6.

EMI/ RFI/ ESD/SWC TEST
a. The equipment shall comply with the EMI/ RFI/ SWC/ ESD test
requirements as following;

Emission test : CE102, RE102 according to RG 1.180(R1)
Susceptibility test : IEC 61000-4-3 ~ IEC 61000-4-6, IEC 61000-4-12

according to RG 1.180(R1)

SWC test : IEC 61000-4-4 , IEC 61000-4-5, IEC 61000-4-12 according

to RG 1.180(R1)

ESD test : IEC 61000-4-2

b. All test of relays shall be performed in accordance with IEEE C37.90.2.

4 – 17

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06

MATERIALS AND FABRICATION (CONT.)
B.

DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
B1. 480V Load Centers
1.

General
a.

Each load center shall consist of circuit breakers, transformers, buses
and accessories, mounted on metal frames, complete with all electrical
connections and completely enclosed within sheet-metal housings.

The equipment shall conform to, and tests shall be conducted in
accordance with KEPIC EEE 2000, EED 1200, EEC 3100, EEC 3230,
and NEMA ST20, and the related standards listed therein, in effect on
the date stated in Paragraph 4.03.C.

In all cases, load centers equipment ratings shall be in accordance with
the American National Standards Preferred Ratings, as outlined in
KEPIC EED 1200. These ratings are preferred, but are not to be
considered restrictive as long as any assigned ratings are not less than
those listed.

The arrangement of equipment and connections shall be as shown on
the Attachment 4-6. The Supplier's standard arrangements may dictate
the location of certain equipment (potential transformers, undervoltage
relays, etc.) common to a bus or buses in cubicles other than those
shown on the drawings. This is permissible provided the change is
noted in the Supplier’s drawings.

Main current carrying parts, insulators, supports and housings shall have
sufficient mechanical strength to withstand, without incurring damage,
the effect of any momentary current resulting from a three-phase,
line-to-line or line-to-ground short circuit. The momentary current
shall be the rms value, including the direct current component, of the
maximum cycle that corresponds to the rms symmetrical and rms
asymmetrical currents specified in Paragraph 4.05.B.

Each load center shall be designed successfully to withstand without
damage, the maximum expected transient power frequency and transient
voltage (1.1 pu within 60 sec and 1.4 pu within 2 sec, respectively)
during house load or islanded operation which will be initiated by the
power grid faults or disturbances.

4 – 18

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06

MATERIALS AND FABRICATION (CONT.)
2.

Structures and Housings
a.

Supporting frames with sheet metal enclosures shall be designed and
fabricated to form rigid self-supporting structures that will withstand,
without damage, the installation and service conditions for which the
equipment is specified.

The metal thickness shall be in accordance with KEPIC EEE 2000-5.1.9,
except that non-magnetic steel (non-ferrous metals) shall be used in
locations where ordinary magnetic steel would be subject to excessive
electromagnetic heating. Compartments for auxiliary equipment shall
be of similar construction.

Each circuit breaker shall be installed in a separate compartment with a
hinged door opening to the front of the housing. The door shall have
concealed hinges and a latch in order to secure it and prevent vibration.
The back of each group of vertical compartments shall have a hinged
door equipped with captive knurled-head bolts, which are large enough
to be loosened by hand without the use of tools. All doors shall have
provisions for padlocking.

The Supplier shall make provision in the load centers assemblies to
prohibit the insertion of a circuit breaker into a cubicle with a rating that
is different than that of the circuit breaker which was originally sized for
the cubicle.

Ventilating openings with filter shall be provided. All openings on
load center shall be protected with drip proof louvers. Theses louvers
shall be designed to prevent the entrance of a 3/16 inch diameter rod.

The end of each load centers assembly shall be so designed that future
units can be added. Any unused openings shall be covered by
removable plates. The removable plate shall have enough strength
against deflection. Also, insulation means shall be provided between
bus bar and removable plate where their distance is close enough. The
location of structural steel members shall not prevent the extension of
bus to additional units.

Suitable attachments shall be provided on the top of the shipping
assemblies for lifting or moving the equipment to the final location.
Provisions shall not necessitate disassembly of the equipment.

4 – 19

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06

MATERIALS AND FABRICATION (CONT.)
h.

The circuit breaker compartments shall be designed such that the front
door can be closed and padlocked while the breaker is in the test and
disconnected positions.

Structures shall be designed for removal of the circuit breakers from the
front of the housing. A lifting hoist for circuit breaker removal shall
be provided on each load center.

Compartments indicated as "Spare" on the single line diagrams are for
future units and shall be completely equipped as shown on single line
diagrams.

Breaker compartments to be furnished as "Space" shall be provided with
a door, and suitable for use with the breaker rating specified, Cutouts in
the door shall be covered with removable blank steel covers.

The load center transformer high voltage terminal compartment shall
consist of a full height floor-mounted air-filled, metal-enclosed
compartment directly bolted to the high voltage side of the transformer.
The metal-enclosed compartment shall be provided with removable
bolted end panels for accessibility to high voltage terminal connections.

m. Channel bases for each load centers assembly shall be furnished in
accordance with the Attachment 4-3.
n. The header boxes located the top of load centers shall be provided to
allow cable routing inside of load centers. The weight of cables will
be provided by the Buyer and shall be considered for seismic
qualification. The head boxes can be removable for proper cable
routing. Bottom plates shall be provided for bottom entering cable.
o.

The filters for transformer panel shall be replaceable from the external
surface of panel.

Buses and Insulators
a.

The size, material, and arrangement of the bus bars, connections,
conductor insulators and supports, will be reviewed by the Buyer before
fabrication.

The main bus in each Load Centers assembly shall have the continuous
current rating shown on the corresponding single line diagram.

4 – 20

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06

MATERIALS AND FABRICATION (CONT.)
c.

The buses and bus connections shall have momentary current ratings
corresponding to the momentary or short circuit rating of the connected
circuit breakers. The breaker connections shall have continuous
current ratings not less than the continuous current rating of the
respective circuit breakers.

Main buses and conductors shall be copper or aluminum, and when
installed shall be capable of carrying the maximum load continuously
with a temperature rise not exceeding the limits given in KEPIC EEE
2000, table 7, Conductors feeding two or more breakers (including
futures) shall be rated at least 1600 amperes.

All copper connections, including provisions for Buyer's power
connections, shall be silver plated. If aluminum is used, the aluminum
shall be tin plated at points of connection.

The bus shall be protected against damage from expansion and
contraction due to load and temperature changes when the housings are
assembled in groups.

Insulators and supports shall be braced to prevent displacement due to
stresses incident to short circuits.

Rear insulating barriers shall be furnished and installed to provide
complete isolation of incoming cables from the vertical bus, such that
load side connections can be made without danger of contacting any
energized bus.
The phase sequence of the assembled 3-phase busses and primary
conductor shall be A, B, C, counting from front to back, top to bottom,
or left to right, as viewed from the circuit breaker operating mechanism
side in accordance with KEPIC EEE 2000.

i. j.

Connections for cables to outgoing services shall be extended to the rear
for accessibility. The studs on the load side of all circuit breakers shall
be drilled or provided with copper details so that all incoming cable lugs
can be connected to the studs with the lugs vertical and perpendicular to
the stud. Supplier shall make provision for satisfactory termination of
Buyer's oversized cables (sizes of Buyer’s power cables will be shown
on the single line diagrams). NEMA standard drilling shall be
provided for all of Buyer's incoming cable connections.

4 – 21

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06

MATERIALS AND FABRICATION (CONT.)

4. k.

A ground bus shall be installed in each structure and bolted to each
section of it, and shall be extended to transformer section. The ground
bus shall be capable of carrying current of a magnitude and duration
corresponding to the short-time rating of the largest circuit breaker in
the Load Centers. The ground bus dimensions shall in no case be less
than 0.25 by 2.0 inch copper.
Grounding devices shall be provided which effectively ground the
frames of all circuit breakers and other removable devices in both the
operating and test positions.

The Supplier shall drill two 9/16 inch holes on 1-3/4 inch centers at
each end of the ground bus in the Load Center for connection to the
station grounding grid, and shall supply two-hole compression type
terminals suitable for Buyer's 200 mm2 ground cable.

Circuit Breakers
a.

Circuit breakers shall be three-pole, single throw, drawout type, stored
energy operating mechanism type, supported on a frame, and designed
to be rigidly connected to the housing in the operating position.

Circuit breakers shall be rated for the interrupting duty specified in
paragraph 4.05.B.

Circuit breakers shall be provided with current ratings as shown in the
single line diagrams. Static overcurrent trip devices, one for each pole
shall be provided for each breaker except where shown otherwise on the
single line diagrams.

The air circuit breakers shall conform to KEPIC EED 1200, Low
Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers.

The circuit breaker operating mechanisms operated from a 125 V-dc
source shall successfully operate with a control power voltage range
shown in paragraph 4.05.B, as measured at the terminals of the
mechanisms in accordance with KEPIC EED 1200. The spring
charging motor for the breaker shall be energized after the closing
operation is performed.

Circuit breaker mechanisms shall absorb any shock incident to the
operation of the breaker with a minimum of vibration and noise.

4 – 22

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06

MATERIALS AND FABRICATION (CONT.)
g.

Provision shall be made for manual operation of circuit breakers from
the front of the housing. An operating lever shall be provided for
manual closing of the breakers during maintenance. A positive
mechanical "CLOSE-OPEN" indicator shall be provided on each
breaker.

A minimum of 8 electrically separate mechanically operated auxiliary
contacts (4 N.O. - 4 N.C. each) shall be furnished for each breaker.
They shall be reversible as either normally open or normally closed
contacts and shall be operated by the breaker in both operating and test
positions.
The contacts shall be rated for 125 Volts dc, 5 Ampere interrupting
rating and have silver contact surfaces.

A minimum of 2 auxiliary contacts shall be provided to automatically
bypass certain "b" auxiliary contacts as the breaker is withdrawn from
the operating position. If "b" auxiliary contacts are mounted on the
housing and their operation is not affected by the breaker in the
withdrawn position, the bypass contacts may be omitted.

A total of 8 electrically separate breaker operated cell switches (5 N.O. 3 N. C.) each rated 125 V-dc, minimum 5.0 amperes interrupting rating
shall be furnished for each breaker. The switches shall operate when
the breaker is moved between the operating and the test position.

All breakers shall be equipped so that the stored energy mechanism
discharges when the breaker is withdrawn from the cubicle. An
indicator showing when the stored energy mechanism is charged shall
be provided.

Breakers of the same type and ratings shall be completely
interchangeable. Each breaker shall be individually identified for
traceability by its compartment number as shown on the drawings listed
in Attachment 4-6 of this specification.

m. The fixed and movable contacts of the primary disconnecting devices
shall be silver plated, sturdily constructed and arranged so as to
maintain accurate alignment. The primary disconnecting devices and
their supports shall not distort or fail under the mechanical stresses and
heating due to the duties specified herein. The contact of the
secondary fixed and movable disconnecting devices shall be also silver
plated, sturdily constructed and arranged so as to maintain accurate
alignment.
4 – 23

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06

MATERIALS AND FABRICATION (CONT.)
n.

Control relays shall be so connected as to make mechanism
anti-pumping. The relays shall have coils suitable for continuous
operation.

Circuit breakers, under any conditions, shall be mechanically and
electrically trip free (the breaker will trip and remain open if both "trip"
and "close" commands are present).

Anti-pumping or tripping arrangements on "stored energy" breakers
shall not prevent the immediate restoration of the "stored energy" after a
closing operation. In the event that an automatic control calls for
"close" at the time when a "trip" is being manually initiated, the breaker
shall immediately reclose upon the release of the trip circuit.

The circuit breaker shall be designed such that moving it between
operating, test or withdrawn position is possible only by use of a
racking mechanism. The circuit breaker shall be provided with a
mechanical interlock to prevent the breaker from being inserted into or
withdrawn from the operating position when the circuit breaker is
closed. A positive stop to prevent overtravel for connected, test and
withdrawn positions shall be provided for each breaker. The primary
contacts shall be disconnected in the test position, but secondary
contacts shall be maintained in this position for breaker and control
circuit testing operation. All connections shall be disconnected in the
withdrawn position. It shall be possible to close the compartment door
after padlocking the breaker in the withdrawn position. A mechanical
indicator shall be provided to show which of the three positions the
breaker is in.

Breaker direct acting overcurrent trip elements shall be adjustable with
long time, short time and/or instantaneous trip characteristics. The
pick-up and time delay settings shall be such as to ensure maximum
system selectivity and reliability.

Each circuit breaker shall be furnished with a trip alarm switch which
operates when the breaker is tripped by other than manual means.

All load center main supply breakers and MCC supply feeder breakers
shall be furnished with long time and short time overcurrent trip
elements. Tie breaker installed in double ended load centers shall be
furnished with long time, and short time trip elements. The remaining
breakers shall be furnished with long time, short time and instantaneous
overcurrent trip elements.
4 – 24

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06

MATERIALS AND FABRICATION (CONT.)
u.
5.

Each circuit breaker shall be furnished with a operation counter.

Cast Resin Encapsulated Windings Dry Type Transformers
a.

Transformers shall be cast resin encapsulated windings dry type, class
AA/FA, 3 phase, 60 Hertz, two-winding, with Class B 60 C average
winding temperature rise, designed and manufactured in accordance
with KEPIC EEC 3100 and NEMA Standard ST-20. The hottest spot
winding temperature rise of the transformer shall be limited less than
90 C.

The transformers shall be capable of withstanding without injury the
mechanical and thermal stresses caused by a short circuit across the
secondary terminals, with rated primary voltage sustained, of duration
and magnitude in accordance with KEPIC EEC 3100.

The transformers shall be completely enclosed and provided with
suitable louvers to protect if from falling dirt and drip. The core
laminations shall be protected against corrosion by corrosion – resistant
materials.

The transformer shall be equipped with a terminal board or convenient
terminals for changing tap connections when the transformer is not
excited.

The transformer base construction shall be of the fabricated type
suitable for fixing in base channel with bolt and nut. Lifting eyes and
provision for jacking the transformer shall be provided.

Average sound level shall not exceed the values specified in NEMA
Standard ST-20. Pads for isolation of coil and core vibration shall be
provided.

All NEMA standard accessories shall be provided, including a stainless
steel nameplate.

The class AA/FA load center transformers shall be provides with forced
cooling fans. The fans shall provide a 33.3 percent increase above the
self-cooled KVA rating, complete with winding temperature sensing
device and control equipment. Power supply for fans shall be provided
by the Supplier for each fan motor. The winding temperature equipment
shall include a LED type temperature controller. Three sets of contacts
preset to close at different winding temperatures to operate fans and
alarms shall be included for each transformer.
4 – 25

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06

MATERIALS AND FABRICATION (CONT.)
A minimum of 4(2N.O-2N.C) contacts rated 5A, 125 V-dc shall be
provided to close to alarm on high winding temperature.
i.

Each load center transformers without fans shall be provided with
winding temperature equipment. The equipment shall include a dial
type indicator with a red pointer to indicate maximum winding
temperature registered and a white pointer to indicate the immediate
winding temperature. Alarm shall be initiated by preset temperature
contact. A minimum of 4(2N.O - 2N.C) contacts rated 5A, 125 V-dc
shall be provided to close to alarm on high winding temperature.
Provisions shall be made for mounting fans in the future.

The low voltage connections between the Load Centers and transformer
shall be a direct connection. Provision shall be made for detaching the
connections from the Load Centers and moving the transformer in a
direction perpendicular to the bus connections. It is intended that the
transformer be removable without disturbing the Load Centers or the
high voltage cable connections.

Two ground pads each having 2 NEMA drilled holes shall be provided,
one on diagonally opposite corners of each transformer, and each pad
shall be connected to the ground bus through 200mm2 ground jumper
cable.

The low voltage neutral point of the wye connected transformers shall
be connected to the Load Centers ground bus through a removable link.

m. Bus connections between transformer and Load Centers shall be
arranged such that phasing agrees with KEPIC EEE 2000.

6. n.

Transformers of the same type and rating and purchased on the same
order or contract shall have like parts that are interchangeable both
electrically and mechanically with one another. Like parts when
interchanged, shall perform their function equally well in every respect.

The transformers shall be located in accordance with Table 4.B2.2.

Relays, Meters, Switches, and Instruments
a.

Protective relays and instruments to be furnished shall be installed on
the front of the cubicles. The relays shall be of semiflush, drawout
design with integral testing devices and shall be equipped with targets
that can be externally reset. The relay types are described in Table
4.B2.1.
4 – 26

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06

MATERIALS AND FABRICATION (CONT.)
b.

Auxiliary relays shall be provided with dust covers and shall be
mounted on a fixed panel inside of the Load Centers witchgear cubicle.
Space shall be provided to accommodate the relays specified on the
single line diagrams and/or schematic diagrams.

Indicating instruments shall be semiflush mounted, with black markings
on a white face and of the switchboard type with 250 degree scales.
Voltmeters and ammeters shall be furnished with expanded scales.
Accuracy of all instruments shall be within 1 percent of full scale. The
ammeter scales shall match the CT ratios.

The transducers shall be provided as shown on the single line diagrams
and/or schematic diagrams and shall be rated for 4 to 20 mA output
signal. Accuracy shall be 0.25 percent of rated output.

All DC components including relays shall be 600V insulation class
suitable for operation on 125 V-dc. The dielectric strength of DC
relays shall be 1500 Vrms per KEPIC EEF 1000.

Control switches for meters and instruments shall be maintained contact
and shall have round knurled handles. These switches shall be located
on the same cubicle door as their associated meters or instruments.

Equipment on each panel shall be arranged with a maximum amount of
space allowed for future additions.

Red-green indicating lights shall be provided for each circuit breaker to
indicate when the breaker is in the closed or open position respectively.
Lamps and lenses shall be replaceable from the front of the panel. The
indicating light shall be LED type. Indicating lamps shall be complete
with resistors for operation at 125 V-dc if required. All special tools
required for lamp replacement shall be furnished by the Supplier.

Lock out relays for breaker shall be provided in accordance with Table
4.B2.1 and related schematic diagrams.

Running time meters shall be provided for all motor feeders in
accordance with the single line diagrams.

Control relays, auxiliary contacts and small mechanisms shall be
enclosed and protected, but shall be accessible for maintenance. Fuses
shall be located in areas where it will not be hazardous to replace them.

4 – 27

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06

MATERIALS AND FABRICATION (CONT.)
7.

Instrument Transformers
a.

Instrument transformers shall be insulated for a test voltage
corresponding to the insulation level of the Load Centers.

Current transformers shall have 5 ampere secondary windings.

Current transformers shall have minimum mechanical and thermal
limits as defined by Standards referenced in KEPIC EEE 2000 or as
specified. Unless specifically limited to a shorter time by the
associated protective equipment being furnished by the Supplier, the
duration of the short-circuit shall be considered to be one second. If
the supplier used a value less than one second to rate the current
transformers being supplied, this shall be stated in Supplier's proposal.

Current transformers shall have accuracy in accordance with KEPIC
EEE 2000 and EMB 5100.

Inner diameter of the current transformer for feeder ground protection
shall be large enough to accommodate the load feeder cables.

Potential transformers shall have ANSI 0.3W, X, Y and 1.2Z accuracy.
The voltage ratings are shown on the design drawings.

All instrument transformers shall be grounded directly to the ground bus,
not to the housing.

Potential transformers shall be mounted so that the high voltage side of
them can be connected and/or disconnected easily; bolted connections
are not acceptable.

Potential transformer high voltage windings shall be protected by
current limiting fuses. Potential transformers and current limiting fuses
shall be completely disconnected and visibly grounded when in position
for inspection. Fuses sized to prevent harmful overload to the PT’s shall
be installed in all ungrounded phase of the low voltage circuit and shall
be located to permit replacement while the switchgear is energized.
Fuse holders shall be permanently labeled as to size and type fuse
required.

4 – 28

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06

MATERIALS AND FABRICATION (CONT.)
8.

Wiring
a.

Wiring shall be performed in accordance with Appendix 4P(except
Paragraph 1.3, of Attachment A) and the following:

Cables and wiring required for the equipment shall be furnished and
installed at the factory. Cables and wiring shall be enclosed in rigid
metal ducts or flexible metal covering, where practicable.

All wiring shall be capable of passing the tests indicated in NEMA WC
57, and NEMA WC 70 as well as the flame test of KEPIC END 3810
(IEEE Std 383-2003).

Wiring terminations shall be on terminal blocks indicated in Appendix
4P or approved equivalent. A minimum of 20 percent spare terminal
points shall be provided.

Shorting type terminal blocks shall be used for CT secondary leads to
prevent an open circuit if the switchgear energized. These terminal
blocks shall be indicated on the switchgear wiring diagrams.

The assembled control equipment and wiring connections shall be
insulated for a working voltage of 600 volts, and shall be subjected to a
one minute test of 1500 volts AC; phase to ground, at the factory after
fabrication in accordance with KEPIC EEE 2000.

Terminal blocks shall be furnished and installed at all shipping splits for
all wire and cable. Jumpers shall be supplied for convenient
connection in the field.

Lighting, receptacle, and cooling fan circuits in the cabinets shall be
routed in metallic conduits.

The Supplier shall show Buyer’s wire numbers on schematic and wiring
diagram drawings.

All internal wiring shall be routed from point to point without splices.
Wires shall be routed in wire ways. Insulating material, in the form of
flame-retardant grommets or molding, shall be provided on all edges of
openings where wires pass through metal panels or pass between
cubicles.

4 – 29

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

4.06

MATERIALS AND FABRICATION (CONT.)
k.

Wiring and components shall be arranged so that instruments or devices
may be removed and/or serviced without disturbing the wiring. No
control wire shall be routed across the face or rear of an instrument,
junction box, or other device in a manner which will prevent the
opening of covers or obstruct access to leads, terminals, devices, or
instruments.

All terminal blocks for interface connections between Buyer's external
wiring and Supplier's equipment wiring shall be enclosed, located in
areas of adequate space and clearances, and readily accessible for top or
bottom entry indicated in Table 4.B2.2. These areas shall allow
convenient placement and termination of the Buyer's cables in neat and
orderly arrays. Future cable removal or addition shall not require
temporary removal or disconnection of adjacent unrelated cables. The
location, size and arrangement of terminal blocks for all external wiring
shall be subject to acceptance by the Buyer.
Terminal blocks shall be suitable to the size of external wiring which
will be decided by the Buyer. Therefore, terminal blocks rating and
dimension shall be provided to the Buyer for approval.

m. Wiring between auxiliary switches and terminal blocks shall be
completed for all switch points, whether used or not.

9. n.

Connection to the terminal blocks shall be provided for remote
indication.

Connections to the terminal blocks shall be provided for parallel remote
close/trip control switches.

One side of each terminal block shall be designated for Buyer's external
connections.

125V DC Control Source
a.

A continuous DC wire control bus, insulated for 600V and not smaller
than 6 AWG, shall be furnished and shall extend the entire length of the
switchgear assembly with terminals provided at each end for connection
to the supply source. The control bus shall be tapped at each breaker
cubicle with the tap extended to double pole disconnect switches with
fuses of 25kA interrupting capacity for the control circuit including the
breaker closing circuit. The bus shall have a separate tap at each
breaker cubicle with a separate double pole disconnect switch with fuses
provided for the breaker trip circuit only.
4 – 30

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

4.06

MATERIALS AND FABRICATION (CONT.)
b.

Fuses shall also be provided for remote control circuits, and circuits
utilizing solid state circuitry. All required fuses shall be furnished.

Fuse holders shall be permanently labeled as to size and type of fuse
installed. Fuse size shall be noted on all electrical schematic diagrams
and wiring diagrams.

10. Space Heaters
a.

Thermostatically controlled space heaters shall be provided in each
assembly so that the temperature inside the cubicles shall be maintained
above the dew point temperature. A molded case circuit breaker shall
be provided for connection of the heaters to a 120V, single-phase, AC
power source. The heaters shall be rated for 240V single-phase;
however, the wattage rating shall be such that sufficient heat is
produced when operating at 120V. The Supplier shall indicate
whether heaters are to be energized for normal operation or only
required during the storage and construction phase.

11. Cables and Terminals
a.

All 480V load centers shall have provisions for top or bottom entrance
of power and control cable, and adequate space for termination of the
Buyer's cable. The Supplier shall furnish cable supports of a
flame-retardant material suitable to withstand the maximum short circuit
stresses. The Buyer's power and control cables shall enter from the top
or bottom as indicated in Table 4.B2.2.

Suitable long barrel compression type terminals, as described in
Appendix 4P shall be provided for all outgoing feeder cables.
Terminals shall be sized to accommodate cables shown on the single
line diagrams holding brackets shall be provided so that cables can be
disconnected from their terminals and securely fastened to the brackets
for inspection and maintenance.

12. Interlock
a.

The interlock system shall be such that a maximum number of three (3)
circuit breakers can be put in service simultaneously; i.e., in no case all
the four (4) circuit breakers can be in service.

The interlock system shall be subject to review and approval by the
Buyer.
4 – 31

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

4.06

MATERIALS AND FABRICATION (CONT.)

13. Receptacle
One 120V AC receptacle shall be provided for each load center's group.
14. Spare Part
Spare parts shall be adapted the most severe condition for the its
qualification.
TABLE 4.B2.1

Load Center Protective Relay Descriptions

Device
No.

Description 51G

Solid State, very inverse time overcurrent relay of 1.5A-6A tap
range. ABB 51Y (443S2241) or equivalent.

51GN

Solid State, inverse time overcurrent relay of 1.5A-6A tap range.
ABB 51I (443S1241) or equivalent.

50GS

Solid State, Instantaneous ground overcurrent relay and current
transformer with 5-50A primary current range and 125V DC
control power. ABB-ITE GR-5, 202D614IUL or equivalent.

High dropout and pick up, hinged armature telephone type under
voltage relay of 120V 60Hz input and 60-110V setting range. ABB
27 (411R1175) or equivalent.

Thermal protective relay for transformer protection.
Relay type and model are dependant on manufacturer’s standard.

Electrical operated hand reset type lock out relay with 4N.O and
4N.C contacts. Electro Switch LOR-1, 7803D or equivalent.

Solid State, extremely inverse long time overcurrent relay of
4-12A tap range. ABB 51L (443T5340) or equivalent.

4 – 32

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. : 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06

MATERIALS AND FABRICATION (CONT.)
TABLE 4.B2.2

Equipment No.

480V Load Center Cable Entrance and Transformer Location

Transformer
Location

0-824-E-LC03 Left

Cable Entrance
Incoming

Feeder Control Top & Bottom Top Top

B2. 480V Motor Control Centers
1.

General
a.

Each motor control center shall be designed successfully to withstand
without damage, the maximum expected transient power frequency and
transient voltage (1.1 pu within 60 sec and 1.4 pu within 2 sec,
respectively) during house load or islanded operation which will be
initiated by the power grid faults or disturbances.

Structures
a.

NEMA enclosures Type 1, with gasketed doors and cover plates, shall
be provided for each motor control center.

The motor control centers shall consist of vertical sections, jointed
together to form a rigid, free-standing, self supporting and completely
enclosed control assembly structures that will withstand without damage
the transportation, installation and service conditions for which the
equipment is specified.

No more than six (6) NEMA Size 2 starters shall be mounted in a
vertical section.

Motor control center shall be back-to-back type unless otherwise
specifically stated on the single line diagrams.

4 – 33

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06

MATERIALS AND FABRICATION (CONT.)
e.

The vertical sections shall be provided with top and bottom horizontal
wiring troughs. The troughs shall be readily accessible by removal of
cover plates and shall form a convenient wiring space the entire length
of the control center. In addition, each vertical section shall have full
height vertical wiring troughs except at incoming feeder line
compartments, auxiliary power transformer and distribution panel
compartments where the full height of vertical is required. Horizontal
and vertical troughs shall have enough space for power and control
cable running and shall be isolated from live buses by means of solid
barriers.

All motor control centers shall be adequately ventilated.

Motor control centers shall be designed so that future units can be added
to either end without the use of transition boxes and without difficulty
or undue expense. Any unused openings shall be covered by removable
plates. The design shall be such that individual motor starter or circuit
breaker unit may be removed easily without possibility of shorting the
buses.

Removable lifting eyes or angles shall be provided for lifting or moving
the equipment to the final location.

Channel bases for each motor control center shall be furnished in
accordance with Attachment 4-3, Channel Base for Rollout Load
Centers.

Motor control centers shall have provisions for top and/or bottom
entrance of power and control cable, and adequate space for termination
of the Buyer's cable.
The Supplier shall furnish cable supports of a
flame-retardant material suitable to withstand the maximum short circuit
stresses.
Each motor control center shall be provided with header box for top
entry of power and control cables to the MCC. The header box shall
extend the full length of the motor control center assembly and shall
have suitable construction for power and control cable run between
cable tray and each compartment. The upper plate for header box shall
be the flat type of no welding part. If any connection parts exist at the
upper plate for header box, connection parts shall be adequately sealed.
Provisions for cable entry to the header box shall be provided at the
front and/or rear side. Cable entry to the top of header box shall be
provided where required upon owner's request. Cable protection shall
be suitably provided at the header box cable entry area.
4 – 34

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06

MATERIALS AND FABRICATION (CONT.)
3.

Draw Out Units
a.

The draw-out units shall be of the plug-in type and shall be connected to
the vertical bus by means of pressure type disconnecting stabs.
Disconnecting stabs shall be silver or tin plated and of high strength
copper alloy equipped with spring steel clips to provide high pressure
connection points and current rating.
Bus stab openings shall be of close tolerance and of sufficient depth to
provide positive guidance of the unit stabs. Construction shall be such
as to positively prevent insertion of mis-aligned or mangled contacts.

Guide rails shall be provided in the structure for positive support and
alignment when removing and replacing the units. The latching
mechanism shall also be used to latch the unit in the fully engaged
energized position.

Each unit shall be readily removable, with access from the unit front to
all components and wiring. All auxiliary equipment, except that which
is specified for mounting on the door, shall be mounted on the draw-out
unit. The draw-out units shall be equipped with miscellaneous
components such as indicating lights, ground sensors, control
transformers and other devices as indicated on the single line and
schematic diagrams.

Units of the same size type, classification and side shall be readily
interchangeable where control and power circuitry permit.

Units shall be individually identified for traceability by means of a
permanent identification number. Units identification shall correspond
to that shown on the Supplier's wiring diagrams.

Each unit compartment shall be enclosed and isolated from adjacent
units, buses and wireways and shall be so designed and constructed that
any fault will be localized within the compartment.
In addition,
each compartment shall be so ventilated that a unit can be located
anywhere within the structure to replace a unit of similar size.

Each compartment shall be enclosed by a flange-formed door with a
continuous full length hinge, or concealed type hinges accepted by the
Buyer.

4 – 35

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06

MATERIALS AND FABRICATION (CONT.)
h.

The door shall be a part of the structure so that it may be closed to cover
the open buses in the event the plug-in unit is temporarily removed.
The compartment door shall be interlocked so that the circuit breaker
must be open before the door can be opened.
A hidden release
mechanism shall be provided to defeat this interlock to allow opening
the door for intentional access to an energized unit. An operating
handle, on the door, or accessible through an opening in the door, shall
indicate the circuit breaker position, clearly marked "ON," "OFF," or
"TRIPPED," and provision shall be made for pad locking in the "OFF"
position with the door closed. A button marked "RESET" shall be
furnished in the compartment door of each starter, and installed to allow
manual reset of thermal overload relays or solid state overload
relays(SSOR) without opening the door.
The Supplier shall provide the door key of 15ea. for normally use and
the special key of 3ea. per each MCC.

Buses
a.

Power shall be distributed by a main horizontal bus provided across the
motor control center with vertical buses extending into each section to
supply power to the individual motor control center units.

The horizontal and vertical buses shall be isolated by barriers that
prevent personnel contact with energized buses while the motor control
center units are being serviced.

The main horizontal and vertical buses shall be copper. Vertical buses
shall be silver or tin plated throughout their entire length.

All bus connections, including bus joints and taps, shall be plated.
Pressure type bolted connections with cadmium plated, galvanized steel,
or zinc plated steel bolts shall be used. All connections should
withstand torques required to tighten relevant bolting unless posted.

Bus supports shall be formed of heavy-duty, high-dielectric strength of
a non-hygroscopic molded compound, or porcelain of adequate strength
and long creepage distance.

Materials used for bus insulation and supports, and personnel safety
barriers shall have flame retardant ratings equal to or better than a 94
V-O classification as covered in UL Standard No. 94, Test for
Flammability of Plastic Materials.

4 – 36

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06

MATERIALS AND FABRICATION (CONT.)

5. g.

A continuous copper grounded bus of minimum capacity equivalent to
6t × 50mm copper bar shall be supplied extending the full length of
each motor control center except TR section, with a solid tie to the
structure of each vertical section.
The Supplier shall supply a 2-hole
compression type long barrel lug on the ground bus at each end of the
motor control center for bottom connection to the Buyer's 200mm2
copper ground cable with the connection areas being silver plated.

The phase arrangement on the motor control center buses and primary
connections shall be A, B, C from left to right, and from top to bottom,
as viewed from the front, with the load terminals T1, T2, T3 connected
in the same sequential order. The rear compartments, where the load
terminals are reversed with respect to the phase sequence A, B, C must
have a permanent caution sticker indicating the reverse phase sequence.
In making the external power connections, the generating plant's phases
A, B, C will be connected to the motor control centers in the same
sequential order.

Drilled plated area shall be made for Buyer's 2-hole, NEMA drilled
lug(s) per phase for connecting main supply cables to the bus at a point
at least 24" below the top or above the bottom of the housing. Cable
entrance locations are shown on Table 4.B3.1. The Supplier shall
supply 2-hole compression type long barrel lugs. The cable size will be
furnished after award of contract.

Molded Case Circuit Breakers
a.

All circuit breakers shall be 600Volt, 60Hz, 3pole, interrupting rating
with auxiliary contact and bell alarm contact. For the interrupting rating,
refer to attached reference drawing (Attachment 4-6). The breakers shall
be built and tested in accordance with UL 489.

The circuit breaker used in feeder with separate ground fault protection
shall be provided with shunt trip unit.

Short circuit protection of combination motor starters shall be provided
by molded-case, manually operated, trip-free magnetic-only breakers
equipped with front adjustable magnetic trip.

Protection of feeder taps and magnetic contactors for non-motor loads
shall be provided by molded case, manually operated, trip-free
thermal-magnetic breakers with inverse-time thermal overload and
instantaneous magnetic-trip for short circuit protection on each pole.
4 – 37

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06

MATERIALS AND FABRICATION (CONT.)
6.

Combination Starters
The combination starter is combined as followings for motor start.
a.

Magnetic only type circuit breaker
a1. A three-pole magnetic only type molded case circuit breaker shall
be equipped with adjustable magnetic only overcurrent protection
as specified in Paragraph 4.06.B.B2.5.

Magnetic starter
b1. Starters shall be of the magnetic type, NEMA ICS Class A, suitable
for direct on-line starting of 3 phase, 460 volt induction motors.
Starters shall be sized as indicated on the single line diagrams and
in accordance with the above NEMA standard.
b2. Reversing starters shall be supplied as indicated on the single line
and schematic diagrams. The two contactors of each reversing
starter shall be mechanically interlocked to prevent their closing
simultaneously and electrically interlocked to prevent their coils
being energized simultaneously.
b3. No starter size smaller than a NEMA size 1 shall be furnished.

Overload relays
c1. The solid state type overload relays shall be provided for motor
loads.
c2. These overload relays shall be manually resetable with the
compartment door closed, and complied with the requirement
specified in Paragraph 4.06.B.B2.9.f.
c3. Contact arrangements shall be as specified on the schematic
diagrams. In addition, one normally open overload relay contact
shall be provided with each motor starter. When the overload
condition is happened, the opened overload relay contact is closed,
and then the motor starter is opened. And, the overload relay
contact shall be maintained the close position before the overload
relay is manually reset or during the motor starter is open position
on overload.

4 – 38

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06

MATERIALS AND FABRICATION (CONT.)
c4. Specific overload heater sizes and heater resistance data will be
furnished to the Supplier by the Buyer after award of Contract.
7.

Combination Contactors
The combination contactor is combined as followings needed for some
specific non-motor loads or feeders operating.

8. a.

Each feeder unit for the specific non-motor loads shall consist of a
magnetic contactor, thermal magnetic type molded case circuit breaker
and auxiliary control devices, as shown on the schematic diagrams.

The magnetic contactors shall be rated as indicated in KEPIC EMC
2100 for the specific non-motor loads.

The thermal magnetic type molded case circuit breakers shall be as
specified in Paragraphs 4.06.B.B2.5.

Control Devices and Instruments
a.

Auxiliary control transformer
a1. An individual 480-120 volt control transformer connected on the
load side of the circuit breaker shall be provided for each starter.
a2. The secondary of the control transformer shall have one side
grounded and the other side fused. In addition to sufficient capacity
to operate the starter and the auxiliary relay if any, each control
transformer shall have excess capacity of at least 50 volt amperes
for external circuit burden.
a3. The control transformer sizes shall be nominal 150VA for NEMA
Size 1 and 2 contactors and 250VA for NEMA Size 3 and 4
contactors.
a4. Control transformers shall be arranged so that they can be replaced
without disassembling the units on which they are mounted.

Auxiliary relays
b1. Auxiliary relays shown on the schematic diagrams are required to
provide additional auxiliary contacts for miscellaneous controls and
interlocking with other apparatus.

4 – 39

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06

MATERIALS AND FABRICATION (CONT.)
b2. These relays shall be of the front connected, machine tool type for
installation in the individual MCC combination starter
compartments or auxiliary relay compartments as shown on the
drawings.
b3. The auxiliary relays shall be suitable for 120 volt, 60-Hertz ac
operation. Contact rating shall be 10 amperes, 240 volts ac
minimum.
b4. All auxiliary relay contacts shall be the field convertible type. If not
field convertible type, additional auxiliary relays shall be supplied
to provide sufficient contacts as shown on the schematic diagrams
without enlarging the unit compartments.
b5. Auxiliary relay contacts shall be internally wired in parallel with
other contacts in the same motor control center as shown on the
schematic diagrams.
c.

Time delay relays
c1. Time delay relays shall be of the pneumatic dash pot type as
manufactured by Agastat, Series 7000 or acceptable equal.
c2. The relays shall have a dial head adjustment with characteristics
and contact arrangement as specified in the schematic diagrams.

Latching/Alternating relays
d1. The latching/alternating relays shown on schematic diagrams shall
be front connected machine tool type and shall be mounted in the
individual MCC combination starter compartments.
d2. The latching/alternating relays shall be a mechanically held type
suitable for continuous operation at 120 volts 60 Hz. One of the
two relay coils shall have the capability to act as a master for
preventing contact oscillation when a simultaneous energization of
both coils occur.
d3. Contact ratings shall be 10 amps, 240 volts ac minimum. All such
latching relays to be supplied must be approved by the Buyer.

e. Indicating lights 4 – 40

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06

MATERIALS AND FABRICATION (CONT.)
e1. Red-green indicating lights shall be provided for each feeder unit as
shown on schematic diagrams.
e2. White and yellow indicating light shall also be provided for each
motor starter unit to indicate overload relay operation.
e3. The indicating light shall be of LED type.
e4. Indicating lights can be half-illumination due to leakage current or
induced voltage (from around AC line), in OFF state. In this case,
indicating lights shall have provision to prevent the
half-illumination

9. f.

Voltmeters shall be provided in accordance with the attached single line
diagrams.

Indicating instruments shall be semi-flush mounted, with black
markings on a white face and of the switchboard type.

Ground Fault Protection Devices
a.

Separated ground fault protection shall be provided where shown in the
single line diagrams.

Sensors for the detection of ground faults shall be of the current
transformer type which encircle all load conductors to the feeder to
detect the resultant current caused by a line-to-ground fault. Sensors
shall be large enough to accommodate the 600 volts cable sizes shown
on the single line diagrams. Sensor inside diameter size shall be at least
2.56 inch or larger for NEMA starter size 3 and 4, and 1.18 inch or
larger for NEMA starter size 1 and 2.

Each sensor shall be connected to a separate ground fault relay which
will initiate tripping of tie breaker immediately associated with the
ground-faulted circuit.

The ground fault relays shall be equipped with a manual reset.
And the indicating lamps shall be provided on the doors of each
compartments to indicate the status of ground fault relays.

The ground fault relays and their associated sensors shall be mounted in
the draw-out unit compartments.

4 – 41

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06

MATERIALS AND FABRICATION (CONT.)
f.

All relays shall not be damaged nor exhibit spurious output when
subjected to a radio frequency susceptibility test, over a frequency range
of 25 ~ 1000 MHz with a field strength measured at a point 5cm in front
of the relay surface, of 35 volts per meter in accordance with IEEE
C37.90.2.

10. Auxiliary Contacts
a.

Each motor starter and each contactor for non-motor load shall have
auxiliary contacts rated at 10A (minimum), 220 volts ac, and electrically
separated.
Auxiliary contacts shall be suitable for continuous operation of
inductive and non-inductive loads and shall be of the field replaceable
type.
b1. Non-reversing motor starters and contactors for non-motor load
shall be provided with three normally open and three normally
closed auxiliary contacts.
b2. Reversing motor starters shall be provided with two normally open
and two normally closed auxiliary contacts for each of the two
contactors.

Where indicated on the Schematic diagrams, one normally closed
auxiliary contact from above shall be wired from the terminal blocks
located in the motor starter compartment to the 120V ac circuit breaker
of distribution panel for motor space heater control.

11. Space Heaters
a.

Thermostatically-controlled space heaters shall be provided in quantity
and capacities necessary to maintain the temperature inside each motor
control center above any anticipated dew point temperature for the
conditions of operation specified herein.

The heaters shall be rated for 240V ac and shall be connected to operate
at 120V ac. Heaters shall be wired to terminal blocks and be readily
accessible for inspection, maintenance, and removal. Fabricated
barriers shall be provided around each heater to prevent contact by
personnel.

4 – 42

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06

MATERIALS AND FABRICATION (CONT.)
12. Potential Transformers
a.

All potential transformer shall be grounded directly to the ground bus.

The transformer shall have ANSI 0.6W, X, Y accuracy.
ratings are shown on the single line diagrams.

Fuses sized to prevent harmful overload to the PT's shall be installed in
all ungrounded phase of the low voltage circuit and shall be located to
permit replacement while the motor control center is energized. Fuse
holders shall be permanently labeled as to size and type fuse required.

The voltage

13. Auxiliary Relay Compartments
Auxiliary relay compartments shall be provided. These compartments shall
contain auxiliary relays, potential transformers, meters, and protective relays
as shown on the schematic drawings and the single line diagrams. The
auxiliary relays shall be mounted on a removable pan type subpanel and be
completely wired to terminal blocks.
14. 120/208V AC Power Supply
a.

Three-phase dry type auxiliary power transformers with a primary-side
thermal-magnetic circuit breaker shall be furnished in motor control
centers where specified in accordance with the single line diagrams.
The transformer neutral shall be grounded to the motor control center
ground bus.

Auxiliary power transformer shall be ANSI Class AA, dry type, Class B
or better insulation with a temperature rise not to exceed 70℃ above a
maximum ambient temperature of 50℃ when operating continuously at
rated capacity. The kVA and kV ratings of the transformer and the
number of taps are specified in paragraph 4.05.B.B2.1.i.

Auxiliary power transformer enclosures shall be ventilated to prevent
transformer heat from causing excessive temperature rise in components
contained in hearby compartments.

4 – 43

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06

MATERIALS AND FABRICATION (CONT.)
d.

Distribution panels for power distribution containing bolt-on type, 1pole
molded case thermal magnetic breakers, shall be provided in the motor
control centers where specified in the single line diagrams. Panels and
breakers shall have 5,000 A (rms sym.) interrupting capability at
120/240V ac.

The distribution panel shall have removable trim, a hinged door with
combination catch and lock with projecting handle. A directory frame
shall be provided for circuit identification.

The distribution panel shall be provided with neutral bus connected to
the neutral of auxiliary power transformer.

15. Spaces
Where indicated on the single line diagrams, "Spaces" shall be provided.
Blank spaces shall be complete with doors, guide rails, and other accessories
such that plug-in units may be installed anytime without any modification to
the structure. The doors shall be without cutouts or openings.
16. Wiring and Terminal Block
a.

The motor control centers shall be wired in compliance with NEMA
ICS 3, Part 1 for Class II, Type B Standard Construction, in which all
each individual unit compartment’s power and control cable leads are
connected to each individual unit compartment terminal blocks as
shown on the Buyer's schematic diagrams. But the control cable leads
for the MCC shall be connected to the master terminal blocks mounted
at the top or bottom of vertical sections with Type C wiring. The
master terminal block numbering shall be assigned each unit
compartment.

Wiring shall be performed in accordance with Appendix 4P (except
Paragraph 1.3 of Attachment A) and following:

All wiring shall be capable of passing the tests indicated in NEMA WC
70 .

Wiring terminations shall be on terminal blocks indicated in Appendix
4P or approved equivalent. A minimum of 20 percent spare terminal
points shall be provided, and those consist of unused points and spare
contacts points.

4 – 44

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06

MATERIALS AND FABRICATION (CONT.)
e.

Terminal blocks shall be furnished and installed at all shipping splits for
all wire and cable.

The Supplier shall show the Buyer's wire numbers on schematic and
wiring diagram drawings.

All internal wiring shall be routed from point to point without splices.
Wires shall be routed in wireways. Insulating material, in the form of
flame-retardant grommets or molding, shall be provided on all edges of
openings where wires pass through metal panels or pass between
cubicles.

Wiring and components shall be arranged so that instruments or devices
may be removed and/or serviced without disturbing the wiring. No
control wire shall be routed across the face or rear of an instrument,
junction box, or other device in a manner which will prevent the
opening of covers to obstruct access to leads, terminals, devices, or
instruments.

Wiring between auxiliary switches and terminal blocks shall be
completed for all switch points, whether used or not.

Terminal blocks and terminals shall meet the requirements of Appendix
4P, and if the Buyer’s cable size is big more than the Supplier’s terminal
size such as circuit breaker, TOR or SSOR, the Supplier shall supply
additional terminal block to meet these Buyer’s cable connection.

There shall be enough space in each bucket for the external and internal
cable connections to meet radius requirement. Each bucket shall have
enough opening for power cable entrance.

The power terminal block shall be apart minimum 2 inches from the
wireway edge and inspected by the Buyer before the manufacture of test
equipment.

17. Receptacle
One 120V ac receptacle shall be provided for each MCC.

4 – 45

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06

MATERIALS AND FABRICATION (CONT.)
Table 4.B3.1 480V Motor Control Center Cable Entrance
Cable Entrance
Equipment No.

C. Incoming Feeder Control 0-826-E-MC07 Later Top Top 0-826-E-MC08 Later Top Top 0-826-E-MC09 Later Bottom Bottom

SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
1. The following materials shall not be used in harsh environments
a. Teflon (PTFE)
b. Organic paints
2. The Supplier shall determine the number of vertical sections required based on an
economical assembly. The single line diagrams showing the arrangements,
breaker trip rating, service, load rating, etc., will be issued after award of contract.

Materials
The use of asbestos in the manufacture of any component purchased under this
specification shall be prohibited.

Welding
The Supplier shall prepare general welding procedure in accordance with the
requirements of KEPIC SWT, structural welding code-sheet steel. Welding
procedure shall contain all related information including welding process, preheat,
postweld heat-treatment, etc.. This procedure shall be submitted to the Buyer for
review in accordance with Appendix 4D.
The Supplier shall provide Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS) and Procedure
Qualification Records (PQR) prepared in accordance with the applicable code.

4 – 46

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.07

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
A. GENERAL
All instrumentation and controls furnished by the Supplier shall comply with the
requirements delineated in Appendix 4S.
B. INSTRUMENT NUMBERS AND DATA
1. The Supplier shall furnish detailed specification, calibration and setpoint data for
all instrument and control devices furnished factory mounted on the equipment
and devices furnished loose for mounting by the Buyer.
2. The data furnished by the Supplier will be included in the Buyer Plant Instrument
Index and Data Book and, therefore, shall be furnished in the format that is
compatible with the book format as follows:
a.

The Supplier shall furnish the instrument specification, calibration, setpoint,
and tagging data on his instrument data sheets.

If the Supplier chooses to also use his instrument number, both his and the
Buyer's numbers shall be used where instrument numbers are shown.

3. The Supplier shall submit, in accordance with Appendix 4D a list of all
instruments shipped loose, instrument location drawing and installation detail
drawings for all instruments shipped loose to avoid damage to instruments or
equipment.

4.08

SURFACE PREPARATION AND COATING
A.

SCOPE
1.

The coating requirements specified herein shall be applied for the exposed
ferrous metal surfaces and components.

The following surfaces shall not be coated unless otherwise indicated.

3. a. Stainless steel b. Galvanized steel c.

Machined or wearing surfaces (a suitable shipping and storage
preservative is required.)
The Supplier shall submit the surface preparation and coating procedure
for review prior to the start of coating work.
4 – 47

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.08

SURFACE PREPARATION AND COATING (CONT.)
B.

REFERENCES
1.

The Supplier shall confirm to the applicable requirements of the following
reference unless otherwise indicated:
a.

SSPC-SP10
/ NACE No.2

Near-White Metal Blast Cleaning

b. SSPC-PA2

Procedure for Determining Conformance to Dry
Coating Thickness Requirement

c. SSPC-VIS 1

Guide and Reference Photographs for Steel
Surfaces Prepared by Dry Abrasive Blast
Cleaning

The prime and finish coating materials shall be one of the following:
Manufacturer

Primer Finish CARBOLINE KOREA LTD. CL 893 RCP CL 801 KCC Corporation EP170 EH 6270 (S) 2.

Finish coat shall be the same manufacturer as the primer.

Color of finish coat both surfaces of interior and exterior shall be as
follows:
ITEMS

COLOR

480V Load Center and Motor
Light Yellowish Grey
Control Center
*

MUNSELL NO. *
5 Y 7/1

Munsell Color, Macbeth, Division of Kollmorgen Corp.,
Baltimore, Maryland 21218, Latest Edition

Manufacturer's standard coating system and practice may be considered in
lieu of the specified requirements with the concurrence of the Buyer. To be
considered, the Supplier shall submit technical data sheets of the proposed
coating system and coating procedures for review prior to the start of
coating work.

4 – 48

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.08

SURFACE PREPARATION AND COATING (CONT.)
D.

SURFACE PREPARATION
1.

Surfaces shall be blasted in accordance with SSPC-SP10/NACE No.2,
using only dry blasting abrasive. The height of the profile of the anchor
pattern shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the coating
system, and as measured with a Keane-Tator profile comparator of
Elcometer roughness gauge adjusted to profile height.

Steel and fabrication defects such as weld spatter, sharp edges of welds,
delaminations, scabs and slivers visible before or revealed by blast
cleaning shall be repaired prior to coating.

Sharp corners and fillets shall be rounded to a minimum radius of 1/8 inch.

Surface preparation operations shall be performed under the following
conditions:
a.

Relative humidity shall not exceed 80 percent

There shall be no moisture on the steel. The surface temperature of
the steel shall be at least 5 ºF above the dew point.

The total elapsed time from blast cleaning to the application of the coating
shall not exceed 4 hours, but in any event before visible rusting occurs.

After blasting and immediately prior to coating, the blasting dust shall be
removed by using a high pressure air blow off and followed by vacuum
cleaning.

APPLICATION OF COATING
1.

Storage, mixing, thinning, application and curing of coating material shall
be in accordance with the coating manufacturer's latest published
instructions.

The coating system to be applied shall be as follows:
Two coats of epoxy shall be applied to a dry film thickness of 3.0 mils to
5.0 mils for primer and finish coat. Total thickness of primer and finish
coats shall be not less than 6.0 mils, nor more than 10.0 mils.

4 – 49

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.08

SURFACE PREPARATION AND COATING (CONT.)
3.

4. F.

Application shall be performed under the following conditions:
a.

Relative humidity shall not exceed 80 percent.

Surface temperature of steel shall be between 50℉and 100℉.

There shall be no moisture on the steel surface.

Metal temperature shall be at least 5℉ above dew point.

The steel surfaces shall be clean and free from contamination.

Edges which will be field welded shall be masked 1 inch from the
edge prior to coating.

Runs, sags, drips or overspray which cause failures by loss of adhesion,
blistering, peeling, mudcracking or rusting of substrate shall not be
permitted. Defective areas shall be reblasted and recoated.

INSPECTION AND TESTING
The Supplier shall perform the following inspection and testing:
1.

Verify compliance with requirements of the coating manufacturer's
specification

Confirm the blast quality by comparing the blasted surface with
SSPC-VIS 1 and the approved steel sample profile with an Elcometer
roughness gauge adjusted to profile height or a Keane-Tator profile
comparator.

Conduct an air blast test the beginning of each shift of blasting.

Inspect blasted surfaces immediately before application of the coating.
Coating application shall proceed only when results of the inspection are
acceptable to the Supplier's inspector.

Check the dry film thickness of coating using SSPC-PA2.

Checking relative humidity and temperature to allow the specified curing
period

4 – 50

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.08

SURFACE PREPARATION AND COATING (CONT.)
G.

MATERIAL FOR TOUCH-UP
The Supplier shall provide to Buyer, with the shipment of the equipment,
components, or materials to the project site, one gallon container(s) minimum of
each coating material to be used for the touch-up work, including required
solvents. Label each container with the color name, batch number, and attach the
coating manufacturer's product Identify certification record and application
instructions.

4.09 4.10

NAME PLATES
A.

Nameplates of laminated phenolic material with engraved letters shall be installed
to designate the main title, equipment number, cubicle number, and the purpose of
all circuits, instruments, meters, relays and fuses.

Nameplates shall be fastened to the equipment with rust-proof screws or other
agreed-upon methods.

The color of nameplates and lettering, the size of letting shall be the requirements
of Appendix 4U and the required wording will be furnished by Buyer after award.

The Supplier shall submit name plate drawings which show the equipment
specification for Buyer's review.

Instrument Tagging shall be performed in accordance with Appendix 4T.

Each transformer shall be provided with nameplates location on both the front and
rear side of the enclosure.

INSPECTION AND TESTING
A.

GENERAL
1.

The Supplier shall conduct and be responsible for the shop inspections and
shop tests called for in the Specification as well as the applicable codes
and standards, and shall furnish all facilities necessary for the performance
of such tests.

The Buyer has the right to inspect and witness the Supplier's manufacturing
and testing operations for the equipment purchased in accordance with
Sections 2 and 3, and Appendix 4B of this Specification.
4 – 51

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.10

INSPECTION AND TESTING (CONT.)

B. 3.

Buyer shall be given the opportunity to witness the final inspection of all
equipment prior to the release for shipment.

The equipment/materials which have been subject to destructive design
test(s) such as seismic qualification test, fire retardant test, etc shall not be
delivered, unless it can be demonstrated by analysis, or other means
acceptable to the Buyer, that the accumulated stress cycles already
experienced by the tested equipment will not degrade, in any way, its
ability to perform its function.

The Supplier shall submit records and reports for all tests and inspections
required by this Specification. These records and reports shall be prepared
promptly after each test or inspection and shall be transmitted to the Buyer
prior to shipment of the equipment to the Project site.

Test reports of design test and production test shall be submitted.

If certification on an existing design test is available, design test will not
be necessary.

INSPECTION AND TESTS
B1. 480V Load Centers
1.

Design Test
The following tests shall be performed in accordance with KEPIC EEE
2000, KEPIC EEC 3100, KEPIC EMB 5100, and KEPIC EEF 1000.
a.

Load Centers
1) Dielectric Test
2) Temperature Rise Test
3) Short-Time Current Withstand Test
4) Short-Circuit Current Withstand Test
5) Mechanical Endurance Test
6) Flame Resistance Test
7) Rod Entry Test
8) Paint Qualification Test

Ventilated Dry Type Power Transformer
1) Resistance Measurement Test( 500kVA)
2) Impedance Voltage and Load Loss Test( 500kVA)
3) Temperature Rise Test
4) Dielectric Tests
4 – 52

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.10

INSPECTION AND TESTING (CONT.)
5) Audible Sound Level Test
6) Short Circuit Capability Test

2. c.

Instrument Transformer
1) Impluse(BIL) Test
2) Wet 60Hz 10s Withstand Test
3) Short-time Mechanical Withstand Test
4) Temperature Rise Test
5) Accuracy Test
6) Switching Impulse Test(current transformer only)

Relay
1)
Dielectric Test
2)
SWC Test

Production and Routine Test
The following tests shall be performed in accordance with KEPIC EEE
2000, KEPIC EEC 3100, and KEPIC EMB 5100.
a.

Load Center Assembly
1)
Dielectric Test
2)
Mechanical Operation Test
3)
Grounding of Instrument Transformer Case Test
4)
Electrical Operation and Control Wiring Tests
a) Control Wiring Continuity
b) Control Wiring Insulation Test
c) Polarity Verification
d) Sequence Tests

Ventilated Dry Type Power Transformer
1)
Resistance Measurements Test( 501kVA)
2)
Ratio Test
3)
Polarity and Phase Relation Test
4)
No-load Losses and Excitation Current Test
5)
Impedance Voltage and Load Loss Test( 501kVA)
6)
Dielectric Tests

Instrument Transformer
1)
Dielectric Test
2)
Induced Voltage Test
3)
Accuracy Test
4)
Polarity Test
4 – 53

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.10

INSPECTION AND TESTING (CONT.)
3.

Physical Inspection
a.

Dimensional inspection b. Visual inspection

Site Performance Test
Site performance tests will be performed by the Buyer upon each circuit
breaker after installation for the purpose of verifying that the overall
performance of the equipment complies with specification requirements.
The Supplier shall furnish field test procedure manual which shall identify
items that need be tested and acceptance criteria for the field test values.

B2. Motor Control Centers
1.

Production Test
The following production tests shall be performed on each motor control
center assembly and local control station assembly as follows ;
a.

Mechanical operation test
Mechanical operation tests shall be performed on motor control center
and local control station to ensure that all mechanical interlocks,
alarms and other mechanical parts function correctly and in accordance
with this specification.

Sequence Test
Sequence tests shall be performed to ensure that all devices in each
particular functional sequence operate properly and in the correct
order.

Control Wiring Continuity Test
Control wiring continuity tests shall consist of verifying that the
control wiring is in accordance with the wiring diagrams and this
Specification.

Control Wiring Insulation Test
The control wiring shall be subjected to and successfully withstand the
tests for control wiring and the Supplier shall be responsible for proper
protection of instruments and devices, that may be damaged by high
voltage tests.

4 – 54

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.10

INSPECTION AND TESTING (CONT.)
e.

Polarity Test
All current and potential transformers shall be tested to ensure that the
connections between them and the meters and relays are connected for
the proper polarity in accordance with the wiring diagrams.

Instrument Transformer Grounding Test
The current and potential transformer cases or frames shall be checked
for effective grounding to the ground bus when installed in the motor
control center assemblies.

Instrument Test
All meters and relays shall be electrically tested to ensure that the
pointers move in the proper direction and that when the relays trip or
are reset, their targets operate properly. All instruments and devices
shall have passed their individual bench test.

Design Test
The following design tests shall have been performed in accordance with
applicable codes and standards on a design identical to that specified in this
Specifications ;
a.

Continuous Current and Temperature Rise Test
The continuous current rating of the motor control center assembly
shall be verified by determining that the temperature of the buses and
other components, with the conductors carrying the continuous rated
full load current, does not exceed the limits specified in this
Specifications. The tests shall be conducted in accordance with
applicable codes and standards and the ambient temperature
determined in accordance with ANSI/IEEE No. 1.

Short-Circuit Current Test
The motor control center assemblies shall be subjected to and
successfully withstand the momentary current. The rms value
including the direct current component as determined by the maximum
cycle, corresponding to the value specified in this Specifications. The
test shall determine the mechanical, electrical and thermal capability of
the bus and devices mounted within the motor control center assembly.
Tests are to be in accordance with NEMA Standard ICS 3, Part 1.

Interrupting Ratings of Circuit Breakers
The circuit breakers shall be subjected to and successfully withstand
and interrupt the short circuit current specified in Specifications. Tests
shall be in accordance with NEMA AB 1.
4 – 55

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.10

INSPECTION AND TESTING (CONT.)
3.

Physical Inspection
a.
b.

Dimensional inspection.
Visual inspection.

FIELD PERFORMANCE TEST
a.

Field performance test will be performed by the Buyer upon each
circuit breaker after field installation for the purpose of verifying
that overall performance of equipment complies with this
specification requirement.

The Supplier shall submit to the Buyer field performance test
procedure that identify test acceptance criteria and items need to be
tested besides following items.
b1.
b2.

C. 4.11

Circuit breaker open-close operating test
Energizing test

WITNESS AND HOLD POINTS
1.

The items covered by this specification shall be subject to at least the minimum
level of Quality Surveillance actions as indicated in the witness and hold point
lists attached to this specification.

However, the actual and detailed witness and hold points will be decided when
the Buyer reviews and confirms the Supplier’s quality plan specified in
Appendix 4B of this specification.

SHIPPING REQUIREMENTS
A.

GENERAL
1.

The items procured by this specification are to be shipped, handled, stored,
packaged and marked in accordance with Section 2 and KEPIC QAP-2, II-2.
The KEPIC QAP-2, II-2 classification of each item is designated below.
Item

Level a. Protective relays A b. Meters and Instruments A 4 – 56

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.11

SHIPPING REQUIREMENTS (CONT.)

B. c. Transducers A d. Other equipment B 2.

Instruction covering handling, storage, installation, and maintenance at
construction site shall be prepared and submitted by the Supplier.

Preparation for shipment shall protect the switchgear and all other parts and
auxiliary devices or accessories against corrosion, dampness, breakage, or
vibration injury during transportation and handling. Packaging shall prevent
tampering or pilfering and shall be approved and accepted by transportation
companies.

Each shipping section shall be provided with supports in the form of suitable
steel sections, lifting eyes, etc., to maintain alignment of parts during shipping,
handling, hoisting, and installation. Location of lifting points shall be clearly
identified on shipping containers and on drawings. Each shipping section shall
have its weight clearly marked on the container.

Necessary bus connections, wire jumpers, bolts, nuts, washers, etc., shall be
furnished, suitably packaged, and marked to facilitate field assembly. Each
shipping container shall be identified with the name of contents, Purchase Order
number, and Purchase Order item number.
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS

B1. 480V Load Centers
1.

Steamship Containerized Load Centers
a.

Load centers shall be placed on a skid base made of wood. Plastic
shrouds or covers, minimum 6 mil, clear polyethylene film shall cover
complete unit. Any projections that could pierce shroud shall be
cushioned. All doors, panels or other openings shall be closed and
securely fastened. A screw driver shall be used to tighten door panel
fasteners. No tape shall be attached to the surface of any cabinet.

A minimum of two polypropylene straps with plastic buckles, each
uniformly spaced, shall be applied to the circumference or parallel to the
skids on the outside of the polyethylene cover.
Polypropylene
strapping shall be minimum 1 inch wide. Purpose of the strapping is to
hold all doors or panels closed and to hold polyethylene cover to the
cabinet. Switchgear shall be loaded into steamship container at the
Supplier's facility.
4 – 57

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.11

SHIPPING REQUIREMENTS (CONT.)
All voids shall be filled with disposable, inflatable air bags.
2.

Load Centers Too Big or Not Loaded Directly Into Steamship Containers
a.

Load centers shall be prepared as above. In addition, a shroud or cover
shall totally enclose the unit. A polyethylene-aluminum-scrim barrier
can also be used. Sealed rubber gaskets shall be placed between the
skid, unit, shroud or cover and bolts that holds unit to skids.
Excess air shall be evacuated from the shroud or cover prior to sealing.
Desiccant shall be installed in accordance with KEPIC QAP-2, II-2.

b. 3.

The unit prepared above shall be enclosed in a sheathed crate with a
waterproof case liner.

Transition Boxes
Transition boxes shall be covered with a plastic cover, minimum 6 mil or equal
and crated. More than one transition box can be placed in a crate. Care
shall be taken so that they do not strike each other.

Circuit Breakers or Transformers
a.

Circuit breakers or transformers shall be shipped installed in load center
structure. They shall be packaged with extreme care. Heavy
corrugated or plastic devices shall be used that will offset irregular or
protect breakable parts. The devices shall take the strain when
handling and not an irregular shaped or breakable part. Spare Circuit
breakers shall be covered with a plastic or polyethylene-aluminum-scrim
barrier.

Desiccant shall be installed in accordance with KEPIC QAP-2, II-2,
Care shall be used to determine that sealed barriers will not be punctured.
The complete packaged unit shall be overpacked in a sheathed box or
crate.

4 – 58

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.11

SHIPPING REQUIREMENTS (CONT.)
B2. 480V Motor Control Centers
1. The vertical units of the motor control center assemblies shall be factory
assembled into sections of maximum length which can be conveniently
shipped and handled in the field. The assembled sections shall be of a size
accepted by the Buyer. The Supplier shall furnish all material required to
prepare the assembled sections for shipment, including structural steel lifting
beams for each section, if required. These beams shall be sufficiently rigid to
distribute evenly all loads which may be imposed in handling.
2. The contents, contract or Bill of Material Item Number and Purchase Order
Number shall be clearly marked on the exterior of each packing unit.
3. The Supplier shall submit with the proposal a description of his method of
packaging.

4.12

INSTRUCTION MANUALS
A.

INSTRUCTION MANUALS
1. The Supplier shall furnish twenty (20) bound sets to the KORAD site and six
(6) bound sets to the A/E of for all instruction manual for all equipment
furnished by the Supplier. Such instruction books shall include, but are not
limited to, manufacturers' instruction books and leaflets, and other instruction
literature containing the following information:
a.

Handling and storage instructions.

Installation instructions
procedures(s)

c. Outline drawing(s) d. Assembly drawing(s) e. Erection drawing(s) f.

Maintenance requirements and techniques

Material data sheets including performance data

Complete material/parts list(s)
4 – 59

including disassembly and assembly

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.12

INSTRUCTION MANUALS (CONT.)
i.

Operating procedure(s) j.

Other data including performance curves etc.

Electrical drawings including data and drawings shown in paragraph
4.04.B.

l. Operating procedure m.

Inspection and testing procedure(s)

2. Parts List: The instruction manual shall include a complete parts listing for the
equipment. This list, using Microsoft Excel only, shall be inclusive for and
applicable to all equipment, components, auxiliaries, accessories, and materials
being furnished under the contract. Each part shall be completely identified
by part number, part description, part classification, and drawing references in
accordance with standard Appendix 4X.
3. The installation instructions, disassembly and assembly procedure(s), assembly
drawing(s), erection drawing(s), and material/parts list(s) shall be completely
and consistently cross-referenced by drawing number, part number, piece mark
number, etc.
4. Each instruction book shall have an index listing of all leaflets, etc., in the
same order as they appear in the book. Individual submittal of various
manufacturers' instruction books, etc., will not be acceptable. The index
listing shall also identify the specific equipment, including all furnished
options and accessories that the instruction literature is to cover. This book
shall be issued one month prior to shipment of equipment.
5. Maintenance/Surveillance program and preventive maintenance program
should assure that equipment will operate on demand to meet the performance
requirements. This program shall include acceptance criteria to ensure that the
design qualified life has not suffered thermal and cyclic degradation resulting
from the accumulated stresses triggered by the specified environmental
condition.
B.

Erection Information
1. The Supplier shall furnish information to the Buyer for the erection of the
equipment, a detailed scope of the work involved in the complete erection of
this equipment, including all accessories and appurtenances furnished
therewith.
4 – 60

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

4.12

INSTRUCTION MANUALS (CONT.)
2. This information shall include all necessary drawings and a comprehensive
outline as to the extent of field fabrication required; and as to all temporary
falsework, scaffolding, blocking, shoring, heating, disassembling,
reassembling, welding, bolting, cleaning, checking, inspection, painting,
testing etc, required to be done by the construction contractor.

4 – 61(Final) ATTACHMENT 4-1 Witness Point

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1

Page 1 of 1

The following tests/operations are to be witnessed by the Buyer's representative on a first
operation basis. Witnessing of these activities after acceptable first operation will be on a
representative sample basis unless otherwise directed below.
Witness Points (s)

Sample Size Alternative

1. Material Inspection and review of
Component & Material Test Reports
2. Visual and Dimensional Inspection
3. Surface Preparation and Coating
Inspection

4-1-1(Final) ATTACHMENT 4-2 Hold Point

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1

Page 1 of 1

The following tests/operations are to be witnessed by the Buyer's representative on a 100%
basis, Unless otherwise directed below. Waiver of Hold Points must be given by Buyer.
Hold Points (s)

Sample Size Alternative 1.

Design Tests. (if Applicable)

Production Test/Routine Test
(* Production Test for Load Center is
included Dry Type & Instrument
Transformers)

Operating Functional Test

4. Final Inspection 5.

Review and Sign-off of Quality
Verification Documentation

Packing and Shipping Inspection

7. Release for Shipment 4-2-1(Final) ATTACHMENT 4-3

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1

Channel Base for Rollout 480V Load centers and Motor control centers
Page

1. 480V Load Center 4-3-1 1 of 2 ATTACHMENT 4-3

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1

Channel Base for Rollout 480V Load centers and Motor control centers
Page

2 of 2

2. 480V Motor Control Center

NOTES :
1. The equipment shall be shipped fastened to the channel base.
2. The equipment may be fastened to the base by bolting or by welding.
3. If the equipment is to be fastened to the base by bolting, the nuts shall be welded to the
underside of the base.
4. If the equipment is to be mounted to the base by welding, holes shall be provided in the
bottom of the housing, so that the equipment can be plug welded to the base.
5. If the equipment is to be mounted to the base by welding, vendor shall show welding plan,
size, start and ending point for welded mounting type to establish the floor mounting
requirements.

4-3-2(Final) ATTACHMENT 4-4

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1

ATTACHMEMT 4-4
BUILDING STRUCTURE MOUNTING DESIGN
AND LOAD SUMMARY FORM

4-4-1 ATTACHMENT 4-4

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1

TABLE I – STRESS LIMITS FOR WELDING TO BUILDING STRUCTURE*

Plant
Operating
Condition

Loading Combination

Stress Limits
for Non – ASME
Section III
Equipment and
Supports5)

Normal

Dead Weight Loads
+ Pressure Loads
+ Thermal Expansion Loads4)
+ Equip. Operation Loads1)
+ Nozzle Loads

AISC Steel Construction
Manual Section A5.1

Upset

Dead Weight Loads
+ Pressure Loads
+ Thermal Expansion Loads4)
+ Equip. Operation Loads1)
+ Upset Condition Dynamic Loads2)
+ Nozzle Loads

AISC Steel Construction
Manual Section A5.1

* BUILDING STRUCTURE REFERS TO A/E DESIGNED COMPONENT (REFER TO SKETCH 1(a))

TABLE II – STRESS LIMITS FOR BOLTING TO STEEL BUILDING STRUCTURE *

Plant
Operating
Condition

Loading Combination Normal

Dead Weight Loads
+ Pressure Loads
+ Thermal Expansion Loads4)
+ Equip. Operation Loads1)
+ Nozzle Loads

AISC Steel Construction
Manual Section J3

Upset

Dead Weight Loads
+ Pressure Loads
+ Thermal Expansion Loads4)
+ Equip. Operation Loads1)
+ Upset Condition Dynamic Loads2)
+ Nozzle Loads

AISC Steel Construction
Manual Section J3

Stress Limits

* BUILDING STRUCTURE REFERS TO A/E DESIGNED COMPONENT (REFER TO SKETCH 1(b))

4-4-2 ATTACHMENT 4-4

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1

TABLE III – STRENGTH LIMITS FOR ANCHORING TO BUILDING STRUCTURE *
Plant
Operating
Condition

Test
(If Required)

Normal Upset

Strength Limits for cast-in anchor per
ACI 349-01 Appendix B

Loading Combination
(1.43)) Dead Loads
+ (1.3) Field Test Pressure Loads
+ (1.3) Thermal Expansion
Loads4)
+ (1.7) Equip. Operation Loads1)
+ (1.4) Nozzle Loads
(1.43)) Dead Loads
+ (1.7) Pressure Loads
+ (1.3) Thermal Expansion
Loads4)
+ (1.7) Equip. Operation Loads1)
+ (1.4) Nozzle Loads

(1.43)) Dead Loads
+ (1.7) Pressure Loads
+ (1.3) Thermal Expansion
Loads4)
+ (1.7) Equip. Operation Loads1)
+ (1.4) Upset Condition Dynamic
Loads2)
+ (1.4) Nozzle Loads

Tensile Strength
n N s =
n Ase f ut ≥ N u
where, f ut shall not be taken greater than 1.9 f y
or 125,000 psi.
Shear Strength
sVs = s 0.8(0.6) Ase fut ≥ Vu
where, f ut shall not be taken greater than 1.9 f y
or 125,000 psi.
Tension / Shear Interaction
Nu
V
u
≤ 1.2
n
N s
s
Vs
where,
n
0.80 ,
s
0.75
Note)

The tensile & shear stress area for anchor shall
be taken as
0.9743 2
A
0.7854[ D
]
se
n
where,
D : Major thread diameter
n : Number of threads per inch

Minimum center-to-center spacing
For untorqued anchors : 4do
For torqued anchors : 6do
Maximum anchor diameter(do) ≤ 2 in

If required, Vendor shall modify anchor bolt
details including bolt diameter, number of bolt,
bolt material and bolt arrangement as
recommended by A/E

If the concrete expansion anchor (post installed
anchor) is used, the bolt adequacy check shall be
done based on the ACI 349-01 Appendix B.

See ACI 349-01 Appendix B for nomenclatures
shown on this table.

* BUILDING STRUCTURE REFERS TO A/E DESIGNED COMPONENT (REFER TO SKETCH 1(c))

4-4-3 ATTACHMENT 4-4

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1

Note :
1)

Equipment operation loads include but are not limited to :
a)
b)
c)

Motor start-up and running torque
Valve seating torque and/or thrust
Thrust load on fans and pumps

Upset condition dynamic loads include postulated dynamic loads as
identified in the Purchase Specification.

3) When calculating the vertical forces induced from the gravity of
the floor-mounted equipment, the load factor of the dead load
shall be -0.9 instead of +1.2 or +1.4.
4)

Thermal expansion load shall be considered only if the thermal
expansion of equipment affects the supporting system.

Weld allowable stresses shall be per Table J2.5 of AISC.

4-4-4 ATTACHMENT 4-4

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1

SKETCH 1 – TYPICAL EXAMPLES OF EQUIPMENT ATTACHMENTS TO BUILDING STRUCTURES

4-4-5 ATTACHMENT 4-4

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1

BUILDING STRUCTURE LOAD SUMMARY FORM
(Seismic Category III Equipment Foundation)
Client:
Project :
Equip. Name :

Project No. :

Equip. No. :
Building Location :
Building Structure Loads

Prepared by : Date :

Reviewed by :
Approved by :

Date :
Date :

Building Elevation :
Drawing No. :
Forces (kips)
FX

Moments (ft-kips)
FZ

MX MY MZ

Dead Loads
Field Test Pressure Loads
Pressure Loads
Thermal Expansion Loads
Equipment Operation Loads
Nozzle Loads
Upset Condition
Seismic Load
Dynamic Loads
Foundation Plan Sketch1), 2)
(If necessary, use the accompanying paper.)

+X
+Y is up.
+Z

Note 1)

2)
3)
4)

The above building structure loads are the resultant directional forces and moments
at the geometric center of the foundation bolt group or weld group and
UNFACTORED LOADS. INDICATE THE GEOMETRIC CENTER OF THE
FOUNDATION BOLT GROUP OR WELD GROUP ON THE FOUNDATION
PLAN SKETCH.
Global axes X, Y & Z are mutually perpendicular at the equipment foundation,
where axis Y coincides with the vertical direction.
The resultant directional moments are a summation of applicable local moments
and transferred local force contributions.
The field test pressure loads, pressure loads, thermal expansion loads, equipment
operation loads, and upset condition dynamic loads shall NOT include the dead
loads.

4-4-6(Final) ATTACHMENT 4-5

Spec. 0-824-E208
Rev.1

CROSS-REFERENCE TABLE
Between KEPIC and Referenced Codes and Standards
(KEPIC 2015 Ed. through 2016 Addenda)

1. Mechanical - General (MG)
Designation

Referenced Codes and
Standards(Edition)

Title MGA (2010 Ed.) General Requirements MGB (2012 add.) Pressure Vessels

ASME Sec.Ⅷ Div.1 (10 Ed.~11 add.)

MGC (2010 Ed.) Heat Exchangers TEMA (07 Ed.) MGD (2013 add.) Storage Tanks API 650 (13 Ed.) MGE (2013 add.) Piping ASME B31.1 (12 Ed.) MGF (2012 add.) Pumps

HI 1.1~1.2 (08 Ed.), HI 1.3 (09 Ed.),
HI 1.4 (10 Ed.), HI 1.6 (00 Ed.),
HI 9.1~9.5 (00 Ed.)

MGG (2013 add.) Valves ASME B16.34 (13 Ed.) -

2. Nuclear Air and Gas Treatment (MH)
Designation

Referenced Codes and
Standards(Edition)

Title MHA (2006 Add.) General Requirements

ASME AG-1 Div.Ⅰ (97 Ed.～04 add.)

MHB (2006 Add.)

Ventilation Air Cleaning and
Ventilation Air Conditioning

ASME AG-1 Div.Ⅱ (97 Ed.～04 add.)

MHD (2005 Ed.) Testing Procedures

ASME AG-1 Div.Ⅳ (97 Ed.～04 add.)

3. Materials (MD)
Designation

Referenced Codes and
Standards(Edition)

Title MDF (2012 add.)

Ferrous Material Specifications

ASME Sec.ⅡPart A (10 Ed.~11 add.)

MDN (2011 add.)

Nonferrous Material Specifications

ASME Sec.ⅡPart B (10 Ed.)

MDW (2012 add.)

Welding Material Specifications

ASME Sec.ⅡPart C (10 Ed.~11 add.)

MDP (2013 add.) Material Properties

ASME Sec.ⅡPart D (10 Ed.~11 add.)

4. Non-destructive Examination (ME)
Designation
MEN (2013 add.)

Referenced Codes and
Standards(Edition)

Title
Nondestructive Examination

4-5-1

ASME Sec.Ⅴ (10 Ed.~11 add.)

ATTACHMENT 4-5

Spec. 0-824-E208
Rev.1

5. Welding (MQ)
Designation

Referenced Codes and
Standards(Edition)

Title MQW (2012 add.) Welding Qualification

ASME Sec.Ⅸ Part QW
(10 Ed.~11 add.)

MQB (2012 add.) Brazing Qualification

ASME Sec.Ⅸ Part QB
(10 Ed.~11 add.)

6. Measuring & Control Equipment (EM)
Referenced Codes and
Standards(Edition)

Designation Title EMA (2010 Ed.) - General Requirements

EMB
Measuring
Equipment

1100
(10 Ed.)

Temperature Measurement
Thermocouples

ISA MC 96.1 (82 Ed.)

1200
(05 Ed.)

Industrial Platinum Resistance
Thermometer Sensors

IEC 60751 (95 Ed.)

3100
(10 Ed.)

Area Flowmeter

ISA RP 16.1~16.6
(59~61 Ed.)

4100
Vibration, Axial Position, and Bearing
(12 add.) Temperature Monitoring Systems

API 670 (00 Ed, R10)

5100
(10 Ed.)

IEEE C57.13 (08 Ed.)

Requirements for Instrument
Transformers

7. Measuring & Control Equipment (EM)
Designation
EMC
Control
Equipment

Title

Referenced Codes and
Standards(Edition)

1100
(05 Ed.)

Industrial Control and Systems
General Requirements

NEMA ICS 1-Part 8 (00 Ed.)

2101
(10 Ed.)

General Standards for Manual and
Magnetic Controllers

NEMA ICS 2 –PART 1
(00 Ed., R05)

2102
(10 Ed.)

AC Noncombination Magnetic Motor
Controllers Rated 600 Volts

NEMA ICS 2 –PART 2
(08 Ed.)

2104
(10 Ed.)

Nonmagnetic Motor Controllers

NEMA ICS 2 –PART 3
(00 Ed., R05)

2106
(10 Ed.)

AC General-Purpose Controllers for
Synchronous Motors

NEMA ICS 2-325
(88 Ed.)

2107
(10 Ed.)

DC General-Purpose Constant-Voltage
Controllers

NEMA ICS2 –PART 5
(00 Ed., R05)

4-5-2 ATTACHMENT 4-5

Spec. 0-824-E208
Rev.1

7. Measuring & Control Equipment (EM) -(Continued)
Designation
EMC
Control
Equipment

Title

Referenced Codes and
Standards(Edition)

2108
(10 Ed.)

AC General-Purpose Medium Voltage
Contactors and Class E Controllers,
60 Hertz

NEMA ICS 2-324
(88 Ed.)

2109
(10 Ed.)

Maintenance of Motor Controllers
after a Fault Condition

NEMA ICS2- Annex A
(00 Ed., R05)

2110
(10 Ed.)

AC Combination Motor Controllers

NEMA ICS 2-PART 6
(00 Ed., R05)

2202
(10 Ed.)

Magnetic Lighting Contactors

NEMA ICS 2 –PART 7
(00 Ed., R05)

2304
(10 Ed.)

Auxiliary Contacts

NEMA ICS 2 –221
(88 Ed.)

2403
(10 Ed.)

Overload Relays

NEMA ICS 2 –PART 4
(00 Ed., R05)

2501
(10 Ed.)

Resistors and Rheostats

NEMA ICS 2-213
(88 Ed.)

2502
(10 Ed.)

Autotransformers and Reactors

NEMA ICS 2-214
(88 Ed.)

2602
(10 Ed.)

AC Automatic Transfer Switches

NEMA ICS 2-447
(88 Ed.)

3000
(10 Ed.)

Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

NEMA ICS 6 (93 Ed., R11)
NEMA 250 (03 Ed.)

3100
(10 Ed.)

Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
(1000 Volts Maximum)

NEMA 250(08 Ed.)

5000
(10 Ed.)

Guide for Instrumentation and
Control Equipment Grounding in
Generating Stations

IEEE 1050(99 Ed.)

EMD
Indication &
Recording
Instruments

1100
(10 Ed.)

Requirements for Electrical Analog
Indicating Instruments

ANSI C39.1 (81 Ed., R92)

2100
(10 Ed.)

Announciators Sequences and
Specifications

ISA 18.1 (79 Ed., R04)

EME
Computer
System for
Process
Control and
Monitoring

1000
(10 Ed.)

Application Guide for Distrbuted
Digital Control and Monitoring for
Power Plants

IEEE 1046(91 Ed,. R96)

3100
Software Verification and Validation
(10 add.)

IEEE 1012 (04 Ed.)

3200
(05 Ed.)

Software Requirements Specifications

IEEE 830 (98 Ed.)

3300
Software Configuration Management
(06 add.) Plans

IEEE 828 (05 Ed.)

3310
Software Configuration Management
(08 add.)

IEEE 1042 (87 Ed., R93) 4-5-3 ATTACHMENT 4-5

Spec. 0-824-E208
Rev.1

7. Measuring & Control Equipment (EM) -(Continued)
Designation
EME
Computer
System for
Process
Control and
Monitoring

EMF
Measurement
Method of
Process
Variable &
General of
Process
Control

Title

Referenced Codes and
Standards(Edition)

3400
(05 Ed.)

Software Life Cycle Process

IEEE 1074 (06 Ed.)

3500
(05 Ed.)

Software Unit Testing IEEE 1008 (02 Ed)

3600
(07 Ed.)

Software Test Documentation

IEEE 829 (98 Ed.)

3700
(07 Ed.)

Software Reviews IEEE 1028 (02 Ed.)

3800
(07 Ed.)

Software Safety Plans IEEE 1228 (94 Ed)

3900
(08 Ed.)

Software Quality Assurance Plans

IEEE 730 (02 Ed.)

1100
(10 Ed.)

Temperature Measurement
Instruments and Apparatus

ASME PTC 19.3 (74 Ed., R98)

1200
(12 Ed.)

Pressure Measurement Instruments
and Apparatus

ASME PTC 19.2 (10 Ed.)

1300
(10 Ed.)

Application of Fluid
Meters-Especially Differential
Pressure Type

ASME PTC 19.5 (04 Ed.)

2200
(10 Ed.)

Quality Standard for Instrument Air

ISA 7.0.01 (96 Ed.)

8. Electric Equipment (EE)
Designation

Title EEA (2010 Ed.) -

EEB
Rotating
Machinery

1000
Rotating Equipment General
(13 add.) Requirement

General Requirements

Referenced Codes and
Standards(Edition)
-

NEMA MG 1 Section I Part 1
(11 Ed.)

2110
Small and Medium Induction Motors NEMA MG 1 Section II
(13 add.)
(11 Ed.)
2120
Large Induction Motors
(13 add.)

NEMA MG 1 Section II Part 20
(11 Ed.)

2200
(10 Ed.)

IEEE 112 (04 Ed.)

Test Procedure for Polyphase
Induction Motors and Generators

2300
Guide for Testing Turn Insulation of IEEE 522(04 Ed.)
(10 add.) Form-Wound Stator Coils for
Alternating-Current Electric Machines

4-5-4 ATTACHMENT 4-5

Spec. 0-824-E208
Rev.1

8. Electric Equipment (EE) -(Continued)
Designation
EEC
Transformer

EED
Protection
Equipment

Title

Referenced Codes and
Standards(Edition)

1000
Terminal Markings and Connections
(13 add.) for Distribution and Power
Transformers

IEEE C57.12.70 (11 add.)

2100
General Requirements for Liquid(11 add.) Immersed Distribution, Power and
Regulating Transformers

IEEE C57.12.00 (10 Ed.)

2200
(12 add.)

Test Code for Liquid-Immersed
Distribution, Power and Regulating
Transformers

IEEE C57.12.90 (10 add.)

3100
(10 Ed.)

General Requirements for Dry-Type
IEEE C57.12.01 (05 Ed.)
Distribution and Power Transformers
Including Those with Solid-Cast
and/or Resin-Encapsulated Windings

3200
Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution
(13 add.) and Power Transformers

IEEE C57.12.91 (11 add.)

4100
(10 Ed.)

IEEE C57.19.01
(00 Ed. R05)

Performance Characteristics and
Dimensions for Outdoor Apparatus
Bushings

1100
Rating Structure for AC
(11 add.) High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated
on a Symmetrical Current Basis

IEEE C37.09 (99 Ed., amd. 1-07)

1110
(10 Ed.)

Test Procedure for AC High-Voltage
Circuit Breakers Rated on a
Symmetrical Current Basis

IEEE C37.09a
(05 Ed. R07)

1200
(15 Ed.)

Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit
Breakers Used in Enclosures

ANSI C37.50 (89 Ed., R00)
IEEE C37.13 (08 Ed.)
IEEE C37.16 (00 Ed.)

1210
(10 Ed.)

Preferred Ratings, Related
Requirements, and Application
Recommendations for Low-Voltage
AC(635V and below) and DC(3200V
and below) Power Circuit Breakers

IEEE C37.16(00 Ed.)

1220
Switchgear-Low Voltage AC Power
(13 add.) Circuit Breakers Used in
Enclosures-Test Procedures

ANSI C37.50(12 Ed.)

1300
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers,
(12 add.) Molded-Case Switches and
Circuit-Breaker Enclosures

UL 489(11 Ed.)

2000
(10 Ed.)

IEEE 32 (72 Ed., R90)

Requirements, Terminology and Test
Procedures for Neutral Grounding
Devices

4-5-5

IEEE C37.04 (99 Ed., amd. 2-08)

ATTACHMENT 4-5

Spec. 0-824-E208
Rev.1

8. Electric Equipment (EE) - (Continued)
EEE
Switchgear &
Panelboard

EEF
Relay

1000
Motor Control Centers
(12 add.)

UL 845 (11 add.)

2000
(10 Ed.)

Metal-Enclosed Low-Voltage Power
Circuit Breaker Switchgear

IEEE C37.20.1 (02 Ed., R07)

3000
(10 Ed.)

Metal-Clad Switchgear

IEEE C37.20.2 (99 Ed., R05)

4000
Panelboards
(11 add.)

NEMA PB 1 (06 Ed. erta 08)

1000
(10 Ed.)

IEEE C37.90 (05 Ed.)

Relays and Relay Systems
Associated with Electric Power
Apparatus

2000
Surge Withstand Capability(SWC)
(11 add.) Tests for Relays and Relay System
Associated with Electric Power
Apparatus

IEEE C37.90.1 (02 Ed. erta 04)

3000
(10 Ed.)

Electrostatic Discharges Tests for
Protective Relays

IEEE C37.90.3(01 Ed.R06)

4000
(10 Ed.)

Safety Systems for Nuclear Power
Generating Stations

IEEE C37.90.2(04 Ed.)

1000
(05 Ed.)

Recommended Practice for
Maintenance, Testing, and
Replacement of Vented Lead-Acid
Batteries for Stationary Applications

KS C 8505 (02 Ed.)
IEEE 450 (02 Ed.)

1100
(10 Ed.)

IEEE 484 (02 Ed., R08)
Recommended Practice for Design
and Installation of Vented Lead-Acid
Batteries for Stationary Applications

1200
(10 Ed.)

Recommended Practice for Sizing
Lead-Acid Batteries for Stationary
Applications

IEEE 485 (97 Ed. R03)

EEH
Battery
Charger

1000
(10 Ed.)

Utility Type Battery Chargers

NEMA PE 5 (97 Ed., R03)

EEI
Electromagnetic
Compatibility

1000
(05 Ed.)

Methods of Measurement For Radio
Influence Voltage (RIV) of
High-Voltage Apparatus

NEMA 107 (87 Ed., R93)

2000
(09
Add.)

Requirements for the Control of
Electromagnetic Interference
Characteristics of Subsystems and
Equipment

MIL STD 461F (07 Ed.)

EEJ
Heat Tracing
System

1000
(05 Ed.)

Recommended Practice for the
Design and Installation of Electric
Heat Tracing Systems for Nuclear
Power Generating Systems

IEEE 622A (84 Ed., R94)
IEEE 622B (88 Ed. R94)

EEL
Uninterruptible
Power Supply
System

1000
(05 Ed.)

IEEE Recommended Practice for the
Application and Testing of
Uninterruptible Power Supplies for
Power Generating Stations

IEEE 944 (86 Ed., R96)
IEC 60146 (73 Ed.)
IEC 60146-2 (74 Ed.)

EEG
Battery

4-5-6 ATTACHMENT 4-5

Spec. 0-824-E208
Rev.1

9. Cable and Raceways (EC)
Designation

Title ECA (2010 Ed.) - General Requirements

ECB
Wire & Cable

1100
(10 Ed.)

Soft or Annealed Copper Wire

Referenced Codes and
Standards(Edition)
ASTM B 3 (01 Ed., R07)

1200
Specification for Tinned Soft
(11 add.) or Annealed Copper Wire for
Electrical Purposes

ASTM B 33 (10 Ed.)

1300
(10 Ed.)

Specification for Lead-Coated
and Lead-Alloy-Coated Soft Copper
Wire for Electrical Purposes

ASTM B 189 (05 Ed.)

1400
(10 Ed.)

Specification for ConcentricLay-Stranded Copper Conductors,
Hard, Medium-Hard or Soft

ASTM B 8 (04 Ed.)

3000
(05 Ed.)

Instrumentation Cables and
Thermocouple Wire

NEMA WC 55 (92 Ed., R98)

4000
(10 Ed.)

Control, Thermocouple Extension, and
Instrumentation Cables

NEMA WC 57(04 Ed.)

5100
(10 Ed.)

Test Procedure for Impulse Voltage
Tests on Insulated Conductors

IEEE 82 (02 Ed.)

5200
(05 Ed.)

Guide for Making High-Direct-Voltage
Tests on Power Cable Systems in the
Field

IEEE 400 (91 Ed.)

5300
Guide for Field Testing and Evaluation IEEE 400(12 Ed.)
(13 add.) of the Insulation of Shielded Power
Cable Systems
6000
(10 Ed.)

Binational Wire and Cable Packaging
Standard

NEMA WC 26 (08 Ed.)

7100
(10 Ed.)

Nonshielded Power Cables Rated 2000
Volts or Less for the Distribution of
Electrical Energy

NEMA WC 70(09 Ed.)

7200
(10 Ed.)

5-46kV Shielded Power Cable for Use
in the Transmission and Distribution
of Electric Energy

NEMA WC 74(06 Ed.)

ECC
Cable Fitting

2100

Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and
Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical
Metallic Tubing, and Cable

NEMA PR 4

ECD
Line Apparatus

1100
(10 Ed.)

Electric Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC)

ANSI C80.1 (05 Ed.)

2100
(10 Ed.)

Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
Tubing and Conduit

NEMA TC 2 (03 Ed.)

3100
Metal Cable Tray Systems
(11 add.)

4-5-7 NEMA VE 1 (09 Ed.) ATTACHMENT 4-5

Spec. 0-824-E208
Rev.1

10. Transmission, Transformation & Distribution (ET)
Designation

Title

Referenced Codes and
Standards(Edition)

ETA (2010 Ed.) - General Requirements

ETC
Pad Mounted
Raceway

2130
(05 Ed.)

Common test methods for insulation
and sheathing materials of electric
cables Part 1: Methods for General
application Section 1: Measurement of
thickness and overall dimension-Tests
for determining the mechanical
properties

JEC 208(80 Ed.)

ETD
Machinery
Apparatus

1001
(05 Ed.)

High-Voltage Test Techniques-General
Definitions and Test Requirements

IEC 60060-1 (89 Ed., corr.
92)

1002
(05 Ed.)

High-Voltage Test TechniquesMeasuring Systems

IEC 60060-2 (94 Ed., amd.
1-96)

ETE
System
Protection
Apparatus &
Measuring &
Control
Equipment

1004
Insulation Co-ordination-Definitions,
(07 add.) Principles and Rules

IEC 60071-1 (06 Ed.)

1010
Degrees of Protection Provided by
(05 add.) Enclosure

IEC 60529 (89 Ed. amd.
1-99)

1031
Specification and Acceptance of New
(06 add.) Sulphur Hexafluoride

IEC 60376 (05 Ed.),
60376A (73 Ed.), 60376B (74
Ed.)

1040
Insulated Bushings for Alternating
(07 add.) Voltages Above 1000 V

IEC 60137 (03 Ed.)

1051
Metal Oxide Surge Arresters without
(06 add.) Gaps for AC Systems

IEC 60099-4 (04 Ed.)

3130
(05 Ed.)

Synthetic Testing of High-Voltage
Alternating Current Circuit-Breakers

IEC 60427 (00 Ed.)

3210
(05 Ed.)

Switches for Rated Voltages Above
1 kV and less than 52 kV

IEC 60265-1 (98 Ed., corr.
00)

3220
(05 Ed.)

Alternating Current Disconnectors and
Earthing Switches

IEC 60129 (84 Ed., amd.
2-96)

3310
(05 Ed.)

Common Specifications for HighVoltage Switchgear and Controlgear
Standards

IEC 60694 (96 Ed., amd.
2-01)

3430
High-Voltage(>1000 V) Expulsion Type
(11 add.) Distribution Fuses, Fuse and
Disconnecting Cutouts, Fuse
Disconnecting Switches, and Fuse
Links, and Accessories Used with
These Devices

IEEE C37.42 (09 Ed.)

2200
(10 Ed.)

IEEE C37.1 (07 Ed.)

SCADA and Automation Systems

4-5-8 ATTACHMENT 4-5

Spec. 0-824-E208
Rev.1

11. Nuclear Safety Related Structures (SN)
Designation

Title

Referenced Codes and Standards(Edition)

SNC (2005 Ed.)

Reinforced Steel Concrete Structures ACI 349 (01 Ed.)

SNE (2006 add.) Protective Coating

ASTM D 3359 (95 Ed.), 3843 (00 Ed.),
3911 (95 Ed.), 3912 (95 Ed.), 4082 (95 Ed.),
4227 (95 Ed.), 4228 (95 Ed.), 4286 (99 Ed.)
4537 (96 Ed.), 4538 (95 Ed.), 4541 (95 Ed.),
5139 (96 Ed.), 5144 (00 Ed.), 5163 (96 Ed.),
5498 (94 Ed.), 5962 (96 Ed.)

12. Non Nuclear Safety Related Structures (SG)
Referenced Codes and
Standards(Edition)

Designation Title SGA (2010 Ed.) General Requirements SGB (2012 add.)

Building Code Requirements for
Structural Concrete

ACI 318 (11 Ed.) SGE (2012 add.)

Code for Structural Steel Buildings

AISC 360 (10 Ed.) -

13. General Structural Provisions (ST)
Designation

Title

Referenced Codes and
Standards(Edition)

STA (2005 Ed.) Design Loadings ASCE 7 (02 Ed.) STB (2005 Ed.)

Seismic Analysis of Nuclear Structures

ASCE 4 (98 Ed.)

14. Structural Welding (SW)
Referenced Codes and
Standards(Edition)

Designation Title SWS (2011 add.) Structural Welding-Steel AWS D1.1 (10 Ed.) SWT (2010 Ed.)

Structural Welding-Sheet Steel

AWS D1.3 (08 Ed.) 4-5-9 (final) ATTACHMENT 4-6

Spec : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1

DWG NO. REV NO. 0-824-E140-003 1 TITLE PAGE SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM 4-6-1

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
480V LOAD CENTER LC03
0-826-E140-007

1 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM 4-6-2

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
480V MOTOR CONTROL CENTER MC07
0-826-E140-008

2 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM 4-6-3

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
480V MOTOR CONTROL CENTER MC08
0-826-E140-009

2 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM 4-6-4

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE
BLDG480V MOTOR CONTROL CENTER MC09
0-824-E143-001

1 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4-6-5

480V LOAD CENTER INCOMING BREAKER
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

4-6-6 0-824-E143-002 1 0-824-E143-003 1

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
480V LOAD CENTER AUX. COMPARTMENT
PART

4-6-7 0-824-E143-004 1 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4-6-8

480V LOAD CENTER TYPICAL MOTOR LOAD
FEEDER BREAKER

480V LOAD CENTER MCC&PACKAGE
FEEDER BREAKER
0-826-E143-001

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
480V MCC

TC4-6-1(Final) 4-6-9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER

Spec : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1

Att 4-6 F A2 A1

A
A
C

480V LOAD CENTER
XFMR
0-824-E-TR06
1500/2000KVA
6900-480V
AA/FA
(NOTE 1,2)

B 49
T
A

C
B

F-A B B

1600AF
320SR

2-PT'S
480-120V

A
C

FU
4A

600/
5A

1600AF
160SR

RTM F-B1

OC/SC
LT
IT

DISC. LINK

(NOTE 5)
APFR
CLF

B2 B4 C2 C3 F-B1

OC/SC
LT
IT

1600AF
160SR

RTM

1600AF
800SR

F-B1

OC/SC
LT
IT

1600AF
630SR

F-B1

OC/SC
LT
ST

1600AF
800SR

1 F-B1

OC/SC
LT
ST

F-B1

OC/SC
LT
ST

1600AF
160SR

RTM F-B1

OC/SC
LT
IT

51
GN

MCCB
200AF
100AT

F-A
8A

E 2 D.C

FAN
CONTROL
PNL

RELAY SCHEDULE & DEVICE NUMBER

CLF
3A

C
F-B1
OC/SC
LT
ST
4000AF
3200SR

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG

CONTINUED ON BELOW LEFT 0-824-E140-003

480V LOAD CENTER 0-824-E-LC03 50KA 3000A BUS

F DEVICE MFR RLY TYPE FUNCTION

27
49T
50GS
51G
51GN

ABB
NAMIL
ABB
ABB
ABB

411R1175
S-302CR
GR-5
443S2241
443S1241

UNDERVOLTAGE RELAY
TEMPERATURE DETECTOR
GROUND SENSOR OVERCURRENT INSTANTANEOUS
GROUND OVERCURRENT RELAY(VERY INVERSE)
GROUND OVERCURRENT RELAY(INVERSE)

86 HHI HLR-06B LOCKOUT RELAY

FUNCTIONAL TABLE
CODE
F-A
F-B1
F-B2
F-B3

DESCRIPTION
PCMS ALARM
TRIPS SUPPLY BREAKER
SUPPLY BREAKER CONTROL BY PCMS
TRIPS MEDIUM VOLTAGE BKR FEED TO LOAD CENTER XFMR

E VS

3KVA
480-120/240V

(NOTE 3)
40 Kvar

50
GS

(NOTE 3)
40 Kvar

50
GS

51
G

300/5A 1 1

SC
3Φ 480V
60KVA

B1 C1 D1 E1 INST INST INST INST B2 C2 D2 E2 86 A2 B3 C3 F-B1 A3 B4 C4

A1
50
GS

51
G

300/5A 300/5A

51
G

50
GS

XFMR
86

86 86 86 86 86 86

1
E3

D3 SPARE SPARE 1 F-B1,B3 F-A F-B1 F-A F-B1 F-A F-B1 F-B1 F-A F-A F-B1 F-A F-B1 F-A F-A E4 D4 SPARE 3-1/C 750KCM

D
NOTE

1. 변압기는 효율관리기자재 운용규정에서 정한 고효율 변압기를 사용한다.
2. 변압기는 표준 소비 효율기준을 만족하는 제품을 사용한다.
3. 전기설비부문 의무사항 2항에 의거
: 모든 전동기(3Φ, 1.5KW 이상)는 [내선규정의 콘덴서 부설용량 제정
기준표] 역률개선용 콘덴서를 설치한다.

SPARE

480V MCC
0-826-E-MC07
DWG : 0-826-E140-007

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
SUPPLY AHU HV01 FAN
0-611-M-AH02

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
SUPPLY AHU HV01 FAN
0-611-M-AH01
SPARE

0-831-E-LT21

NORMAL LIGHTING &
RECEPTACLE

FROM 6.9KV SWGR
1-822-E-SW01
DWG : 1-822-E140-001

260
KW

480V MCC
0-826-E-MC09
DWG : 0-826-E140-009

75
HP

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
SUPPLY AHU HV01
HEATING COIL HC01(BANK 1)
0-611-M-HC01

75
HP

100
KVA

3-1/C 500KCM 3-1/C 750KCM 3/C #2/0

NORM. LTG
XFMR 100KVA
480-380/220V

3/C #2/0 3/C #4/0 3/C #4/0 FRONT VIEW

4. ANALOG METER IS PART OF CONTROL SWITCH MODULE.
5. 역률자동조절장치

D2 D3 D4 E2 E3

E4
REFERENCE DWG
FACILITY POWER BLOCK : 1-822-E140-001

C
1600AF
630SR

1600AF
320SR

RTM

1600AF
320SR

RTM 1

1
F-B1

CONTINUED FROM ABOVE RIGHT

OC/SC
LT
ST

F-B1

OC/SC
LT
ST

F-B1

OC/SC
LT
ST

F-B1

OC/SC
LT
IT

F-B1

OC/SC
LT
ST

INFORMATION ONLY

* PREPARER : 이창수, TEL : 054-421-7461

(NOTE 3)
300/5A

51
G

300/5A

51
G

300/5A

50
GS

50 Kvar

(NOTE 3)
50 Kvar

51
G

300/5A

260
KW

97
KW

F-A F-B1 1

97
KW

86 F-A 86 F-B1 F-A F-B1 3/C #4/0 3/C #4/0 F-B1 86 3/C #4/0 F-A 3-1/C 500KCM F-B1 86 B 1

1
86

50
GS

100
HP

87
KW

86 F-B1 F-A F-A 1 02/01/19 FINAL ISSUE 0 03/12/18 CONSTRUCTION ISSUE REV. DATE DESCRIPTION 3/C #4/0

51
G

3/C #4/0 B F-B1

OC/SC
LT
IT

PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED

100
HP

8 7 6 A

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
EXHAUST ACU FAN
0-611-M-AH05

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
EXHAUST ACU FAN
0-611-M-AH04

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
ACCU-C COMPRESSOR
0-611-M-HV02

1
RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
ACCU-B COMPRESSOR
0-611-M-HV02

11E60M11_SLD.VST A 1

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
ACCU-A COMPRESSOR
0-611-M-HV02

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
SUPPLY AHU HV01
HEATING COIL HC01(BANK 2)
0-611-M-HC01

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG

SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
2ND RADWASTE R/ST BLDG 480V L/C 0-824-E-LC03

4-6-1
5

PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER

4 3 2 0-824-E140-003 SHEET 1/1 JOB NO. RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY SCALE REV. 11G79

N
Ⅱ/Ⅲ

NONE 1 1 A1 (841X594 mm) 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Spec : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1

PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER Att 4-6

100AF
6.3A
TM

100AF
40A
TM

100AF
15A

100AF
3.2A

TM TM MO 1 1

3/C #6
19
HP

7.5
KW

1 3/C #6

7.5
HP

3/C #8

7.5
HP

3/C #10

1.5
HP

24
HP

11
KW

15
KW

SSOR

SSOR
50
GS

100AF
6.3A
MO

MO 1 1 1 SSOR F

100AF
50A
TM

SSOR
50
GS

50
GS

(NOTE 1)
6.50Kvar

10
HP

1.5
KW

5
KW

10
HP

1.5
HP

29
KW

D 1

50
GS

24 MO

SSOR
50
GS

(NOTE 1)
6.50Kvar

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
ACCU-A FAN
0-611-M-HV02

7.5
HP

(NOTE 1)
8.7Kvar

AVR FOR SECURITY
SYSTEM
0-862-E-VR01

(NOTE 1)
7Kvar

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
ACCU-C FAN
0-611-M-HV02

30 4.35Kvar

(NOTE 1)
4.35Kvar

50
GS

100AF
20A

SSOR

SSOR
50
GS

100AF
32A

1 2

SSOR
50
GS

SPARE 29 (NOTE 1) 3/C #10

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
ACCU-B FAN
0-611-M-HV02

50
GS

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
SUMP PUMP 2
0-673-M-PP02
SCD: 0-673-E143-001

SHIELDED CELL
EQUIPMENT
0-473-M-ZN01

24
HP

SPARE

(NOTE 1)
4.35Kvar

SPARE

(NOTE 1)
8.7Kvar

SSOR

SSOR
50
GS

50
GS

100AF
15A

23 CONTINUED ON BELOW LEFT SSOR 2 MO TM

100AF
15A

22 3/C #4 SSOR 4 MO TM

100AF
32A

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
OFFICE PACU HEATING
COIL
0-611-M-HV03

SSOR MO 20 3/C #10 1 MO

100AF
30A

100AF
60A

100AF
30A

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
OFFICE PACU FAN
0-611-M-HV03

1 TM 18 SPARE 1

100AF
50A

17 3/C #10 1

225AF
125A

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
FLOOR DRAIN
SUMP PUMP
0-481-M-PP02
SCD: 0-481-E143-001

BRKR TRIPPING POWER
FOR (50GS) RELAY

VOLTAGE
MONITORING

CONTINUED ON ABOVE RIGHT D 3/C #6 3/C #6

3-1/C 750KCM
FORM 480V LOAD CENTER
0-824-E-LC03
SLD: 0-824-E140-003

20
KW

100AF
30A

50
GS

2A 27 MO

SSOR
50
GS

120V AC
DIST. PNL

26 MO 3/C #10

125AF
100A
TM

E MO

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
SUMP PUMP 1
0-673-M-PP01
SCD: 0-673-E143-001

C1 MO 3/C #10 F-A

100AF
15A

100AF
6.3A

250VA
480-120V
1Φ

27 V

100AF
20A

14 3/C #10 TM

100AF
20A

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
HALL (150-R07) EUH
0-611-M-HX12

TM 12 3/C #10 TM

100AF
60A

ROLL UP DOOR
0-221-A-DO-R04

100AF
30A

3/C #6 2

225AF
100A

10 3/C #10 TM

225AF
100A

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
FLOOR DRAIN
SUMP PUMP
0-481-M-PP01
SCD: 0-481-E143-001

TM 480120V

VS
R

100AF
15A

ROLL UP DOOR
0-221-A-DO-R03

2
1A

125AF
50A

7 3/C #10 480120V 6 3/C #8

3
1A

F 5

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG

PASSENGER
ELEVATOR RS-E1
0-683-A-EL01

4 3

RADIATION SHIELD
DOOR
0-221-A-DO-R01

2 1 60HZ 42KA 600A BUS

RADIATION SHIELD
DOOR
0-221-A-DO-R02

0-826-E140-007 480V MCC 0-826-E-MC07

INFORMATION ONLY
MCC
SPACE
HEATER

NOTES 2/C #10

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
HVAC EFFLUENT(PIG)
0-761-J-RE/RT-012

0.5
HP

: 모든 전동기(3Φ, 1.5KW 이상)는 [내선규정의 콘덴서 부설용량 제정
기준표] 역률개선용 콘덴서를 설치한다.

2. THE 120/208V AC DIST. PNL FEEDER BREAKERS ARE 50AF
THERMAL MAGNETIC TYPE MCCB.

3. SSOR DENOTES SOLID STATE OVERLOAD RELAY WHICH HAS A FUNCTION
OF THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION.
FROM 120V AC PNL
IN MCC
0-826-E-MC07

1
KW

3/C #10 3/C #10

10
KW

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
NON RADIOACTIVE
SUMP PUMP ROOM
EXHAUST FAN
0-611-M-AH06

3/C #8

26
KW

3/C #4

3/C #10
1
HP

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
CRANE CONTROL ROOM
HUMIDIFIER
0-611-M-HV05

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
OFFICE PACU HUMIDIFIER
0-611-M-HV03

11
KW

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
CRANE CONTROL ROOM
PACU HEATING COIL
0-611-M-HV05

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
CRANE CONTROL ROOM
PACU FAN
0-611-M-HV05

3/C #8 1. 전기설비부문 의무사항 2항에 의거

4. SPACE HEATER DOES NOT HAVE A DESIGNATED COMPARTMENT NO.
5. INTERPOSING RELAY SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR NEMA SIZE 3,4 MAGNETIC
CONTACTOR.
REFERENCE DWG
FACILITY POWER BLOCK : 1-820-E140-001

120/208V AC DIST. PNL
0-826-E-MC07-C2

MCC SPACE HTR
0-826-E-MC07
MCC SPACE HTR
0-826-E-MC09
L/C SPACE HTR
0-824-E-LC03-A1
PCMS CAB. (LATER)
0-771-J-LATER

2/C #10
2/C #10

03 2/C #8 05 2/C #10

07
09

SPARE 11 SPARE 13 SPRAE 15 SPARE 17

SPARE
CCTV SYSTEM
0-792-J-LP10

01 2/C #8

19
21
23

*Preparer : 이창수 , Tel : 054-421-7461

20A

20A
20A

20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 30A 30A 40A 40A 50A 50A A B 02 2/C #10 04 2/C #10 06 2/C #10 08 2/C #8 10 B SPARE 12 SPARE

14
16

LFCP
0-691-J-LP103
CCTV SYSTEM
0-792-J-LP02
PCMS CAB. (LATER)
0-771-J-LATER
HVAC TERM. BOX
0-611-W-0002

SPARE
2/C #8

1 02/01/19 FINAL ISSUE 0 03/12/18 CONSTRUCTION ISSUE REV. DATE DESCRIPTION

L/C CONTROL(MOTOR SPACE HTR)
0-824-E-LC03-A1

18
20

2/C #10

LFCF
0-691-J-LP01

1 PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED

22
24

2/C #6

FIRE DAMPER TB
0-691-W-0008

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG

C
N

11E60M11_SLD.VST A A

SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
480V MCC 0-826-E-MC07

4-6-2
8

7 6 5

PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER

4 3 2 0-826-E140-007 SHEET 1/1 JOB NO. RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY SCALE REV. 11G79

N
Ⅱ/Ⅲ

NONE 1 1 A1 (841X594 mm) 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER

Spec : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1

Att 4-6 0-826-E140-008

480V MCC 0-826-E-MC08
2

1 4 3

3
1A

480120V
2
1A

R 27 6 7

125AF
50A

100AF
15A

TM TM TM TM TM

480208/120V
3Φ 4W
30KVA

VS 5 8 9

100AF
30A

100AF
30A
TM

60HZ 30KA 600A BUS
10

11 12

100AF
32A
TM

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG

MO 13

100AF
15A

100AF
30A

TM TM 14

100AF
60A

15 17

100AF
50A

100AF
63A
TM

16 MO TM 2 19

100AF
50A

100AF
15A

TM MO MO 1 1 SSOR SSOR

250VA
480-120V
1Φ

2 18 2 20

100AF
30A

ZZ F

100AF
15A
TM

C1
V

F-A

125AF
100A

SSOR
50
GS

50
GS

SSOR
50
GS

50
GS

MCC
SPACE
HEATER

50
GS

2A 2/C #10 3/C #10 E 2 2

FROM 120V AC PNL
IN MCC
0-826-E-MC08

3/C #8

3.3
KW
RADIATION MONITORING
SYSTEM
0-761-J-RE/RT-012

SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE 2 2

12
KW
RECEIPT INSPECTION
EQUIPMENT
0-473-M-ZN01

3/C #2 60A

WELDING RECEPTACLE
0-836-E-WR02

WELDING RECEPTACLE
0-836-E-WR01

SPARE SPARE

BATTERY CHARGER
0-841-E-BC05

STAND-BY
LIGHTING TR
0-831-E-LT22

SPARE SPARE 30A

20
KVA

2 SPARE

BRKR TRIPPING POWER
FOR (50GS) RELAY

FROM 480V LOAD CENTER
1-824-E-LC07
SLD: 1-824-E140-007

15
KVA

3/C #6

XFMR
480-380
/220V
15KVA

3/C #4 6-1/C 750KCM E 3/C #8

120V AC
DIST. PNL

D D INFORMATION ONLY

NOTES
1. 전기설비부문 의무사항 2항에 의거
: 모든 전동기(3Φ, 1.5KW 이상)는 [내선규정의 콘덴서 부설용량 제정
기준표] 역률개선용 콘덴서를 설치한다.
2. THE 120/208V AC DIST. PNL FEEDER BREAKERS ARE 50AF
THERMAL MAGNETIC TYPE MCCB.

C C

3. SSOR DENOTES SOLID STATE OVERLOAD RELAY WHICH HAS A FUNCTION
OF THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION.
4. SPACE HEATER DOES NOT HAVE A DESIGNATED COMPARTMENT NO.
5. INTERPOSING RELAY SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR NEMA SIZE 3,4 MAGNETIC
CONTACTOR.

REFERENCE DWG
FACILITY POWER BLOCK : 1-820-E140-001

120/208V AC DIST. PNL
0-826-E-MC08-C2

MCC SPACE HTR
0-826-E-MC08

2/C #10

SPACE HTR
0-842-E-TR05

2/C #10

01
03
05
07
09
11

PERSONEL COMPUTER
0-611-E-ZE31

3/C #10

ADR SYSTEM
0-611-E-ZE32
RECEPTACLE POWER
0-841-E-BC05

3/C #8
2/C #10

PORTAL MONITOR #1
0-611-E-ZE33

3/C #8 19

13
15

21
23

20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 30A 30A 40A 40A 50A 50A A B

*Preparer : 김태훈 , Tel : 054-421-6544

02 2/C #10

SPACE HTR
0-842-E-UP05

04 2/C #10

RECEPTACLE POWER
0-842-E-TR05

06
08
10
12
14
16

2/C #10

18
20

2 12/23/20 GENERAL REVISION 1 02/01/19 FINAL ISSUE 0 03/12/18 CONSTRUCTION ISSUE REV. DATE DESCRIPTION

SPACE HTR
0-841-E-BC05
SPARE

3/C #8

PORTAL MONITOR #2
0-611-E-ZE34

22 PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED 24

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG

C
N

11E60M11_SLD.VST A

4-6-3
8

7 6 5 A

SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
480V MCC 0-826-E-MC08
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER

4 3 2 0-826-E140-008 SHEET 1/1 JOB NO. RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY SCALE REV. 11G79

N
Ⅱ/Ⅲ

NONE 2 1 A1 (841X594 mm) 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER

Spec : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1

Att 4-6
2

1 4 3 5

3
1A

480120V
2
1A

100AF
15A

TM TM

480208/120v
3Φ 4/W
30KVA

VS
R

125AF
50A

100AF
60A

100AF
30A
TM

100AF
75A

100AF
30A
TM

9 10

100AF
30A
TM

60HZ 42KA 600A BUS 11 12

100AF
30A

100AF
15A

TM TM

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
13

100AF
15A
TM

15 MO TM F-A 18

100AF
15A

MO MO 1 2 SSOR SSOR TM

125AF
100A
50
GS

50
GS

100AF
60A

100AF
40A
TM

100AF
30A
TM

25 24

100AF
50A

100AF
50A
TM

100AF
60A
MO

TM 2

SSOR
50
GS

50
GS

(NOTE 1)

(NOTE 1)
6.50Kvar

SSOR 7Kvar

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
STAIR 3 EUH
0-611-M-HX08

ELECTRIC HOT WATER
HEATER
0-585-P-HE03

30
KW

3/C #4

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
VESTIBULE EUH
0-611-M-HX04

30
KW

17.5
HP
RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
OFFICE ACCU
COMPRESSOR
0-611-M-HV04

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
DISPOSAL INSPECTION
AREA EUH
0-611-M-HX03

3/C #4

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
DISPOSAL INSPECTION
AREA EUH
0-611-M-HX02

18
KW

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
MIDIUM LEVEL
RADWASTE DRUM
STORAGE AREA EUH
0-611-M-HX06

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
DISPOSAL INSPECTION
AREA EUH
0-611-M-HX01

3/C #4

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
DRUM LOADING AREA
CRANES
0-683-M-CX01&CX02

15
HP

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
MIDIUM LEVEL
RADWASTE DRUM
STORAGE AREA EUH
0-611-M-HX05

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
STORAGE AREA CRANE
0-683-M-CX03

1
HP

3/C #6

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
AHU ROOM EUH
0-611-M-HX10

5
KVA

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
STAIR 1 EUH
0-611-M-HX07

30
KW

SPARE 3/C #4

7
KW

3/C #2 3/C #10

5
KW

60A

WELDING RECEPTACLE
0-836-E-WR03

3/C #10

13
KW

3/C #10 3/C #8

13
KW

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
EXHAUST FAN
0-611-M-AH03
SCD: 0-611-E143-002

3/C #8

13
KW

3/C #10 3/C #8

40.7
KW

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
ELECTIC EQUIPMENT
ROOM PACU FAN
0-611-M-HV07

3/C #2

15
KW

REGULATING XFMR
0-842-E-TR05

3/C #8

15
KW

SPARE 3/C #8

40
KW

SPARE 3/C #2 5KVA

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
BATTERY ROOM EDH
0-611-M-HC02

VOLTAGE
MONITORING

FROM 480V LOAD CENTER
0-824-E-LC03
SLD: 0-824-E140-003

BRKR TRIPPING POWER
FOR (50GS) RELAY

3-1/C 750KCM 3/C #8

120V AC
DIST. PNL

50
GS

100AF
32A

1
C1

100AF
6.3A

250VA
480-120V
1Φ

27 V 17

225AF
40A

100AF
12.5A

100AF
50A

TM 16 CONTINUED ON BELOW LEFT 0-826-E140-009 480V MCC 0-826-E-MC09

2
27

D CONTINUED ON ABOVE RIGHT 26 28 29 31 30 32 33 ZZ

100AF
6.3A

100AF
15A

MO MO TM TM TM 1 2 1 SSOR SSOR

100AF
6.3A

100AF
32A

100AF
6.3A

MO MO MO 1 1 SSOR SSOR

100AF
60A

INFORMATION ONLY SSOR

MCC
SPACE
HEATER

50
GS

(NOTE 1)
0.87Kvar

(NOTE 1)
7Kvar

(NOTE 1)
0.87Kvar

(NOTE 1)
7Kvar

(NOTE 1)
0.87Kvar

NOTES
1. 전기설비부문 의무사항 2항에 의거

RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
HALL (130-R07) EUH
0-611-M-HX11

2/C #10

3
KW

2. THE 120/208V AC DIST. PNL FEEDER BREAKERS ARE 50AF
THERMAL MAGNETIC TYPE MCCB.
3. SSOR DENOTES SOLID STATE OVERLOAD RELAY WHICH HAS A FUNCTION
OF THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION.

4. SPACE HEATER DOES NOT HAVE A DESIGNATED COMPARTMENT NO.
5. INTERPOSING RELAY SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR NEMA SIZE 3,4 MAGNETIC
CONTACTOR.

FROM 120V AC PNL
IN MCC
0-826-E-MC09

3/C #10

3/C #10
1.5
KW

ROLL UP DOOR
0-221-A-DO-R05

3/C #10
13
KW
RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
STAIR 2 EUH
0-611-M-HX09

3/C #10
2
HP
RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT
ROOM ACCU FAN
0-611-M-HV08

3/C #4
24
HP
RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT
ROOM ACCU
COMPRESSOR
0-611-M-HV08

3/C #10
2
HP
RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
CRANE CONTROL ROOM
ACCU FAN
0-611-M-HV06

3/C #6
17.5
HP
RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
CRANE CONTROL ROOM
ACCU COMPRESSOR
0-611-M-HV06

2
HP
RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
OFFICE ACCU FAN
0-611-M-HV04

C 3/C #10

: 모든 전동기(3Φ, 1.5KW 이상)는 [내선규정의 콘덴서 부설용량 제정
기준표] 역률개선용 콘덴서를 설치한다.

REFERENCE DWG
FACILITY POWER BLOCK : 1-820-E140-001

120/208V AC DIST. PNL
0-826-E-MC09-C2

MCC SPACE HTR
0-826-E-MC09

2/C #10

MCC SPACE HTR
0-826-E-MC07

2/C #10

01
03
05
07

MOTOR SPACE HTR
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR
0-121-A-DO12

2/C #10 09 2/C #10

11
13
15
17
19
21
23

20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 30A 30A 40A 40A 50A 50A A B

*Preparer : 김태훈 , Tel : 054-421-6544
02

2/C #10 04 2/C #10

HVAC TERM. BOX
0-611-W-0001
AUTO SLIDING DOOR
0-121-A-DO13

06
08

SPARE

10
12
14

2 12/23/20 GENERAL REVISION 1 02/01/19 FINAL ISSUE 20 0 03/12/18 CONSTRUCTION ISSUE 22 REV. DATE DESCRIPTION 16 SPARE 18 PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED 24

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG

C
N

11E60M11_SLD.VST A

4-6-4
8

7 6 5 A

SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
480V MCC 0-826-E-MC09
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER

4 3 2 0-826-E140-009 SHEET 1/1 JOB NO. RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY SCALE REV. 11G79

N
Ⅱ/Ⅲ

NONE 2 1 A1 (841X594 mm) 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

1
Spec: :0-824-E208
0-824-E208
Spec
Rev. 0
Rev. 1

PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER Att 4-6 0-824-E143-001 CLOSE TRIP INDICATION

480V LC BUS
GROUND FAULT

A
P

BREAKER CONTROL CLOSE CONTACTS

A
T

51GN
R
13
1

52 E

FU
8A

A1 A11 B1 B11

3
4

86 14 A X 12 LOCATION DESCRIPTION 8 A LOAD CENTER B PCMS CABINET

61
33

E 62 G

CT
600/5A

A19 A3 A7

CLOSE INT MECH.
DWG: 0-824-E143-005

A1 A9 F 49TX D A2 86

TRIP INT. MECH.
DWG: 0-824-E143-005
C

A2
b

A20 86 A8 INFORMATION ONLY B 51GN 49T A 4

TIME
INST

A1 c 3 X T 24 86

DISCONNECT
LINK

2 22 26

HS
CLOSE

1
1

FAN CONTROL
PANEL DWG.
PNS NO.
E208-DE-C01-01

480-120/240V
3KVA

21
49T

HS
TRIP

2 (DWG : 0-824-E143-003) OC/SC

125V DC SUPPLY AT 480V LC

LT
ST

G 7

3 POSITION SPRING
RETURN TO NORMAL
& PISTOL GRIP
HANDLE WITH TARGET

CLOSE DECK

C
TRIP

POSITION
NORMAL

B TRIP F

HAND SWITCH DEVELOPMENT & ESCUTCHEON

FU
10A

B 3 C 4

FU
10A

NOTES
1.

SYMBOL DENOTES PULLED WIRE LOCATION.

2. CELL SWITCH 33 CONTACTS SHOWN WITH
BRKR IN OPERATING POSITION.

33
13

A
A

B 22

22
49T

C 86

34
52
TAS

14
A
3C

41
52
b

43
52
a

45
52
b

47
52
a

46 67

49
52
b

52
a
50

71
33

68 69 33

74
33

72 52 CONTACT SPARES 73 33

33
75

33 76 78 79

33
82

SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM : 0-824-E140-003

CLOSE & TRIP
SWGR FEED
TO L/C BRKR
SEE BELOW TABLE
* PREPARE : 이창수, TEL : 054-421-7461

11
33

REFERENCE DRAWINGS

LOGIC DIAGRAM : 0-824-E158-001
B

81
33

23 3R

TO PCMS CAB.
FOR MONITORING LIGHT,
SEE BELOW TABLE

77 86 A B

TO PCMS CAB.
FOR MONITORING LIGHT.
SEE BELOW TABLE

21
86

FROM 6.9 Kv SWGR
(SW01)

B 16 25 28 14

52
a

12
86

33
13

83 33 CONTACT SPARES 18 B

15
86
17

1 01/03/19 FINAL ISSUE 0 04/24/18 CONSTRUCTION ISSUE REV. DATE DESCRIPTION 86 CONTACT SPARES PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED

TABLE
A

LOAD CENTER
BRKR NO.

0-824-E-LC03-A2

TO SWGR (86)
HAND SWITCH NO.

SWGR BRKR NO. HS-401 1-822-E-SW01-D1 B PCMS CAB REMARK LATER -

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG

A
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
480V LOAD CENTER INCOMING BREAKER
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER

4-6-5
4-6-5
8

7 6 5 4 3 2 0-824-E143-001 SHEET 1/1 JOB NO. RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY SCALE REV. 11G79

N
Ⅲ

NONE 1 1 A1 (841X594 mm) 6 5 4 3 2 1 PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER TRIP INDICATION 480V LC BUS GROUND FAULT FU A A 3A P

CONTROL SWITCH DEVELOPMENT & ESCUTCHEON

FU
10A

B P11 TO PCMS CAB F

CS
BREAKER CONTROL

POSITION
DECK

0-824-E143-002 CLOSE F

: 0-824-E208
Spec : Spec
0-824-E208
Rev. 1 Rev. 0

Att 4-6

C
CLOSE

CONTACTS
TRIP

TRIP

50GS
7
52

3 POSITION SPRING
RETURN TO NORMAL
& PISTOL GRIP
HANDLE WITH TARGET

R
26

(DWG : 0-824-E143-003) E 3

CS
CLOSE

4 12 1 G 2 3 4 X

1
X

TARGET

24
125V DC SUPPLY AT 480V LC

OC/SC R 86

LT
IT

1 CLOSE 7 NORMAL 8 8

CS
TRIP

2
TO PCMS
CAB

TO PCMS
CAB

1 2 A LOCATION DESCRIPTION A A LOAD CENTER B PCMS CAB. E

25
86
27

G
86
A1

D A19 A3 A7

CLOSE INT MECH.
DWG : 0-824-E143-005

A9 F D INFORMATION ONLY 86

TRIP INT. MECH.
DWG : 0-824-E143-005
C

A2 A20 86 A8

B
NOTES

FU
N11

10A N FU TO PCMS CAB 1. A

3A
GROUND
SENSER

2. CELL SWITCH 33 CONTACTS SHOWN WITH
BRKR IN OPERATING POSITION.

50GS

3. THIS CIRCUIT IS NOT SUPPLIED FOR XFMR LOAD
FU
6A
91

B C TO LOAD 120V AC LC BUS PTS

A
A

33
92
33

52
a

34 C

120V AC SUPPLY AT 480V LC

4 C

SYMBOL DENOTES PULLED WIRE LOCATION.

1
RTM
2

31
32

52
b

33 84 22 22 33 86

85
28

52
BA

52
a

34 35 37

52
b

36 38

52
a

41
33

72 42

52
a

74
33

REFERENCE DWG

75
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM : 0-824-E140-003

A
A

MOTOR
SPACE
HEATER

A 3C A

3R
B

A A A A LOGIC DIAGRAM : LATER

3G
B

A
TO ANN. CKT
DWG : 0-824-E143-003

SPARE TO PCMS CAB.

* PREPARE : 이창수, TEL : 054-421-7461

B B

35
36

52
b

39
40

52
b

43
44

67
52
b

77
33

68 33

81
33

33
79

12
33

82 33

16
86

18 11 15

86
14

86
13

21
86

17 1 01/03/19 FINAL ISSUE 0 04/24/18 CONSTRUCTION ISSUE REV. DATE DESCRIPTION

86
23

PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
52 CONTACT SPARES

33 CONTACT SPARES 86 CONTACT SPARES A A

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
480V LOAD CENTER
TYPICAL MOTOR LOAD FEEDER BREAKER
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER

4-6-6
4-6-6
8

7 6 5 4 3 2 0-824-E143-002 SHEET 1/1 JOB NO. RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY SCALE REV. 11G79

Ⅲ
N

NONE 1 1 A1 (841X594 mm) 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

SpecSpec
: : 0-824-E208
0-824-E208
Rev.Rev.
10

PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER Att 4-6 0-824-E143-003 480V LC BUS A

VOLTEMTER SWITCH DEVELOPMENT & ESCUTCHEON

B F 1 VOLTMETER C

UNDERVOLTAGE RLY
27-1

UNDERVOLTAGE RLY
27-2

B-C
A-B

v A 4 2 8 6 C

3
B

2-PT'S
480-120V

5 7 4 3 4 3

POSITION
OFF

C-A 1 2 3 4

SW. (VS)
5
4 POSITION
KNURLED HANDLE 7
@ LOAD CENTER

OFF
FU
3A

CONTACTS A-B B-C F C-A

X
X
X

8 X X X VS 1 20 18 16 19 17 15 TS-1

A
C

FU
8A

B E

8
2

125V DC BUS UNDERVOLTAGE

POWER FAIL
27-1

12 A A B2 B2

XFMR TEMP
INCOMING BREAKER
HIGH
INOPERABLE
DWG:0-824-E143-001

FEEDER ELEC. PROTECTION
DWG:0-824-E143-002,004,006

CLOSES
BELOW
TAP
VALUE

11
12

7 22

6
74

49T

22
86

3 5 28 25

A
K2A03
B

A
K2A02
B

A
K2A01
B

52
BA

22
86

28 25

TO OTHER
CONTACTS FOR
MCC FEEDER BRKR OR
NON MOTOR LOAD

52
BA

INFORMATION ONLY

A
K2A04
B

NOTES
1. SYMBOL DENOTES PULLED WIRE LOCATION.
2. EXTERNAL POWER & INTERNAL JUPMER CONNECTIONS
WILL BE SHOWN ON DWG(V/D)

TO PCMS CABINET C D 4 27-1

CLOSES
BELOW
TAP
VALUE

11 74 SPARES TO RTM D E

8
74

FU
20A

A
P09
D

REFERENCE DRAWINGS A 8

7
27-1

5
27-2

FU
20A

74
6

TO EACH MOTOR FEEDER 7 X16 MCCB 2P 100AF/20AT R2

SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM : 0-824-E140-003
LOGIC DIAGRAM : 0-824-E158-001,002,003
L/C V/P : LATER

120VAC FOR MOTOR SPACE HETER

R1 D

125V DC CONT. POWER FOR FEEDER BRKRS
(DWG:0-824-E143-002)

MCCB 2P 100AF/20AT MCCB 2P 100AF/20AT

DISTRIBUTION (0-841-E-DP05)

BACK-UP 125V DC CONT. POWER

NORMAL 125V DC CONT. POWER
DISTRIBUTION PNL (0-841-E-DP05)

FU
20A

125V DC CONT. POWER FOR FEEDER BRKRS

P10

* PREPARE : 이창수, TEL : 054-421-7461

B U16 1 01/03/19 FINAL ISSUE 0 04/24/18 CONSTRUCTION ISSUE REV. DATE DESCRIPTION

N10
D

N09
D

FU
20A

A PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG

A
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
480V LOAD CENTER AUX. COMPARTMENT PART
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER

4-6-7 4-6-7 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0-824-E143-003 SHEET 1/1 JOB NO. RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY SCALE REV. 11G79

N
Ⅲ

NONE 1 1 A1 (841X594 mm) 7 6 5 4 2

1
0-824-E208
Spec : Spec :
0-824-E208
Rev. 1 Rev. 0

0-824-E143-004 480V LC BUS TRIP INDICATION P

GROUND FAULT
FU
10A

CONTROL SWITCH DEVELOPMENT & ESCUTCHEON

CS
BREAKER CONTROL

POSITION
DECK

51G
C
TRIP

13 CLOSE

CONTACTS
TRIP

INST
26

R 86 52 E (DWG : 0-824-E143-003) OC/SC

125V DC SUPPLY AT 480V LC

24
LT
ST

3 1

CS
CLOSE

4 2

3 POSITION SPRING
RETURN TO NORMAL
& PISTOL GRIP
HANDLE WITH TARGET

T TIME T 12 14 8

CS
TRIP

G 1 2 3 4 CLOSE PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER

Att 4-6
CLOSE

F 3 NORMAL 8 X

1
X

E
61
33
62

G
86
A1

D A19 A3 A7

CLOSE INT MECH.
DWG:0-824-E143-005

A9 F INFORMATION ONLY 86

TRIP INT MECH.
DWG:0-824-E143-005

C
A2

A20 86-1 E8 B FU NOTES 10A N 1.

SYMBOL DENOTES PULLED WIRE LOCATION.

2. CELL SWITCH 33 CONTACTS SHOWN WITH
BRKR IN OPERATING POSITION.
3

CT
300/5A

51G
4

C 32

22
86

38 25 C

52
TAS

REFERENCE DWG
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM : 0-824-E140-003

A
A

B L/C V/P : LATER C A TO MCC OR PACKAGE FDR A

TO ANN. CKT
DWG:0-824-E143-003
* PREPARE : 이창수, TEL : 054-421-7461

67
39

41
52
b

43
52
a

45
52
b

47
52
a

52
b
48

71 74 77 81

49
52
a
50

33
68

69 33

33
72

73 33

33
75

33 76

33
78

33 79

33
82

33 CONTACT SPARES 52 CONTACT SPARES 11 13 18 B

15
86

33
83

86
17

1 01/03/19 FINAL ISSUE 0 04/24/18 CONSTRUCTION ISSUE REV. DATE DESCRIPTION

86 CONTACT SPARES
PREPARED

CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG

A A

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
480V LOAD CENTER
MCC & PACKAGE FEEDER BREAKER
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER

4-6-8 4-6-8 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0-824-E143-004 SHEET 1/1 JOB NO. RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY SCALE REV. 11G79

N
Ⅲ

NONE 1 1 A1 (841X594 mm) 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER 0-826-E143-001 F

Spec : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1

Att 4-6

SCHEME #1
NON-50GS LOAD FEEDER
480V MCC BUS

SCHEME #2
50GS LOAD FEEDER
480V MCC BUS

SCHEME #3
VOLTAGE MONITORING
480V MCC BUS

A A A B B

B
27-1

27-2 C C C F 1 VS 1A V1 1 2

480-120V
52

1A V2 3 4 V 0-600V 52

5 6
1A
7 8

E E

R
UNDERVOLTAGE
1A
Tb1
27-1
Tc2
Tb1
27-2
Tc2
A1
27X
A2
INCOMING
7

D D 8

COMMON ALARM
A
A

B A B EACH MOTOR FEEDER BREAKER TRIP

BREAKER TRIP OR
CONTROL POWER FAIL

50GS CONTROL
BUS
POWER FAIL UNDERVOLATAGE

A C EACH NON-MOTOR FEEDER A C

B
K1A01

C C

NON-MOTOR LOAD
& PACKAGE TYPE
MOTOR LOAD

C
SCHEME #1
10
(NOTE 3)

C
21
74
22

21
27X

8 22

52
ALT

MCC INTERNAL
JUMPER TO
OTHER FDR´S
BREAKER TRIP
ALARM SWITCH

52
a
7

31 8 74

52
ALT

MCC INTERNAL
JUMPER TO
OTHER FDR´S
SAME ALARM

TO PCMS CAB.
FOR MCC
TROUBLE
ALARM

10
11

1
RESET
2

50GS 10

50GS
2

11 SPARE B SCHEME #5

EACH NON-MOTOR
(50GS) FEEDER

3A SCHEME #3

50GS/
RESET

FROM EACH MOTOR FEEFER
SCHEMATIC DWG

SCHEME #1,2

EACH NON-MOTOR
(50GS) FEEDER

1
74

50GS
4

1
RESET
2

6
50GS
4

1
50GS

50GS 2 2 3

3
52
SHT

52
SHT

Y 5 5

50GS/
RESET

TO OTHER FDR'S 50GS CIRCUIT

A
6

LOGIC DIAGRAM : 0-824-E-158-002,
0-826-E-158-001
* PREPARE : 이창수, TEL : 054-421-7461

B 13

31
27X

14 13

43
27X

27X
44

31
74

74
32

74
44

AB CA OFF SPARE 5 07/17/24 FINAL ISSUE 0 04/24/18 CONSTRUCTION ISSUE REV. DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED

VOLTMETER SWITCH DEVELOPMENT & ESCUTCHEON

VS 6 1 43

BC
SPARE

PCMS CAB
CAB NO
WIRE NO
0-771-J-LATER
K1A01P, K01P
0-771-J-LATER
K1A02P, K01P
0-771-J-LATER
K1A03P, K01P

0-826-E-MC07
0-826-E-MC08
0-826-E-MC09

SCHEME #5 SCHEME #3 B MCC

CONTACTS OFF AB BC CA
1
2
X
3

4 5 6 7 8

4-6-9(Final)
7

SPARE LOCATION DESCRIPTION

52*
(NOTE 3)
1
RESET
2

REFERENCE DWGS 5 B C

52
SHT

Y K01P 8

52
a

3 A A C

1. SYMBOL DENOTES PULLED WIRE LOCATION.
2. THIS BRKR IS PROVIDED FOR SHUNT TRIP 120V AC
CONTROL CIRCUIT OF LOADS WITH 50GS RELAY.
3. THESE CONTACTS ARE PROVIDED FOR TROUBLE
ALARM OF SHUNT TRIP 120V AC CONTROL CIRCUIT.

32 A 480-120V NOTES 4

1
52
a

LOAD 6

SCHEME #5
50GS CIRCUIT
480V MCC BUS

B LOCATION DESCRIPTION SCHEME #2

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG

X
X
X

A X X

TYPICAL SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
480V MCC
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER

4 3 2 0-826-E143-001 SHEET 1/1 JOB NO. RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY SCALE REV. 11G79

N
Ⅱ/Ⅲ

NONE 1 1 A1 (841X594 mm) ATTACHMENT 4-7

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1

Form. Parent Component Design Functions
And
Classification Evaluation Sheet

TC 4-7-1 (Final) ATTACHMENT 4-7

Spec. : 0-824-E208
Rev. 1

Form. Parent Component Design Functions and Classification Evaluation Sheet

1. Evaluation Sheet No. 2. Station/Unit(s)

3. System/Component Identification
System

480V Load Centers & Motor Control Centers

Component

Load Centers &
Component Tag No.
Motor Control Centers

Specification No. 0-824-E208 Supplier/Manufacturer

4. Component Design Functions Evaluation
Design Function

Design Function Description
Refer to Section 4.05.A.

5. Component Classification
Radwaste Safety
Category(RSC)

□ I ■ II □ III Seismic Category □ I □ II ■ III Quality Class 6. References 4-7-1 (Final) ■ AQ □ NQ

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/ STORAGE BUILDING

APPENDIX 4A1
Appendix 4A1(Quality Assurance Program
Requirements)

KEPCO E&C JOB No. : 11G79

ISSUE STATUS 0 04/25/18 General Revision REV. NO DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED

Preparer : 정영수, Tel : 054-421-7855

LILW 2nd Radwaste R/S Building

APPENDIX 4A1
Quality Assurance Program Requirements

KEPCO E&C JOB NO. : 11G79

ISSUE STATUS

0
REV. NO.

Issue for Use
DATE

DESCRIPTIONS PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED

작성자 : 정영수 전화 : 054-421-7855

Appendix 4A1
Rev. 0

TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Title Page 1.0 SCOPE 4A1-1 2.0 TERMINOLOGY 4A1-1 3.0

QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM CRITERIA

4A1-2 4.0

QUALITY ASSURANCE MANUAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT (AQ Class)

4A1-4 TC 4A1-1(Final)

Appendix 4A1
Rev. 0

1.0 SCOPE 1.1

This appendix applies to the supplier and the sub-supplier of items and services and the
construction contractor (hereinafter called as supplier) as specified in the contract.

1.2

The supplier shall establish and implement an acceptable quality assurance program which wholly
or selectively complies with the “Quality Assurance Program Criteria in Sec. 3.0” depending upon
the work scope of the contract and the quality level of material, equipment and services supplied.
A comparative matrix table which shows conformance to the applied quality assurance program
requirements and the justification for the selective application, shall be included in the quality
assurance program.

1.3

The quality system, policy, organization, responsibility, requirements (and including a list of
procedures as necessary) necessary for control and assurance of quality throughout all phases of
the contract shall be documented and implemented.

1.4

The requirements specified in the contract (general conditions, special conditions, and technical
specification) have priority over the requirements of this appendix. If the supplier believes that an
inconsistency and an ambiguity exists between this appendix and the contract, the supplier shall
immediately notify the Buyer, and shall proceed relevant activities only after obtaining the Buyer's
acceptance.

1.5

The supplier may delegate any or all activities to the sub-supplier. The supplier shall assure that
the sub-supplier is subjected to the same applicable quality assurance requirements of this
appendix.

2.0 TERMINOLOGY 2.1

Buyer: KOREA RADIOACTIVE WASTE AGENCY (KORAD) and his authorized agents.

2.2

Supplier: An entity which provides services, equipment, components, fabrication, construction,
etc. with the Buyer in accordance with contract requirements. As all-inclusive term used in place
of any of the followings: vendor, seller, construction contractor, fabricator, consultant and their
sub-tier levels.

2.3

Controlled Copy: A copy of the supplier's documents which is marked with a controlled copy
number through which current status shall be maintained by transmittals of revisions, additions,
and deletions.

2.4

Procedure: Written requirements which specify operational steps, how an activity is to be
performed, and assign responsibilities for reaching objectives.
4A1-1

Appendix 4A1
Rev. 0

2.5

Quality Assurance Manual (QA Manual): A written document which prescribes quality assurance
program requirements so that all quality related activities are systematically performed and
controlled in accordance with regulatory requirements, contract requirements, codes and
standards.

2.6

Laws concerning nuclear regulation: Nuclear Safety Act, the Enforcement Decree of the Nuclear
Safety Act, NSSC Regulations and Notices.

2.7

Regulatory Body: Nuclear Safety and Security Commission (NSSC) or its agent, Korea Institute
of Nuclear Safety (KINS).

2.8

AQ-Class Items: Items or related services which are covered under Radioactive Waste Safety
Class I, II or Seismic Category I, II.

2.9

NQ-Class Items: Items or related services that are not AQ-Class.

2.10

CFISs (Counterfeit, Fraudulent, Suspect Items): All items which are not authentic.

3.0

QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM CRITERIA

3.1 General 3.1.1

The regulatory requirements and applicable codes and standards effective as of February 28, 2017
shall be used except described otherwise herein.

3.1.2

The Supplier shall identify a management position that retains overall authority and responsibility
for the Quality Assurance Program (normally, this position is the QA Manager). This position is
at the same or higher organization level as the highest line manager directly responsible for
performing activities affecting quality(such as engineering, procurement, production, and
construction)and has no other duties or responsibilities unrelated to QA that would prevent his
full attention to QA matters.

3.1.3

In case QA records are controlled as electronic media, the control measures, including
requirements for retrieval of stored information and duration life of media, shall be established
and implemented.

3.1.4

In case QA program is established based on ISO 9001 Quality Management requirements, a
comparative matrix table which shows conformance to the applied quality assurance program
criteria and justification for the selective application shall be included in the quality assurance
program.

4A1-2

Appendix 4A1
Rev. 0

3.1.5

In case the Supplier is not capable of conducting the tests and inspections using its own
equipment, the originals of QVDs (Quality Verification Documents) shall be submitted directly to
the Buyer by the institution which has conducted the relevant tests and inspections immediately
after having completed the test and inspections. The Supplier shall also submit the copies of the
QVDs to the Buyer. All QVDs submitted to the Buyer shall be self-checking for the truth.

3.2

AQ-class Quality Assurance Program Criteria

3.2.1

The Supplier (Domestic or Foreign) who performs work relevant to Quality Class AQ shall
establish a QA program to meet applicable quality assurance requirements.

3.2.1.1 Domestic Supplier (including Sub-Supplier)
NSSC Notice No. 2014-55 “Quality Assurance Criteria for Radioactive Waste Disposal Facility”
3.2.1.2 Foreign Supplier (including Sub-Supplier)
US NRC NUREG-1293, Rev.1 “Quality Assurance Guidance for a Low-Level Radioactive Waste
Disposal Facility”
3.3

NQ-class Quality Assurance Program Criteria
For NQ-class items, it is required to define and establish the QA program (e.g. ISO 9001, Quality
Management Systems- Requirements or equivalent) to perform quality activities in accordance
with the item's characteristics and the contract requirements. In case a quality assurance program
is specifically required by the applicable regulatory requirements, code and standards in the
contracts, the supplier with himself shall establish and implement a QA Manual to meet those
quality requirements.

3.4

Requirements for detection and prevention of Counterfeit/Fraudulent, Suspect Items (CFSI)

3.4.1

The Supplier shall establish and implement an acceptable program for CFSI control. If needed,
completeness of goods shall be confirmed through sample test, etc., at its own expense.

3.4.2

The Suppler shall not submit forged·falsified or any other wrongful QVDs (Quality Verification
Documents) to the Buyer in relation to the contract fulfillment. If the Supplier fails to do so, he or
she shall be subject to criminal penalties, constraint to participation in tenders as an unjust
supplier, cancellation of registration onto and prohibition on reentrance into Buyer’s qualified
suppliers’ list of quality related equipment and materials, claims for damages, and so on.

4A1-3

Appendix 4A1
Rev. 0

4.0

QUALITY ASSURANCE MANUAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT (AQ Class)

4.1

Tenderers/Contractors shall submit a QA Manual with tender or after award in accordance with
this appendix.

4.2

The Tenderer/Contractor, who has submitted a controlled copy of his QA Manual for the same
quality class, previously in this project, which has been accepted by the Buyer in accordance with
this appendix, need only submit documented evidence to provide commitment that the controlled
copy is applicable to the scope of the work involved in the Tender/Contract.
Documented evidence shall also address the current revision number, and identify the
procurement specification number for which the Tenderer/Contractor had submitted the
previously approved QA Manual.

4.3

The Tenderer who holds any certificate according to applicable code and standard, such as a
KEPIC / ASME Certificate of Authorization, ISO Certificates and other accredited authorization,
shall submit a copy of his current certificates for reference.

4A1-4(Final)

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/ STORAGE BUILDING

APPENDIX 4B
Appendix 4B(Quality Surveillance
Requirements)

KEPCO E&C JOB No. : 11G79

ISSUE STATUS 0 05/15/18 Construction issue REV. NO DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED

Preparer : 이동기, Tel : 054-421-7874

Appendix 4B
Rev. 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION TITLE PAGE 1.0 SCOPE 4B-1 2.0 TERMINOLOGY 4B-1 3.0

CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS

4B-2 4.0

QUALITY PLAN SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

4B-2 5.0

BUYER’S QUALITY SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS

4B-3 6.0 NONCONFORMANCE CONTROL 4B-5 7.0

SUPPLIER DEVIATION CONTROL

4B-5 8.0

QUALITY PROGRAM VERIFICATION (QPV)

4B-6

Attachment
1. Recommended Form of Supplier Quality Plan

TC 4B-1 (Final)

Appendix 4B
Rev. 0

1.0 SCOPE 1.1

This Appendix describes the Buyer's quality surveillance authority, quality
surveillance method and the Contractor's quality control responsibility, etc. for the
work process of material or equipment manufacturing, repair or installation as
specified in Technical Specification.

2.0 TERMINOLOGY 2.1

Buyer : Korea Radioactive Waste Agency (KORAD) and its representative

2.2

Contractor : An entity who provides equipment, fabrication, construction, components
and services to the Buyer. As all-inclusive term used in place of any of the following :
vendor, seller, contractor, supplier, fabricator and their subtier levels

2.3

Quality Plan (or Inspection & Test Plan) : A formal document which describes the
inspection and tests including supplied items, work process, applied documents and the
witness and hold points, etc. Quality Plan shall be prepared by the Contractor and
reviewed by the Buyer in advance of the work start.

2.4

Witness Point : An important step in manufacturing and testing whereby the Contractor
shall advise the Buyer by letter in advance of the operation. The Contractor may
proceed with the work past the witness point only if the Buyer has accepted the
inspection results by signature or advised the Contractor that the Buyer cannot attend.

2.5

Hold Point : A critical step in manufacturing and testing whereby the Contractor shall
not proceed with the work past the hold point without the presence of the Buyer,
unless there is a prior written agreement with the Buyer.

2.6

Release for Shipment : A written document, signed by the Buyer, permitting that the
shipment of materials and/or equipment are available after the completion of quality
surveillance. The Release for Shipment shall be submitted to the Buyer with Quality
Verification Documents on delivery of materials and/or equipment. The delivery of
materials and/or equipment without the Release for Shipment may be refused by the
Buyer but the shipping inspection may be omitted according to circumstances.

2.7

Quality Surveillance : The selective review, observation, and monitoring of processes,
procurements, manufacturing operations, quality control systems, and programs to
determine supplier compliance with contractual quality requirements.

2.8

Inspection : An action that performs examination, investigation or measurement, etc to

4B –1

Appendix 4B
Rev. 0

verify the compliance with the specified requirements for items or services and is
described as quality surveillance, witness inspection or inspection, etc. in this
Appendix.
3.0

CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS

3.1

The Contractor's Quality Inspection Organization shall prepare the related instructions
and procedures, etc. to control the quality inspection in accordance with the
requirements of the contract, the related codes and standards, the design documents
reviewed by the Buyer and Quality Assurance Manual, etc.

3.2

Quality Surveillance includes quality assurance, design, procurement, welding, heat
treatment, nondestructive examination, pressure (hydraulic, pneumatic, vacuum) test,
performance test, coating, packaging, handling, shipping and transportation, etc.

3.3

The Contractor's Quality Inspection shall be completed in advance of the Buyer's
Surveillance Inspection or Authorized Inspection and if not, the Buyer may refuse to
proceed with his surveillance inspection. But the Buyer's and the Contractor's
inspections may be simultaneously performed under impractical situations such as
pressure tests.

3.4

The Contractor shall cooperate with the Buyer for the access to shop and data of the
Contractor and using inspection tools, etc. without charge to the Buyer .

4.0

QUALITY PLAN SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

4.1

(Submittal and Review) The Contractor shall prepare and submit Quality Plan,
describing in detail the inspections and tests during manufacturing, repair and
installation, to the Buyer. The Quality Plan shall be reviewed by the Buyer in advance
of the work start and the Buyer designates witness and hold points in the Quality Plan.

4.2

(Observance of Codes and Standards) Quality Plan shall be prepared to observe
applicable codes and standards specified in the contract.

4.3

(Preparing Method) Quality Plan shall include at least the followings and the typical
example is showed in Attachment 1.
1) Contract No. and name
2) Component name, component No.
3) Quality Plan No. and revision No.
4) Operation, test and examination process
5) Applied documents (procedure, drawing etc.) for each process and revision No.

4B –2

Appendix 4B
Rev. 0

6) Blank for designating the Contractor's inspection points
7) Blank for designating the Buyer's surveillance inspection points
8) Blank for signature verifying inspection result
9) Identification of Quality Verification Documents, etc.

4.4

The Contractor shall not proceed with fabrication without the Buyer's approval of
Quality Plan.

5.0

BUYER’S QUALITY SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS

5.1 General

5.1.1 The Buyer appoints a responsible Quality Surveillance Representative (QS Rep.) who
may perform Initial Visit to the Contractor's shop prior to the start of manufacturing to
consult with necessary matters.
5.1.2 Prior to the start of manufacturing, the Buyer will conduct an initial visit with the
Contractor’s appropriate representative, the quality requirements of the purchase
contract/order and specification, etc. Production shall not start until this meeting is
held or unless Buyer has given a prior approval.
5.1.3 During the initial visit, the Contractor shall furnish the names and addresse s of
material subcontractors, significant components and/or services, such as NDE,
performance testing, etc.
5.1.4 During the initial visit, the Buyer will confirm scope of application and hold/witness
points of the quality plan with the Contractor.
5.2

Manufacturing Inspection

5.2.1 The Contractor shall advise the Buyer's QS Rep. by letter seven(7) working days in
advance of the operation and confirm two(2) working days in advance of the
operation.
5.2.2 Inspection Request Form includes contract No., contract name, inspection item,
inspection process, item No., inspection date, inspection place, the Contractor' person
in charge and his telephone No., etc.
5.2.3 The procedures and drawings applied to manufacturing, test and examination, etc.
shall be reviewed and approved by Buyer according to the contract requirements prior
to the operation.

4B –3

Appendix 4B
Rev. 0

5.2.4 If any nonconformance is found in inspection, the applicable operation shall be held at
the point and reinspected after the required corrective action is completed.
5.2.5 If the Buyer finds any Contractor’s nonconformance, the deficiencies shall be
documented using the Quality Surveillance Deficiency Report(QSDR) which
identifies the procedural requirement found deficient, the type and nature of the
deficiency, and the documentation and/or hardware involved. A copy of this form
shall be given to the Contractor for corrective action.
5.2.6 If the inspection result is satisfactory, the Buyer signs on Quality Plan
(a traveler as necessary) and if not, the Buyer can request the Contractor for corrective
action by Nonconformance Report (NCR) or Corrective Action Request (CAR).
5.3

Shipping Inspection

5.3.1 The items shall be inspected by the Buyer for shipment in the Contractor's shop after
the followings are completed.
1) Completing the submittal of design and quality documents in accordance with
Appendix 4D and the approval by the Buyer
2) Close-out of the disposition or corrective action (NCR, CAR, SDDR, etc.) related to
manufacturing, test, examination and audit
3) Preparation of Quality Verification Documents (CMTR, C of C, Inspection Report and
Record, etc.)
4) Issuing the Contractor's Certificate of Conformance (For materials, CMTR or
Certificate of Compliance shall be provided according to the applicable codes and
standards)
5.3.2 After completing para.5.3.1, the Contractor shall request the Buyer for shipping
inspection. If the shipping inspection result is satisfactory, the Buyer's QS Rep. issues
Release for Shipment and if not, the Buyer can hold the shipping.
5.3.3 The issue of Release for Shipment does not mean the direction for shipment . The
Contractor shall ship the items according to delivery schedule specified in the contract
or the Buyer’s direction.
5.3.4 The Buyer's Release for Shipment does not mean the qu ality assurance of the items.
The Contractor is responsible for any quality problems in manufacturing found after
Release for Shipment.
5.3.5 The detailed requirements for submittal of Quality Verification Documents are in
accordance with Appendix 4E.

4B –4

Appendix 4B
Rev. 0

5.4

Packaging, Handling, Shipping and Transportation Control

5.4.1 The packaging and shipping processes included in Quality Plan shall be witnessed by
the Buyer.
5.4.2 The Contractor shall take necessary measures for the safe delivery of the item during
packaging, handling, shipping and transportation after Release for Shipment.
5.4.3 The Contractor shall take special measures as necessary for heavy products and items
with potential damage during transportation.
6.0

NONCONFORMANCE CONTROL 6.1

Upon finding any nonconformance during manufacturing, test and examination, the
Contractor shall hold the applicable operation and dispose the nonconformance
according to quality assurance requirements.

6.2

When multi-operation process, test and examination are required to d ispose the
nonconformance, a separate Quality Plan shall be prepared for the Buyer’s review.

6.3

The disposition such as use-as-is or repair shall be approved by the Buyer.

6.4

The Contractor shall complete the nonconformance according to the necessary
measures approved by the Buyer and closing NCR shall be verified by the responsible
QS Rep.'s signature.

6.5

The closed NCR of the Contractor shall be included in Quality Verification
Documents.

7.0

SUPPLIER DEVIATION CONTROL

7.1

When the deviations from Purchase Specification requirements occur during
performing the contract, the Contractor shall issue Supplier Deviation Disposition
Request(SDDR) in accordance with Appendix 4H.

7.2

The Contractor shall not ship the material, equipment or service without the close-out
of SDDR.

7.3

SDDR may be issued to dispose NCR and not to substitute for NCR.

7.4

The closed SDDR shall be included in Quality Verification Documents.

4B –5

Appendix 4B
Rev. 0

8.0 QUALITY PROGRAM VERIFICATION (QPV)
8.1 QPV is a modified version of Contractor’s quality program audit. It is performed by the
Buyer to verify on a continuing and progressive basis, the implementation of the
selected quality program elements for safety related items, in producing desired results
in accordance with the contract.

4B –6(Final)

Appendix 4B
Rev. 0

Attachment 1
Recommended Form of Supplier Quality Plan
Page 1 of 3
Supplier:
Client:

Supplier Quality Plan
Project No.:

PNS No.: QP. No. /

Purchase Spec. No./Description

Rev.
Rev.

Quality plan for Rev. Date Form App. 4B, Rev. 0

Revision
Description

Prepared
by
(Supplier)

Reviewed
by
(Supplier)

Approved
by
(Supplier)

Appendix 4B
Rev. 0

Page 2 of 3
Quality Plan Summary
Item Description :

1. Quality Plan List

2. Sequence of Fabrication

Form App. 4B, Rev. 0 QP No. Rev.

Appendix 4B
Rev. 0

Page 3 of 3
Quality Plan Detail
Seq.
No.

Description
of
Operation

QP No.
Reference
Document
No.

Rev.

Inspection WP: Witness Point
Point
; HP: Hold Point
R: Document Review
Form App. 4B, Rev. 0

Rev.

Supplier
Inspection
Point
Point

Verify

Buyer
Inspection
Point
Point

Quality
Verification
Document ;

Quality
VerificaRemarks
tion
Verify Document

W: With QVD

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/ STORAGE BUILDING

APPENDIX 4C
General Requirements for Submittal
Documents

KEPCO E&C JOB No. : 11G79

ISSUE STATUS 0 05/03/18 Construction issue REV. NO DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED

Preparer : 서정욱, Tel : 054-421-6150

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLE PAGE 1.0 GENERAL 4C-1 2.0

SUBMITTAL OF DRAWING AND DOCUMENT

4C-4 3.0 PERMISSION TO PROCEED 4C-5 4.0

DRAWING AND DOCUMENT CONTENTS

4C-8 5.0 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 4C-10 6.0 SAMPLES 4C-11 7.0

QUALITY VERIFICATION DOCUMENTATION

4C-11 8.0 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS 4C-13 9.0

REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRONIC MEDIA

4C-13 10.0

STORAGE AND INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS

4C-18

FOR ELECTRONIC MEDIA
11.0

ELECTRICAL DRAWING REQUIREMENTS

4C-20

ATTACHMENTS
1

SUPPLIER'S TRANSMITTAL 2

DRAWING AND DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE LIST

PLAN VIEW ASSIGNMENT METHOD

INSTRUMENT LOCATION GRID ASSIGNMENT METHOD

INTERNAL WIRING DIAGRAM - CONTROL BOARD

INTERNAL WIRING DIAGRAM - RELAY CABINET

INTERNAL - EXTERNAL WIRING DIAGRAM - TERMINAL BLOCKS

INTERNAL - EXTERNAL WIRING DIAGRAM - LOCAL CONTROL
CABINET

SUPPLIER’S DRAWING/DOCUMENT CHANGE NOTICE

INSPECTION REPORT FOR COMPACT DISC

TC 4C – 1 (Final)

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

1.0 GENERAL 1.1

This appendix provides the requirements for the Suppliers on the content, submittal, and
quality of their drawings and documents (hereinafter called documents) submitted to the
Buyer. The scope includes documents submitted with proposals and after award and all types
of engineering documents such as, but not limited to, design drawings, stress or design
reports, instruction manuals, quality verification documents, samples, manufacturer's data,
engineering data, cuts and diagrams for plumbing fixtures, hardware schedules, information
concerning materials and articles required, etc.

1.2 Definitions 1.2.1

Where the term "design drawings" is used herein, it shall mean “the Buyer’s Design
Drawings" unless otherwise indicated.

1.2.2

Where the term "shop drawings" is used herein, it shall mean "Supplier's shop drawings",
consisting of erection drawings and shop detail drawings, unless otherwise indicated.

1.2.3

Where the term "equipment outline drawings" is used herein, it shall mean Supplier's
drawings that show the general arrangement and overall dimensions of Supplier’s equipment
(such as valves, pumps, heat exchangers, etc.) including, but not limited to, other major
dimensions such as nozzle orientations/locations and sizes, anchoring details, etc.

1.2.4

"Original" - An original reproducible document.

1.2.5

"Reproduction" - Any type of copy of the original document.

1.2.6

“Native file”- Electronic file (2D CAD, 3D CAD, MS-word, Excel, etc.) which was
developed by original software. The original software can read and write this kind of data
file.

1.2.7

"Paper print" - An opaque reproduction such as white print.

1.3

The Buyer’s Project Numbering System (PNS)

1.3.1

In addition to the Supplier's own document number, the Supplier shall assign, for each
document to be submitted to the Buyer in accordance with Appendix 4D, an identification
number based upon the Buyer’s Project Numbering System (PNS) as set forth in Section
1.3.3 of the Appendix.

4C-1

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

1.3.2

The identification number in accordance with the PNS shall be indicated by the Supplier in
document at the upper margin adjacent to the title block of the document as shown in the
following example :

PNS : M213 - DG-A01-01 1.3.3

The numbering per the PNS shall be done as follows ;
a. PNS numbering method :
*
Example

** ***

:
M213

- D G - A 01 - 01

.
Spec. No
Document Category
Document Type
Document Description
Serial Number (Numeric)
Sub-Serial Number (Numeric)

* Specification Number **

Provided by the A/E in Appendix 4D of this Specification
(See Appendix 4D, Column 1)

***

To be assigned by suppliers

4C-2

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

Document Category and Type Reference
Document Category
Symbol

Document Type Description Symbol Description - Submittal With Proposal C Calculation C Schedule and Progress D

System Drawings such
as P&ID, etc.

Design & Engineering
E

Electrical Drawing G

Physical Drawings such as
GA, Layout, Outline,
Foundation Drawing etc.

Instrumentation & Control
Drawing

List, Table and Data Sheet

Quality Assurance/Quality
Surveillance

Manual, Instruction, Guide

S Packing and Shipping P Procedure T Test and Examination R Report V

Quality Verification
Document

S Specification T

Performance or
Characteristic Curve

Z Others E Equipment Qualification I

Site Instruction & Guidelines

Manufacturing and
Fabrication

P
Q

Procurement 4C-3

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

2.0

SUBMITTAL OF DRAWING AND DOCUMENT

2.1 General 2.1.1

Drawings, data or samples required by Appendix 4D or by other specific reference in this
Specification, shall be submitted by and at the expense of the Tenderer/Supplier.

2.1.2

Documents submitted to the Buyer shall be one of the following acceptable sizes :
Korean Size
Code
A0

Document
Size(mm)
1189 x 841

Document
Size(inches)
36 x 48

A1 D 841 x 594 A2 C 594 x 420 A3 B 420 x 297 A4 A 297 x 210

24 x 36
22 x 34
17 x 22
18 X 24
11 x 17
12 X 18
8 1/2 X 11
9 X 12

US Size Code 2.1.3

Design information shall be included in the Drawings. The fact that such design information
may later be included in the instruction and/or operating manuals does not relieve the
Supplier from complying with these requirements.

2.1.4

For local items, Tenderers/Suppliers may submit Korean version for the following
documents;
a. Quality Assurance Program Manual
b. Instruction Manual/Operating and Maintenance Manual
c. Procedures and Reports

2.2 Submittal with Proposal 2.2.1

Each copy of Tenderer’s proposal shall include the drawings and data required in Section 3
and 4 of the Specification.

2.2.2

Proposal Drawings and Data
Drawings and data included as part of the proposal shall show equipment as required by the
Specification.

4C-4

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

2.3 Submittals after Award 2.3.1

After award of contract, Supplier's drawings and documents shall be submitted to the Buyer
in accordance with Appendix 4D.

2.3.2

All drawings and documents resubmitted to the Buyer shall require the change notice using
Attachment 9 with the Supplier’s Transmittal form to minimize the Buyer’s review period.

2.3.3

Detail Drawings and Documents Submittal Schedule List
Upon contract award, the Supplier shall prepare and submit for the Buyer’s review, within 4
(four) weeks after award, a detail list of drawings and documents to be submitted by the
Supplier specified in Appendix 4D. The list shall be prepared using Attachment 2 and shall
include, for each drawing and document, the following information : document number base
upon the PNS & the Supplier’s own identification number, the title to be used by the
Supplier, the submittal purpose ("R" for Review & "I" for Information), the number of
submittal weeks required by Appendix 4D and the scheduled submittal date.
When there are changes on the list, the Supplier shall promptly submit the revised list for the
Buyer’s review. All the changes will be identified by revision bars in the right-hand margin
adjacent to the revision items.

2.3.4

The Supplier's Transmittal shown in Attachment 1 shall accompany drawings, documents,
etc. All submittals received without transmittal form will be returned to the Supplier. The
Supplier is responsible for reproducing Attachment 1 in sufficient quantity for his submittals.

2.3.5

All submittals shall be transmitted to the Buyer by first class mail, express mail, hand
carried, etc. Regarding submittals transmitted from foreign countries, the Supplier should
use registered air mail or overnight express mail such as Federal Express, DHL, etc. The
Supplier shall not send any invoices with the shipment. It is recommended that the
Supplier declare the shipment simply, as "Printed Materials - No Commercial Value".

2.3.6

All U.S. size "B" and Korean size "A3" and smaller documents shall be mailed flat
(unfolded) with chip board protectors on top and bottom of the transmittal. All other
documents shall be rolled (unfolded) inside regular mailing tubes. The inside diameter of
the rolled documents shall be no less than 1 1/2 inches.

3.0 PERMISSION TO PROCEED 3.1

No design drawings, data, etc., will be considered for review which are not complete in all
respects and which have not been thoroughly checked by the Supplier. No design drawings,
data, etc., will be considered for review which cover features that are contingent upon
review of other features for which the Supplier has not submitted drawings, etc., for review.

4C-5

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

3.2

For shop drawings, one paper print of each submitted shop drawing will be returned to the
Supplier marked with the Buyer's stamped review status, comments, and corrections or
changes. Upon receipt of the returned print, the Supplier shall promptly incorporate these
comments, corrections, or changes on that drawing and resubmit it for review as many times
as required until the returned print is stamped with Status 1, and with no corrections or
changes. Such procedure shall not be considered a cause for delay.

3.3

Proper erection drawings shall be submitted with each set of shop detail drawings to indicate
correct location of all members submitted for review. Shop detail drawings submitted
without erection drawings will be returned to the Supplier without review. Erection
drawings showing members for which no shop details have been provided must be
resubmitted when these shop details are submitted for review.

3.4

The Buyer will review the drawings, data, etc., for compliance with the Specifications and
will mark and stamp to them indicate whether changes or corrections are required. If
changes or corrections are necessary, drawings, data, etc., with such changes or corrections
noted will be returned to the Supplier. The Supplier shall resubmit the corrected or changed
drawings, data, etc. All changes, corrections, etc., shall be clearly indicated.

3.5

Drawing and document submitted by the Supplier will be processed by the Buyer within
fifty (50) calendar days after receipt. Documents classified as status 4 or 5 will not be
returned to Supplier. Their status will be indicated on the transmittal only. Documents
classified as status 1,2,3,6 or U will be returned with status stamp and/or marked comments.
The definitions of the status are :
Status 1: No exception taken. Supplier may proceed with fabrication or construction in
accordance with the Specification.
Note: Requests for additional information or documents shall be made in the
remarks section of the Supplier Transmittal (Return Copy)
Status 2: Supplier may proceed in accordance with the Specification based on making
revisions as noted and resubmit.
Status 3: Revise as noted and resubmit. Hold-related work.
Status 4: The document is to be distributed for the Buyer and A/E information according to
project distribution requirements. However, the document may be used for
construction, operation and permanent records.
Status 5: The document is to be used for A/E information only.
Status 6: Void or superseded. This document is not applicable.

4C-6

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

Note : The proper box shall be marked to indicate the reason for processing the
document.

"Void" shall be marked when there is no other document replacing the

voided document.

"Superseded" shall be marked when other documents are being issued

replacing the superseded document.
Status U: This status, which is to be determined and stamped by DDCC only, means that the
document is unacceptable for reproduction and should be resubmitted.
The "Status U" stamp shall be applied at the receiving phase.
3.6

Any action shown in Article 3.5 above is subject to the terms of the contract and does not
relieve the Supplier from his obligations under the contract, including design and detailing.
The Buyer's review of shop drawings shall not be interpreted as constituting approval of the
adequacy of the shop drawings for their use. Permission to proceed does not constitute
acceptance or approval of design details, calculations, analysis, test methods, or materials
developed or selected by the Supplier and does not relieve the Supplier from full compliance
with contractual obligations. Fabrication prior to the Buyer's permission to proceed shall be
at the Supplier 's risk.

3.7

The Supplier shall incorporate changes as required by comments on the drawing(s) or
document(s) and resubmit revised drawing(s) or document(s) within 30 calendar days.
Drawing(s) or document(s) having received previous authorization to proceed shall not be
changed without prior notification to the Buyer. Changes to such drawing(s) or document(s)
shall require resubmittal for the Buyer's permission to proceed.

3.8

The Supplier shall receive "Status 1" for the documents required the Buyer's review before
shipment to the jobsite.

4C-7

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

4.0

DRAWING AND DOCUMENT CONTENTS

4.1

All drawings that are drawn to scale shall have a graphic scale so that any proportional
blowback from the Buyer's reproduction can be scaled.

4.2

All drawings, documents or other data submitted by Supplier shall include, as a minimum,
the following information :
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.

Project Name : 2nd Radwaste R/S Building
The Buyer’s Name : Korea Radioactive Waste Agency (KORAD)
Supplier's Name
Project Numbering System (PNS No.)
Drawing or Document Title and Number and Revision Designation.
Specification Number & Description
Manufacturer's Name & Address (if different from Supplier)
Model Number (if applicable)
Drawing Size. (Drawing only)
The Buyer's Equipment Title and Tag Number and Equipment Location
(Building Name and Elevation)
k. Quality Class (AQ, NQ) and Radwaste Safety Category (I, II, III)
l. Supplier's Certification where applicable
m. North Direction (In the case the Buyer provides the requirements for north direction to
supplier or requests indication of north direction during the Buyer’s review process,
supplier shall indicate the north direction in the supplier’s physical drawings.)

4.3

Each issue of a drawing/document shall include the date of issue, and a description of
revision, if any. Each revised portion of the drawing/document shall be identified by
encircling or revision bar with an appropriate revision letter or number.

4.4

A 3"x6" space shall be provided in the lower right hand corner for the Buyer's status stamp.
Drawings too small or crowded to provide this space shall be printed on a larger size of
paper to provide a 3" wide blank strip on the right border of the drawing.

4.5

Equipment Outline Drawings
All "Equipment Outline Drawings" shall be identified with the following pertinent
information :

4C-8

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

4.5.1

Location of Support and Equipment Mounting Details.
To establish the embedment requirements when the component is mounted directly to the
building structure, Equipment Support Details shall show the following information:
a.

Base plate size and thickness, bolt pattern, bolt size, bolt hole size and bolt material
including each shear and tension load acting on each bolt for bolted mounting type
according to each plant operating condition, or

Welding plan, size, start and end point for welded mounting type according to each plant
operating condition

The Supplier shall use ASTM A36, or ASTM A193 Grade B7 for concrete pad and ASTM A307,
or ASTM A325 for steel pad as mounting bolt material unless otherwise noted. The bolt hole
size for concrete pad shall be as follows, unless notified otherwise.

4.5.2

Bolt Size
≤ 1.0”

Bolt Hole Size
Dia + 1/8”

1 1/8” to 2.0” Dia + 3/16” > 2.0” Dia + 1/4”

Weights and Center of Gravity of Equipment
The weight and the center of gravity of equipment shall be defined for maximum normal
operating, flooded, and dry conditions.
The weight and the center of gravity of any major identifiable sub-assembly or component
shall be identified.

4.5.3

Location of Nozzle Connection (if provided with piping connection)
All nozzles shall be dimensioned from the equipment base reference or centerline to provide
orientation data.

4.5.4

Allowable Forces and Moments (if provided with piping connection)
The equipment supplier shall provide a tabulation of allowable forces and moments at each
nozzle/piping interface oriented to the major axis of the components.
If the maximum forces and moments are related by an equation allowing a variation in the
ratio of forces and moments, this shall also be shown (as applicable).

4.5.5

The weight of complete motor, rotating assembly, rotor part only and shaft only shall be
included in the motor outline drawing.

4C-9

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

4.5.6

Equipment or anchor bolt installation tolerance shall be included in the drawing when
required.

4.6 Erection Drawings 4.6.1

Erection drawings shall be updated by the Supplier to reflect the latest revisions of the
Design Drawings, at each submittal to the Buyer. Issuance of erection drawings shall also
include references to the Buyer's Design Drawings, as well as issue dates of these Design
Drawings.

4.6.2

Each erection drawing shall be identified with "ERECTION DRAWING" in 1/2 inch high
bold lettering just above the title block.

4.7 Shop (Detail) Drawings 4.7.1

Shop (detail) drawings shall indicate in detail for the followings, when required :
a. All materials to be fabricated for the work.
b. Electrical equipment provided by the supplier (outline drawings and wiring diagrams
required).
c. Methods of anchoring.
d. Operating devices.
e. Construction joints, etc.

4.7.2

All shop (detail) drawings shall be clearly referenced to related erection drawings and other
shop (detail) drawings.

4.7.3

Each shop (detail) drawing shall include the building name and location for which the
materials are being furnished.

4.7.4

All shop (detail) drawings to be submitted to the Buyer shall be separated into unique unit, if
requested.

5.0 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 5.1

All submitted drawings or data shall be of sufficiently high quality drafting to permit
reproduction by the Buyer. It is preferable that originals be submitted when possible. If
reproductions of the originals are submitted, they shall be full size and direct-reading. The
reproduction shall be of original quality having sharp, clean, well-defined lines, with a line
density equal to or better than the original.
The lettering shall be large and of an open style permitting reductions down to 30X and
blowback up to 14.5X and remain open with no plugging or loss of legibility. The
reproduction shall maintain an evenly high contrast between image and background over the

4C-10

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

surface of the wing. Reproductions with low contrast or heavy background density with
thin, weak lines and lettering are not acceptable.
5.2

Documents submitted to the Buyer that do not conform to the requirements of this
Specification, shall be subject to reject by the Buyer, and upon request, the Supplier shall
resubmit conforming documents. If conforming submittals cannot be obtained from the
source documents, such source documents shall be retraced, redrawn, or photographically
restored as may be necessary to meet such requirements. Supplier's (or his subsupplier’s)
failure to initially satisfy the legibility quality requirements herein set forth, shall not relieve
the Supplier (or his subsuppliers) from meeting the required schedule for submittal of
documents.

6.0 SAMPLES 6.1

Where samples are required, they shall be submitted by and at the expense of the Supplier.
Such submittals shall be made at least thirty(30) calendar days prior to the time that the
materials represented by such samples need to be purchased for the work. Samples shall be
subject to acceptance, and material represented by such samples shall not be manufactured,
delivered, or incorporated into any work without such acceptance.

6.2

Each sample shall bear a label showing: Supplier's name, project name, name of the item,
manufacturer's name, brand name, model number, as applicable; the appropriate drawing
number; and the applicable section and paragraph number(s) of specification.

7.0

QUALITY VERIFICATION DOCUMENTATION

7.1

The Supplier shall provide quality verification documents such as mill test reports,
hydrostatic test reports, certificates of compliance, etc., as defined throughout the
specification and in applicable codes, standards, etc., and as summarized on the Quality
Verification Documentation List, Appendix 4E.

7.1.1

Certificate of Conformance
A documents signed or otherwise authenticated by an authorized individual certifying the
degree to which items or services meet specified requirements.
a. The certificate should identify the purchased material or equipment.
b. The certificate should identify the specific procurement requirements such as codes,
standards, and other specifications.
c.

The certificate should identify any procurement requirement that have not been met.

d. The certificate should be attested to by a person who is responsible for this quality

4C-11

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

assurance function.
7.1.2

Certified Material Test Report / Material Test Report
A document attesting that the material is in accordance with specified requirements,
including the actual results of all required chemical analysis, tests, and examinations.

7.1.3

Certificate of Compliance
A written statement attesting that the materials are in accordance with specified
requirements.

7.2

Quality verification documents shall clearly identify the material being certified and shall
include, but not limited to, providing the following information: Supplier's name,
specification number, project name, name of the item and reference to the appropriate
drawing.

7.3

For the purpose of material verification, the Supplier shall provide the Buyer with a detailed
list under the "Material Test Property" category to be included in the "QVDL and it's Sample
Forms Listed in Appendix 4E". This detailed list shall consist but not limited to: equipment,
components, parts, module, assembly, material, etc., and the associated document required
such as (certified) material test report, certificate of compliance or "not applicable", shall be
indicated for each item.

7.4

Throughout the work process, the Supplier shall identify individual documents on the QVDL
by serial number and/or attachment number, and shall certify their applicability to the item,
verified by signature and date in the appropriate columns. Following such certification, the
individual documents shall be reviewed by the Buyer/Buyer’s Representative, who will
indicate compliance to the requirement by sign-off on the Appendix 4E form.

7.5

Following completion of fabrication and final inspection, the responsible Buyer/Buyer’s
Representative will verify that all required quality verification documents have been
reviewed and signed off and that copies are available for shipment with material, if required.
The Buyer/Buyer Representative will certify the completion of this requirement by
providing the "acceptance signature" for the specified material or equipment, along with the
necessary quality verification documents. Appendix 4E will serve as the transmittal form
for the quality verification documents that accompany the shipment to the jobsite.

7.6

Additional Information
In addition to the requirements of Appendix 4E and the technical specification, the following
general rules shall apply, as applicable, to determine the quality verification documents to be
prepared by the Supplier.

4C-12

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

7.6.1

The finally assembled equipment will require the following QVDs :
a. Certificate of conformance
b. Test reports or test certificates of the design tests specified in the specification
c.

Final signed-off quality plan

Test reports of the production tests specified in the specification

Final close-out Corrective Action Request (CAR), Non-Conformance Report(NCR) and
Supplier Deviation Disposition Request (SDDR)

7.6.2

Quality class AQ components, module, subassembly, etc. which are parts of the finally
assembled equipment shall require the Certificate of Conformance.

8.0 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS 8.1

All as-built drawings in a electronic file format or equivalent shall be the property of the
Buyer. They shall be turned over to the Buyer, if the Buyer so requests, after of the Work and
after completion incorporation field changes.

8.2

Prior to Supplier's application for payment, and as a condition for an approval of the
payment by the Buyer, the Supplier shall transfer the as-built drawings to the Buyer, if the
Buyer so requests. The Supplier shall deliver the drawings in appropriate containers, indexed
and marked for each part of the Work.

8.3

In the event that the Buyer has not requested delivery of as-built drawings and it is the intent
of the Supplier to destroy these documents, a written approval shall be obtained from the
Buyer prior to destroying them.

9.0

REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRONIC MEDIA

9.1

General
This section describes requirements for high density electronic storage media such as CD
ROMS submitted by the Suppliers to the Buyer. This section specifies requirements for
media recording, submission, and acceptance inspection.

9.2

Definition of Terminology

9.2.1

“Information Media” (hereinafter referred to as Media) means optical storage such as CDROMs, etc. It contains the native document files, drawing image files and drawing vector

4C-13

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

files which may be utilized by computer systems for archiving, retrieval, display and
printing. Media other than industry standard CD-ROMs may be utilized only with prior
approval of the Buyer.
9.2.2

“Drawing and Document file number” means the control number of drawing and document
which is recorded on electronic media. The same number shall be assigned to each media or
format (such as native document file, CAD-image file, and CAD vector file), if multiple
formats are submitted.

9.2.3

“As-Built drawings” shall mean finalized drawings after the completion of plant
construction, and show all aspects of the as-built status.

9.3

Media Submission and Inspection

9.3.1

Submittal item and quantity

Compact Disc for Drawing and Document : Quantity to be adjusted as needed
Data index (sorted by PNS No.) : One(1) set
Inspection report : One (1) set

9.3.2

Submittal and Inspection
a. Supplier shall submit the items listed in Section 9.3.1 to the Buyer in accordance with
Appendix 4D.
b. The Buyer shall confirm that Supplier’s submittal is acceptable by signing the inspection
report. The Supplier shall guarantee that the submitted item and its quantity are
satisfactory and in accordance with the specification.
c. If the quality and quantity do not meet the minimum requirements, the Buyer will
require resubmittal

9.4

Format of Index Data
The basic input elements for Index Data shall be as follows.

4C-14

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

No Index item Width Attribute 1

D/N (Disc-No: CD-ROM No.)

3 AN/F 2

DRAWING / DOCUMENT
FILE NO.

30 AN/V 3 TITLE 80 AN/V 4 SZ (size) 2 AN/F 5 SUPPLIER NAME 30 AN/V 6 REV (Revision) 3 AN/V 7

DATE (Issue date, approval date)

6 N/F

Remark
01A, 01B, 02A…

AL, A0, A1, A2…

F : As-built
001 : first rev.
032507 (MMDDYY)

*N : numeric, AN : alpha numeric V : variable F : fixed
9.4.1

Index fields shall comply with the following requirements:
a. D/N(Disc-No.), “Drawing File No” and/or “Document File No” shall be assigned in
accordance with instructions provided by the Buyer.
b. Drawing size shall be indicated by using two characters such as “A0”, “A1”, etc. If the
drawing size exceeds “A0” in size, “AL” should be used.
c. “Title” column should be filled-in using alphabetical characters and numerics.
d. Supplier name shall not be abbreviated.

9.5

Criteria for production Compact Disc

9.5.1

The file number shall match the PNS number.

9.5.2

Specification for CD-ROMs
CD record format must be compatible with the MS-Windows98 or later version and should
be in accordance with ISO 9660 standard. The Multi-session methodology is not acceptable.

9.5.3

CAD file format
File format may be either DGN (Microstation CAD file) or DWG (AutoCAD 2008 Ed. or
later version).

9.5.4

Document file format (Native Document File)
File format may be either the MS Office file or HWP file.

4C-15

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

9.5.5

Image file format and standards for scanning
a. Image file shall be in TIFF and PDF (Portable Document Format) format per CCITT
Group 4.
b. 200 DPI (dots per inch) or greater is required as a scanning resolution.
c. 1 to 1 is required as a scanning reduction ratio.

9.5.6

Arrangement and configuration of directory and guidelines for the file name assignment.
a. Directory structure shall be as follows ;
\\DWG or Doc\ PNS XXX
File Extension Name
PNS No.

An example of the file name structure is as follows ;
\\ P N S . FFF
File Extension Name (.TIF, .DGN, etc.)
PNS No.

9.5.7

File Storage Structure and Label Attachment
a. Files (CAD, Document, Image) shall be inputted in the appropriate sub-directory
location.
b. A Label shall be attached to the Compact Disc which contains the drawing files or
document files.
The following Label must be attached to Compact Disc Cover
Project Name / DISC No. / PNS No.

c. The following Label must be attached to the CD box.
DISC No. / PNS No.

4C-16

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

d. The following label must be attached to the front side of CD box.
TITLE
Responsible
Person (tel.)
Responsible
Person (tel.)

Buyer
Supplier
Dwg quantity

Disc No. File No.

Completion day
of inspection

Submittal
date

Inspection
Confirmation

Remark 9.6

Inspection and Acceptance Criteria

9.6.1

Procedure for Acceptance Inspection
a. The Supplier shall submit an inspection report per Attachment 10 after an inspection.
b. When a non-conformity is discovered, Supplier shall correct the non-conformity.

9.6.2

Inspection and Criteria for Suitability
a. The Compact Disc inspection shall verify quantity , quality of the material, appearance
and retrieval linkage .
b. Acceptance criteria

Quantity

The product quantity submitted by the Supplier shall match the as-shipped quantity
checked by the Buyer.

Quality of Material

Check points for image cutting, secession, damage, omission, overlapping triangular
position, reversed image, readability and recoverability shall meet the recommendation.

4C-17

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

Appearance

If there are any deficiencies or non-conformities such as label indexing mistakes and
disc damage, the submittal is not acceptable.

Retrieval Linkage

Retrieved data through indexing tools shall match exactly with the image in the
electronic media or actual drawing.

A 10 image reading per disc shall be performed as a minimum to check the retrieval

linkage capability.
10.0

STORAGE AND INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRONIC MEDIA

10.1

The documents to be stored in the form of electronic media shall be the documents that have
been authenticated by the supplier who prepared, reviewed and approved them. The
identification of directories shall be easily understandable and consistent with a written
procedure.

10.2

Tests and inspection of magnetic media shall meet the following requirements:

10.2.1 Inspect magnetic media every 6 months for potential damages.
10.2.2 Test oxidized steel and chromic steel tapes at least every 3 years.
10.2.3 Replace tapes and cartridges with 10 defects and more (saves the data)

Conducts sampling tests on the same lot where the defected tapes or cartridges came from.

10.2.4 For reel tapes that are used for data storage,
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Skip error is allowed at less than 5 times, and error during the initial 100ft distance and
permanent error shall not be allowed.
A scratched or restored tape shall not be used.
A preliminary test of reel tapes for preservation shall be conducted at least 4 times over
the entire process.
For tape of records reservation, path test on the length of one rpm and high-speed
rewinding shall not be permitted
A preliminary test of reel tapes for recording 4 to 10 times shall be conducted before
use, and any error is not allowed in temporary writing.

4C-18

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

10.3

The following storage conditions shall be met for storage facilities, and magnetic media,
optical media and compact disk of electronic records:

10.3.1 Storage conditions for facility
a.

In storage facility any electronic device or non-magnetic device shall not be installed
facility.

b. All media and containers shall be inspected for their access to the facility.
c. The electronic recording media should be protected from an electronic signals.
d. The temperature of 40 ~ 80℉ and relative humidity of 30 ~ 50% shall be kept.
e. No smoking and no food are allowed inside.
10.3.2 Storage conditions for magnetic media
a. Be stored in a vertical rack according to a supplier’s recommendations.
b.

The electronic media that are stored for a permanent or long period should be tested less
than every 6 months before writing.

c. Magnetic reel tapes shall be readable based on a statistical sampling method.
d. 62 ~ 68℉ and 35 ~ 45% humidity, etc.
10.3.3 Storage conditions for optical media
a. The optical media that have been stored for a permanent or long-term storage shall be
replicated before their storage life are expired according to supplier’s recommendations.
10.3.4 Storage conditions for CD-ROM
a. 50 ~ 77℉ and 20 ~ 50% humidity
b. The storage life span of CD-ROMs that are stored for a long term shall be specified.
10.4

The quality assurance records management system of electronic media should comply with
following requirements:
a. Regulatory issue summary 00-018 “Guidance on managing quality assurance records in
electronic media”
b. GL 88-18, “Plant record storage on optical disks”
c. NIRMA, Technical Guide (TG) 11-1998, “Authentication of records and media”
d. NIRMA, Technical Guide (TG) 15-1998, “Management of electronic records”
e. NIRMA, Technical Guide (TG) 16-1998, “Software configuration management and
quality assurance”
f.

NIRMA, Technical Guide (TG) 21-1998, “Electronic records protection and restoration”

4C-19

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

11.0

ELECTRICAL DRAWING REQUIREMENTS

11.1 General

11.1.1 The Supplier shall furnish prints for all necessary data required for an adequate review of the
schematic and wiring diagrams. This information typically consists of:
a. Complete drawings and development for all control and instrument switches, timers,
motor operated valves, etc., when information is already shown on drawings supplied.
b. Individual internal connection diagrams for all instruments, recorders, relays,
annunciators, power supplies, programmable controllers, etc.
11.1.2

Each device shall have the same identification wherever it is used on any other drawing.

11.1.3 All drawings shall be completely labeled to identify the drawing type and the project by
customer.
11.2

Schematic Diagrams

11.2.1 Schematic diagrams furnished by the Supplier shall be detailed so that the operation of the
equipment is very evident and a person with an average understanding of schematics can
become aware of the sequence of operations under normal conditions, while at the same
time be able to determine corrective measures in the case of faulty or improper operation of
the equipment. Circuit flow and component arrangement shall be from left to right or top
to bottom.
11.2.2 Schematics shall show all electrical components. Components shall be identified with
device numbers in accordance with applicable Industry Standards.
11.2.3 All devices shall have their terminal numbers shown. Any device with contacts shall have
all of the contacts shown along side its operating coil. All such contacts shall be identified
as to where they are used in other parts of the circuitry.
11.2.4 Schematics shall not be drawn where any part is crowded or illegible to the extent that its
content is unclear.
11.2.5 Schematics shall show a relay development on the same drawing or page where it is used in
the circuit. This development for each relay used shall show all terminal numbers and all
normally open and/or normally closed contacts as furnished. On this development, each
contact used shall have a reference to its use or position in the circuit and shall crossreference all contacts between drawings using the drawing numbers assigned by the Buyer if

4C-20

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

the contacts are used on another drawing. When relay contacts are used on a drawing other
than where the coil is shown, the Buyer's reference drawing number should be shown just
above or below the relay contact device number. Black box devices shown on schematic
diagrams shall reference the manufacturers drawings or bulletins. These drawings or
bulletins shall be part of the document submittal.
11.2.6

Schematics that do not meet all of the preceding requirements will not be accepted.

11.3 Wiring Diagrams

11.3.1 The Supplier shall prepare detailed diagrams indicating all panel wire terminations in a
manner that physically and visually identifies each wire connection. The diagram shall
show a combination of wiring that connects to the internal components and to terminal
blocks used for the field connections to the equipment.
11.3.2 Each diagram shall show the devices in their physical positions relative to each other. The
Supplier shall assign and affix an instrument location grid code to each device, physically
and on the diagram.
11.3.3 The Supplier shall indicate the location of any shipping-split and show the wiring of
shipping-split terminal blocks if any are furnished. (A note should indicate the removable
end of the shipping-split jumper wires.)
11.3.4 Each device shall be shown as viewed from the wiring side of the device. Terminal
position and terminal numbering shall be shown identical to the device. If none exist, the
Supplier shall assign terminal numbers to be shown on all diagrams for the device.
11.3.5 Plug and/or receptacle units for each instrument or annunciator shall be shown at their
relative position with the type and style number as furnished. Wiring of these terminals
shall be shown in sequential table form.
11.3.6 Each device shall have its instrument number and other information shown adjacent to it.
Black boxes shown on wiring diagram shall reference the manufacturer's drawings or
bulletin. These drawings or bulletins shall be part of the document submittal.
11.3.7 Each electrical connection (other than a jumper on the same device) shall be shown with its
wire code and destination. The reference drawing number shall also be shown if the other
end of the wire is shown terminated on another drawing. This facilitates the identification
and tracing of the circuit throughout the diagrams.

4C-21

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

11.3.8

Detailed wiring drawings of the panel connection side of all terminal blocks shall be
furnished. A minimum of four (4) inches of space shall be furnished on the terminal block
drawings for each row of terminals on the drawings (8 inches between each row of terminal
blocks) to permit the addition of the field connections. (See Attachment 7)

11.3.9

If wiring is color-coded, the coding shall be shown on the diagrams.

11.3.10 If wiring is numbered with bands or sleeves, these numbers shall appear on the diagrams.
Wiring and contacts on the diagrams shall be cross-referenced as specified under "Schematic
Diagrams" in Subsection 11.2.5.
Attachments 3 through 8 indicate representative methods of assigning instrument location
codes and preparing point-to-point wiring diagrams.
11.4

Assignment of Instrument Location Grid Codes

11.4.1 Attachment 4 indicates the method to be used in the layout of the instrument locations for a
typical panel. A left-to-right numbering sequence (when facing the wiring side of the
respective panel) and a top-to-bottom lettering sequence is recommended. Note that "F"
and "R" identify front and rear panels. (Eliminate use of "R" if no rear panel is furnished).
11.4.2 Refer to the front panel elevations and internal views, if any, and assign a vertical row
number to all devices including those mounted on the rear of the overhead, vertical,
benchboard, and apron areas. The row numbers should be consecutive with respect to a
position as viewed from the rear, and should include the maximum number of devices
possible for the front panel.
11.4.3 Repeat the procedure for the top-to-bottom row letters ending with the lowest device on the
apron.
11.4.4 The same procedure sequence should be followed before starting the wiring diagrams for the
rear panels for a duplex control board.
11.4.5 With all possible locations identified, each wiring diagram can then be designed and
numbered in an orderly fashion.

4C-22 (Final)

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

ATTACHMENT 1
SUPPLIER’S TRANSMITTAL
2nd Radwaste R/S Building
From :

Page of CC :

To : A/E DDCC
ZIP CODE 39660,
269 HYEOKSIN-RO, GIMCHEON-SI,
GYEONGSANGBUK-DO,
REPUBLIC OF KOREA

Supplier
Transmittal No.
Date
* Sh : If Sheet No. Is Applicable
** Submitted for : R – Review, I – Information

Spec. No. :
Spec. Title :

*** Review Status for A/E Use Only

**FOR

DOCUMENT NUMBER
Project Doc. No. (PNS)
Supplier’s Doc. No.

Remarks : Sh.*

QT’Y
REV. &
Page
TYPE

DOCUMENT TITLE R I

Supplier
/
Name / Signature
Date :

***
RS

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

ATTACHMENT 1
SUPPLIER’S TRANSMITTAL
SUPPLIER DOCUMENT LIST (CONTINUED)

Page

DOCUMENT NUMBER
Project Doc. No. (PNS)
Supplier’s Doc. No.

Sh.*

QT’Y
REV. &
Page
TYPE

of
**FOR

DOCUMENT TITLE R

***
I RS

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

ATTACHMENT 1
SUPPLIER’S TRANSMITTAL
(RETURN COPY)
2nd Radwaste R/S Building
To :

Page of CC :

From : A/E DDCC
ZIP CODE 39660,
269 HYEOKSIN-RO, GIMCHEON-SI,
GYEONGSANGBUK-DO,
REPUBLIC OF KOREA

Supplier

A/E Transmittal
No.

Transmittal No.
Date

Date

* Sh : If Sheet No. Is Applicable
** Submitted for : R – Review, I – Information

Spec. No. :

*** Review Status for A/E Use Only

Spec. Title :
DOCUMENT NUMBER
Project Doc. No. (PNS)
Supplier’s Doc. No. Sh.*

Remarks :

QT’Y
REV. &
Page
TYPE

**FOR
DOCUMENT TITLE

A/E
/
Name / Signature
Date :

***
I RS

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

ATTACHMENT 1
SUPPLIER’S TRANSMITTAL
(RETURN COPY)
SUPPLIER DOCUMENT LIST (CONTINUED)

Page

DOCUMENT NUMBER
Project Doc. No. (PNS)
Supplier’s Doc. No.

Sh.*

QT’Y
REV. &
Page
TYPE

of
**FOR

DOCUMENT TITLE R I

***
RS

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

ATTACHMENT 2
DRAWING AND DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE LIST
Supplier Name
Spec. No.:

Submittal Sch. List Rev. No.

PNS Doc. Number
Supplier Doc. No.

Sh. Full Document Title* Date: Page of R** App. 4D Submittal I Requirement Sch. Date

Note : * Supplier shall incorporate project tag number and/or P.O. item in document title column for all design
drawings/documents (using Microsoft Excel only).
** Submitted for : R – Review, I - Information

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

ATTACHMENT 9
SUPPLIER’S DRAWING/DOCUMENT CHANGE NOTICE
(RESUBMITTAL)
PNS No.

Rev.
No.

Description of Changes

Changes
Was

Is Remarks

NOTE : When the modification or changes affect the interface with the others (e.g. system/equipment/scope of supply), an asterisk(*) mark shall be indicated
in the “Remarks” column.

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0
ATTACHMENT 10

INSPECTION REPORT FOR COMPACT DISC
Disc No :

Item
Buyer

Division Dept. Responsible person [Tel : ] Supplier Division Dept. Responsible person [Tel : ] Classification

Statement of Compact disc submission and undertaking

Supplier
Submitted Item
and
Quantity

(Signature) [Tel : ]

(1) Compact Disc : Q’ty
[
(2) Processed Index List (sorted by PNS No.)

]

Pertinent
File No.
Acceptor

(Signature)

]
Comprehensive
decision

Quantity inspection
Result for
Inspection

[Tel :

Image quality
inspection
Appearance inspection
Retrieval
linkage inspection

Inspection
Term
Inspection
Confirmed
by Supplier

Inspector
[Tel :

Inspector
]

[Tel : ]

This report guarantees that inspection was performed by the pertinent person according to the rules and
procedures.

Certified by Buyer Appendix 4D

DRAWING AND DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
Spec.No.

0-824-E208

SUBMIT
FOR
PNS
R I GUIDE
E N
⑴
V F
W O

Spec. Rev. No.: 1 DOCUMENT DESCRIPTION Page

SPEC.
PARA.
NO.

1 Of 5

REQUIREMENTS
Q”TITY SUBMITTAL
&
WEEKS
TYPE ⑵
⑶

REMARKS
⑷

D0. Submittal with Proposal

Drawing Showing General
Arrangement, Anchorage, Principal

Dimension, Weight of Equipment

3A.2.5 * PR · Spare Parts List Att 3-1 * PR · Special Tool List Att 3-1 * PR · Equipment Data Sheet

Sec. 3,
3A

* PR · Work Schedule 3A.2.5 * PR

Description and /or Catalogue of the

Equipment Described at Attachment
3-1 (Technical Proposal Data)

3A.2.5 * PR

KEPIC/ASME/ISO Certificate, etc

3A.2.5

Design Test Report for Circuit Breaker

4.10.A.6

*One Copy
Per Each
Proposal

D1. Quality Assurance / Quality
Surveillance
X

QL-A

Supplier’s Quality Plan

App. 4B,
4.1

3P
1EN or1EP

AW+4

(1) Refer to Appendix 4C, Para. 1.3 for detail explanations.
(2) Quantity: In numeral, Type : P=Paper Printing/Photocopy,
E= Electronic Files
(N:NATIVE, P: Searchable PDF, T:TIF, D:DXF, X:EXCEL)
(3) Submittal due time in calendar weeks prior to (-) or after (+) the event indicated.
PR = With Proposal, AW = Award, FB = Fabrication, SH = Shipping,
* = Other Event/Activity defined in remarks column
(4) Tenderer to indicate his schedule in remarks column if different from (3) .

Directly to
Inspection
Contractor

Appendix 4D

DRAWING AND DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
Spec.No.

0-824-E208

SUBMIT
FOR
PNS
R I GUIDE
E N
⑴
V F
W O

Spec. Rev. No.: 1 DOCUMENT DESCRIPTION Page

SPEC.
PARA.
NO.

2 Of 5

REQUIREMENTS
Q”TITY SUBMITTAL
&
WEEKS
TYPE ⑵
⑶

REMARKS
⑷

D2. Schedule & Progress
X

CL-A

Drawing and Data Submittal Schedule

X CL-B

Supplier’s Work Schedule Including

Engineering, Procurement,
Fabrication & Delivery

X CR-A · Work Progress Report

App. 4C,
2.3.3
4.04.B.6

3P+1EX AW+4 5P AW+4 4.40.B.6 5P AW+8 & *

To KORAD
* Monthly
To KORAD

D3. Design & Engineering
X

DG-A

. Arrangement and Outline Drawings
Including Foundation and Mounting
Details

4.04.B &
APP.4C,
4.6

3P+
1EN or1ET

AW+8 X DG-B . Assembly Drawings 4.04.B AW+8 X DE-A · Single Line Diagrams 4.04.B X DE-B

Relay and Metering Diagram

4.04.B X DE-C · Schematic Diagrams 4.04.B X DE-D

Wiring and Connection diagram

4.04.B X DL-A · Spare Part List 4.04.B X DL-B · Special Tool List 4.04.B X DT-A · CT Excitation Curves 4.04.B X DT-B

Protective Relay Characteristic Curves

4.04.B X DT-C

Terminal Block Catalogue

4.04.B

3P+
1EN or1ET
3P+
1EN or1ET
3P+
1EN or1ET
3P+
1EN or1ET
3P+
1EN or1ET
3P+
1EN or1EP
3P+
1EN or1EP
3P+
1EN or1EP
3P+
1EN or1EP
3P+
1EN or1EP
3P+
1EN or1EP

X DC-A

4.04.B.3

Building Structure Load Summary

and Calculation (Calculation : Seismic
Category III )

AW+8
AW+8
AW+8
AW+8
AW+8
AW+8
AW+12
AW+8
AW+8
AW+8

Appendix 4D

DRAWING AND DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
Spec.No.

0-824-E208

SUBMIT
FOR
PNS
R I GUIDE
E N
⑴
V F
W O

Spec. Rev. No.: 1 DOCUMENT DESCRIPTION Page

SPEC.
PARA.
NO.

X DL-C

Equipment/Component List

4.04.B X DL-D · Instrument List 4.04.B 3 Of 5

REQUIREMENTS
Q”TITY SUBMITTAL
&
WEEKS
TYPE ⑵
⑶

REMARKS
⑷

3P+
1EN or1EP
3P+1EX

AW+8 4.03.E

3P+
1EN or1EP

*1-12 *1: SubContracting AW+8

D4. Procurement
X

PP-A

Sub-supplier Qualification and

Surveillance/Inspection Procedure (as
Required)
D5. Manufacturing and Fabrication

X MP-A

Welding Procedure Specification

(WPS) and Procedure Qualification
Record(PQR)

4.04.B.5

3P+
1EN or1EP

*2-20

*2:
Welding

X MP-B

Surface Preparation & Coating

Procedure with Coating System
Technical Data Sheet

4.08.A.3

3P+
1EN or1EP

*3-20 *3:Coating X MR-A

Nameplate Data and/or Nameplate

Drawings

4.09

3P+
1EN or1EP

SH-30

D6. Inspection and Testing
X

TP-A

Design Test Procedure(if Applicable)

(including EMI/RFI for LC & MCC)

4.10

3P+
1EN or1EP

*T-10 X TR-A

Design Test Report or Certificate

(including EMI/RFI for LC & MCC)

4.10

3P+
1EN or1EP

*T+3 X TP-B

Production Test Procedure

4.10

3P+
1EN or1EP

*T-25

*T: TEST Appendix 4D

DRAWING AND DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
Spec.No.

0-824-E208

SUBMIT
FOR
PNS
R I GUIDE
E N
⑴
V F
W O

Spec. Rev. No.: 1 DOCUMENT DESCRIPTION Page

SPEC.
PARA.
NO.

4 Of 5

REQUIREMENTS
Q”TITY SUBMITTAL
&
WEEKS
TYPE ⑵
⑶

REMARKS
⑷

D7. Packing and Shipping
X SP-A
X

SP-B X IM-A · Packing Procedure 4.11

3P+
1EN or1EP
3P+
1EN or1EP

SH-20

Shipping & Transportation Procedure

4.11

D8. Instruction Manual
Instruction Manual Including the
Following information:

4.12 26P+1EP SH

4.04.B.7
App4X 3.4

1P+1EX *SH

APP.4C,
7.3

3P+
1EN or1EP

AW+4 SH-20

Handling and Storage Instruction
Installation Instruction Including

Assembly and Disassembly
Procedure(s)

20 Copies
With
Shipment
to
Site &
6 Copies
to the A/E

Final General Arrangement,

Assembly and Erection Drawings

Complete Start-up, Operation,

Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Instruction

Warranted Performance Test Data
Completed Material / Part List(s)

. Other Instructions/Manuals
Required in Section 4
X IM-B

X VL-A

Part List(s)
D9. Quality Verification Document

QVDL and It’s Sample Forms

Listed in Appendix 4E

-Directly to
Inspection
Contractor

Appendix 4D

DRAWING AND DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
Spec.No.

0-824-E208

SUBMIT
FOR
PNS
R I GUIDE
E N
⑴
V F
W O
X VR-A

Spec. Rev. No.: 1 DOCUMENT DESCRIPTION

Quality Verification Document

Page

SPEC.
PARA.
NO.

5 Of

REQUIREMENTS
Q”TITY SUBMITTAL
&
WEEKS
TYPE ⑵
⑶

APP.4C,
7.0

3P+
1EN or1EP

*SH

Native 3D CAD File Format & DXF

APP.4C,
4.6.8

1P+
1EN &1ED

AW+16

Index of Equipment Part List

APP.4C,
4.6.8

1EN AW+16 · As-Built Drawings APP.4C, 8 * · As-Built Documents APP.4C, 8

1P+
1EN &1ET
1P+
1EN or1EP

D10. 3D CAD Electronic File

D11. As-Built Drawing& Document

5 *

REMARKS
⑷

-Two
Copies
to site
Shipment
&
One copy
to the A/E

* After
Installation

Appendix 4E

QUALITY VERIFICATION DOCUMENTATION LIST
Spec. Title
480V Load Center and Motor Control Center
Supplier
Spec.No
0-824-E208
Spec. Rev. No.
1
IDENTIFICATION AND DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT
QUALITY PROGRAM DOCUMENT
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
ITEM NO. EQUIP. NO./TAG NO.

EQUIPMENT
DESCRIPTION

DESCRIPTION
OF REQUIRED DOCUMENTS

PARA.
NO.

E1. CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMANCE

App.4C

E2. MATERIAL TEST PROPERTIES

Material Test Report
Certificate of Compliance

(Including Electrical Items)

App.4C

E3. INSPECTION &TEST REPORTS

Design Test Reports or Certificate
Production Test Reports
Other Inspection & Test Reports Required

by Section 4 or Quality Plan

Cable Flame Test Report

4.10.B

E4. Final Signed-off Quality Plan

App. 4C,
7.6.1

E5. SDDR/NCR/CAR(close-out), IF ANY

App. 4B,
App. 4H

Page 1 of 1

Packing List No.
CERTIFIED BY
SUPPLIER

THE BUYER’S
REPRESENTATIVE

SERIAL PROVIDED
BYATTACH.
NO. *
NO.*
SIGNATURE / DATE SIGNATURE / DATE

E6. OTHERS
* SUPPLIER to show identification of individual documents

SUPPLIER CERTIFICATION
We certify that listed documentation meets the requirements
of the Purchase Contract and applicable Specifications.

THE BUYER’S REPRESENTATIVE ACCEPTANCE
The Buyer’s Representative shall indicate acceptance. When inspection
is not required at the shop, the Buyer’s review will be made at the job site
after material or equipment has been shipped.

Supplier
Accepted by :
Title :
FORM APPENDIX 4E, REV.0

Date :

The Buyer’s REP. & Title

Date

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/ STORAGE BUILDING

APPENDIX 4H
Documentation Requirements of Supplier
Deviations and Non-Conformances

KEPCO E&C JOB No. : 11G79

ISSUE STATUS 0 05/03/18 Construction issue REV. NO DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED

Preparer : 서정욱, Tel : 054-421-6150

Appendix 4H
Rev. 0

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLE PAGE 1.0

SCOPE ········································································ 4H-1

2.0

DEFINITION ·································································· 4H-1

3.0

REQUIREMENTS FOR SUPPLIER DEVIATION······················· 4H-2
DISPOSITION REQUEST

ATTACHMENT
1.

Supplier Deviation Dispositions Request Form

TC 4H-1 (Final)

Appendix 4H
Rev. 0

1.0

SCOPE
1.1 This Appendix delineates requirements for notification to the Buyer of Supplier
requested deviations and nonconformances to the technical specification requirements in
the contract.

2.0

DEFINITION
2.1 Modify Specification
In general, modification of Specification is applicable to “proposed deviation” except
“nonconformance”. In case the proposed deviation is acceptable, A/E will issue
addendum of technical specification to the Buyer for contract change.
2.2 Repair
The process of restoring a nonconforming characteristic to a condition such that the
capability of an item to function reliably and safely is unimpaired, even though the item
still may not conform to the original requirements.

Repair includes alterations to the

properties of the material through heat treating, welding, metal deposition, chemical
processing, etc.
2.3 SDDR (Supplier Deviation Disposition Request)
SDDR is a form that shall be prepared by a supplier to request the Buyer’s acceptance of
a proposed deviation from the technical specification requirements, having a proposed
disposition of “modify specification”, or to get the Buyer’s decision of the supplierdetected nonconformances to the technical specification requirements and/or the
requirements on drawings, procedures or other documents, having a proposed disposition
of “repair” or “use-as-is”.
2.4 Supplier
An entity who provides services, equipment, components, fabrication, assembly of
components for 2nd Radwaste R/S Building.

An all-inclusive term used in place of any

of the following : vendor, seller, contractor, subcontractor, fabricator, consultant, and
their subtier levels.

4H-1

Appendix 4H
Rev. 0

2.5 Surveillance
Surveillance, as used herein, may include inspection, survey, and/or audit requested by
the Buyer.
2.6 Use-As-Is
A disposition which may be imposed for a nonconformance when it can be established
that the discrepancy will result in no adverse conditions and that the item under
consideration will continue to meet all engineering functional requirements including
performance, maintainability, fitness and safety.
3.0

REQUIREMENTS FOR SUPPLIER DEVIATION DISPOSITION REQUEST
3.1 Supplier Deviation Disposition Request(SDDR) - A form that shall be prepared by all
suppliers:

to request the Buyer’s acceptance of a proposed deviation that departs from the

Technical Specification (Section 4) requirements prior to implementation of work
associated with a deviation, having a proposed disposition of “Modify Specification”,
or

to notify the Buyer of the Supplier-detected nonconformances to the Technical

Specification requirements and/or the requirements on drawings, procedures of other
documents previously reviewed by the A/E, having a proposed disposition of “Repair”
or “Use-As-Is”
3.2 The A/E shall be promptly (within five working days) advised of the above said
nonconformances by means of SDDR. A copy of SDDR notifying the nonconformances
to the Buyer shall be furnished to the Buyer’s Quality Surveillance Representative.
3.3 The Buyer’s acceptance of the SDDR shall be obtained prior to implementation of work
associated with a deviation or implementation of a proposed disposition to the above said
nonconformances.
3.4 The SDDR form shall not be used for cases where the Buyer has previously provided
permission the proceed using an accepted repair procedure covering a specific type of
repair, however, records shall be maintained for each specific repair.

4H-2

Appendix 4H
Rev. 0

3.5 The Supplier shall describe the recommended disposition based on appropriated analysis
and provide technical justification to be firm basis for the proposed deviation.
Submittal of requests for deviations to the A/E from lower-tier suppliers shall be through
the prime supplier.
3.6 SDDRs shall be used for all applicable specifications, regardless of quality class. The
form to be employed is attached to this Appendix as Attachment 1.

3.7 In case where the supplier proposed disposition (based on the deviation) involves cost
impact, the detailed cost amount shall be addressed by the Supplier in a separate sheet as
an attachment to the SDDR. A/E acceptance of the SDDR does not imply that the cost
amount suggested by the supplier is accepted. The cost amount will be separately
adjusted by the Buyer after issuing addendum of the Specification.
3.8 After Quality Surveillance Representative verifies and signs that the accepted disposition
was correctly implemented and accomplished, one(1) copy of the final SDDR shall be
submitted by the Supplier with a letter of transmittal to A/E DDCC.
3.9 A copy of all completed SDDRs shall be included in the Quality Verification
Documentation Package.

4H-3 (Final)

Appendix 4H
Rev. 0
2nd Radwaste R/S Building

ATTACHMENT 1
SDDR (Supplier Deviation Disposition Request)

NOTE :
1. Complete instruction on back this sheet
2. Items 1-17 below to be completed by supplier
3. *Items, Architect/Engineer entries only
4. Attach additional information whenever necessary
FOR SUPPLIER USE
Supplier SDDR No.
Date Submitted

5. A copy of the completed SDDR form shall be included by the supplier in
the quality verification documentation for each item to which this SDDR
applies
* FOR A/E USE
A/E SDDR No.
Date Received

1. Supplier
Name

Tel. No. / Fax. No./E-mail

2. Supplier’s Order No. 3. Supplier’s Part No. 4. Supplier’s Part Name 5. NCR Reference No. 6. Spec. & Rev. No. 7. A/E Part No. 8. A/E Part Name 9. Q. S. Rep. Notified

10. A/E Engineer Notified

Supplier Comple ted

Date
Method
Date
Method
11. Deviation Description(attach extra sheets, sketches, photographs, etc., as necessary and identify quantity and serial numbers as applicable)

12. Supplier’s Proposed Disposition
□ Use-as-is
□ Repair
□ Modify Specification
13. Cost Impact :
□ Yes
□ No
14. Schedule Impact : □ Yes
□ No
15. Proposed Disposition and Technical (plus cost/schedule if applicable) Justification (attach extra sheets, sketches, etc., as necessary)

16. Associated Supplier Document Change (PNS No., Supplier Document No. and Title)

17. Supplier’s Authorized Representative
Name
Signature
*18. A/E Engineering Action
Engineering
Followup
□ Accepted

Architec t / Eng ineer □ Rejected

Title
Date
□ Drawing change(□ A/E

□ Supplier)

□ Licensing document change

□ Spec. / req. change (□ A/E □ Supplier)

□ Price adjustment

□ Other suppliers affected

□ Other

*19. A/E Disposition Statement Including Justification (attach extra sheets, sketches, etc., as necessary)

*20. Signature/Date RE / EGS / APM

Construction action required

□ Yes

□ No
Date

21. Supplier
/

*22. Quality Surveillance
Representative

Instruction for Completing SDDR

Appendix 4H
Rev. 0

This form is to be used by a supplier to:
a) Notify A/E when manufactured product or service does not meet established contract requirements and to document the supplier’s proposed disposition with
their technical (and where appropriate cost/schedule) justification
b) Notify A/E when the supplier wants to propose changes to the technical specification unanticipated at time of award.
c) Record A/E’s disposition of the SDDR.
A deviation is any departure from the requirements of the technical specification, which the supplier has incorporated or proposes to incorporate in the
completed item or service provided. SDDR disposition can be classified as Use-As-Is, Repair, or Modify Specification.
Repair is defined as the process of restoring a nonconforming characteristic to a condition such that the capability of an it em to function reliably and safely is
unimpaired, even though that item still may not conform to the original requirement. Repair includes alterations to the properties of the material through
heat-treating, welding, metal deposition, chemical processing etc. The SDDR form is not to be used for cases where the A/E has pre viously provided
authorization to proceed using as accepted repair procedure covering a specific type of repair, however, records must be maintained for each specific repair.
A/E’s engineering action and disposition statement does not relieve the supplier from responsibility for the accuracy, adequacy, or suitability of the item or
service being provided as defined in the technical specification, nor does it constitute waiver of the right to renegotiate the terms of the technical specification.
Block No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

12.
13.
14.
15.

16.
17.
*18
*19

*20

21.
*22

Entry Information
Supplier’s company name, telephone number, facsimile number, and e-mail address.
Supplier’s order number if one has been assigned.
Supplier’s Part No (s). as applicable from the drawing, catalog, internal specification, etc.
Supplier’s Part Name
Supplier’s NCR No.
Specification Number and Revision Number
A/E Part No.
A/E Part name, if one has been assigned.
Date and method (Fax, E-mail, Letter, etc.) used to notify the Buyer’s Quality Surveillance Representative (QSR) whenever quality surveillance is
applicable.
Date and method (Fax, E-mail, Letter, etc.) used to notify A/E Engineering
Describe the deviating characteristics and define the extent of the out-of-specification for each identified piece affected. Include quantities and
serial, lot, batch, heat, or other numbers as appropriate. Identify the location of the deviating characteristic by print coordinates or specific location,
as applicable. Attach reproducible-quality extra sheets, sketches, etc., as necessary. When proposing a change in either supplier or A/E
documents : describe the change : identify the documents completely including title or subject, date, and revision : and where appropriate, attach a
copy of areas in question.
State proposed disposition.
Check cost impact that would result from proposed changes. If cost impact is marked “yes”, the detailed cost amount shall be addressed on a
separate sheet as an attachment to this SDDR.
Enter delivery schedule impact that would result from proposed changes.
Describe the proposed disposition and provide technical (and where appropriate, cost/schedule) justification for A/E evaluation. Attach
reproducible quality copies whenever required. If the deviation is correctable by repair, submit a detail repair procedure or reference procedure
previously submitted. Provide the Buyer PNS number, supplier number, and procedure title. For documents, provide suggested corrective
wording, procedures, documents, etc. Provide a copy of each SDDR attachment to the Buyer QSR at the supplier’s location.
Identify the nature changes that may be needed on associated supplier documents (drawings, specifications, procedures, manual, etc.)
Enter the name (typed or printed) and title of the supplier representative authorizing the disposition request and appropriate signature and date
signed.
Check all applicable boxes to define the action required by the A/E engineering.
Provide appropriate justification for the A/E actions indicated in Block 18. When changes to drawings, specification, or other A/E documents are
involved, each document should be identified and the associated change briefly described. If other suppliers are affected, i ndicate who they are
and the document that initiated resolution of that involvement. Other followup action (e.g. the need for additional A/E calculations, additional
drawings or sketches, inspection by an KORAD QSR, etc.) should also be identified here. If construction action is required, so indicate.
RE

Signature of the responsible engineer accepting the engineering action and the date signed.

EGS

Signature of the Engineering Group Supervisor who reviewed and concurred with the disposition and date signed.

APM

Signature of the APM (or designee) and the date signed.

Signature of the supplier’s inspector or other representative authorized to verify that the accepted disposition was correctly accomplished and the
date signed.
Signature of the KORAD QSR (when a QSR is assigned to the order) or designee and the date signed.
This signature indicated that the accepted disposition was correctly implemented and verified (on a random sample basis if the SDDR applies to
several parts)

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/ STORAGE BUILDING

APPENDIX 4K5
WELDING REQUIREMENTS FOR
STRUCTURAL STEEL (AWS)

KEPCO E&C JOB No. : 11G79

ISSUE STATUS 0 03/12/18 Construction issue REV. NO DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED

Preparer : 한별, Tel : 054-421-7875

Appendix 4K5
Rev.0

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLE PAGE 1.0 SCOPE 4K5-1 2.0 CODES & STANDARDS 4K5-1 3.0 GENERAL 4K5-1 4.0 SUBMITTAL AND APPROVAL 4K5-2 5.0 WELDING PROCESS 4K5-3 6.0 DETAILS OF WELDED JOINTS 4K5-3 7.0

WORKMANSHIP AND VISUAL EXAMINATION

4K5-4 8.0 PROCESS TECHNIQUES 4K5-5 9.0 WELDING MATERIAL 4K5-6 10.0 HEAT TREATMENT 4K5-7 11.0 REPAIR 4K5-8(Final) TC 4K5-1(Final)

Appendix 4K5
Rev.0

1.0 SCOPE 1.1

This Appendix describes the welding requirements for structural steel and miscellaneous
steel.

2.0 CODES & STANDARDS 2.1

Welding, welding procedures, and welder performance qualification shall meet the
requirements of ANSI/AWS D 1.1, Structural Welding Code-Steel (Hereinafter called "the
Code").

3.0 GENERAL 3.1

All welding shall conform to the requirements of this Appendix, the Technical
Specification and the design drawings.

3.2

All welding procedures shall be approved by the Buyer prior to the commencement
of any welding activities.

3.3

T he Supplier shall be r esponsible for the welding per for med by his organization.
Qualification of welding procedures, welders, and welding operators by other organizations
shall not be permitted.

3.4

The completed WPS shall describe all the essential, nonessential, and, when required,
supplementary essential variables for each welding process used in the WPS. Ranges of
these variables shall be correctly addressed.

3.5

The Supplier shall maintain a record of the results obtained in the WPS, Procedure
Qualification Record (PQR), and Welder and Welding Operator Performance Qualification
(WPQ).

3.6

Recor ds of WPS, PQR, and WPQ shall be in r epr oducib le for m, as appropriate.

4K5-1

Appendix 4K5
Rev.0

3.7

The WPS, PQR, and WPQ shall be certified by the Supplier.

3.8

T he weld er a nd weld in g op er at or s ha ll b e tes t ed u nder t he fu ll supervision and
control of the Supplier.

3.9

The Buyer or Buyer's Representative shall have the right of free access to the Supplier's
facilities and equipment for the purpose of monitoring and witnessing welding activities
performed by the Supplier.

4.0 SUBMITTAL AND APPROVAL 4.1

In case of specific applications other than those deviated from this Appendix, the
Supplier shall submit the complete details of the applications to be used for the Buyer’s
review and approval. Specific applications shall not be permitted without a written
acceptance of the Buyer.

4.2

The Supplier shall demonstrate his capability to use specific application beyond this
Appendix, if required. The Buyer shall be notified of the demonstration in advance for the
witnessing purposes. Test specimens, such as procedure qualification test specimen used
for a specific application, shall be maintained to be accessible to the Buyer and, if
necessary, the Supplier shall submit the specimens to the Buyer.

4.3

The Supplier shall submit detailed welding related procedures which meet the
requirements of the Code for the Buyer's review and approval.

4.4

The Supplier's submittals for the Buyer's review and approval are listed below as
applicable:
o

Welding Procedure Specification (WPS)

Procedure Qualification Record (PQR)

Heat treatment procedure, if applicable

Others, if requested by the Buyer

4K5-2

Appendix 4K5
Rev.0

5.0 WELDING PROCESS 5.1

The following processes shall be permitted for welding with the use of each individual
welding process or with a combination of welding processes:

5.2 A.

Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW)

Submerged Arc Welding (SAW)

Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW) except for short circuiting transfer mode.

Flux Cored Arc Welding (FCAW)

Other welding processes may be used provided:
A

The Supplier demonstrates its capability to use the process within procedural
limitations that are acceptable to the Buyer;

Welding process acceptance shall also be based upon the Buyer's evaluation of the
required reliability of the equipment or component being fabricated.

6.0 DETAILS OF WELDED JOINTS 6.1

Weld joint details for major load carrying components shall be in accordance with
Section 2 of the Code.

6.2

Where possible, prequalified joints which meet the details prescribed in paragraph 3.9 for
fillet welds, paragraph 3.13 for complete joint penetration groove welds, and paragraph
3.12 for partial joint penetration groove welds of the Code shall be used. These joints shall
be deemed as prequalified and should be exempt from test or qualification, except for all
groove and fillet weld joints for weld metal and base metal with a minimum specified yield
strength of 90ksi or higher.

4K5-3

Appendix 4K5
Rev.0

7.0

WORKMANSHIP AND VISUAL EXAMINATION

7.1

Surfaces and edges of parts to be welded shall be smooth, uniform, and free from fins, tears,
cracks, and other discontinuities that would adversely affect the quality or strength of the
weld.

7.2

Welds on all load-carrying members shall be continuous.

7.3

Surfaces to be welded and surfaces adjacent to a weld shall also be free from loose or
thick scale, slag, rust, moisture, grease, and other foreign material that would prevent
proper welding.

7.4

Welding shall not be performed when the ambient temperature is lower than -20 ℃ (0
℉). Ambient temperature does not mean the ambient environmental temperature but the
temperature in the immediate vicinity of the weld.

7.5

Tack welds to secure alignment shall either be removed completely or shall be visually
inspected for cracks to incorporate into the final welds.

Tack welds, whether removed or

left in place, shall be made by a qualified welder.
7.6

I n a s s emb li ng a n d jo i ni n g p ar ts of a s tr u ctu r e t o memb er s , t he procedure and
sequence shall be established to minimize distortion and shrinkage.

7.7

Run-off tabs, when used in production welding of longitudinal welds, shall be removed
after weld completion.

7.8

Member distorted by welding shall be straightened by mechanical means or by carefully
supervised application of a limited amount of localized heat. The temperature of heated
area as measured by approved methods shall not exceed 600℃ (1100℉) for quenched and
tempered steel nor 650 ℃ (1200℉) for other steels.

7.9

Complete joint penetration groove welds made without the use of backing shall have the
root of the initial weld gouged, chipped, or otherwise removed to all but traces of the root
of the initial weld before welding is started from the reverse side.

4K5-4

Appendix 4K5
Rev.0

7.10

P een in g ma y b e us ed on int er media t e wel d la yer s f or contr ol of shrinkage
stresses in thick weld to prevent cracking.

No peening shall be done on the root or surface

layer of the weld or the base metal at the edges of the weld.

The use of manual slag

hammers, chisels, and light weight vibrating tools for the removal of slag and spatter shall
be permitted and shall not be considered peening.
7.11

Acceptance Criteria for Visual Examination shall be in accordance with "NCIG-01, VWAC
(Visual Weld Acceptance Criteria)".

8.0 PROCESS TECHNIQUES 8.1

Welding processes shall be subject to the limitations mentioned herein, as appropriate.

8.1.1

The following limitations shall apply for SMAW:
A.

W el d i n g c u r r en t s ha l l be d et er mi n e d to r ef l ec t the ra nge

recommended by the electrode manufacturer;
B.

Complete joint penetration groove welds made with the use of steel backing shall
have the root gouged to sound metal before welding is started from the reverse side.

8.1.2

The following limitations shall apply for SAW:
A.

The diameter of electrodes shall not exceed 6.5 mm (1/4 inch);

The Supplier shall furnish an electrode manufacturer's certification that the
electrode and flux combination meet the requirements of the classification or
grade;

All welds except fillet welds shall be made in the flat position;

Fillet welds may be made in either flat or horizontal position, except that single
pass fillet welds which may be made in the horizontal position.
Removable starting and stopping tabs shall be used for longitudinal welds.

4K5-5

Appendix 4K5
Rev.0

8.1.3

The following limitation shall apply for GMAW and FCAW:
A.

A gas or gas mixtur e used for shielding shall be of a welding grade having a
dew point of -40 ℃ (-40℉) or lower;

The Supplier shall furnish a gas manufacturer's certification that the gas or gas
mixture is suitable for the intended application and meet the dew point
requirement;

Welding with external gas shielding shall not be done in a draft or wind unless
the weld is protected by a shelter. Shelter shall be of material and shape
appropriate to reduce wind velocity in the vicinity of the weld to maximum of five
(5) miles per hour (2.2 m/sec.);

GMAW in the short circuiting transfer mode shall not be permitted unless prior
review and written acceptance by the Buyer.

9.0 WELDING MATERIAL 9.1

All welding material used in the construction and repair of components or material shall
conform to the requirements of the welding material specification.

9.2

Suitable storage and handling of electrodes, fluxes, and other welding materials shall be
maintained. Precaution shall be taken to minimize absorption of moisture by fluxes or
cored, fabricated, and coated electrodes.

9.3

A written procedure shall be established to provide the method used to control the receipt,
storage, baking, drying, and disbursal of all welding materials.

9.4

Low hydrogen electrode coverings shall be limited to a maximum moisture content not
exceeding 0.4 percent by weight.

For proper application of this requirement, Annex VIII

of the Code or any standard psychometric chart may be used in the determination of
temperature-relative humidity limits.

4K5-6

Appendix 4K5
Rev.0
9.5

Low hydrogen type electrodes for SMAW shall be used when any of the following
conditions apply:
A.

For carbon steels having either a specified allowable carbon content above
0.30 percent, or having a total alloy content of 0.50 percent or more;

For carbon steels having a specified minimum tensile strength of 70 ksi and a
thickness greater than 25 mm (1 inch);

For repair welding of any steel casting.

10.0 HEAT TREATMENT 10.1

Preheat
A.

Preheat requirements shall also apply to tack welds, fillet and attachment welds,
and thermal gouging and cutting of structural steels.

The minimum preheat temperature shall be in accordance with the Code for the
welding process being used and higher strength steel being welded. In any cases,
minimum preheat temperature of 16℃ (60℉) shall be applied.

The preheat temperature shall be checked by suitable methods, such as
temperature-indicating crayons or thermocouple pyrometers, to ensure that the
required temperature is uniformly maintained during the welding operation.

10.2

Interpass temperature
Minimum preheat temperature requirements in Table 3.2 of the Code shall also apply to
minimum interpass temperature.

10.3

Stress-relief heat treatment
Where required by the drawings or specifications, welded assemblies shall be stressrelieved by heat treatment. The stress-relief heat treatment shall conform to paragraph 5.8
of the Code.

4K5-7

Appendix 4K5
Rev.0

11.0 REPAIR 11.1

The removal of weld metal or positions of the base metal shall be repaired in
accordance with paragraph 5.26 of the Code.

11.2

Surface defects may be removed by grinding or machining and may not be repaired by
welding provided that the following requirements are met:
A.

The remaining thickness of the section is not below the required thickness;

The area is examined, after blending, by a suitable method to ensure that the
defect has been removed or the indication reduced to an acceptable limit.

11.3

The surface area of defects shall be cleaned of all foreign materials for a distance of 51 mm
(2 inch) from the outside of the defect.

11.4

T he r ep a ir ed or r ep la c ed w el d s ha l l b e r es t or ed b y t h e met h o d originally used,
and the same technique and acceptance criteria shall be applied.

11.5

Additional weld metal to compensate for any deficiency in size shall be deposited using an
electrode smaller than that used for making the original weld, and preferably not more than
4.0 mm in diameter.

11.6

A f t er r ep a ir t h e s u r f a c e s h a l l b e b l en d e d u n i f o r ml y i n t o t h e surrounding
surface.

11.7

Prior written approval of the Buyer shall be obtained for repairs to base metal, repair of
major defects or delayed cracks, or for a revised design to compensate for deficiencies.

11.8

Definition of major repair
Major repairs are defined as the repair of any crack other than crater cracks or the repair
of defects that are indicative of a fundamental materials problem or of a process out of
control.

4K5-8(Final)

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/ STORAGE BUILDING

APPENDIX 4P
Standard Specification for Electrical
Apparatus

KEPCO E&C JOB No. : 11G79

ISSUE STATUS 0 05/31/18 Construction issue REV. NO DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED

Preparer : 김기운, Tel : 054-421-4877

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT / STORAGE BUILDING

APPENDIX 4P
Standard Specification for Electrical Apparatus

KEPCO E&C JOB NO. : 11G79

ISSUE STATUS

0
REV. NO.

Issue for Use
DATE

DESCRIPTIONS PREPARED CHECKED 작성자 : 김기운 REVIEWED APPROVED 전화 : 054-421-4877

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION. TITLE PAGE 1.0

SCOPE ...………………………………………….................................... 4P-1

2.0

ATTACHMENTS
A.

INSULATED TERMINAL LUGS FOR CONTROL AND
INSTRUMENTATION WIRING

COMPRESSION COPPER POWER LUGS

TERMINATION OF CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION
CABLES AND WIRES

CONDUIT TERMINATIONS AT THERMOCOUPLES,
TRANSMITTERS, SOLENOIDS, ETC.

TERMINATION OF CONDUIT AND CABLES AT MOTOR
DRIVE UNITS, VALVES, ETC.

HINGED COVER CABINETS WITH REMOVABLE PANEL
FOR TERMINAL BLOCK MOUNTING

CABLE REQUIREMENT FOR SUPPLIER FURNISHED CABLE

TC 4P -1 (Final)

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0

1.0

SCOPE
This Appendix provides design requirements and general information to be used by the
Supplier for electrical equipment design. Refer to each individual attachment for specific
information regarding the scope of each one.
The products listed herein are proven to be adequate for the intended uses specified by the
buyer. Other brands may be substituted where the Supplier demonstrates that the substitute
product is adequate for the intended use.

4P-1 (Final)

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0

ATTACHMENT A

INSULATED TERMINAL LUGS FOR
CONTROL & INSTRUMENTATION WIRING

A-1

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment A

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
1.0

TITLE PAGE

SPECIFICATIONS .……………………………………. ........................ A-3

A-2

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment A

1.0 SPECIFICATIONS 1.1

All terminal lugs shall be screw-compression ring tongue type.

1.2

All connections to terminal blocks, instrument, etc., shall be made with following tin
plated compression type ring tongue terminal lugs according to the location or Electrical
Classification of systems, equipment or components as specified in Section 4 of the
specification.
Terminal lugs of "Thomas & Betts", "Burndy", "Panduit", or "3M", or KS Marked as
listed on page A-5, or equivalent

1.3

The wire insulation shall be removed without nicking the conductor. The wire shall be
firmly inserted into the lug and crimped with a ratchet type, or positive action
air/hydraulic tool as listed on Page A-4, or as recommended by the lug manufacturer.

1.4

Manufacturer's standard insulating sleeve for listed terminals are Polyvinyl-Chloride
(PVC) for terminal lugs of "Thomas & Betts", "Burndy", "Panduit", or "3M""; Nylon for
KS marked or equivalent. The Supplier shall obtain the buyer's prior approval for
furnishing insulated lugs with other than Manufacturer Standard insulation on them.
Acceptable manufacturers and specific catalog numbers of acceptable insulating lugs are
listed on Page A-4.

1.5

Part numbers specified in this attachment are for use with AWG conductors. If metric
conductors are to be furnished by the Supplier, the appropriate lug from the same
manufacturer and of the same type shall be used.

1.6

Terminal lugs of KS marked or equivalent shall be made of Oxygen Free HighConductivity Copper (OFHC) and shall meet the KSC2620.

A-3

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment A
RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURER
WIRE
SIZE
(AWG)

STUD
SIZE

22-18 THOMAS & BETTS BURNDY PANDUIT 3M

Nominal
Number

INSTALLATION
TOOL

RBP 1.5-3.5

Recommended
Manufacture

RBP 1.5-4 " RBP 1.5-5 " RBP 2.5-3.5 " RBP 2.5-4 " RBP 2.5-5 " RBP 2.5-6 " RBP 4, 5-3.5 " RBP 4, 5-4 " RBP 4, 5-5 " RBP 4, 6-6 " CT-720 RBP 10-5 " CT-720 RBP 10-6 "

CATALOG
NUMBER

INSTALLATION
TOOL

CATALOG
NUMBER

INSTALLATION
TOOL

CATALOG
NUMBER

INSTALLATION
TOOL

CATALOG
NUMBER

6 18RA-6X WT 145C TP16-6 MR8-89-1 PV18-6R CT-400 MV18-6R/S 22-18 8 18RA-8X WT 145C TP16-8 MR8-89-1 PV18-8R CT-400 MV18-8R/L 22-18 10 18RA-10X WT 145C TP16-10 MR8-89-1 PV18-10R CT-400 MV18-10R/L 16-14 6 14RB-6X WT 145C TP14-6 MR8-89-1 PV14-6RX CT-400 MV14-6R/S 16-14 8 14RB-8X WT 145C TP14-8 MR8-89-1 PV14-8RX CT-400 MV14-8R/L 16-14 10 14RB-10X WT 145C TP14-10 MR8-89-1 PV14-10RX CT-400 MV14-10R/L 16-14 1/4" 14RB-14X WT 145C TP14-14 MR8-89-1 PV14-14RX CT-400 MV14-14R/S 12-10 6 10RC-6X TP10-6 MR8-89-1 PV10-6RX CT-460 MV10-6R 12-10 8 10RC-8X TP10-8 MR8-89-1 PV10-8RX CT-460 MV10-8R 12-10 10 10RC-10X WT 2130 TP10-10 MR8-89-1 PV10-10RX CT-460 MV10-10R 12-10 1/4" 10RC-14X

WT 145C or
WT 2130

TP10-14 MR8-89-1 PV10-14RX CT-460 MV10-14R/S 8 10 PV8-10RX 8 1/4" PV8-14RX

WT 145C or
WT 2130
WT 145C or
WT 2130

A-4 (Final) KS Marked

INSTALLATION
TOOL

TH 482
or TH 484
TH 482
or TH 484
TH 482
or TH 484
TH 482
or TH 484
TH 482
or TH 484
TH 482
or TH 484
TH 482
or TH 484
TH 482
or TH 484
TH 482
or TH 484
TH 482
or TH 484
TH 482
or TH 484

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0

ATTACHMENT B

COMPRESSION COPPER POWER LUGS

B-1

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment B

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION

TITLE PAGE 1.0

SCOPE ... ……………………..............………………………………...... B-3

2.0

SPECIFICATIONS ..............……........……………………………….......

B-2 B-3

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment B

1.0 SCOPE 1.1

This Attachment provides specifications and general information for copper compression
terminal lugs to be used for terminating stranded insulated and uninsulated copper
conductors.

2.0 SPECIFICATIONS 2.1

Lugs shall be color keyed or coded, tool applied compression type (hexagonal or
circumferential), tin plated made of high conductivity copper and be listed by the
Underwriters Laboratories for use with copper cable or KS marked(only for one-hole
lugs) or equivalent.

2.2

Lugs shall be applied in accordance with the following instructions:
a. The installation tools and dies shall be of either hexagonal or circumferential
compression type as recommended by the lug manufacturer. The tooling shall be
color coded or color keyed with the lugs.
b. For inspection purposes, the manufacturer's die code shall be embossed upon the
applied compressed connection on lugs.

2.3

The bolt holes of the lugs shall be drilled and spaced in accordance with the latest NEMA
Standards Publications No. CC-1 "Electric Power Connection for substations". The bolt
holes of KS marked one-hole lugs shall be drilled in accordance with the KSC2620.

2.4

Lugs listed are long barrel type for maximum current-carrying requirements and have
barrels that are blind ended.

2.5

Lugs shall meet the performance requirements of Underwriters Laboratories Test of
UL486 except the heating or current cycling tests shall be performed for a minimum of
500 cycles.

2.6

2.7

KS marked(only for one-hole lugs) or equivalent shall be made of Oxygen Free HighConductivity Copper (OFHC) and shall meet the KSC2620.

B-3

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment B
TYCO ELECTRONICS
ONE-HOLE TERMINAL LUGS

WIRE SIZE CAT. NO.

BOLT
SIZE
INCH(MM)

A B C

DIMENSION INCHES (MILLIMETERS)

DIE
CODE

HYDRAULIC INSTALLING HEAD & DIE
CODE PART NO.
69065

69099 69082 #2 325202 5/16 (7.9) 1.62 (41.15) 0.84 (21.34) 0.71 (21.34) 2 46321-3 46765-3 - #1 325202 5/16 (7.9) 1.62 (41.15) 0.84 (21.34) 0.71 (21.34) 2 46321-3 46321-3 - 1/0 325303 3/8 (9.5) 1.97 (50.04) 1.04 (26.42) 0.87 (22.10) 1/0 46322-2 46766-2 - 2/0 325403 3/8 (9.5) 2.11 (53.59) 1.09 (27.69) 0.97 (24.64) 2/0 46323-2 46767-2 - 3/0 325503 3/8 (9.5) 2.26 (57.40) 1.14 (28.96) 1.08 (27.43) 3/0 46324-2 46749-2 - 4/0 325605 1/2 (12.7) 2.45 (62.23) 1.21 (30.74) 1.19 (30.23) 4/0 46325-2 46750-2 - 250 MCM 325705 1/2 (12.7) 2.58 (65.53) 1.25 (31.75) 1.28 (32.51) 250 - 46751-2 -

ONE HOLE LUG
DIMENSION DETAIL
B-4

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment B
TYCO ELECTRONICS
TWO-HOLE TERMINAL LUGS

WIRE SIZE CAT. NO.

BOLT SIZE
INCH(MM)

DIMENSION INCHES (MILLIMETERS)
A

B C

DIE
CODE

HYDRAULIC INSTALLING HEAD & DIE
CODE PART NO.
69065
69099
69082

1/0 53680-2 1/2 (12.7) 4-1/4 (107.9) 2-51/64 (71.0) 27/32 (21.4) 1/0 46322-2 46766-2 - 2/0 53681-2 1/2 (12.7) 4-7/16 (112.7) 2-27/32 (72.2) 61/64 (24.2) 2/0 46323-2 46767-2 - 3/0 53682-2 1/2 (12.7) 4-21/32 (118.3) 2-57/64 (73.4) 1-1/16 (27.0) 3/0 46324-2 46749-2 - 4/0 327284 1/2 (12.7) 4.21 (106.93) 2.96 (75.19) 1.19 (30.23) 4/0 46325-2 46750-2 - 250 MCM 327285 1/2 (12.7) 4.34 (110.24) 3 (76.2) 1.28 (32.51) 250 - 46751-2 - 300 MCM 327286 1/2 (12.7) 4.43 (112.52) 3 (76.2) 1.40 (35.56) 300 - 46752-2 - 350 MCM 327287 1/2 (12.7) 4.55 (115.57) 3 (76.2) 1.51 (38.35) 350 - 46753-2 69653 500 MCM 327289 1/2 (12.7) 4.80 (121.92) 2.98 (75.69) 1.80 (45.72) 500 - - 46755-2 600 MCM 327290 1/2 (12.7) 4.97 (126.24) 3 (76.2) 1.95 (49.53) 600 - - 46756-2 700 MCM 53686-2 1/2 (12.7) 6-9/32 (159.5) 3 (76.2) 2-3/32 (53.2) 700* - - 46757-2 1000 MCM 327294 1/2 (12.7) 5.64 (143.00) 3.19 (81.02) 2.51 (63.75) 1000 - - 46760-2

*Range from 650 to 750 MCM.

TWO HOLE LUG DIMENSION DETAIL
B-5

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment B
BURNDY
ONE-HOLE TERMINAL LUGS
WIRE
SIZE

CAT.
NO.

BOLT SIZE
INCH(MM)

#6 YA6C 1/4 (6.4) #4 YA4C 1/4 (6.4) #2 YA2C 5/16 (7.9) #1 YA1C 5/16 (7.9) 1/0 YA25TC38 3/8 (9.5) 2/0 YA26 3/8 (9.5) 3/0 YA27 1/2 (12.7) 4/0 YA28 1/2 (12.7)

250
MCM

YA29 1/2 (12.7)

DIMENSION INCHES (MILLIMETERS)
A
2-1/64
(51.2)
2-7/64
(53.6)
2-27/64
(61.5)
2-3/8 (60.5)
2-21/32
(67.5)
2-51/64
(71.0)
3-7/32
(81.8)
2-31/32
(75.4)
3-3/16
(81.0)

COLOR KEY B C 21/32 (16.7) 13/32 (10.4) BLUE 11/16 (17.4) 1/2 (12.7) GRAY 45/64 (17.9) 19/32 (15.0) BROWN 11/16 (17.4) 43/64 (17.0) GREEN 53/64 (21.0) 3/4 (19.1) PINK 51/64 (20.2) 13/16 (20.6) BLACK 1-3/16 (30.2) 29/32 (23.1) ORANGE 1-3/64 (26.6) 1 (25.4) PURPULE 1-3/32 (27.8) 1-3/32 (27.7) YELLOW

NOTE: For the die index, 1 means that die is color coded and 2 means that die is not color coded.

B-6

DIE
INDEX
NO.

HYDRAULIC INSTALLING HEAD &
DIE CODE PART NO.
Y39

Y46

1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2

U8CABT
U5CRT
U6CABT
U4CRT
U2CRT
U2CRT
U4CABT
U1CRT
U2CABT
U25RT
U26RT
U26RT
U27RT
U27RT
U28RT
U28RT
U29RT
U29RT

374
7
346
8
10
10
375
11
348
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16

Y48B
C28R
C28R
C29R
C29R

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment B
BURNDY
TWO-HOLE TERMINAL LUGS
WIRE
SIZE
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
250
MCM
300
MCM
350
MCM
400
MCM
500
MCM

CAT.
NO.
YA252N
YA262N
YA272N
YA282N
YA292N
YA302N
YA312N
YA322N
YA342N

BOLT SIZE
INCH(MM)

DIMENSION INCHES (MILLIMETERS)

COLOR KEY A B C 1/2 (12.7) 4-51/64 (121.8) 3-1/16 (77.8) 13/16 (20.8) PINK 1/2 (12.7) 5-1/32 (127.8) 3-1/32 (77.0) 13/16 (20.8) BLACK 1/2 (12.7) 5-1/16 (128.6) 3-1/32 (77.0) 15/16 (23.8) ORANGE 1/2 (12.7) 5-1/16 (128.6) 3-1/32 (77.0) 1 (25.4) PURPLE 1/2 (12.7) 5-5/16 (134.9) 3-1/32 (77.0) 1-1/32 (26.2) YELLOW 1/2 (12.7) 5-3/4 (146.1) 3-1/32 (77.0) 1-7/32 (31.0) WHITE 1/2 (12.7) 5-23/32 (145.2) 3 (76.2) 1-9/32 (32.5) RED 1/2 (12.7) 5-7/8 (149.2) 3-1/32 (77.0) 1-13/32 (35.8) BLUE 1/2 (12.7) 5-31/32 (151.6) 3-1/32 (77.0) 1-17/32 (38.9) BROWN

NOTE: For the die index, 1 means that die is color coded and 2 means that die is not color coded.

B-7

DIE
INDEX
NO.

HYDRAULIC INSTALLING HEAD &
DIE CODE PART NO.
Y39

Y46

1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2

U2CABT
U25RT
U26RT
U26RT
U27RT
U27RT
U28RT
U28RT
U29RT
U29RT
U28ART
U30RT
U29ART
U31RT
U30ART
U32RT
U31ART
U34RT

348
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
298
17
324
18
470
19
299
20

Y48B
C28R
C28R
C29R
C29R
C28AR
C30R
C29AR
C31R
C30AR
C32R
C31AR
C34

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment B
BURNDY
TWO-HOLE TERMINAL LUGS
WIRE
SIZE
600
MCM
750
MCM
1000
MCM

CAT. NO.

DIMENSION INCHES (MILLIMETERS)

BOLT SIZE
INCH(MM)

A B C

COLOR
KEY

YA36-2N 1/2 (12.7) 6-5/8 (168.3) 3-1/32 (77.0) 1-23/32 (43.7) GREEN YA39-2N 1/2 (12.7) 6-3/4 (171.5) 3-1/32 (77.0) 1-29/32 (48.4) BLACK YA44-2N 1/2 (12.7) 7 (177.8) 3-1/32 (77.0) 2-3/16 (55.6) WHITE

DIE
INDEX
NO.

HYDRAULIC INSTALLING HEAD &
DIE CODE PART NO.
Y39

Y46 Y48B

1 472
2 22
1 473
2 24
1 27
2 27

U32ART
U36RT
U36ART
U39RT
-

U32ART
U36RT
U36ART
U39RT
P44RT
P44RT

C32AR
C36R
C36AR
C39R
C44R
C44R

NOTE: For the die index, 1 means that die is color coded and 2 means that die is not color coded.
PANDUIT
ONE-HOLE TERMINAL LUGS

WIRE SIZE CAT. NO.

BOLT SIZE
INCH(MM)

DIMENSION INCHES (MILLIMETERS)
A

B C

COLOR
KEY

HYDRAULIC INSTALLING HEAD & DIE CODE
NO.
PANDUIT
PANDUIT
BURNDY Y39
CT-930
CT-940CH

1/0 LCB 1/0-56 5/16 (7.9) 2.61 (66.3) 0.755(19.2) 0.76 (19.3) PINK P42 P42 U25RT 2/0 LCB 2/0-38 3/8 (9.5) 2.82 (71.6) 0.838(21.3) 0.85 (21.6) BLACK P45 P45 U26RT 3/0 LCB 3/0-12 1/2 (12.7) 3.12 (79.2) 1.088(27.6) 0.96 (24.4) ORANGE P50 P50 U27RT 4/0 LCB 4/0-12 1/2 (12.7) 3.22 (81.8) 1.090(27.7) 1.06 (26.9) PURPLE P54 P54 U28RT

250
MCM

LCB 25012 1/2 (12.7) 3.32 (84.3) 1.090(27.7) 1.17 (29.7) YELLOW P62 P62 U29RT B-8

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment B
PANDUIT
TWO-HOLE TERMINAL LUGS

WIRE SIZE CAT. NO.

BOLT SIZE
INCH(MM)

DIMENSION INCHES (MILLIMETERS)
A

B C

COLOR
KEY

HYDRAULIC INSTALLING HEAD & DIE CODE
NO.
PANDUIT
PANDUIT
BURNDY Y39
CT-930
CT-940CH
P42
P42
U25RT

1/0 LCC 1/0-12 1/2 (12.7) 4.86 (123.4) 3 (76.2) 0.80 (20.3) PINK 2/0 LCC 2/0-12 1/2 (12.7) 4.98 (126.5) 3 (76.2) 0.85 (21.6) BLACK P45 P45 U26RT 3/0 LCC 3/0-12 1/2 (12.7) 5.03 (127.7) 3 (76.2) 0.96 (24.4) ORANGE P50 P50 U27RT 4/0 LCC 4/0-12 1/2 (12.7) 5.13 (130.3) 3 (76.2) 1.06 (26.9) PURPLE P54 P54 U28RT

250
MCM
300
MCM
350
MCM
400
MCM
500
MCM
750
MCM
1000
MCM

LCC 25012
LCC 30012
LCC 35012
LCC 40012
LCC 50012
LCC 75012
LCC 100012

1/2 (12.7) 5.23 (132.8) 3 (76.2) 1.17 (29.7) YELLOW P62 P62 U29RT 1/2 (12.7) 5.94 (150.9) 3 (76.2) 1.19 (30.2) WHITE P66 P66 U30RT 1/2 (12.7) 5.99 (152.1) 3 (76.2) 1.28 (32.5) RED P71 P71 U31RT 1/2 (12.7) 6.10 (154.9) 3 (76.2) 1.39 (35.3) BLUE P76 P76 U32RT 1/2 (12.7) 6.36 (161.5) 3 (76.2) 1.54 (39.1) BROWN P87 P87 U34RT 1/2 (12.7) 7.04 (178.8) 3 (76.2) 1.89 (48.0) BLACK P106 P106 U39RT 1/2 (12.7) 7.29 (185.2) 3 (76.2) 2.17 (55.1) WHITE -- P125 - B-9

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment B
3M COMPANY
ONE-HOLE TERMINAL LUGS

WIRE SIZE CAT. NO.

BOLT SIZE
INCH(MM)

DIMENSION INCHES (MILLIMETERS)
A

B C DIE CODE

HYDRAULIC INSTALLING HEAD & DIE CODE
INDEX NO.
T&B 13246

T&B TBM15 BURNDY Y39 2/0 31036 3/8 (9.5) 2-27/32 (72.2) 29/32 (23.1) 13/16 (20.6) 2/0 42 42H U28RT 3/0 31041 1/2 (12.7) 3-1/8 (79.2) 1-5/32 (29.4) 29/32 (23.1) 3/0 45 45 U27RT 4/0 31045 1/2 (12.7) 3-5/16 (84.1) 1-5/32 (29.4) 1 (25.4) 4/0 50 50 U28RT

250
MCM

31049 1/2 (12.7) 3-3/8 (85.7) 1-3/32 (27.7) 1-1/8 (28.4) 250 54 54H U29RT B-10

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment B
3M COMPANY
TWO-HOLE TERMINAL LUGS
WIRE
SIZE
4/0
250
MCM
300
MCM
350
MCM
500
MCM
750
MCM
1000
MCM

CAT. NO.

BOLT SIZE
INCH(MM)

DIMENSION INCHES (MILLIMETERS)
A

B C

DIE
CODE

HYDRAULIC INSTALLING HEAD & DIE
CODE INDEX NO.
T&B 13246

T&B TBM15 BURNDY Y39 31145 1/2 (12.7) 5-5/32 (131.0) 3 (76.2) 1 (25.4) 4/0 54 54H U28RT 31149 1/2 (12.7) 5-5/16 (134.9) 3 (76.2) 1-1/8 (28.4) 250 62 62 U29RT 31153 1/2 (12.7) 5-3/4 (146.1) 3 (76.2) 1-7/32 (31.0) 300 66H 66 U30RT 31156 1/2 (12.7) 5-3/4 (146.1) 3 (76.2) 1-9/32 (32.5) 350 71H 71H U31RT 31166 1/2 (12.7) 6-5/32 (156.4) 3 (76.2) 1-17/32 (38.9) 500 87H 87H U34RT 31172 1/2 (12.7) 7 (177.8) 3 (76.2) 1-29/32 (48.4) 750 106H 106H U39RT 31178 1/2 (12.7) 7-9/32 (185.0) 3 (76.2) 2-3/16 (55.6) 1000 - 125H - B-11

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment B
THOMAS & BETTS CO.
ONE-HOLE TERMINAL LUGS
WIRE
SIZE

CAT. NO. #8 54930 #6

BOLT SIZE
INCH(MM)

DIMENSION INCHES (MILLIMETERS)
A

B C 1/4 (6.4) 1-15/32 (37.3) 9/16 (14.3) 15/32 (11.9) 54905 1/4 (6.4) 1-1/2 (38.1) 9/16 (14.3) #4 54906 1/4 (6.4) 1-17/32 (38.9) #2 54942 5/16 (7.9) #1 54947 1/0

COLOR
KEY

HYDRAULIC INSTALLING HEAD & DIE
CODE INDEX NO.
13642

TBM15 21940 RED 21 21 - 7/16 (11.1) BLUE 24 24 24 9/16 (14.3) 9/16 (14.3) GRAY 29 29 29 1-27/32 (46.8) 23/32 (18.6) 21/32 (16.7) BROWN 33 33 33 5/16 (7.9) 2-1/16 (52.4) 13/16 (20.6) 43/64 (17.1) GREEN 37 37 37 54909 3/8 (9.5) 2-3/32 (53.2) 13/16 (20.6) 3/4 (19.1) PINK 42 42H 42 2/0 54910 3/8 (9.5) 2-3/32 (53.2) 1-1/16 (27.0) 13/16 (20.6) BLACK 45 45 45 3/0 54965 1/2 (12.7) 2-17/32 (64.3) 1-1/16 (27.0) 15/16 (23.8) ORANGE 50 50 50 4/0 54970 1/2 (12.7) 2-11/16 (68.3) 1-1/16 (27.0) 1-1/32 (26.2) PURPLE 54 54H 54

250
MCM

54913 1/2 (12.7) 3-1/32 (77.0) 1-1/16 (27.0) 1-1/16 (27.0) YELLOW 62 62 62 B-12

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment B
THOMAS & BETTS CO.
TWO-HOLE TERMINAL LUGS
WIRE
SIZE

CAT. NO. 2/0 54862

3/0
4/0
250
MCM
300
MCM
350
MCM
400
MCM
500
MCM
600
MCM
750
MCM
1000
MCM

BOLT SIZE
INCH(MM)

DIMENSION INCHES (MILLIMETERS)
A

B C 1/2 (12.7) 4-5/16 (109.5) 2-15/16 (74.6) 13/16 (20.6) 54864 1/2 (12.7) 4-13/32 (111.9) 2-15/16 (74.6) 54866 1/2 (12.7) 4-3/4 (120.7) 54868 1/2 (12.7) 54870

COLOR
KEY

HYDRAULIC INSTALLING HEAD & DIE
CODE INDEX NO.
13642

TBM15 21940 BLACK 45 45 45 15/16 (23.8) ORANGE 50 50 50 3 (76.2) 1-1/32 (26.2) PURPLE 54H 54H 54 4-27/32 (123.0) 3 (76.2) 1-3/32 (27.9) YELLOW 62 62 62 1/2 (12.7) 5-1/32 (127.8) 3 (76.2) 1-1/4 (31.8) WHITE 66 66 66 54872 1/2 (12.7) 5-1/4 (133.4) 3 (76.2) 1-23/64 (34.5) RED 71H 71H 71 54874 1/2 (12.7) 5-9/32 (134.1) 3 (76.2) 1-7/16 (36.5) BLUE 76 76 76 54876 1/2 (12.7) 5-11/16 (144.5) 3 (76.2) 1-5/8 (41.3) BROWN 87H 87H 87 54878 1/2 (12.7) 5-13/16 (147.6) 3 (76.2) 1-3/4 (44.5) GREEN 94H 94H 94 54880 1/2 (12.7) 6 (152.4) 3 (76.2) 1-15/16 (49.2) BLACK 106H 106 106 54882 1/2 (12.7) 6-39/64 (167.9) 3 (76.2) 2-17/64 (57.5) - - 125H 125 B-13 (Final)

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0

ATTACHMENT C

TERMINATION OF CONTROL & INSTRUMENTATION CABLES AND WIRES

C-1

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment C

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION

TITLE PAGE 1.0

SCOPE ………………………………………………………………… C-3

2.0

PURPOSE…….…………………………………….…………………

3.0

GENERAL……………………………………………….……………. C-3

4.0

WIRE IDENTIFICATION…………………………………………….

C-3 5.0

WIRE SUPPORT AT EQUIPMENT………………………………….

C-3 6.0

TERMINATING WIRES…………………………….………………..

C-3 7.0

WIRING OF PANEL……………………………………………….…

C-5 8.0

SWINGING PANEL OR DOOR WIRING…………………………..

C-6 9.0

TERMINATION OF TAPE-SHIELD DRAIN WIRE ……………….

C-7 10.0

TERMINATION OF METAL SHIELDING BRAID…………………. C-9

C-2 C-3

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment C

1.0 SCOPE 1.1

The recommendations contained herein apply to all control, instrumentation and
thermocouple cables and wires.

2.0 PURPOSE 2.1

The purpose of this Attachment is to identify methods of terminating control and
instrumentation cables and wires.

3.0 GENERAL 3.1

The details shown in this Attachment are typical. They are intended to serve as a guide
and reference and are supplemental to the Purchase Specification and Electrical Drawings.

4.0 WIRE IDENTIFICATION 4.1

Each wire shall be identified at both ends by securely fastening noncorrosive cable tags or
markers around the wire. These tags or markers shall be imprinted with the wire
numbers identified on the wiring diagrams.

4.2

Cable tags and markers shall be suitable for the wire and the environmental conditions
mentioned in Section 4 of the specification.

5.0

WIRE SUPPORT AT EQUIPMENT

5.1

Supplier shall provide support to avoid stress on the individual wires. All wires
terminating at control boards, logic cabinets, switchgear, motor control centers, etc., shall
be supported with facilities furnished with the equipment.

6.0 TERMINATING WIRES 6.1

All individual wires shall be terminated on terminal blocks, fuse blocks, etc.. No more
than two wires shall be connected to any one terminal point.

6.2

Only one wire per terminal will be used by the buyer on the field side of the terminal
blocks. Any common connections required shall be provided by the Supplier on the
panel side of the terminal block and the field side shall be left free for the buyer’s wiring.
C-3

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment C

TERMINATING WIRES (CONT.)

6.3

Each terminal for the field side of the terminal block shall be the minimum width of
0.312” (See Detail A).

6.4

When cutting away the insulation, wire stripping tools shall be used. The length of
insulation removed shall be as recommended by the terminal lug manufacturer. The bare
wire must be completed covered by the ferrule on the lug.

6.5

Each wire (other than thermocouple extension wire) shall be terminated with a ringtongue terminal lug which is to be fastened to the wire with the proper compression tools.
Attachment A to this Appendix indicates the applicable ring-tongue terminal lug to be
used, and also indicates other pertinent directions on the subject of terminations.

6.6

When grounding wires for potential or current transformer circuits are indicated, each
grounding wire shall be insulated wire (Type SIS or XHHW), be suitable for the
environmental conditions mentioned in Section 4 of purchase specification, be 10 AWG
(5.5 mm2) with Class B stranding and be terminated at both ends with the specified ringtongue terminal lug.

6.7

When a grounding circuit for instrumentation cable shield and/or drain wire is indicated,
the ground wire and jumper wires of the circuits shall be assembled so that both wires (to
any indicated terminal block terminal) are terminated in a single ring-tongue terminal lug.
This allows removal of the ground from a given terminal without interrupting the ground
circuit to other terminals. The ground and jumper wires shall be 18 AWG (1.0 mm2) with
Class B stranding, be suitable for the environmental condition mentioned in Section 4 of
purchase specification and be insulated wire (600V, Type SIS or XHHW). The grounding
wire shall be terminated at the grounding point in a single ring-tongue terminal lug.

6.8

Wires requiring termination in either a plug or receptacle shall be terminated as the type
plug or receptacle requires according to the proper Wiring Diagram.

6.9

Thermocouple extension wire terminations shall be made without the use of lugs. After
stripping off sufficient insulation, each wire is terminated (in the case of machine screw
terminals) by bending the wire in a "U" shape around the terminal screw in the same
direction as the screw tightens and tightening the screw properly.

6.10

When thermocouple extension wire termination is made in the terminal block, bar
conductor in the terminal block shall be of the same material as the thermocouple extension
wire in order to have proper accuracy.

6.11

If connections are made with plug, connector, etc., both male and female of plug, connector,
etc. shall be supplied with the equipment and/or cable.

C-4

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment C

7.0 WIRING OF PANEL 7.1

Control wires shall be continuous between terminal points and be 14 AWG (2.08 mm2)
with Class B stranding. Insulation shall be 600 volt, suitable for the environmental
conditions mentioned in Section 4 of the specification and be of Type SIS or XHHW.
Terminations shall be as mentioned in Section 6 on this attachment.

7.2

Wiring shall be bundled, be run in straight lines without kinks and have uniform bends.
Bends shall be of sufficient radius to avoid damage to the insulation. The wires shall be
symmetrically arranged so as to avoid stress on the terminations. They shall be secured
in position with bolted cleats and mounting plates or secured with cable ties and
terminated in a good workmanlike manner.

7.3

Approved terminal blocks shall be furnished within suitable enclosures for cable
connections to or between panels, racks or skid mounted units. Requirements for
terminal blocks are identified in Attachment F to this Appendix.

7.4

Separate terminal blocks shall be provided for power, control and/or instrumentation
cables, respectively. And for noise reduction, opening for power, control and/or
instrumentation cable entrances shall be separated, respectively.

7.5

Wiring techniques(e.g., physical separation, shield of susceptible circuit or shield of
EMI/RFI source. etc.) shall be applied to minimize producing undesirable effects in the
control or instrumentation circuit.

C-5

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment C

8.0

SWINGING PANEL OR DOOR WIRING

8.1

When connections are made from a fixed panel or box to a swinging panel or door, the
conductors used across the hinge shall be 14 AWG with Class K stranding or as specified
on the Electrical Drawings. These conductors shall have tinned copper wire with 600 volt,
Type SIS or XHHW and be suitable for the environmental conditions mentioned in Section
4 of the specification.

8.2

Conductors crossing a door hinge area shall be cleated on both sides of that area so that
they rotate (instead of flexing) with the movement of the swinging panel or door. (See
Detail A)

DETAIL A
METHOD OF INSTALLING HINGE WIRE ON SWINGING PANEL OR DOOR
C-6

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment C

9.0

TERMINATION OF TAPE-SHIELD DRAIN WIRE

9.1

Each drain wire termination shall be made by using an insulated butt splice and insulated
extension wire as indicated in the following details:

DETAIL B
INDIVIDUAL SHIELDED PAIRS, TRIADS, ETC.

DETAIL C
OVERALL SHIELD DRAIN WIRE

C-7

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment C

9.0

TERMINATION OF TAPE-SHIELD DRAIN WIRE(CONT.)

DETAIL D
TAPE-SHIELD DRAIN WIRE EXTENSION WITHOUT
USING INSULATED BUTT-SPLICE

DETAIL E
SHIELD BRAID TERMINATION

C-8

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment C

9.0

TERMINATION OF TAPE-SHIELD DRAIN WIRE(CONT.)
Notes for Details B through D
1.

The outer cable jacket shall only be removed for a distance necessary to expose
sufficient lengths of individual conductors to make the proper connections to
termination points. The drain wire extension shall be 18 AWG tinned copper
with Class B stranding and cut to a length to reach its termination point. The
insulation shall be 600V, Type SIS or XHHW and suitable for the environmental
conditions mentioned in Section 4 of the specification.

The insulated butt splice shall be crimped with the ratchet crimping tool
recommended by the manufacturer of splicing material.

The sleeve shall be either heat shrinkable tubing or electrical tape, shall capture
the tape shield and the insulation on the drain wire extension and shall be suitable
for cable materials.

Detail D is an acceptable alternate termination of the tape-shield drain wire.
When this method is used, an insulating sleeve shall be slipped over the drain
wire before the lug is attached. The drain wire shall be made long enough to
reach its termination point.

10.0

TERMINATION OF METAL SHIELDING BRAID

10.1

Each shielded braid terminal shall be terminated as described in the following paragraphs.

10.2

The ferrules and splices required for properly terminating cables and conductors which
have braided shielding braid will depend on the diameters of the cables and conductors
involved. This attachment will, therefore, recommend the ferrules and splices by
manufacturers types rather than specific catalog numbers. The Supplier shall consult the
hardware manufacturer for applicable catalog numbers of the complete splice and the
crimping tool required to terminate each size cable.

10.3

The following methods are recommended for terminating the metal shielding braid:
Method 1 Shield Extension
This method uses a combed out and twisted wires of the braid as a conductor which is
spliced with an insulated butt splice to an insulated wire as shown in Detail E.

C-9

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment C

10.

TERMINATION OF METAL SHIELDING BRAID (CONT.)
Notes for Detail E
1. The outer cable jacket shall only be removed for a distance necessary to expose
sufficient lengths of individual conductors to make the proper connections to
termination points. The drain wire extension shall be 18 AWG tinned copper with
Class B or Class K stranding and cut to a length to reach its termination point. The
insulation shall be 600V, Type SIS or XHHW and suitable for the environmental
conditions mentioned in Section 4 of the specification.
2. The shielded braid should be combed out and twisted to size 12 AWG conductor.
3.

The insulated butt splice shall be crimped with the crimping tool recommended by the
splice manufacturer.

4. The sleeve shall be either heat shrinkable tubing or tape, shall capture the cable jacket,
shielding braid and lead wire insulation and shall be suitable for the cable materials.
Method 2 Single Piece
The single piece termination contains a tinned metallic shell which protects the inner
conductor(s) during the crimping of a shield extension to the metal shielding braid as
detailed in principle by Detail F.

DETAIL F
1 PIECE TERMINATION TO SHIELD (SH)
C-10

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment C
10.

TERMINATION OF METAL SHIELDING BRAID (CONT.)
Notes for Detail F
1.

The shield extension shall be 18 AWG tinned copper with Class B or Class K
stranding. The insulation shall be 600V, Type SIS or XHHW and suitable for the
environmental conditions mentioned in Section 4 of the specification. The
extension shall be trimmed so that the shielded conductors are shielded until
nearing their termination points.

Recommended manufacturers of the shell termination piece are:
AMP - "Termashield"
Burndy - "Uniring"
Thomas & Betts - "STA-KON"

The one piece termination may be of the preinsulated kind or be insulated with
either manufacturers insulating sleeve or heat shrinkable tubing.

Method 3 Two Piece
The two piece termination consists of a harder inner and softer outer ferrule which allows
crimping of the shield extension to the braid without distortion of the inner conductor(s)
as detailed in Detail G.

DETAIL G
2 PIECE TERMINATION TO SHIELD (SH)
C-11

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment C

10.

TERMINATION OF METAL SHIELDING BRAID (CONT.)
Notes for Detail G
1.

The shield extension shall be 18 AWG tinned copper with Class B or Class K
stranding. The insulation shall be 600V crosslinked polyethylene (Type SIS or
XHHW). The shield extension shall be tinned so that the shielded conductors
are shielded until nearing their termination points.

Recommended manufacturers of the two piece terminations are:
Burndy - "Hyring"
Thomas & Betts - "STA-KON"

The two piece termination may be of the preinsulated kind or be insulated with
either manufacturers insulating sleeve or heat shrinkable tubing.

C-12 (Final)

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0

ATTACHMENT D

CONDUIT TERMINATIONS AT THERMOCOUPLES,
TRANSMITTERS, SOLENOIDS, ETC.

D-1

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment D

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLE PAGE 1.0

SCOPE ...........................………………………………………………… D-3

2.0

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS ..………………………………………..... D-3

D-2

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment D

1.0 SCOPE 1.1

This attachment outlines the method of terminating conduits at thermocouples,
transmitters, solenoids, etc. This information is being supplied to the manufacturer for
information to illustrate the field installation detail.

2.0 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 2.1

Unless otherwise specified on the Construction Drawings, conduit terminations at
thermocouples, transmitters and solenoids shall be made with liquid-tight flexible conduit.

2.2

Minimum one foot length of liquid-tight flexible conduit will be used for terminating of
rigid steel conduit to the equipment.

2.3

See following typical detail installations as shown below.

D-3

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment D

CONDUIT CONNECTION AT THERMOCOUPLE

Conduit Connection at Thermocouples, Transmitters, Solenoids,
Etc. (in Mild Environment)
D-4 (Final)

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0

ATTACHMENT E

TERMINATION OF CONDUIT
AND CABLES AT MOTORS DRIVE UNITS, VALVES, ETC.

E-1

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment E

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLE PAGE 1.0

SCOPE ...........................………………………………………………… E-3

2.0

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS ..………………………………………..... E-3

E-2

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment E

1.0 SCOPE 1.1

This attachment outlines the method of terminating conduits at motors, damper drive units,
motor operated valves, and other equipment. This information is being supplied to the
manufacturer to identify the field installation detail.

2.0 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 2.1

Unless otherwise specified on the Construction Drawings, conduit terminations at motors
and other electrically driven equipment shall be made with liquid-tight flexible conduit.

2.2

Minimum one foot length of liquid-tight flexible conduit will be used for terminating of
rigid steel conduit to the equipment.

2.3

Motors and drives located outdoors shall have terminal housings that can be oriented to
allow conduit entrance from the bottom or either sides.

2.4

See following typical detail installations as shown below.

E-3

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment E

DETAIL A DETAIL B

DETAIL C
E-4 (Final)

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
ATTACHMENT F

HINGED COVER CABINETS WITH REMOVABLE PANEL
FOR TERMINAL BLOCK MOUNTING

F-1

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment F

Hinged cover cabinets with non-locking handles and latches, with panels mounted on
studs in rear for installation indoors in dry, non-hazardous locations, shall be 14 gauge
sheet steel and shall conform to the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association
(NEMA) Standard for Type 1 enclosures.

Cabinet sizes, except for Detail A, are based on minimum spacing required for the
installation and wiring of 12 point molded bakelite terminal blocks with washer head
screw contacts as follows:
A.

Control Terminations (10-32 Screw, 600V Rated or above)
Series 1500, Catalog No. 1512ST
Series 1600, Catalog No. 1612ST
Marathon Special Products Co.
Type EB-25, Catalog No. EB25A12W
General Electric Co.
Catalog No. TBU-12
Westinghouse Electric Corp.
Series YSFT-XXX-XX-S-FN
Yongsung Electric Co., Ltd. or equivalent

Instrumentation Terminations (8-32 Screw) for low level signals
Series 300, Catalog No. 312
Marathon Special Products Co.
Type CR151, Catalog No. CR151B2
General Electric Co.
Series YSFT-XXX-XX-S-FN
Yongsung Electric Co., Ltd. or equivalent

Terminal Blocks shall be suitable to the size of external wiring which will be decided by
the buyer. Therefore, terminal blocks rating and dimension shall be provided to the
buyer for review.
3.

Detail A shows the cabinet arrangement for mounting a single 8 point Marathon Special
Products Co's series 1600 terminal block, or equivalent.

Cabinet sizes shown are typical sizes

F-2

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment F

The quantity, size and position of conduit or cable openings in the cabinets shall be
determined from Electrical Installation Drawings (where applicable ) and punched by the
Construction Contractor.

Hinged cover cabinets that are to be installed outdoors shall be 12 gauge, they shall be
galvanized without knockouts, and the cover shall be suitably gasketed. If galvanized
finish is damaged by welding, drilling or cutting, the exposed metal shall be repaired with
a zinc-rich paint or a galvanized repair stick. Cabinet shall conform otherwise to NEMA
Standard for Type 4X enclosures.

Cabinets shall have a 1" diameter drain hole provided in a bottom front corner with a
bronze screen or mesh spot-brazed on the inside surface over the opening.

Terminal blocks shall be mounted to the panel at the rear of the cabinet.

Terminal block number plate shall be attached near each terminal block within cabinet.

All terminal blocks shall be marked in a permanent manner with the name of the
manufacturer, the identification or serial no., terminal block point no. etc.,etc. and those
information shall be provided to the buyer for review.

F-3

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment F

DETAIL
NUMBER

TERMINAL BLOCKS CABINET DIMENSIONS QUANTITY

MAX. NO.
OF POINTS

HEIGHT WIDTH DEPTH A 1 8 16” 12” 6-5/8” TO 7” B 1 12 20” 16” 6-5/8” TO 7” C 2 24 20” 20” 6-5/8” TO 7” D 4 48 30” 20” 6-5/8” TO 7” E 6 72 30” 24” 6-5/8” TO 7” F-4 (Final)

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0

ATTACHMENT G

CABLE REQUIREMENT FOR SUPPLIER FURNISHED CABLE

G-1

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment G

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 1.0 TITLE PAGE

SPECIFICATIONS ………………………………..............…………… G-3

G-2

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment G

1.0 SPECIFICATIONS 1.1

Cable Requirements
The external cable supplied by Vendor shall meet the following requirements unless
otherwise specified in Section 4.0 of the Purchased Specification.

1.1.1

Cable
a.

Cable shall be suitable for the environmental condition mentioned in
Section 4.0 of the Purchased Specification.

Cable shall meet the following Code and STD :
-

1.1.2 1.1.3

IEEE 383, Section 8
NEMA WC57(ICEA S73-532), NEMA WC70, NEMA WC74

Insulation and jacket material
a.

Insulation – EPR, XLPE or equivalent

Jacket – Neoprene, Hypalon or equivalent

PVC is not acceptable for insulation or jacket material.

Flame Test
a.

The flame test shall meet the requirements of the IEEE 383 with aged and unaged
test specimens. The flame test shall be performed in accordance with IEEE 1202 for
Vertical Tray Flame Test (VTFT) and UL VW-1 for Vertical Flame Test (VFT) as
shown in IEEE 383.

The thermal and normal radiation aging shall be performed in accordance with IEEE
383. All cables shall also be aged in accordance with IEEE 383 considering the
design life before the flame test.

The VTFT shall be performed with completed cables and VFT with only insulated
wire.

However, it is acceptable that the pigtail cable and installed cable within the 30ft
galvanized steel conduit could be performed only VFT with unaged test specimens.

G-3

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment G

1.0 SPECIFICATIONS(CONT.) 1.2

Supplier furnished cable shall have the following identifications on the outer surface of
the cable and Supplier shall submit the detail method of each cable identification for the
Buyer's review.

1.2.1 Cable Color Code : Black 1.2.2

The Buyer 's Cable Type Code: (The buyer will provide the cable type code after the buyer
receives the cable data mentioned in para. 1.3 below)

1.2.3

The Buyer's Cable number (If required)

G-4

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
Attachment G

1.0 SPECIFICATIONS(CONT.) 1.2.4

The following information shall be printed on the outer surface of the cable
a.

Supplier's name b. Rated circuit voltage c.

Insulation/Jacket material

d. Year of manufacture e.

Supplier's traceability code

Number of conductors and wire size

1.3

The following cable data shall be supplied by the Supplier for the Buyer 's review and
approval.

1.3.1

Copper cable for power, control and instrument
a.

Cable Manufacturer b. Number of conductors c.

Method of Conductor Identification (Color, Character or Number)

d. Conductor size (AWG) e.

Overall diameter (inch) (Normal/Maximum)

Shield material (If required)

g. Voltage rating (V) h. Temperature rating (℃) i.

Insulation/Jacket material

j. Jacket color G-5

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
1.0

SPECIFICATIONS (CONT.)
k.

Wight/Foot (lb) (Note 1) l. BTU/ft for fire loading m.

AC Ohm/100ft＠25℃ (Note 2)

DC Ohm/100ft＠25℃ (Note 2)

Rated ampacity in air at 40℃ (Note 2)

Min. pulling temperature(℃)

q. Radiation Rating (Gy) r.

Bend radius (Pulling/Training) (inch) (Note 1)

Allowable sidewall pressure (lb/ft) (Note 1)

Max tension (lb) (Note 1)

Cable length (ft) (Include length limitation, if any)

Connector manufacture/type (If any)

w. -

Maximum allowable cable diameter (inch)

Connector outside diameter (inch)

Has cable been qualified to IEEE 383 vertical tray flame test and/or vertical flame
test? (Yes/No)

Note 1. It is not applicable for pigtails.
2. It is applicable for power cable only.
1.3.2

Fiber Optic cable
a.

Cable Manufacturer b. Number of fibers c.

Fiber type (Singlemode or Multimode, etc.)

d. Core/Clad size e.

Attenuation (dB/km) @850 nm and @1300 nm
G-6

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
1.0

SPECIFICATIONS (CONT.)
f.

Bandwidth(Mhz-km) @850 nm and @1300 nm

g. Jacket material/color h.

F.O Cable type (Loose or Tight Tube)

i. Radiation rating (Gy) j. Overall diameter (inch) k. Weight per feet (lb/ft) l. Max. tension (lb) m.

Sidewall pressure (lb/ft)

Bend radius (Pulling/Training) (inch)

Cable length of limitation to assure the acceptable range of the signal (ft)
(If required)

p. BTU/ft for fire loading q.

Connector manufacture/type
-

Maximum allowable cable diameter (inch)

Has cable been qualified to IEEE 383 vertical tray flame test and/or vertical flame
test? (Yes/No)

G-7 (Final)

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/ STORAGE BUILDING

APPENDIX 4S
General Requirements for Instrument &
Control

KEPCO E&C JOB No. : 11G79

ISSUE STATUS 1 07/10/19 General Revision 0 06/15/18 Construction issue REV. NO DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED

Preparer : 정승하, Tel : 054-421-3943

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section Title Page 1.0

GENERAL ..................................................................................................... 4S-1

2.0

CODE & STANDARDS ................................................................................. 4S-1

3.0

GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ........................................................ 4S-3

4.0

HUMAN FACTORS ENGINEERING DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ............. 4S-31

Attachment
A

Standard Abbreviation List

A-1 B

Demarcation and Mimic Guidelines

B-1 C

Statistical Basis of the Uncertainties

C-1 D Instrument List D-1(Final) E

Instrument Numbering System

E-1(Final) TC 4S-1(Final)

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
1.0

GENERAL 1.1

This appendix is applicable to furnishing instrumentation components, associated piping
or tubing, and wiring within a package specification.

1.2

All field-mounted instruments and associated electrical devices shall be NEMA Type 4
rated or located in NEMA Type 4 or Type 12 enclosure.

1.3

All control panels and associated panel mounted devices shall be designed to meet the
Human Factors Engineering design requirements specified in Section 4.0.

2.0 CODE & STANDARDS 2.1

Supplier shall control the quality and services to meet the requirements of this Appendix,
applicable codes and standards, but not limited to those listed in Section 2.2.

2.2

Referenced Codes and Standards
Sponsor

Number Subject ANSI C84.1

Electric Power Systems and Equipment – Voltage Rating

ASME B1.20.1

Pipe Threads (Except Dryseal)

ASME B16.5

Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings

ASME B16.11

Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded

ASME PTC19.5 Flow Measurement ASME B31.1 Power Piping IEEE

383(’03 Ed.) Standard for Qualifying Class 1E Electric Cables and Filed
Splices for Nuclear Power Generating Stations

IEEE 946

Recommended Practice for the Design of DC Auxiliary
Power System for Generating Stations

IEEE 518

Guide for Installation of Electrical to Minimize Electrical
Noise Inputs to Controllers from External Sources

4S-1

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
Sponsor

Number Subject IEEE 1050

Guide for Instrumentation and Control Equipment
Grounding in Generating Stations Corrections

IEEE 1202

Standard for Flame Testing of Cable for Use in Cable Tray
in Industrial and Commercial Occupancies

IEEE C37.90.1

Standard Surge Withstand Capability(SWC) Test for
Protective Relay and Relay Systems

ISA 7.0.01

Quality Standard for Instrument Air
(ISA : The International Society of Automation)

ISA 5.1

Instrumentation Symbols and Identification

NEMA 250

Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
(1000V Maximum)

NEMA ICS

Industrial Controls and Systems

NEMA WC-70

Nonshielded Power Cables Rated 2000 volts or less for the
Distribution of electrical Energy

NEMA WC-57

Standard for Control, Thermocouple Extension, and
instrumentation Cables

UL 3

Safety Standard for Flexible Nonmetallic Tubing

UL 4

Safety Standard for Armored Cable

UL 83

Safety Standard for Thermoplastic Insulated Wires

UL 467

Standard for Safety Grounding and Bonding Equipment

UL 486A

Standard for Safety Wire Connectors

UL 489

Molded-Case Circuits Breakers, Molded-Case Switches,
and Circuit Breaker Enclosures

UL 1581

Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables and
Flexible Cords

USNRC RG 1.143

Design Guidance for Radioactive Waste Management
Systems, Structures and Components Installed in Light
Water Cooled Nuclear Power Plants

USNRC RG 1.21

Measuring, Evaluating and Reporting Radioactive Material
in Liquid and Gaseous Effluents and Solid Waste

USNRC RG 1.40

Qualification of Continuous Duty Safety Related Motors
for Nuclear Power Plants

4S-2

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
3.0

GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

3.1

General
1.

The following requirements generally are applicable only to larger custom-built
package systems. Package systems, especially those that have been built in a
particular configuration through several units of manufacture, will normally be
purchased on the standardized version. KORAD reserves the right to evaluate and
approve system drawings before fabrication.

Equipment shall be arranged to prevent hazard to personnel or damage to major
equipment in the event of mechanical failure or loss of power.

Adequate spacing shall be provided for personnel performing operating or
maintenance procedures and for servicing, maintaining, removing, and replacing
components.

Local indicating instrumentation shall be visible to the operator at the normal
floor level. Where instrumentation is elevated or arranged such that it is not
accessible from a floor or a major structure, Supplier shall supply permanent
platforms, ladders, or other access.

Supplier shall furnish the instrument data using Attachment D, Instrument List.
The required data and general device information shall be provided via data base
or text file which is a PC compatible magnetic or optical media. The data shall be
in an EXCEL or ACCESS format.

Flame Test for Instruments Cables
a. The VFT (Vertical Flame Test) shall be performed in accordance with IEEE
383 with unaged test specimens.
b. The flame test of cables shall be in accordance with UL VW-1 as show in IEEE
383.

3.2

Installation
Instrumentation and control equipment shall be furnished and installed in accordance
with the following requirements. In case not specified herein, Supplier's standard

4S-3

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
practice shall be applied following KORAD’s approval:
1.

Package system control panels or cabinets will be located in the vicinity of the
related equipment so that easy operation and/or monitoring can be made.

The materials used in fabrication or installation shall be as follows:

Sensing lines

a. General
.

tube : seamless austenitic stainless steel

fittings : austenitic stainless steel

valve/manifold valves : austenitic stainless steel

Air distribution / pneumatic signal lines

tube : seamless copper or seamless austenitic stainless steel

fittings : brass or bronze or austenitic stainless steel

valves : brass or bronze or austenitic stainless steel

Tube clamps : stainless steel
Process tap and root valves : main line class

Root valve shall be located as close to the process tap as practical but they shall be
accessible.

The type and size of process taps shall be as follows. Root valve size shall be the
same as the process tap size:

Pressure (including differential pressure) : 3/4" S.W. or Flange as applicable
Temperature : 1-1/4" S.W or Flange as applicable
Orifice flange.

900 Psig or greater / 800 oF or greater : 3/4" S.W

Less than 900 Psig / Less than 800 oF : 1/2" S.W

4S-4

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

Averaging Pitot Tube : depend on type and size
Sampling probe : S.W type, size to be dependent on probe size

Sensing lines shall be of 3/8" O.D x 0.065 Wall Thickness tube and shall not be
over 50 feet long. Sensing lines run shall be continuously sloped by 1 inch per 1
foot. Reversal slopes without a separate drain or vent valve shall be avoided.

Sensing lines shall be as short as practical.

The discharge points of vents or drains shall be away from electrical equipment or
operational areas. In case of hazardous fluid, the discharge lines of drains and vent
shall be connected to a safe disposal point.

Instruments shall be located in accessible areas where they will be free from
vibration, missile, or jet-impingement, and rigidly mounted with 33Hz of natural
frequency, and protected against physical damage, shock, high temperature
freezing, or adverse effect on the process fluid.

Preferred instrument elevations relative to process taps shall be as follows :
FLUID

PREFERRED INSTRUMENT ELEVATION

LIQUID BELOW PROCESS CONNECTION SLURRY BELOW PROCESS CONNECTION STEAM ABOVE 20 PSIA BELOW PROCESS CONNECTION STEAM BELOW 20 PSIA ABOVE PROCESS CONNECTION GAS OR AIR ABOVE PROCESS CONNECTION

10. A pair of differential-pressure sensing lines shall have an equalizing manifold with
bleed valves.
11. The flow tap should be located in a straight run of the pipe line according to the
ASME PTC 19.5-2004 “Flow Measurement”.

4S-5

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

3.3

Control Panels, Cabinets, and Racks
1.

All enclosed control panels shall be NEMA Type 12 for indoor use and NEMA
Type 4 for outdoor use. Control panels shall be freestanding, unless provided as
integral parts of a prewired, skid-mounted package. Each panel, cabinet and rack
shall be rigid, suitably braced, stiffened, and reinforced to withstand all stresses
incidental to shipping, installation and operation without warping or twisting.

Control panels, cabinets, and racks shall be completely tubed, wired, and
assembled with all instruments, devices, and controls installed so that the
assembly is an operating unit ready for installation.

Each freestanding control panel/cabinet shall be provided with sufficient interior
lighting and duplex, grounded type 120 Vac 1ø receptacles. Control panel/cabinet
heater when required during construction stage and during long storage shall also
be provided. Heaters rated more than 2000 watts in capacity shall be rated at 600
V for 480 V, 3 phase operation and heaters rated less than 2000 watts in capacity
shall be rated at 240 V for 120 V, 1 phase operation.

Supplier shall provide incoming circuit breakers for the incoming power circuit
and documents showing the characteristics of the circuit breakers shall be
submitted to KORAD for coordination with KORAD's upstream circuit breakers.

Each control panel shall be provided with a loss of control voltage relay for
KORAD’s alarm.

Each control panel load shall be limited to 2 kVA at 120 Vac. For higher control
panel loads, the panel shall be provided with a step down transformer 480-120 V
of adequate capacity with incoming circuit breakers.

Piping, tubing, fittings, and wiring shall be arranged such that instruments or
devices may be removed or serviced without disturbing piping, tubing, or wiring.

4S-6

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

Instruments exerting strong cantilever forces on the panel surface shall be
adequately supported to remain plumb and true within 1/16 inch of vertical and
horizontal alignment.

Wiring
Control panel wiring shall be performed in accordance with Appendix 4P and the
following:
-

Low level analog type instrumentation wiring shall be 2/c or 3/c twisted and
shielded (i.e. copper mylar tape with stranded copper drain wire) cable not less
than AWG No. 16 (1.25 mm2), Class B stranded copper with an insulation/
jacketing system.

Current transformer circuit leads shall not be less than AWG No. 10 (5.5 mm2),
and shall be terminated at separate short circuiting type terminal blocks.

Extra flexible wiring shall be provided over door hinges or other locations
where leads may be subject to flexing.

Conductor insulation shall be cross-linked polyethylene or ethylene propylene
rubber compound. Cable Jacket shall be Neoprene, Hypalon or equivalent, if
required. PVC is not acceptable for insulation or Jacket material.

Terminal blocks shall be suitable for external wires and shall be approved by
KORAD.

All cables shall be capable of passing the test indicated in NEMA Standard
WC57/ICEA S-73-532- and WC70/ICEA S-95-658, as well as the flame test in
IEEE 383.

4S-7

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

Wires shall be identified by individual wire numbers or letters at all terminal
points. Wires shall be identified by individual sleeve-type wire markers slipped
over the ends of and fastened to wires at each termination. Sleeves shall be
flame-resistant, non-conducting, a minimum of 1 inch in length, lettered
length-wise. PVC sleeves are not acceptable.

All control panels and cabinets shall be completely wired at the factory prior to
shipment in a manner to ensure satisfactory and reliable operation.

Particular

attention shall be given to factors such as vibration, temperature, ease of
installation, testing, and routine maintenance. All wiring shall be protected
from sharp edges and corners.
-

External wire entrances shall be in accordance with KORAD's standard for
wiring segregation.

All electrical equipment and instruments which require external connections
shall be prewired to terminal boxes mounted on skids.

Control panels containing both AQ and NQ devices and wires shall follow the
separation and isolation requirements identified in USNRC RG 1.143.

Supplier shall provide enough space in each control panel for cable training
bend radii.

10.

Connections and Terminations
-

Circuits connecting to KORAD's external equipment shall be terminated at
heavy duty terminal blocks including shield wires for instrumentation cable.
Instruments interfaced with KORAD's equipment shall be wired to a
centralized terminal block. Supplier's wiring shall not have more than two
wires connected to any terminal point.

Wiring connections shall be made with compression crimp-on type ring-tongue
terminals with insulated ferrules.

4S-8

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
-

Any electronic components, which are arranged in sliding drawers for rack
mounting shall be provided with quick disconnect type connectors for ease of
removing the drawers. Mating connectors shall be supplied with an apparatus
where such terminations are provided as manufacturer's standard.

Provisions shall be made for the entrance of all power cables to the cabinets
with adequate space provided for termination. Supplier shall furnish cable
supports with a flame-resistant nonhygroscopic material suitable to withstand
the maximum short circuit stresses.

Terminal block bars for thermocouple circuits shall be of appropriate material
such as chromel or constantan for signal continuity.

Supplier shall furnish terminal blocks with a minimum of 20 percent spare
terminals for each panel.

11.

Insulation
-

All insulation and clearances to ground shall be designed such that the live
parts will withstand a high potential test of not less than 2500 V at 60 Hz for 1
minute (except for solid state equipment).

The insulation of all control device coils shall be impervious to moisture and
suitable for operation in a salt laden air. The insulation shall completely seal
the conductors to prevent penetration of moisture or other contaminants and
shall be suitable for continuous operation at a rated total temperature of 130 oC
(266 oF) (Class B). The type of insulation desired shall be one in which the coil
windings are fully encapsulated with an epoxy resin, resulting in a
homogeneous watertight seal.

12.

Insofar as practical, arrangement of instruments and conduits on panels, cabinets
and racks shall place the electrical devices out of likely paths of condensate or
water drains that may occur during testing or calibrating of instruments.

13.

Ground Bus
A ground bus of 1-inch by 1/4-inch thick copper bar shall be installed to extend
the length of each cabinet at a convenient location just above the mounting base.

4S-9

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
Each section of the cabinet and all instrument and device grounds shall be
grounded directly to this bus. Supplier shall drill two NEMA standard 9/16-inch
holes on 1-3/4-inch centers spacing at each end of the ground bus for connection
of KORAD's ground cable. Where signal ground isolated from equipment ground
is required, a separate ground bus shall be installed in each equipment for
analog/digital signal ground.
14.

With the multiple instrument arrangement, the panels, cabinets and racks shall be
arranged so any instrument can be serviced without taking the other instruments
out of service.

15.

Panels, cabinets and racks, when requested, shall have hinged, gasketed,
removable doors. The doors shall be equipped with handles.

16.

Instruments with pigtail electrical connections, such as solenoid valves, shall have
all pigtails terminated with ring tongue-type lugs adjacent to the device in lieu of
spliced connections.

17.

All instrument piping, tubing, valves, and fittings shall be installed and securely
fastened to the panels, grouped in an orderly manner, and terminated with fittings
and plugs at points located at the top or bottom of each panel.

Each terminal

point shall be identified by a stainless steel tag bearing the number of the
instrument associated with the sensing line. All clamps, pads, and supports in
direct contact with stainless steel pipe or tubing shall be of stainless steel material.
18.

All process-sensing line piping, tubing, fittings, and welding within the panels,
unless otherwise noted, shall conform to the ASME B31.1 Code for Power Piping.
Supplier shall certify that the design, materials, fabrication, construction, and
testing of all piping provided by Supplier conforms to the ASME B31.1 Code.

19.

Test connections shall be provided such that each device can be calibrated and
checked without its removal from the panel.

20.

All valves located within tubing runs (tube connection at inlet and outlet) shall be
mechanically supported from the panel structure. Valves in piping runs may be
supported by the pipe, provided adequate pipe supports are utilized.

4S-10

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
21.

All process-sensing line fittings and connections shall be of welded construction
except final connections to the instruments and test connections at the instruments,
which shall be threaded.

22.

Connections from control devices shall be terminated in bulkhead fittings unless
specified otherwise.

23.

Tubing runs shall be continuous from equipment to terminal area except where
tees are required or where tubing cannot properly be formed, attached, or removed
in one piece without deformation.

24.

Each air supply stop valve and tube terminal connection shall be identified by a
stainless steel tag stamped with KORAD's tag number of the connecting
instrument on the instrument panel.

25.

Control switches, indicating instruments, annunciators and alarm lamps shall be
located in front of the panel. Relays, contactors, etc., shall be located on the inside
of the rear and side panels. The arrangements of equipment inside the panel shall
be such as to provide ample access and meet applicable separation requirements as
called in the Technical Specification.

26.

The freestanding control panel shall be designed to receive cables from above and
below unless otherwise specified. Top cover plates shall be removable in sections
for KORAD's drilling of conduit and cable entrance fittings. The top of the panel
shall be designed for attaching and supporting KORAD's cable trays with space
allowed for cable entry.

27.

An internally mounted motor-driven blower, if required, shall be provided
complete with intake filter and necessary grills. The blower shall be of sufficient
flow capacity to limit the air temperature rise of 10 o F.

28.

Fuses shall be nonreusable cartridge type with indication when blown and shall be
assembled in NEMA 1 type enclosure with adequate lighting for maintenance and
service. There shall be a proper protective coordination between main fuses or
circuit breakers and branch fuses or circuit breakers where the control panels
provide the main and feeder fuses and circuit breakers. Supplier shall provide
coordination verification documents for KORAD's approval.

4S-11

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

29.

Supplier shall supply all necessary power sources for the components which are
operated or controlled by and/or through the control panel. Supplier shall also
supply adequate terminal blocks for external wirings for the components. Supplier
shall also supply suitable voltage regulating transformers for instrumentation
when required.

30.

If plug-in relays are used, a plug-in test device shall be furnished.

31.

Timers, relays, stepping switches, logic controllers and other similar devices shall
be provided with dust-tight enclosures.

32.

All recorders and indicators shall be arranged for optimum viewing by the
operator and ease of chart removal.

In no case shall recorders be mounted that

maintenance and chart changing will require ladders or foot stools.
33.

Control and instrument wiring running inside the panels shall be installed in
raceways having removable covers.

3.4

Small Air Systems
If instrument air consumption to the package system is less than 600 scfh, individual
combination filter reducers shall be used with each instrument or with a panel or rack
header using less than 600 scfh for the complete panel.

3.5

Large Air Systems
1.

On large systems, Supplier shall provide a dual instrument air regulator filter
station to reduce the nominal 100 psig instrument air to 20 psig.

The valve and manifold arrangement shall permit removal of one reducing valve
and one filter from service without disturbing the other or affecting its operation.

A minimum 4-1/2 inch diameter, 0 to 30 psig pressure gauge shall be provided
downstream of each reducing regulator but ahead of manifold valves.

If instruments requiring air pressures different from those described here are

4S-12

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
furnished, Supplier shall supply an additional filter/reducing station for each
different system.
5.

All filter/reducing stations shall be furnished with a separate relief valve
downstream of the reducing valve.

On panels, individual air supply takeoffs for an instrument shall be made from the
top of a brass air header through 1/4 inch brass packless valves attached to 1/4
inch brass nipples brazed into the header.

Each instrument and valve shall be tagged with the instrument number in
accordance with KORAD's Numbering System.

8.
3.6

Supplier shall furnish 20 percent extra valve-branches on each header installed.

Calibration
1.

The following shall be considered the measurement reference data for this
specification :

Normal barometric pressure : 14.7 psia
Pressure base for gas-flow measurement

: 14.7 psia

Temperature base for gas-flow measurement
Temperature base for liquid-flow measurement

: 15.6 oC (60 oF)
: 15.6 oC (60 oF)

Performance
The Following are minimum acceptable performance requirements for instruments
of package systems, all expressed as percentages of instrument operating span.

a. Panel mounted indicator (Electrical Type):
Accuracy(%) Repeatability(%)

4S-13

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

±1.5
b.

±0.2

Field mounted instrument (Electrical & Pneumatic)
b1. Transmitter Input

Accuracy(%) Repeatability(%)

- Gage Pressure ±0.5 ±0.2 Spans to 50 mmHg ±1.0 ±0.5 Spans exceeding 50 mmHg ±0.5 ±0.1 Spans to 500 in H2O ±0.5 ±0.2 Spans 500 to 850 in H2O ±0.75 ±0.2 - Resistance ±0.5 ±0.15 - Millivolts ±0.5 ±0.15 Displacer ±0.5 ±0.2 Flanged Diff. Pressure ±1.0 ±0.1 ±0.5 ±0.2 - Absolute Pressure - Diff. Pressure - Level - Current/Pneumatic

b2. Local Indicator/Switches Accuracy(%)

Differential Indicator Switch

±1.5% of F.S

Differential Pressure Indicator

± 0.75% of F.S - Pressure Switch ±0.5% of F.S - Pressure Gauges ±0.5% of F.S 4S-14

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

Temperature Indicator

±1% of F.S - Temperature Switches ±1% of F.S - Flow Indicator ±5% of F.S - Flow Switch ±2% of F.S - Level Indicator ±1% of F.S

Level Switch

3.7

±1/4 inch

Electronic Field-Mounted Instruments
The following features shall be incorporated as applicable into all electronic
field-mounted instruments included in this specification :

Signals

: 4 to 20 mA dc, two-wire

Electronic circuitry : solid-state
Power Supply : 24 V dc (remotely mounted)
Electrical connection : 3/4 inch conduit
Non-interacting zero and span adjustments

Diaphragm seals shall be provided for pressure, flow, and level transmitters in
application such as acid, caustic, radioactive fluids, etc.

Transmitters shall be provided with shop-filled capillaries where required.

Pressure Transmitters (gauge, absolute and differential)

Type : 2 wire

4S-15

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

Wetted parts : Type 316 stainless steel (except body, gaskets, and seals)
Amplifier

: integral

Housing : suitable for specified service environment
Junction box :

integral, with wiring terminals

Elevation and suppression capability : as required
Mounting : surface
Process connections

: 1/4" NPT preferred

Temperature Transmitters (resistance to current)
-

Sensor

: RTD, platinum, 100 ohm rating at 0 oC base Temp. with Temp.

coefficient of exactly 0.00385 ohm/ oC three or four wire ungrounded.

Range and span : field adjustable
Output

: linear - Housing

: suitable for specified service environment

Adaptability to : 3 or 4 wire system
Mounting : surface

Temperature Transmitters (mV to current)

Sensor

: thermocouple (E Type)

Range and span : field adjustable

Output : linear with mV input

Housing : suitable for specified service environment

4S-16

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

Mounting : surface

Temperature Transmitters (filled-system type)

Output

: 4 - 20 mA - Others

: Refer to Paragraph 3.8.2.

Level Transmitters (displacer type)

Displacer length : to suit application range
Displacer material
Hanger rod

: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel

: 300 series stainless steel

Mounting Type :

external cage type (preferred) or internal displacer

Mounting orientation and connections

: to suit application

Housing : suitable for specified service environment.

Level Transmitters (differential-pressure type, flanged or extended diaphragm)

Mounting : side of vessel
Flange :

material, size and rating to match application

Wetted Parts : Type 316 stainless steel
Housing : suitable for specified service environment

Converters (current to pneumatic) - Input/Output

: 4 to 20 mA dc/3 to 15 psig

4S-17

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

Housing : suitable for specified service environment
Air line connection : 1/4" NPT
Mounting : surface
Accessories

: pressure reducing valve with filter and gauge

Thermocouples

Type : Refer to Paragraph 3.7.3.

9. Installation

: Thermowells shall be provided with thermocouples.

RTD's

Type : Refer to Paragraph 3.7.2.
Installation

3.8

: Thermowells shall be provided with RTD's.

Pneumatic Field-Mounted Instruments
The following features shall be incorporated as applicable into all pneumatic
field-mounted instruments included in this specification :

Output Signals
Accessories

: 3 to 15 psig

: pressure reducing valve with filter and gauge.

- Zero adjustment

: accessible without removing cover

Mounting : surface
Output and air supply connections

: 1/4 inch NPT

Style : indicating type or with output gauge.

4S-18

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
1.

Pressure Transmitters

(gauge, absolute and differential)

Wetted parts : Type 316 stainless steel
Elevation and suppression capability : as required

Gaskets : TFE or silicone elastomer for nonradioactive services and suitable
material for radio-active services.

Process connections : 1/4" NPT preferred

Temperature Transmitters ( filled-system type)
-

Bulb

: furnished with a companion thermowell .

Ambient temperature compensation : for Class II thermal systems without
compensation ( bulb elevation calibration correction may be required), all other
system classes with compensation either fully compensated or easily
compensated as suited for the accuracy requirements.

Level Transmitters (displacer type)

Displace length : to suit application range
Displace material

: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel

- Hanger rod

: 300 series stainless steel

- Mounting :

external cage (preferred) or internal displace

Mounting connection and orientation : to suit application
Gauges : supply and output air

Level Controllers (displacer type) - Control modes

: proportional (plus integral if application requires)

4S-19

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

Setpoint knob

external (preferred) or inside case door

Control action : reversible
Displace length : to suit application range
Displace material

: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel

Hanger rod : 300 series stainless steel

Mounting :

external cage (preferred) or internal displace

Connection and orientation : to suit application
Gauges : supply and output air

3.9

Panel Mounted Instruments
The following features, as applicable, shall be incorporated into all panel mounted
instruments included in this specification :

Signal transmission : 4 to 20 mA or 3 to 15 psig
Electronic circuitry
Scale :

microprocessor based solid-state or equivalent.

white with black numerals.

Panel mounting : flush or semiflush
Bezel

: black

Accessories

mounting hardware and shelves.

Elect. Indicators :

Size : nominal 3 inch width X 6 inch height

4S-20

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

Terminal connections
Ganging :

: studs on rear of instrument

capability for horizontal array

Engineering units and scaling factors :

Metric unit shall be applied for all
indicating.

But especially for

pressure and volumetric flow, the
following engineering units should
be applied.
.

For pressure, metric unit such as mmH2O (or cmH2O) or kg/cm2 should
be used.

For volumetric flow , metric unit such as ℓ/s or ℓ/min should be used.

- Zero adjustment : front of instrument

Display : LED bargraph with 4 digit numeric.
Display color

: green

Scale : printed, engineering units and scaling factors
Mounting Method : From the front of the panel.

Recorders (miniature strip chart) :

Size : 6 X 6 inch nominal
Pens

: color coded in multi pen units

Chart capacity : For 30 days
Inking system : capsule
Ink and chart supply : For 2 years plant normal operation
Chart speed :

variable speed 4S-21

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

Chart drive : 120 Vac, 60 Hz
Display : LCD or LED
Display Color

: green

Indicating Controllers :

Control modes

non interactive and to suit application

Control action : reversible
Indicators

: setpoint, controlled variable, and output

Scale : fixed
Display : LED or VFD(vacuum fluorescent display)
Display Color

: green

Size : 3 inch width by 6 inch height, nominal.
Chassis

: slideout for adjustment or servicing in place

Servicing : provision for maintaining manual control.

Manual Control Station :

Setting device : thumbwheel, knob, or pushbuttons
Scale : calibrated 0 to 100 percent unless otherwise required by application

- Output indicator :

if furnished, scaled 0 to 100 percent

Measured variable indication :

4S-22

when required by application

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

Manual/Automatic Transfer Stations :

Scale : calibrated 0 to 100 percent
Indication :
Switch :

measured variable and output

manual/automatic transfer

- Signal biasing :

when required by application

Manual/automatic transfer

Signal Comparators

: bumpless and balanceless

(electronic receiver switches) :

Setpoint capability : 0 to 100 percent of input
Adjustable deadband
Output relay : SPDT

Relay contact rating

: 0.5 A, at 250 Vdc inductive load, and 5 A, at 120

Vac, 60 Hz resistive load.
7.

Signal Selectors (high-low) :

Capability : select on 1 percent difference
Type :

nonindicating - Field convertible : 3.10 on high or low signal

Alarm Contacts and Annunciation :
1.

Local annunciators and alarms shall include dual "trouble alarm" contacts for
transmission of a combined common signal to a remote annunciator.

4S-23

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

Annunciator field trouble contacts shall be normally open and shall close to alarm.

The annunciator shall incorporate the momentary acknowledge and test
pushbuttons.

Annunciators
-

Solid state type annunciators shall be used and all logic cards shall be plug-in
type.

Response time shall be less than 50 msec.

All logic cards shall be tested for surge withstand capability per IEEE
C37.90.1 and annunciator system shall operate reliably in ambient temperature
up to 148 oF.

Aux. relay contacts shall be rated for 0.5 A at 125 Vdc inductive load, 1 A at
120 Vac, 60 Hz resistive load.

Twenty five percent spare active windows complete with logic circuits shall be
provided for KORAD's future use.

Annunciators shall follow the sequence below :
Alarm Contact
Operator

Field Condition Action Contact Normal None Open Off Alarm (abnormal) None Close Flashing Sounding Close Return to None Open Flashing Sounding Close

normal before
acknowledge

4S-24

to remote
Window Audible
Silent

Annunciator
Open

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
Alarm + 20

None seconds Closed Flashing Silent Close or Open

Alarm (abnormal) Acknowledge Close

On Silent Open Alarm (normal) Off Silent Open Off Silent Open Acknowledge Open Normal after None Open

acknowledge
7.

Annunciator Cabinet :
-

The annunciator cabinet shall be Hathaway EL series or Ronan series X12
series or approved equivalent.

Local annunciator horns shall be adjustable such that they will sound 10 dB
above local ambient noise levels.

There shall be an alarm contact closing on loss of voltage to the local
annunciator to be transmitted to the main annunciator.

3.11

Miscellaneous Instrument and Hardware
The following are miscellaneous instruments and hardware, so defined because they do
not specifically fall into any of the previously defined categories.

However, they are

part of many package systems and therefore must meet the following specifications.
With regards to process related switches, high setpoint contact shall be energized to
close on process rising action while low setpoint contact be energized to close on
process falling action.

Control Valves :

Minimum body size : 1 inch, with reduced trim as required

4S-25

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

Use of butterfly or ball valves

Valve sizing :

: for special applications

Valve sizing and Cv rating shall be specified based on

minimum and maximum pressure drop, pressure, and flow requirement of the
system.

Valve shall be 70 to 85 percent open during rated maximum process

condition.
-

Positioners, with gauges and bypass

on all butterfly valves, valves 2

inches and larger, and on cases of seat unbalance when needed for exact
positioning, split ranging (do not use bypass) characterizing, and for flow
deemed critical by Supplier.
2.

Solenoid Valves :

Coil insulation : Class H

Solenoid valve enclosures

: suitable for specified service environment with

3/4 inch threaded conduit hub
-

Elastomers : Seals, Disc. or Diaphragm material to be fluorocarbon elastomer
(VITON, FLLIOREL, etc) or approved equivalent.

- DC solenoids

: rated 125 Vdc, for continuous operation range at 90 to 140
Vdc

- Solenoid coil leads

: run in conduit to terminal boxes

mounted such that conduit and cable may be connected

Solenoid valves :

without causing misalignment or incorrect operation
-

Solenoid valves shall be as manufactured by ASCO or approved equivalent

Each solenoid valve shall be supplied with 30 ft pigtails having insulation
temperature ratings of 200 oC (392 oF).

3. Pressure, Temperature and Flow Switches :

4S-26

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

Enclosures

Switches

: suitable for specified service environment
: rigidly fastened to panel, rack, or cabinet such that removal of

tubing, piping, and wiring may be accomplished without dismounting of the
instrument.
-

Contact rating : 5 A, 120 Vac, 60 Hz resistive load and 0.5 A, 250 Vdc
inductive load.

Pressure, temperature and flow switches

installed such that KORAD's

connections are to terminal blocks.
4.

Level Switches :
a.

Displacer type
-

Contact rating : 5 A, 120 Vac, 60 Hz resistive load 0.5 A, 250 Vdc
inductive load

b. - Switch type : 2-DPDT - Others

: refer to Paragraph 3.8.5

Electronic type (ultrasonic, capacitance, etc)

Enclosures

: Suitable for specified service environment

- Mounting connections : 3/4" NPT

Switch contact rating and type : See Paragraph 3.11.4.a

Limit Switches :

Enclosures

: suitable for specified service environment

4S-27

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

Contacts : 2-DPDT

Contact rating

: 5 A, 120 Vac, 60 Hz resistive load and 0.5 A, 250 Vdc

inductive load.
6.

Auxiliary Relays :
-

Auxiliary relays shall be rated 600 Vac self-reset front connected surface
mounted with cover, coil rated for 5 A 120 Vac 60 Hz and 0.5 A 125 Vdc
continuous duty.

Contact rating : 5 A, 120 Vac, 60 Hz resistive load and 0.5 A, 250 Vdc
inductive load.

(Differential) Pressure Gauges including flow indicator:
-

Pressure gauges : Minimum 4-1/2 inch diameter dial (white face with black
graduations), phenol turret case, and blowout protection

Dial inscriptions shall not be used :

the service shall be indicated by a

permanent label attached to the gauge case.
-

Diaphragm seals :

on instruments used for handling viscous liquids or

liquids with suspended solids. Means shall be provided for on site calibration
of all instruments furnished with diaphragm seals.

Engineering units and scaling factors :

Metric unit shall be applied for all
indicating.

But especially for

pressure and volumetric flow, the
following engineering units should
be applied.

For pressure, metric unit such as mmH2O (or cmH2O) or kg/cm2 should be
used.

For volumetric flow , metric unit such as ℓ/s or ℓ/min should be used.

4S-28

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

Thermowells :
-

Type : socket weld ( 1-1/4"), thread ( 1-1/4" or 1" NPT), or Flange (3")

Location : after fluid mixing but not in the minimum straight run of pipe
upstream or downstream of a flow element.

Material : to suit application service

Thermometers :

Dial type : bimetallic with 5 inch diameter dial
Orientation type

: as required for unobstructed viewing

Stem : 1/4 inch stainless steel

10.

Averaging Pitot Tubes :
-

Averaging pitot tubes shall provide suitable signal for proper recording,
totalizing or control of complex systems.

The sensing probes shall be designed to sense flow velocity in each of several
equal annular cross-sectional areas of the flow stream and provide an output
signal proportional to the average flow.

Material : to suit application service

11. Timers :

The type of timers shall be timer selector switch, reset timer or program timer

as required.

Each timer shall have proper adjustable range and 120 Vac 60 Hz continuous

duty coils.
-

Contact rating : 5 A, 120 Vac, 60 Hz resistive load and 0.5 A, 250 Vdc

4S-29

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
inductive load.
12.

Control Switches, Pushbuttons, Selector Switches :
-

The number of stages and contacts, number of switch positions, and handle
style and color shall be specified or reviewed by KORAD.

All contacts shall have contact rating designations of A600 and P300 as
defined in NEMA ICS-5.

Removable handles or keys for control switches shall not be interchangeable
with other switches. Supplier shall furnish two handles per unit for use with all
control switches.

13.

Indicating Lights :
-

Indicating lights shall be complete with bulb, translucent lens, and suitable
resistor for the service required. Lens color shall be either as specified or
reviewed by KORAD.

Indicating lights for dry, indoor applications shall be Master Specialties
Series-10E or approved equivalent.

LED's are preferred and shall be used whenever available, for the indicating
lights in the control panels and boards. LED's shall be of equivalent brightness
to incandescent lamps. LED's shall be as manufactured by Master Specialties,
Ledtronics, Oshino or approved equivalent.

14.

Uninterrupted Power Supply System
All equipment are subject to short period of power interruption during the fast bus
transfer from normal power source to standby power source. Standby power
source is supplied approximately 5 to 10 cycle after initiation of bus transfer.
All equipment shall continue to operate without any degradation of performance
during or after bus transfer. If uninterrupted performance of equipment can not be
guaranteed, uninterrupted power supply system which consists of inverter, battery,
battery charger and any other necessary devices shall be provided by the supplier.

4S-30

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

3.12

Instrument Numbering and Tagging
1.

Supplier shall assign instrument number in accordance with Attachment E for all
instrumentations and controls supplied with associated mechanical equipments.

Instrument tagging shall be in accordance with Appendix 4T, "Requirements for
Instrument Tagging."

3.13

Unless otherwise specified, the ac equipment fed from system nominal voltage of 120
Vac or 480 Vac shall be rated in accordance with ANSI C.84.1, and be able to normally
operate at the steady state voltage variation of 10%. The operating voltage ranges of
125 Vdc and 250 Vdc equipment shall be in accordance with IEEE 946 Table 1.

4.0

HUMAN FACTORS ENGINEERING DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

4.1

General
1.

Control panels and associated panel mounted devices to be furnished within this
package specification shall be designed to meet the following human factors
engineering design requirements for consistent design to 1)minimize operator
errors, 2)improve operating convenience.

4.2

Annunciators
1.

Control panel annunciators shall follow good human factors engineering design
criteria in order to be immediately and correctly noticed, accurately responded to
in a timely fashion, and easily discriminable.

Functional Grouping
Annunciators shall be grouped by function and system.

Alarm Controls
-

The control panel alarm system shall have 2 discriminable controls.

4S-31

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
(acknowledge and test buttons)
-

Control Type : The two controls shall be pushbuttons of large (2cm or
greater) diameter.

Dark at Power
Control panel annunciators shall adhere to the "dark board" concept.

Out-Of-Service (OOS) and Blank Windows
Out-Of-Service (OOS) and blank windows shall be set up such that the operators
will not receive spurious alarms.

Alarm Matrix
Alarms shall be identified by their positions in the row by column matrix.

The

matrix rows and columns shall reflect information on the system and problem.
Columns shall reflect systems when possible and rows common trouble types. For
example, A and B train alarm for a system would be in adjacent columns with
alarms for identical pump trips in a row.
7.

Labeling & Nomenclature
Alarm legends shall be unambiguous and easy to read.
-

Abbreviations - Only abbreviations from the standard list of abbreviations and
table of system mnemonics (Attachment A, Part I) shall be used.
Abbreviations shall be consistent for component types, system names, and
trouble types.

Labeling
Engraving and tile setup

4S-32

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
.

Wording shall be set up on each alarm tile in this order : first - Alarm
Source (e.g. - pump A, EFW) second - Problem (e.g. - open, power lost,
pressure, flow) third - Degree of severity, if needed (e.g. - Lo-Lo)

If a three line format is not needed, a 2 line tile shall be acceptable.
More than 3 lines per tile shall be avoided.

Lettering height shall be such that 14 characters may fit per line.

Character font shall be Gothic, such as Bold Boston (sans serif) for
maximum viewability, Stroke width shall be wider than that traditionally
used, with a 3:8 ratio to height.

Hence letter height shall be 1/4 inch.

Lettering shall be accomplished by the following method : Engraving
plastic diffuser tile and filling the engraving with black paint or ink.

Multi - Input Windows
In many cases, an alarm window will have multiple inputs. The general principle
governing this is that multiple inputs may be used only when the operator's
response to the inputs is the same. For instance, if the operator's response to the
alarm would be to dispatch someone to a local panel, regardless of what input, the
inputs would be appropriate on one window.

However, if the operator must

perform different actions, separate windows should be used. In order to limit the
number of control panel alarms, multi-input windows shall be used when
appropriate.
4.3

Panel Layout
1.

Consistency and Standardization
-

Layouts shall be consistent and instrumentation types standard for similar
systems and functions.

For each type of control function or indicator function, only one hardware type
shall be used where practical. For example, all controls for breakers should be
the same model. This does not mean, for instance, that all recorders shall be
the same. It means that all recorders which perform similar functions (e.g. -

4S-33

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
trend data for a linear variable from 5 input points, over a certain range and
frequency of reading) should be the same model.
2.

Panel Size & Shape
For location of components above the floor, vertical panels. shall adhere to the
following I&C height guidelines:
Controls

Displays Min. - Max. Min. - Max. Major

86 – 135 cm ( 34 – 53 inch)

127 –165 cm (50 – 65 inch)

Normal

86 – 178 cm ( 34 – 70 inch)

104 –178 cm (41 – 70 inch)

"Major" means that controls and display are used frequently or precisely by the
operator.
3.

Display and Control Groups
Related instruments and controls shall be grouped together and arranged to reflect
system process.

Grouping

Controls and indicators for each system shall be integrated and grouped below
relevant alarms. In general, annunciators shall be at the highest panel elevation,
status lights and LED meters below them (but above 170 cm height) and other
controls and indications either on the bench section of the panel or located
below the 170 cm elevation on the vertical-board.

The vertical-board shall

contain predominantly indication devices such as analog meters with controls,
especially those with handles being located primarily on the bench section.
However, controls and indications shall be integrated to reflect process flow as
described below.

Hardware Layout Mimic

Hardware shall be arranged on the control panels so as to blend instrumentation

4S-34

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
and control in a manner that reflects process flow through the system. For
example, pump and valve controls should reflect their relative locations in the
flow paths in the plant with relevant indicators such as discharge pressure, and
flow located adjacently. This type of arrangement need not be done for small,
uncomplicated systems with only a few controls and indicators.
4.4

Visual Displays (Indicators and Lights)
Visual displays shall be easy to read, unambiguous, easy to maintain, and provide
needed, relevant information. Glare shall be kept low enough so that visual displays may
be easily read.
1.

Color Coding
Color coding shall provide clear status information on lights without being
overused.
Color coding for indicator lights shall, in general, be as follows:
-

Red : Equipment or process operating (open, running, on) or for immediate
operator information/attention.

Green

: Equipment or process not operating (close, stop, off)

White : Equipment with trouble/disabled condition, (or Yellow) general
information or status. If LED's are used in lieu of bulbs, yellow may be
substituted (white and yellow are indiscriminable to the human eye).

Amber : Not to be used as a warning. May be used for "Auto" as needed, or
for less critical operator information/ attention.

Lettering and Wording
Lettering and wording shall be clear, consistent, and readable under all conditions.

4S-35

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

Consistency

Nomenclature shall be consistent for units, system names, and other standard
words on all indicators.

Legends on Lights

Legends and component names shall not be engraved only on indicators.

label shall also be provided in all cases, such that control names shall be visible
even when bulbs are burned out or power is lost.
Lettering on visual displays shall adhere to the same general principles as in
Section 4.7 (labeling). The only exception is that lettering shall be of smaller
size (actual size depends on hardware dimensions).
3.

Lights
Indicator lights shall be easy to maintain and easy to see against background
lighting and glare.
-

Color on backlite pushbuttons shall be derived from LED's, not plastic boots
placed over lightbulbs.

Engraving of identification information (such as valve number, pump name,
etc.) shall be placed on labels and not lenses. However, status information
(such as trip bypass, trouble, etc.) can be placed on lenses.

Meters and Recorders
Meters shall be easy to use; accurate and unambiguous under all conditions.
Recorders shall be easy to use and maintain and shall contain features allowing
precise readings.

Meter Scales

Meter Scales shall have clear divisions, which are non-logarithmic and utilize
major, intermediate and minor scale divisions. All scale divisions shall be in 1's,

4S-36

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
2's, 5's or 10's (preferably 1's or 10's). Scales shall be in units preferred by
operators for interpreting the variable. Metric units shall be used on all meters
and indicators. Scales shall begin and end at major scale divisions and be
consistent with range limits. Log scales are permissible for certain power meter
applications. Exceptions to this practice may be individually evaluated based on
technical considerations.
-

In the event of a power loss, meters shall have provisions to indicate the power
loss.

4.5

Controls
All controls shall be easily discriminable, standardized across function, grouped
according to function and generally within system, and chosen with good human factors
incorporated into the hardware.
1.

Control Type
Control types shall be standardized for function and shall reflect good human
factors practice. Each type of control shall be readily discernable from the other.
Controls with handles shall not be located within 10cm (from the bottom of the
control handle) of the edge of the benchboard panel (to prevent inadvertent
activation).

Pushbutton Controls

As a general practice, pushbutton control shall be vertically aligned.
Pushbutton legend shall be readable under ambient light conditions, regardless
of internal illumination.

Rotary Controls

All rotary control knobs shall incorporate the following features:

4S-37

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
.

Good Control Resistance .

Grooved or textured edge and a 2.5 cm minimum diameter

Clear linear scale markings - a detent at each position if possible

Bright orange or red pointer on control bezel or comparable position
indicator

All control types shall be standardized relative to function. That is, if a
pushbutton control switch is used for one type of task such as valve operation,
it should be used for that task in all instances.

Administrative Controls
Restricted use of controls shall have barriers to inappropriate actuation. These may
be protective housings, hinged shields or keylocks, in this order of preference.
-

Protective housings are type of controls in which a round pushbutton has a
guard on its side but not top. This prevents inadvertent actuation but does not
cause the operator to take extra action or pause.

Keylocks shall be used only when access must be absolutely restricted and
there is a real danger of unauthorized use of the controls. Keylocks shall use
double sided teeth on keys and shall have "up" as the locked position for the
control. Keys shall only be removable when the switch is locked. Keys shall be
available at all necessary times in a timely fashion from a well-marked
controlled repository.

Control Discrimination

All possible cues shall be used to aid operators in discriminating between

different control types.

Tactile cues (different shape, feel, and resistance) and visual cues (size, shape,

color, style) can be used.

4S-38

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
4.6

Video Display Unit(VDU) Displays
Computer displays shall be designed for clarity, rapid error-free interpretation, and
accurate presentation of information. Computer hardware shall be designed to support
this principle.
1.

Display Format
Displays shall be formatted to avoid clutter, be easy to use and avoid being "busy"
-

Layout of displays shall be done by the computer system supplier. The criteria
mentioned below are general guidelines intended to assure compliance with
NUREG-0800 and NUREG-0700.

Display clutter shall be avoided. All screens shall be at least 50% white space.
To avoid "busy" screens, data shall not change more often than 1 time a second
and rapidly oscillating data shall be smoothed out.

Use of Graphs
Graphs, when used, shall have clear information in a format familiar to operators.
Scales and Units : Graphs on computer generated displays shall use the same
scales and units that operators are familiar with, from MCR
instrumentation and plant procedures.

Color
Chosen colors shall be discrete, readily visible, and enhance operator processing
of displayed information.

Menus
All computer displays shall be menu-driven and shall provide paging cues.

4S-39

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
Menus shall be hierarchical in nature and each option shall be assigned a number.
Multi-page menus and displays shall be avoided.
5.

Hardware
Glare : All MCR VDUs shall be fitted with glare shields or antiglare screens and
mounted at an angle empirically determined to minimize glare.
-

VDUs shall be capable of high resolution graphics and, at a minimum, the 7
colors described previously.

Diagonal resolution shall exceed 800 pixels for a 19 inch screen.

Data refresh rates shall not exceed once per second ; as this would be
meaningless to the operator.

Computer response time shall be fast enough not to impact operator
performance.

Highlighting
Highlighting shall be used but not overused to emphasize key information.
Blinking (Flashing) Displays can be used for transition to computer alarm state
(and suppressed when acknowledged) and for graphic displays where plant
parameters exceed the setpoint and are shown out of bounds. Blink rates for these
should not detract from readability.

Lettering and Messages
Messages shall be concise but complete. Lettering shall be easily discriminable
and readable.

Alpha numeric character size shall be a minimum of 7 pixels by 9 pixels.

Graphic lines shall have a minimum density of 40 pixels per inch.

Prompt messages shall provide direction to the operator and shall display
required action or options.

4S-40

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

Guidelines
All VDU displays shall use format, units and limits (scale range) that correspond
to control board Instrumentation and Control.
-

In tabular data, decimals shall be aligned: whole numbers shall be right
justified.

Data flow shall mimic normal plant flow relations.

4.7

Labeling, Demarcation, and Mimic
Hierarchical labeling employing clearly visible lettering shall be employed.

Labels

shall conform to good human factors practices in general, as outlined in EPRI NP-3659,
and NUREG-0700.
1.

Hierarchical Labeling
To prevent panel clutter and unnecessary repetition, a hierarchical labeling scheme
shall be used.
-

System or subsystem name shall be presented on an overall label for groups of
controls and indications within these demarcated areas, and the system name
should not be repeated on each individual identifying label.

As labels go up the hierarchy, letter height and stroke width shall increase.

General labeling and Demarcation Guideline
General labeling guideline (e.g. label colors, letter heights, stroke widths etc.) shall
be in accordance with Appendix 4U. Demarcation and mimic shall be designed in
accordance with Attachment B.3.

4S-41

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
3.

Nomenclature and Style
Labels shall use plant standard nomenclatures and abbreviations as delineated in
Attachment A.

4S-42 (Final)

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION

ABBREVIATION

STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION

ABBREV

IATION

A
APPROXIMATELY

APPROX BLOWER BLWR ARCHITECT ENGINEER AE, A/E BLOWING BLWG AREA RADIATION AR BOILER BLR

AREA RADIATION
MONITOR (ING)

ARM BOOSTER BSTR BOTTLED GAS BG ARGON ARG BOTTOM BOT

AS LOW AS REASONABLY
ACHIEVABLE

ALARA BOX BX ASSEMBLY ASSY BREAKER BRKR ATMOSPHERE ATMOS BREATHING BR ATMOSPHERIC DUMP VALVE ADV BRIDGE BRDG AUCTIONEERED AUCTD BRITISH THERMAL UNIT BTU AUDIBLE AUD BUILDING BLDG AUTOMATIC AUTO BURNER BNR AUTOSTART AUTOST BYPASS BYP AUXILIARY AUX AUXILIARY RELAY CABINET ARC AUXILIARY STEAM AUX STM AUXILIARY TRANSFORMER AUXT AVAILABLE AVAIL AVERAGE AVG C

B
BACK

BCK BACK-UP BCKUP BACKWASH BKWH BALANCE BAL BATTERY BATT BEARING BRG BEFORE BFR BETWEEN BTWN BISTABLE BISTAB BLEED BLD BLEED TRIP VALVE BTV BLOCKED

BLKD
A-1

CABINET CAB CABINET WIRING DIAGRAM CWD CABLE CBL CALCULATION CALC CALIBRATION

CALB,
CALIB

CALCIUM CA CAPACITY CAPY CARBON C CARBON DIOXIDE CO2 CASING CSG CATEGORY CAT CATHODE RAY TUBE CRT CATHODIC PROTECTION C PROT CATION CTN CAUSTIC CAUS CAVITY CVTY CELSIUS o CENTER CTR C

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION

ABBREVIATION

STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION

ABBREV

IATION

C (Cont.)
CENTIMETER

CM COALESCER CLSCR CENTRAL ALARM STATION CAS CFR CENTRAL PROCESS UNIT CPU

CODE OF FEEDERAL (UNITED
STATES) REGULATIONS

CENTRIFUGAL CENT COEFFICIENT COEFF CHAMBER CHMB COLLECTION COLLN CHANGE CHNG COLLECTOR COLL CHANNEL CH COLUMN COL CHARCOAL CHAR COMBUSTIBLE COMB CHARCOAL DELAY BED CDB

COMBUSTIBLE GAS CONTROL
SYSTEM

CGCS CHARCOAL GUARD BED CGB COMMON CMN CHARGER CHR COMMUNICATION COM CHARGING CHRG COMPARTMENT COMP CHECK CHK, CK COMPENSATED CMPN CHECK VALVE

CK VLV
CHEM

COMPENSATED IONIZATION
CHAMBER

CIC

CHEMICAL
CHEST

CHST COMPONENT CMPNT CHILLED CHLD CCS CHILLED WATER CH WTR

COMPONENT CONTROL
SYSTEM

CHILLED WATER COIL CWC

COMPONENT COOLING
WATER (SYSTEM)

CCW(S) CHILLER CHLR COMPRESSOR COMR CHLORIDE CHLOR COMPUTED CMPTD CHLORINE CL COMPUTER CPTR CHLORINATION CHLORTN COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN CAD CIRCUIT(S) CKT(S) CONCENTRATION CONC CIRCULATING CIRC CONDITION CONDN CIRCULATING WATER PUMP CWP CONDUCTIVITY CDTY

CIRCULATING WATER
(SYSTEM)

CW(S) CONDUCTIVITY RACK CDTY RK CLARIFIER CLRF CONNECTION CONN CLEAING CLNG CONSTRUCTION CONSTR CLEAN UP CU CONSTRUCTION PERMIT CP CLOSE CLS CONTROL (LER) CTRL(R) CLOSED CLSD CONTROLLED CTRLD

CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION

CCTV CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM CLD COAGULANT COAG CONTROL ROOM CR A-2

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION

ABBREVIATION

STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION

ABBREV

IATION

C (Cont.)
CONTROL VALVE

CV DECREASE DECR CONTROL WIRING DIAGRAM CWD DEENERGIZE DENERG CONVECTION CONV DEGASFIER DEGAS CONVERTER CVTR DEGRESS DEG CONVEYER CNVR DELAY DLY COOLER CLR DEMAND DEM COOLING CLG DEMINERALIZER COOLING WATER TREATMENT CWT

DEMI,
DEMIN

CORRECTED CORR DENSITY DNS COST SCHEDULE C/S DEPENDENT DEP COUNTS PER MINUTE CPM DESIGN BASIS ACCIDENT DBA COUNTS PER SECOND CPS DESIGN BASIS EARTHQUAKE DBE COUPLING CPLG DESIGN CRITERIA MANUAL DCM COVER CVR

DESIGN DOCUMENT CONTROL
CENTER

DDCC CROSSCONNECT

XCON
XTIE

DESIGN INFORMATION
TRANSMITTAL

DIT

CROSSTIE
CROSSOVER

XOVER DETECTOR DET CUBICLE CUB DETECTION DETN CURIE CI DEVIATION DEV CURRENT CURR DEWATERING DEWATER CURRENT INDICATOR II DIESEL DSL CURRENT RECORDER IR DIESEL OIL DO CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT DIESEL GENERATOR DG CUTOUT CTOUT DIFFERENTIAL DIFF CYLINDER CYL DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE

D P, P,
DIFF PRESS

DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE
CONTROL STATION

PDK

D
DAMPER

DMPR
DAS

DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE
INDICATOR

PDI

DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM
DATA LINK

DL DIGITAL DIG DECARBONATOR DECAR DCM DECADES PER MINUTE DPM

DIGITAL CONTROL AND
MONITORING

DECANTER DECAN

DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
SYSTEM

DDPS DECONTAMINATION DECON DIGITAL ELECTROHYDRAULIC DEH DECONTAMINATION FACTOR

DF
A-3

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION

ABBREVIATION D (Cont.)

STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION

ABBREV

IATION

E DIGITAL TO ANALOG D/A EAST E DILUTE DIL ECCENTRICITY ECC DILUTION DILU EFFICIENCY EFF DIRECT CURRENT DC EFFLUENT EFLU DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL DDC EFFLUENT CONCENTRATION EC DISABLED DIS ELECTRICAL ELECT DISCHARGE DSCH ELECTRICAL TO PNEUMATIC E/P DISCHARGE FLUME DSCH FLM

ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

EWD DISCONNECT DISCON ELECTROHYDRAULIC EH DISENGAGE DISENG EHC DISPLAY DISP

ELECTROHYDRAULIC
CONTROL

DO2

ELECTROMAGNETIC
INTERFERENCE

EMI

DISSOLVED OXYGEN
DISTRIBUTION

DISTR ELETRONIC ELECTRN DIVERSION DIVE ELECTRO PNEUMATIC E/P DIVISION DIV ELEVATION ELEV DUCT DCT ELEVATOR ELVTR

DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITY

DOR EMERGENCY EMRG DOCUMENT REVIEW NOTICE DRN ENCLOSURE ENCLSR DOMESTIC DOMES ENERGIZE ENERG DOWNSTREAM DNSTRM ENGAGED ENGD DRAIN DRN ENGINE ENG DRAIN PUMP DRNP ENGINEERING GROUP LEADER EGL DRAIN TANK DT

ENGINEERING GROUP
SUPERVISOR

EGS DRAIN VALVE

DV
DCDF

ENVIRONMENTAL
MONITORING

DRAWING COMMENT
DISTRIBUTION FORM

EQUIPMENT EQUIP, DRIVE DRV DRUM DRM EQUIPMENT DRAIN TANK EDT DUPLEX DPLX EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATION EQ DURATION DURAT

EQUIPMENT VIBRATION
MONITORING SYSTEM

EVMS ESSENTIAL ESSEN EVACUATION EVAC EVAPORATOR EVAP EXCESS EXCS EQ, EQPT A-4

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION

ABBREVIATION

STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION

ABBREV

IATION

E (Cont.)
EXCESS FLOW CHECK VALVE

EFCV FLOW INDICATOR FI EXCHANGER EXCH FIK EXHAUST EXH

FLOW INDICATING CONTROL
STATION

EXHAUSTER EXHSTR

FLOW INTEGRATOR
INDICATOR

FQI EXHAUSR HOOD EXHD FLOW INTEGRATOR SWITCH FQS EXPANSION EXP FLOW TRANSMITTER FT EXTERNAL EXTER FLUE GAS FG EXTRACTION EXT FLUID FLU EXTRAXTOR EXTRR FLUORIDE FLUO FOULING FLG FREQUENCY FREQ FREQUENCY INDICATOR SI FROM FR FRONT FRNT FRONT FACE FF FULL LENGTH CEA FLCEA FUNCTION

FUNC,
FUNCT

F
FACILITY

FAC FAHRENHEIT F FAILED AS IS F.A.I FAILED CLOSED F.C. FAILED OPEN F.O. FAILURE FAIL

FAILURE MODE AND EFFECTS
ANALYSIS

FMEA
FALT

FUNCTIONAL
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM

FID

FAULT
FEEDER

FDR FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM FLD FEET

FT
FLD

FUNCTIONAL RECOVERY
GUIDELINES

FRG

FIELD
FILTER

FLTR FUTURE FUT FIRE PROTECTION (PANEL) FP(P) FIRST 1ST FLAME FLM FLANGE FLNG FLASH FLSH FLOOR FLR FLOW FLO

FLOW CALIBRATION
CONSTANT

FCL FLOW CONTROLLER FC FLOW CONTROL VALVE

FCV
A-5

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION

ABBREVIATION

STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION

ABBREV

IATION

G
GALLONS PER MINUTE

GPM HAND CONTROLLER HC GAS ANALYZER GA HIC, HIK GAS COLLECTION HEADER GCH

HAND INDICATING
CONTROLLER

GAS DECAY TANK GDT HANDLE HDL GASEOUS RADWASTE SYSTEM GRS HANDLING HDLG

GASEOUS WASTE
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

GWMS HANDSWITCH HS HAND TRANSFER SWITCH HTS GAS INSULATED BUS GIB HANDWHEEL HNDWHL GAS INSULATED SUBSTATION GIS HEADER HDR GAS MONITOR GM HEADER DRAIN TANK HDT GAS RECIRCULATION

GAS
RECIRC

HEALTH HLTH HEAT HT GAS STRIPPER GS HEATER (S) HTR(S) GAS STRIPPER EFFLUENT GSE HEATER DRAIN HD

GAS STRIPPER EFFLUENT
RADIATION MONITOR

GSERM HEAT EXCHANGER HX GAS SURGE TANK GST HEATING HTG GAS SURGE HEADER GSH

HEATING, VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING

HVAC GATEHOUSE GH HEAT LOSS HL GEARBOX GRBX HEAT TRACING HT TRAC GEIGER-MUELLER G-M HERTZ HZ GENERAL GNRL HIGH HI

GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
CHANGING REQUEST

GACR

HIGH EFFICIENCY
PARTICULATE AIR (abs)

HEPA GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA GDC HIGH-HIGH HI-HI, HH GENERATOR GEN HIGH-HIGH-HIGH HI-HI-HI GLAND GLND HIGH LEVEL OVERRIDE HLO GLYCOL GLY HIGH LEVEL WASTE HLW GRAM GM HIGH OR LOW HI/LO GRAVITY GRAV HIGH PRESSURE HP GROUND GND HIGH VOLTAGE HV GROUP GRP HOIST HST HOLD (ING) HLD (G) HORIZONTAL HOR

HORIZONTAL MULTICELL
PRESSURE FILTER

HMPF A-6

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
H

ABBREVIATION

STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION

ABBREV

IATION

(Cont.) HOTWATER H/W INNER INR HOUR HR ISOLATION ISOL HOUSE HSE INOPERABLE INOP HOUSING HSNG INPUT/OUTPUT I/O

HUMAN FACTORS
ENGINEERING

HFE INSERTION INSER INSIDE DIAMETER ID HUMAN FACTORS GROUP HFG INSPECTION INSP HUMIDIFIER

HUMF
HUMID

INSTITUTE FOR NUCLEAR
POWER OPERATIONS

INPO

HUMIDITY
HYDRAULIC

HYD IEEE HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT HCU

INSTITUTE OF ELECTRIC AND
ELECTRONIC ENGINEERS

HYDRAULIC FLUID PUMP HFP INSTRUMENT INST HYDRAZINE HYDZ INSTRUMENT AIR IA HYDROGEN H, H2

INSTRUMENT AIR
DISTRIBUTION DRAWING

IAD HYDROXIDE

HYDROX
HYCO

INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL

I&C HYPOCHLORITE

INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION
DETAILS

IID

INSTRUMENT LOCATION
DRAWING

ILD

I
IMPULSE

IMP INACCESSIBLE

INACCES
INACT

INTEGRATED PROJECT
SCHEDULE

IPS

INACTIVE
INBOARD

INBD INTERCEPT INTCP INCH IN IWD INCOMING INC

INTERCONNECTION WIRE
DIAGRAMS

INCREASE INCR INTERFACE REQUIREMENT IRQ INDEPENDENT INDP INTERMEDIATE INTERM INDICATOR IND INTERNAL INT INDIVIDUAL INDVL

INTERNALS VIBRATION
MONITORING SYSTEM

IVMS INDUCTION INDN INTEROFFICE MEMORANDUM IOM INERTING INRT IODINE IOD, I INFLUENT INFLU IEDH INITIATE INIT

ION EXCHANGE DRAIN
HEADER

INITIATED INTD ION EXCHANGER IX INJECTION INJ IRON FE INLET INLT ISOLATION ISOL A-7

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION

ABBREVIATION I (Cont.)

STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION

ABBREV

IATION

L ISOLATION VALVE IV LABORATORY LAB ISOMETRIC DRAWING ISO LEAD LD ISOTOPE ISOTPE LEAK LK LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM LDS LEAK OFF LKOFF

J
JOINT

JT LEAVING LVNG JOINT SYSTEM DESIGN JSD LEFT HAND LH JOURNAL JRNL LEVEL LVL, L JUNCTION JUNC LEVEL CONTROL VALVE LCV JUNCTION BOX JB LEVEL CONTROLLER LC

LEVEL INDICATING CONTROL
STATION

LIK LEVEL INDICATOR LI

LEVEL MULTIPOINT
RECORDER

LJR

LEVEL INSTRUMENT BRIDDLE
DRAWING

LBD LEVEL SETTING DIAGRAM LSD LEVEL TRANSMITTER LT LICENSEE EVENT REPORT LER LIGHT LGT LIGHT EMITTING DIODE LED LIGHTER LGTR LIGHTING LTG LIGHTING ARRESTER LA LIGHT WATER REACTOR LWR LIMIT LMT LIMITING LMTNG

LIMITING CONDITIONS OF
OPERATION

LCO LINE LN LINE OF SIGHT LOS LINEAR LNR

LINEAR VARIABLE
DIFFERENTIAL TRANSFORMER

LVDT LIQUID LIQ

K
KILOGRAMS

KILOGRAMS PER CENTIMETER KG/CM2A
SQUARED ABSOLUTE
KILOGRAMS PER CENTIMETER KG/CM2G
SQUARED GAUGE
KILOVARS

KVAR KILOVOLTS KV KILOWATTS KW

KOREA ATOMIC ENERGY
RESEARCH INSTITUTE
COMPANY

KAERI

KOREA RADIOACTIVE WASTE KORAD
AGENCY
KOREA INSTITUTE FOR
NUCLEAR SAFETY

KINS

KOREA NUCLEAR FUEL
COMPANY

KNFC

KEPCO ENGINEERING &
CONSTRUCTION
COMPANY

KEPCO E&C

KOREA STANDARDS
INSTITUTE

KSI

KOPEC INTERACTIVE
DOCUMENT SYSTEM

KIDS A-8

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION

ABBREVIATION

STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION

ABBREV

IATION

M
L (Cont.)

MACHINE MACH LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY LCD MAIN MN LIQUID RADWASTE SYSTEM LRS MAIN CONTROL ROOM MCR

LIQUID WASTE MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM

LWMS MAIN POWER MP MAIN TRANSFORMER MTR LITER L MAINTENANCE MAINT LOAD CENTER LDC MAKEUP MU LOCAL LCL MALFUNCTION MALF LOCAL CONTROL PANEL (S) LCP MANAGER MANGR LOCAL CONTROL STATION LCS MANIFOLD MFLD LOCALLY MOUNTED LM MANIPULATOR MANIP LOCAL SAMPLE LS MANPOWER MP LOCAL SAMPLING SYSTEM LSS MANUAL MAN LOCAL TEST SWITCH LTS MANUAL/AUTOMATIC M/A LOCKED LKD LOCKED CLOSED L.C.

MANUAL/AUTOMATIC
INDICATOR CONTROL

MAIC
111111

LOCKED OPEN L.O. MANUAL INDIVIDUAL MI LOCKED-OUT L-O MANUFACTURING MFG LOGARITHMIC LOG MANUFACTURING LICENSE ML

LOOSE PARTS MONITORING
SYSTEM

LPMS MANUFACTURER MFR MASTER MAST LOW LO MASTER DIAGRAM MD LOW-LOW

LO-LO, LL
LO-LO-LO

MATERIAL TRACKING
SYSTEM

MTS LOW-LOW-LOW MAXIMUM MAX

MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE
CONCENTRATION

MPC

LOW
AND
INTERMIDIATE LILW
LEVEL RADWASTE DISPOSAL 111111111111
11111
FACILITY
LOW BEARING

LBRNG
LWR

MEAN TIME BETWEEN
FAILURE

MTBF

LOWER
LOW PRESSURE

LP MEAN TIME TO FAILURE MTTF LOW VOLTAGE LV MEAN TIME TO REPAIR MTTR LUBRICATING LUB MECHANICAL MECH LUBRICATING OIL LUBO

MEMORY ADDRESS
TRANSLATOR

MAT MERCURY HG MEZZANINE MEZ A-9

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION

ABBREVIATION

STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION

ABBREV

IATION

N
M

(Cont.) NARROW NAR MICROPROCESSOR MPROCES NARROW RANGE NR MIDSPAN MDSP NATURAL NAT MILLIMETERS MM NEGATIVE NEG

MILLIMETERS MERCURY
ABSOLUTE

MM HGA

NET POSITIVE SUCTION HEAD

NPSH NEUTRAL GROUND NEUTGND MINIMUM MIN,MINI NITROGEN N2 MINUTE MINU,MIN NOBLE NBL MISCELLANEOUS MISC NONCONFORMANCE REPORT NCR MODULATION MOD NON-POST ACCIDENT NPA MOISTURE MOIST NON-REGENERATIVE NON-REGEN MONITOR MON MONTHLY PROGRESS REPORT MPR

NON-SAFETY RELATED
DESIGNATION

MOTOR MTR NORMAL

NSR
1111110
NORM

MOTOR CONTROL CENTER MCC MOTOR OPERATED VALVE MOV

NORMAL OPERATING
GUIDELINES

MOUNTED MTD MOUNTING HEIGHT MH

MULTIPERIPHERAL
CONTROLLER

MPC MULTIPLEXER MUX NOZZLE MULTIVARIABLE INDICATOR UI NUCLEAR

MULTIVARIABLE LIGHT
INDICATION

NUCLEAR REGULATORY
COMMISSION (UNITED STATES)

MULTIVARIABLE
MULTIFUNCTION

UU NUMBER

NORTH
NOT APPLICABLE
NOT FULLY CLOSED
NOT FULLY OPEN

A-10

NOG
111111111
N
N/A
NFC
NFO
NOZ
NUC
NRC
1111111
NUM,#,
NO.

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION

ABBREVIATION O

STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
P

OBSTRUCTION OBSTR PACKING OFF GAS OG PANEL OFFICE OFC PARTICLE

OFFSHORE TECHNICAL
SUPPORT

OTS

PART LENGTH CONTROL
ELEMENT ASSEMBLY

OIL CIRCUIT BREAKER OCB PART NUMBER OKAY OK PARTS PER MILLION ON LOAD TAP CHANGE OLTC PENDANT OPEN OPN PENETRATION OPEN/CLOSE O/C OPERATING OPER

PENETRATION
PRESSURIZATION

OPERATING BASIS
EARTHQUAKE

OBE OPERATING LICENSE OL OPERATION OP OPERATOR OPR

PH NUMBER (EFFECTIVE
HYDROGEN ION CONCENTRATION, MEASURES ACIDITY/
ALKALINITY)

OPERATOR INTERFACE UNIT OIU PHASE ORGANIC CARBON C PHOSPHATE ORIFICE ORIF PILOT OUNCE OZ OUTBOARD OUTBD

PIPING & INSTRUMENTATION
DIAGRAM

OUTBOARD BEARING OBRNG OUTER OUTR OUTLET OTLT OUTLET HEADER OHDR

PLANT CONTROL& MONITORING
SYSTEM

OUT-OF-SEQUENCE OUT-OF SEQ PLATE OUT OF SERVICE OOS PLATEN OUTSIDE OUTS PLENNUM OUTSIDE AIR OA PNEUMATIC OUTSIDE DIAMETER OD POINT OVER OVR POLISHER OVERCURRENT OC POLISHING OVERLOW OVERFLO POSITION INDICATOR OVERLOAD OVRLD

POSITION LIGHT INDICATION

OVERSPEED OVRSP POSITIVE OXYGEN O2 POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT

PERCENT
PERFORMANCE

PIPING DESIGN TABLE
PIPING SYSTEM DESIGN
SPECIFICATION

A-11

ABBREV

IATION

PKG
PNL
PART
PLCEA
P/N
PPM
PNDT
PEN
PP
%, PCT
PERF
PH
111111111
PHAS
PHOS
PLT
P&ID
PDT
PSDS
PCMS
111111
PLTE
PLTN
PLEN
PNEU
PNT
PLSHR
PLSHNG
ZI
ZL
POS
PD

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION

ABBREVIATION P (Cont.)

STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION

ABBREV

IATION

PROJECT DISTRIBUTION LIST

PDL POTENTIOMETER POT PROJECT MANAGER PM POUND LB PNS

POUND PER SQUARE
INCH ABSOLUTE

PSIA

PROJECT NUMBERING
SYSTEM
PROPORTIONAL

PROP

POUND PER SQUARE
INCH GAUGE

PSIG PROTECTION PROT PUMP (S) PMP(S) POWER PWR PURGE PRG PRECIPITATOR PCP PURIFICATION FILTER PF PREFERRED PRFD PRE-FILTER PRE-FLTR

PURIFICATION ION
EXCHANGER

PIX, PUR.
EX.

PREHEATER PHTR PURIFIER PURF PREHEATING PHTG PURITY PRTY

PRELIMINARY TASK ANALYSIS

PTA PUSHBUTTON PB PRESSURE PRESS, P PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM PAS PRESSURE CONTROLLER PC

PRESSURE CONTROL OR
REGULATING VALVE

PCV Q Q QUADRANT QUAD PRESSURE DROP PD QUALITY QLTY

PRESSURE INDICATING
CONTROLLER

PIK QUALITY ASSURANCE QA PI

QUALITY ASSURANCE OF
DESIGN PROCEDURE

QADP

PRESSURE INDICATOR
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE

PRV QAR PRESSURE TRANSMITTER PT

QUALITY ASSURANCE
REPRESENTATIVE

PREVENTION PREV QUALITY CONTROL QC PRIMARY PRIM QUALITY SURVEILLANCE QS PROBE PROB QUANTITY QNTY PROCEDURE REVIEW NOTICE PRN PROCESS PROC

PROCESS AND EFFLUENT
RADIATION MONITORING

PRM

PROCESS CONTROL CABINET
PROCESSING UNIT
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION
PROCESS SAMPLING
PROGRAM
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLER

PCC
PU
PI
PS
PROG
PLC
A-12

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION

ABBREVIATION

STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION

ABBREV

IATION

R
RACK

RK REMOTE RMT RACKED IN R/I REMOTE CONTROL MODULE RCM RACKED OUT R/O REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT RTU

RADIATION MONITORING
CABINET

RMC REMOVAL RMVL REMOVE RMV

RADIATION MONITORING
SYSTEM

RMS REPRESENTATIVE REP

RADIOACTIVE
CONCENTRATION GUIDE

RCG

REPUBLIC OF KOREA-ATOMIC
ENERGY BUREAU

ROK-AEB RADIOACTIVE DRAIN SYSTEM RDS RESERVE RES

RADIOACTIVE LAUNDRY
SYSTEM

RLS RESERVOIR RSVR RESET RSET RADIOACTIVE WASTE RADWASTE RTD

RADIOACTIVITY LIGHT
INDICATION

RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE
DETECTOR
RESPONSIBLE ENGINEER

RE RADIOACTIVITY RECORDER RR RESTRICTING RSTRCTING RANGE RNG RETURN RTRN RATE RT REVERSE OSMOSIS RO RECEIVER RCVR REVOLUTIONS PER MINUTE RPM RECIRCULATION RECIRC RIGHT SIDE RS RECYCLE RECY RISER RISR REFERENCE REF ROENTGEN R REGENERATOR REGN ROENTGEN ABSORBED DOSE RAD REGION RGN ROENTGEN EQUIVALENT MAN REM

(REGISTERED) PROFESSIONAL
ENGINEER

(R)PE ROOM RM REGULATE REG ROOT MEAN SQUARE RMS REGULATOR REGR ROOT SUM SQUARE RSS REGULATORY GUIDE RG RUNNING RUN REHEAT RH REHEATER RHTR REINJECTION REINJ RELATED RLTD RELALTIVE REL RELATIVE HUMIDITY RH RELAY RLY RELIEF

RLF
A-13

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION

ABBREVIATION

STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION

ABBREV

IATION

S
SAFETY

SAF SKIMMER SKIM SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT SAR SLUDGE SLUG SAFETY-RELIEF VALVE SRV SLUICE SLU SAMPLE SAMP SMOKE SMK SATURATED SAT SNUBBER SNUB SCANNER SCAN SODIUM NA SCAVENGING SCAV SOLENOID SLND SCHEDULED SCHED SOLENOID VALVE SOV SCREEN SCRN SOLID RADWASTE SYSTEM SRS SEAL SL SECOND (time) SEC

SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT SWNS
111
SYSTEM

SECOND (after first) 2ND SECONDARY SECD SECTION SECT SECURITY SECUR SEISMIC SEIS SELECTION SEL SELECTOR SWITCH SEL SW SEPARATOR SEP SEQUENCE SEQ SEQUENCE OF EVENTS SOE SERVICE SERV SERVICE WATER SW SETPOINT SETPT SEWAGE SEW SHAFT SHFT SHALLOW SHAL SHEEL SHL SHUTDOWN S/D SIDE SD SIDEWALL SWL SIGNAL SIG SILICA SI

SILICON CONTROLLED
RECTIFIER

SCR
A-14

SOLUTION SOLN SOURGE SRCE SOURGE RANGE SR SOUTH S SOUTH/NORTH S/N SPARGING SPRG SPECIAL LIGHT INDICATION XL SPECIFIC SPCF SPECIFICATION SPEC SPECIFIC GRAVITY SPGR SPECIFIC VOLUME SPVOL SPEED SPD SPREADING SPRDG SPRINKLER SPKLR STAGE STG STAIRWAY STRWY STANDARD STD STANDBY STBY

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION

ABBREVIATION

STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION

ABBREV

IATION

S (Cont.)
STANDBY LIQUID CONTROL

SWITCHGEAR SLC SWGR SYSTEM

SYS
SYSTEM DESIGN CRITERIA
SDC
SYSTEM
FUNCTIONAL
SFD
DESCRIPTION

START STRT STARTED STRD START-UP S/U STATIC STAC STATIC PRESSURE SP STATION STA STATUS STAT STEAM STM STOP ST STOPPED STOP STORAGE STOR STRAINER STRN STREAM STRM STRIPPER STRIPR STRUCTURE STRUC STUCK STK

TEMPERATURE CONTROL
VALVE

SUBSTATION SUBSTA TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER SUCTION SUCT TEMPERING SUDDEN SUD TEMPORARY SULFATE SO4 TERMINAL SUMP SMP TERTIARY SUPERVISORY SUPV TEST

SUPPLIERS’S DEVIATION
DISPOSITION REQUEST

SDDR TEST SIGNAL POSITION

SUPPLIER DOCUMENT REVIEW
FORM

SDRF SUPPLY SUP SUPPORT SUPRT SUPPRESSION SUPP SURFACE SURF SURGE SRGE SURVEILLANCE SURV SUSPENDED SOLID SS SWITCH SWCH, SW

T
TACHOMETER
TANK (S)
TASK ANALYSIS
TECHNICAL
TELEVISION
TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
TEMPERATURE INDICATING
CONTROL STATION
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

THERMAL
THERMOCOUPLE
THERSHOLD
THROTTLE
THRUST
THRUST BEARING
TIME
TIME INDICATOR
TIMER
TOTAL
TOTAL DISSOLVED SOLID
A-15

TACH
TK(S)
TA
TECH
TV
TEMP, T
TC
TIK
TI
TCV
TT
TMPG
TMPRY
TERM
TERT
TST
TSP
THERM
T/C, TC
THRSHD
THROT
TRST
TBRNG
TM
KI
TMR
TOT
TDS

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION

ABBREVIATION T (Cont.)

STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION

ABBREV

IATION

V TOTAL INTEGRATED DOSE TID VACUUM VAC TOWER TWR VALID VLD TRAIN TRN V/V TRANSDUCER XDCR

VALIDATION AND
VERIFICATION

TRANSDUCER POWER SUPPLY
CABINET

TPSC VALVE (S) VLV(S) VAPOR VAP TRANSFER XFER VARIABLE VAR TRANSFORMER XFMR VAULT VLT TRANSMITTER XMTR VENTILATION VENT TRAVELLING TRAV VENT (TO ATMOSPHERE) V TREATMENT TREAT VERIFICATION VERF TRIP TRP VERTICAL VERT TRIPPED TRPD VESSEL VESS TROUBLE TRBL VIA TURBID TRBD

VIA (THROUGH, BY MEANS OF,
BY WAY OF)

TURBIDITY TBDT VIBRATION VIB VOLTAGE VTG VOLTAMPERE VA UNBAL VIDEO DISPLAY UNIT VDU UNCERT(S) VOLTMETER VM UCMPN VOLT-OHM METER VOM UPS VOLTAGE TO CURRENT E/I

VOLTAGE TO FREQUENCY
CONVERTER

VFC UPPR

VOLTAGE TO PULSE RATE
CONVERTER

VPRC VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER VT VOLTS VOLT, V VOLUME VOL

U
UNBALANCE
UNCERTAINTIE(S)
UNCOMPENSATED
UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER
SUPPLIER
UPPER
UPPER BEARING
UPSTREAM
UTILITY

UBRNG
UPSTRM
ULTY

A-16

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION

ABBREVIATION

W
WAREHOUSE

WH WARM-UP WMUP WASTE WSTE

WASTE MANAGEMENT
(SYSTEM)

WM(S) WATCHDOG TIMER WDT WATER WTR WATERBOX WTRBX WEIGHT WT WEST W WIDE RANGE WR WINDBOX WDBX WINDING WDG WINDOW WDW WITHDRAW WITHDRA WITHOUT W/O A-17 (Final)

STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION

ABBREV

IATION

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
ATTACHMENT B
DEMARCATION AND MIMIC GUIDELINES

1.1

General
Proper demarcation and mimic can significantly improve an operator's ability to use a
set of controls and/or displays. Demarcation of functionally grouped controls and
displays reduces operator search time. Demarcation also aids in defining or
reinforcing the relationship between controls and their displays. Labeling the
functionally grouped and demarcated controls/displays can reduce the wordiness of
individual component labels and can increase information transfer.
Groups of functionally similar controls/displays shall be enclosed by demarcation
lines. The demarcated area shall be labeled with a descriptive title as to the system
or function of the demarcated controls. Each individual component shall be labeled
with its alpha-numeric designator and/or its descriptive name. The descriptive title
of the demarcated group shall not be repeated in the individual component labels.

1.2

Abbreviations
Refer to Attachment A for preferred abbreviations.

1.3

Component Designations
1.3.1 Nomenclature shall be consistent with procedures and flow diagrams.

1.3.2

Controls and displays shall be identified by a descriptive name and
alpha-numeric designature where available.

1.3.3 Controls and displays in a mimic may be identified by its alpha-numeric
designator if its position in the mimic describes its function.
1.4

Demarcation
Demarcation can be used on control panel to designate system boundaries and component
groups.
Demarcation material shall be autostriping tape (Mannufacturer: 'Trim' or equivalent).
Chartpack-style (Paper-Backed) tape shall not be used as it is not durable.
Width = 0.48cm(0.19 inch)
B-1

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
{0.2cm (0.078 inch) may be used for subsystem delineation}
Color: black
Group Labels shall be centered on the demarcation line.
1.5

Material
Label plates and mimic lines shall be made of low glare material. In areas where the plate
may be abused, stronger, less scratchable material is recommended.

1.6

Mimics
A mimic is the use of lines to show the relationship between system components or to
show the direction of fluid flow or electrical distribution. Arrows, whose base is wider
than the mimic line, shall be used to show the direction of the fluid or electrical flow.
Arrows shall be used only when the flow is in one direction.
Fluid mimic lines shall be black. Electrical mimic lines shall conform to the following
convention:
345 kV - white
154 kV - silver
13.8 kV - red
4.16 kV - blue
480 V

yellow

Symbols may be used to represent components in the system.
The start and end of each mimic shall be identified; and if it connects to another mimic or
extends to another panel, this shall be indicated. Mimics shall be made (cut) from the same
0.16 cm (0.06 inch) thick material as labels.

B – 2 (Final)

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
ATTACHMENT C
STATISTICAL BASIS OF UNCERTAINTIES

DELETED C–1

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

DELETED C–2

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

DELETED C – 3 (Final)

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
ATTACHMENT D
INSTRUMENT LIST (SPEC. NO :

)
SHEET :

KORAD’S TAG NO. SERVICE DESCRIPTION

INSTRUMENT
TYPE
SAFETY CAT/
SEISMIC CAT

INPUT RANGE

OUTPUT
RANGE

SWITCH TYPE
SETPOINT
(ALARM OR
TRIP)

CONTACT
RATING

D-1 (Final) SCALE RANGE ENG’G UNIT MANUFACTURER MODEL NO. SUPPLIER’S TAG NO. REFERENCE DWG NO.

LOOSE
PART
(YES/NO)

OF
REMARK

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

ATTACHMENT E
INSTRUMENT NUMBERING SYSTEM

Instrument No. Description Example : 0 - 542 - J - PDIS - 3001 - AA

Phase +
PBS +
Equipment Category +
Instrument type #
Serial Number ++
Duplicate instrument
with identical
designation *
+

Optional on Drawing (If this common part of component tag no. is separately identified as a
drawing note)

Two, three, or four letters are used

Numbering of the system shall generally be upper left across to lower right, but take process
flow path into account.
If four(4) letters of instrument type are used, “PDIS” for example, serial number can be
reduced to 3 digits

* Optional

The PBS shall be identified from the specifications. Otherwise, the Supplier shall request
KORAD's assistance.

Note : The solenoid-operated air valves are numbered by the above numbering system.
E – 1 (Final)

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/ STORAGE BUILDING

APPENDIX 4X
Requirements for Part Classification

KEPCO E&C JOB No. : 11G79

ISSUE STATUS 0 01/26/24 Construction issue REV. NO DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED

Preparer : 임정민, Tel : 054-421-6395

Appendix 4X
Rev. 0

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION

TITLE PAGE 1.0 GENERAL 4X-1 2.0 DEFINITIONS 4X-1 3.0

REQUIREMENTS FOR PART CLASSIFICATION

4X-1

ATTACHMENT
1

INSTRUCTIONS TO DETERMINE PART
CLASSIFICAION FOR AQ-CLASS EQUIPMENT

2 PART LIST FORM TC 4X – 1 (Final)

Appendix 4X
Rev. 0

1.0 GENERAL 1.1

Scope
The Scope of this Appendix is to determine the quality classification of parts used in
equipment. The purpose is to utilize the classification method practically and efficiently for the
receipt/storage building operation and management.

2.0 DEFINITIONS 2.1

Equipment
An assembly of components designed and manufactured to perform specific functions

2.2

Component
An assembly of parts to have independent function (e.g., pump, motor)

2.3

Part
Minimum unit of maintenance or replacement as a basic unit of equipment or component
(e.g., gasket, relay, capacitor, switch, stem)

3.0

REQUIREMENTS FOR PART CLASSIFICATION

3.1

The supplier shall identify and determine appropriate quality class of each part. Part
classification depends on design function and quality class of its parent equipment. Therefore,
if the quality class of equipment is AQ, the classification of the parts shall follow Section 3.2.
The rest of equipment, which is considered as NQ, are not classified. All parts of NQ class
equipment are also considered as quality class NQ. However, part list shall be prepared in
accordance with Section 3.4.

3.2

Requirements of part classification for AQ-Class equipment

3.2.1

For the parts used in AQ-Class parent equipment (that is, augmented-quality component),
after confirming component’s regulatory requirements or special requirement imposed by the
utility, parts which perform or impact to their component (equipment)’s design functions are
classified as quality class AQ.

3.2.2

Suppliers shall identify the required information for all components and complete Form1 of
attachment 1.

3.2.3

If the information about parent components has been changed, the supplier should be
informed about Attachment 1, Form 1 from A/E.

3.2.4

Supplier shall identify and evaluate the function of each part using Form2 of attachment 1. If
a part is not required for design function of parent component directly, the quality class of part
is determined as NQ.

4X - 1

Appendix 4X
Rev. 0

3.2.5

All parts described in the part list shall be properly designated quality class with an alphanumeric character (AQ or NQ) and the definition is as follows:
A. Augmented Quality(AQ)
AQ is assigned to those parts which are provided as non-safety-related items for which
regulatory requirements or special requirements imposed by the utility exist that establish
design, procurement, maintenance, or quality assurance requirements. None of these
requirements constitutes a safety-related functions or classification. However, because of
these requirements certain items are classified as AQ in order to ensure that these
requirements are preserved while operating, maintaining, or modifying the items.
B. Non-Quality(NQ)
NQ is assigned to those parts that do not effect nor degrade the equipment/component
safety function performance or availability. This category consists of non-safety-related
items that are not subject to any special requirements.

3.2.6

Based on the above classifications, supplier shall complete the part list using the Attachment
2.

3.3

Requirements of part classification for NQ-Class equipment

3.3.1

Supplier shall complete and submit the part list only using Part List Form of Attachment 2.

3.4 Part List 3.4.1

The part list, using Microsoft Excel only, shall be prepared by referring Attachment 2 for the
classified parts of all equipment.

3.4.2

Supplier who supplies AQ class equipment shall submit the part list to owner including all
completed forms of Attachment 1.

4X - 2

Appendix 4X
Rev. 0

3.5 Work Flow 3.5.1

The work flow chart for overall part classification process is as follows.

Identify part

Is parent equipment
augmented quality

Part is NonQuality: NQ No (AQ)?

Yes
Is the part required for
parent equipment’s
Design functions?

Yes
Part is Augmented
Quality: AQ

4X – 3 (Final) No

Appendix 4X
Rev. 0

ATTACHMENT 1
INSTRUCTIONS TO DETERMINE PART CLASSIFICATION
(AQ - Class Equipment)

4X-A1-1

Appendix 4X
Rev. 0

Table of Contents

Form 1. Parent Component Design Functions and Classification Evaluation Sheet
Form 2. Part Classification Work Sheet
Instructions
1. Instructions for Evaluating Design Functions and Classification for Parent Component
2. Instructions for Preparing Part Classification Work Sheet

4X-A1-2

Appendix 4X
Rev. 0

Form 1. Parent Component Design Functions and Classification Evaluation Sheet
1. Evaluation
Sheet No.

2. Station/Unit(s)

3. System/Component Identification
System
Component

Component Tag No. Specification No. Supplier/Manufacturer

4. Component Design Functions Evaluation
Design Function

Design Function Description

5. Component Classification
Radwaste Safety
Category(RSC)

□ I □ II □ III Seismic Category □I □ II Quality Class □ III 6. References 4X-A1-3 □ AQ □ NQ

Appendix 4X
Rev. 0

Form 2. Part Classification Work Sheet
1. Part Identification
Part Classification
Work Sheet No.

Part Description Part/Model No. Specification Manufacturer

Manufacturer’s
Identification No.

2.Part Function
3. Part Safety Assessment
No.

1) Questions Yes

Is the part required for design function(s) of the component?

(Only for Seismic Category II component)
2)

Is the part required for maintaining structural integrity of the
component?

4. References
5. Part Safety Classification
□ Augmented Quality(AQ)

□ Non-Quality(NQ)

6. Part Classification Evaluation
(Document a Basis or References)

7. Final Part Classification

□ Augmented Quality(AQ) □ Non-Quality(NQ) 4X-A1-4 No N/A

Appendix 4X
Rev. 0

1. Instructions for Evaluating Safety Functions and Classifications for Parent Component
The classification and safety functions of the component are a prerequisite to the parts classification and must be
established before proceeding to the parts classification.
Referring to following instructions supplier shall identify and provide the required information for all
components using Form 1 of this attachment.
No.

Section Description

Instructions
Give the number of evaluation sheet as follows:

1 Evaluation Sheet No.

Description Example: 0-152-M255 – ES - 001
(Spec. No.)

2 Station/Unit(s)

(Sheet Serial No. 001 thru 999)

Identify the station/unit(s) of installed item.
Identify the system/component identifications, including the following:
System and Component Description

System/Component
Identification

Component Tag No.
Technical specification No. of the parent component
Supplier/Manufacturer of the parent component
Identify design functions of component item referring to the purchase

Component Design
Function Evaluation

specification section 4 and above item 3 and describe each function, one
function per line.
Identify the component classes as follows:

Component
Classification

1) Radwaste Safety Category: Radwaste Safety Category I, II or III
2) Quality Class: AQ(Augmented Quality) or NQ(Non-Quality)
3) Seismic Category: Seismic category I, II or III
Identify the evaluation reports including environmental and seismic

6 References

qualification reports or other related documents of parent item.

4X-A1-5

Appendix 4X
Rev. 0

2. Instructions for Preparing Part Classification Work Sheet
If the parent component is Augment-quality(AQ) the associated function of parts shall be evaluated to determine
whether any special regulatory or site specific requirements apply which would require classification of the part
as AQ. Referring to following instructions supplier shall identify the required information and evaluate the
results for the questions using Form 2 of this attachment.
Section
Description

Instructions 1

Part
Identification

Identify the part identifications as follows:
1) Give the number of Part Classification Work Sheet as follows:
Description Example: 0-611–M–AU01 - 001
(Tag No.)
(Part Serial No. 001 thru 999)
2) Part Description: Identify the name or description of the part.
3) Part/Model Number: Identify the identification number for the part. This
might be a part number, model number, style number, type number or other
unique identifier used by the manufacturer to uniquely identify the product.
4) Specification: Provide a brief description of part specification.
5) Manufacturer: Identify the manufacturer providing the item.
6) Manufacturer’s Identification No.: Number assigned to track item in the
manufacturer inventory.

2 Part Function

Provide a description of the part design functions. Generally this will be the role or
function as provided on the manufacturer’s published description.

No. 3

Part Safety
Assessment

Answer the following questions no. 1) and 2) to determine the part safety
classification in consideration of part function.
1) Is the part required for design function(s) of the component?
: Confirm the design functions of the parent component and determine whether
the part is required for that function of component. Refer to the item no.4 of
Form 1.
2) Is the part required for maintaining structural integrity of the component?
: Answer only when the Seismic category of parent component is II.

4 References

Identify the reference documents including the title, revision number and other
information.

Part Safety
Classification

Select the part safety classification based on the item no. 3 above. If one of the
answer of above questions is ‘yes’, the part should be classified AQ.

Part
Classification
Evaluation

Describe the basis or references about part classification.

Final Part
Classification

Select the final part classification based on the preceding evaluation.
Generally, part is determined to be AQ when the item has been classified Augmented
Quality (AQ).

4X-A1-6 (Final)

Appendix 4X
Rev. 0

ATTACHMENT 2
PART LIST FORM

4X-A2-1

Appendix 4X
Rev. 0

Attachment 2
Part List
1. PO No.

2. PO Item No. 3. Equipment No.

4. Equipment
Description

5. Equipment Model
No.

6. Component No.

7. Component
Manufacturer

8. Component
Model No.

9. Part No. 10. Part Description 11. Material 12. Quantity 13. Unit 14. Shelf Life

15. Replacement
Cycle

16. Part Manufacturer

17. Supplier Drawing
No.

18. Revision No.

19. Instruction
Manual No.

20. Volume No.

21. Safety
Classification

22. Quality Class. 23. SQ Report No. 24. Revision No. 25. Page No. 26. QVD No. 27. Page No. 4X-A2-2

Appendix 4X
Rev. 0
Instruction for Completing Part List
No.
1

Entry Information
PO No.(Purchase Order Number): Number of Purchase Specification

Example) E208, E277, M250, M259…

PO Item No.(Purchase Order Item Number): Number specified in the Section 3. Attachment 3-1 (Pricing and
Schedule Data)

Example) 0-E208-1.02.A, 0-M250-1.01, 0-E277-B.0001…

Equipment No. : Tag number, Name or Mark number specified in the Section 3. Attachment 3-1 (Pricing and
Schedule Data) PO Item No.
① Identified in Name, not Tag No., Equipment No. should be described as the Name

Example) Equipment Hatch Body

② In case both Tag and Name are not identified, Mark No. should be described as the Name

Example) 2550-A-CKB-D

Equipment Description:
① If the Equipment is Tag No.,

Example) PO No. E208 – Description of Equipment No. 1.02.A

Section 3. Attachment 3-1
1.02 480V Motor Control Centers
A. 0-826-E-MC07
B. 0-826-E-MC08
C. 0-826-E-MC09

Equipment Description in 1.02.A
“480V Motor Control Centers”

② If the Equipment No. is Name,

Example) PO No. M259 – Description of Equipment No. 1.15.A

Section 3. Attachment 3-1
1.15 Detectors
A. Smoke Detector, Analogue Type
B. Heat Detector, Explosion Proof Type

Equipment Description in 1.15.A
“Smoke Detector, Analogue Type for
Detectors”

③ In case of instruments and valve items, Description specified in Data Sheet should be used.
④ In case of Bulk materials (e.g., Bulk valves, pipes), Description specified in Suppliers’ Drawing as a Title
should be used.

Example) In case of 2550-A-CKB-D, Class 2500 Y-Piston Check Valve

Equipment Model No. : Equipment Model No. assigned be manufacturer

Example) MD 308, MDG 286D, APT3700N

Component No. : If the Equipment can be divided in several assemblies, supplier can assign the component
number by adding 2 digits(alphabet + numeric number)

Example) 0-826-E-MC07-A1, 0-826-E-MC07-A2

Component Manufacturer : Name of Component Manufacturer

Example) HHI(Hyundai Heavy Industries CO. LTD)

Component Model No. : Component Model No.

Example) MD 308(S), HIMF-V11F

Part No. : Part Identification number such as Model No., of Catalog No., of Serial No.

Example) SD11046-01, KVAH7250M

Part Description : Part name and specification

Example) Vacuum Circuit Breaker – 4.16kV, 2000A, 60Hz, 50kA

Material : Material code name

11
12
13

Example) ASTM A217 Gr.WC9, JIS G4051, S45C

Quantity : Quantity of part
Unit : Unit of part
4X-A2-3

Appendix 4X
Rev. 0
No.
14
15
16
17

Entry Information
Shelf Life: Maximum time to preserve function of part

Example) X months or X years

Replacement Cycle: Recommended replacement period

Example) X months or X years

Part Manufacturer: Name of part manufacturer

Example) ABB, MERSEN, YONGSUNG

Suppler Drawing No. : Drawings submitted to KORAD according to PNS(Project numbering system)

Example) ① 1 page of drawing: [E208-DG-B02-01]

② more than 1 pages: describe just one page to identity applicable item
[E208-DG-B02-01(X/N)]

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

Revision No. : Revision number of supplier’s drawing document

Example) 0, 1, 2, 3…

Instruction Manual No. : Instruction manual number
Volume No. : Number of instruction manual(in case of several books, specify the number as X/N)
Safety Classification : Safety classification of part

Example) Augmented Quality(AQ), or Non-Quality(NQ)

Quality Class: Quality class of part

Example) Augmented Quality(AQ) or Non-Quality(NQ)

SQ(Seismic Qualification) Report No. : SQ Report No.

Example) E208-ER-A01-01

Revision No. : Revision number of SQ Report

Example) 0, 1, 2, 3…

Page No. : SQ Report Page number that identifies applicable part

Example) 3 of 100(Page of Total Page)

QVD(Quality Verification Document) No. : QVD No.

Example) E208-VR-A01-01

Page No. : QVD Page number that identifies applicable part

Example) 3 of 100(Page of Total Page)

Note: 1) Every data shall be entered in every cell to prevent an error during the uploading and downloading to the
computational program even for the identical information (do not merge the cell).
2) Use left-aligned test for the input data to easily identify the information and prevent an error.
3) Place “N/A” if the entry is not applicable during the data entry.

4X-A2-4 (Final)

===== 2-2-2. 구매규격서 요약_F.hwp =====

구매규격서 요약

1. 품 명: 480V 저압차단기반 및 전동기제어반

(480V Load Centers & Motor Control Centers)

2. 구매규격서 번호: 0-824-E208 (Rev.1, 추록6)

3. 설계범주 ㅇ 폐기물안전범주: Ⅱ ㅇ 품질등급: AQ ㅇ 내진범주: Ⅲ 4. 공급품목

480V Load Centers(50kA, 3000A, 480V 6면) : 1대

480V Motor Control Centers : 3대

5. 주요 기술규격 ㅇ KEPIC EEC~F ㅇ ANSI C57.12.10 ㅇ IEEE 383 ㅇ NEMA AB1 등 6. 납기일: 2028. 01. 5. 7. 인도조건: 방폐장현장 하차도 8. 하자보증기간: 인수통보일로부터 3년

===== 2-3. 계약 일반조건_F.hwpx =====

Ⅱ. 계 약 조 건

제1장 계약 일반조건
물품구매계약일반조건

2026.<hp:fwSpace/>5.<hp:fwSpace/>12.<hp:fwSpace/>일부개정

제1조(총칙) 발주자와 계약상대자는 물품구매표준계약서(이하 “계약서”라 한다)에 적힌 물품의 구매(“제조”를 포함한다. 이하 같다) 계약에 관하여 제3조에 따른 계약문서에서 정하는 바에 따라 신의와 성실의 원칙에 바탕을 두고 이를 이행한다.
제2조(정의) 이 조건에서 사용하는 용어의 뜻은 다음과 같다.

1. “발주자”란 한국원자력환경공단(이하 “공단”이라 한다) 이사장 또는 그로부터 위임을 받은 자를 말한다.

2. “계약상대자”란 발주자와 물품구매계약을 체결한 자연인 또는 법인을 말한다.

3. “규격서(시방서)”란 물품에 대한 기술적인 요구사항과 요구 필요조건의 일치성 여부를 판단하기 위한 절차와 방법을 포함하여 서술한 문서로, 제품의 성능, 재료형상, 치수, 용적, 색채, 제조, 포장 및 검사방법 등을 포함한다.

4. “산출내역서”란 입찰금액 또는 계약금액을 구성하는 물량, 규격, 단위, 단가 등을 적은 명세서를 말한다.

5. 이 조건에서 정한 용어를 제외하고는 공단 계약규정에서 정하는 바에 따른다.

6. <삭제>

7. <삭제>
제3조(계약문서) ① 계약문서는 계약서, 규격서, 유의서, 물품구매계약특수조건, 물품구매계약특수조건 및 산출내역서 등으로 구성되며 상호보완의 효력을 갖는다. 다만, 이 경우 산출내역서는 계약금액의 조정과 기성부분에 대한 대가의 지급할 때 적용할 기준으로서 계약문서의 효력을 가진다.
② 발주자는 ｢국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법령｣, 물품구매 및 제조와 관련된 법령 및 이 조건에 정한 계약일반사항 외에 해당 계약의 적정한 이행을 위하여 필요한 경우 물품구매계약특수조건을 정하여 계약을 체결할 수 있다.
③ 제2항에 따라 정한 물품구매계약특수조건에 ｢국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법령｣, 물품구매(제조)와 관련된 법령 및 이 조건에 반하여 계약상대자의 계약상 이익을 제한하는 내용이 있는 경우 특수조건의 동 내용은 효력이 인정되지 않는다.
④ 이 조건이 정하는 바에 의하여 계약당사자간에 행한 통지문서등은 계약문서로서의 효력을 가진다.
제4조(사용언어) ① 계약을 이행할 때 사용하는 언어는 한국어를 원칙으로 한다.
② 발주자는 계약체결할 때 제1항에도 불구하고 필요하다고 인정하는 경우에는 계약이행과 관련하여 계약상대자가 외국어를 사용하거나 외국어와 한국어를 병행하여 사용할 수 있도록 필요한 조치를 할 수 있다.
③ 제2항에 따라 외국어와 한국어를 병행하여 사용한 경우 외국어로 기재된 사항이 한국어와 상이할 때에는 한국어로 기재한 사항이 우선한다.
제5조(통지 등) ① 말로 한 통지ㆍ신청ㆍ청구ㆍ요구ㆍ회신ㆍ승인 또는 지시 등(이하 “통지 등”이라 한다)은 문서로 보완되어야 효력이 있다.
② 통지 등의 장소는 계약서에 적힌 주소로 하며, 주소를 변경하는 경우에는 이를 즉시 계약당사자에게 통지하여야 한다.
③ 통지 등의 효력은 계약문서에서 따로 정하는 경우를 제외하고는 계약당사자에게 도달한 날부터 발생한다. 이 경우 도달일이 공휴일인 경우에는 그 다음 날부터 효력이 발생한다.
④ 계약상대자는 계약 이행 중 관계 법령 및 이 조건 등에 정한 바에 따라 서면으로 정당한 요구를 받은 경우에는 이를 성실히 검토하여 회신하여야 한다.
제6조(채권양도) ① 계약상대자는 이 계약에 따라 발생한 채권(대금청구권)을 제3자(공동수급체 구성원 포함)에게 양도할 수 있다.
② 발주자는 제1항에 따른 채권양도와 관련하여 적정한 계약이행목적 등 필요한 경우에는 채권양도를 제한하는 특약을 정하여 운용할 수 있다.
제7조(계약보증금) ① 계약을 체결하려는 자는 계약체결일까지 계약규정 제37조에 따른 현금 또는 보증서 등으로 계약보증금을 납부해야 한다. 이 경우 보증기간은 계약상 의무이행 개시일부터 계약기간 종료일 이후로서 계약상 의무이행이 완료되는 시점까지를 포함해야 한다.
② 계약을 체결하려는 자가 계약보증금의 전부 또는 일부의 납부를 면제받은 경우에는 제8조제1항 및 제2항에 따라 공단 귀속 사유가 발생할 때 계약보증금에 해당하는 금액을 현금으로 납입할 것을 보장하기 위하여 그 지급을 확약하는 내용의 문서(이하 “계약보증금 지급각서”라 한다)를 제출해야 한다.
③ 발주자는 단가계약에 따르는 경우로서 수회에 걸쳐 분할하여 계약을 이행하게 할 때에는 매회별 이행예정량 중 최대량에 계약단가를 곱한 금액의 100분의 10 이상을 계약보증금으로 납부하게 할 수 있다.
④ 발주자는 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률 시행령」(이하 “시행령”이라 한다) 제37조제2항제2호에 따른 유가증권이나 현금으로 납부된 계약보증금을 계약상대자가 특별한 사유로 시행령 제37조제2항제1호부터 제5호까지에 따른 보증서 등으로 대체납부할 것을 요청한 경우에는 같은 가치 이상으로 대체납부하게 할 수 있다.
⑤ 계약상대자는 이 조건에 따라 계약금액이 증액된 경우에는 이에 상응하는 금액의 계약보증금을 제1항에 따라 추가로 납부해야 하며, 발주자는 계약금액이 감액된 경우에는 이에 상응하는 금액의 계약보증금을 반환해야 한다.
제8조(계약보증금의 처리) ① 계약상대자가 정당한 이유 없이 계약상의 의무를 이행하지 않은 경우에는 계약보증금을 공단에 귀속한다.
② 시행령 제69조에 따른 장기물품제조계약에서 계약상대자가 2차 이후의 물품제조계약을 체결하지 않은 경우에 제1항을 준용한다.
③ 제7조제2항에 따라 계약보증금 지급각서를 제출한 경우로서 계약보증금의 공단 귀속사유가 발생하여 발주자의 납입요청이 있을 때에는 계약상대자는 해당 계약보증금을 지체 없이 현금으로 납부하여야 한다.
④ 제1항 및 제2항에 따른 계약보증금을 공단에 귀속할 때 그 계약보증금은 기성 또는 기납부분에 대한 미지급액과 상계 처리할 수 없다. 다만, 계약보증금의 전부 또는 일부를 면제받은 자의 경우에는 공단에 귀속되는 계약보증금과 기납부분에 대한 미지급액을 상계 처리할 수 있다.
⑤ 계약상대자가 납부한 계약보증금은 계약이 이행된 후 계약상대자의 청구에 따라 반환한다.
제9조(수량변경) 발주자는 필요에 따라 계약된 물품의 수량을 100분의 10 범위에서 변경할 수 있다. 다만, 발주자가 해당 물품의 수급상황 등을 고려하여 부득이하다고 판단하는 경우에는 계약상대자의 동의를 받아 100분의 10 범위를 초과하여 계약수량을 변경할 수 있다.
제10조(계약이행상의 감독) ① 발주자는 계약의 적정한 이행을 확보하기 위하여 필요하다고 인정하는 경우에는 물품의 제조를 위하여 사용하는 재료 및 그 밖의 제조공정을 감독할 수 있으며, 계약상대자에게 필요한 조치를 요구할 수 있다.
② 계약상대자는 발주자의 감독업무 수행에 협력해야 하며, 발주자는 감독업무를 수행할 때 계약상대자의 업무를 부당하게 방해해서는 안 된다.
제10조의2(하도급계약의 감독) 계약상대자는 물품 납품을 위한 하도급계약을 체결하는 경우에는 반드시 발주자의 승인을 받아야 하며, 이 경우에는 ｢하도급거래 공정화에 관한 법률｣ 제3조의2에 따른 공정거래위원회 표준하도급계약서를 사용하여 하도급계약을 체결해야 한다. 다만, 사업의 특성상 하도급 표준계약서 사용이 어려운 경우에는 발주자와 협의하여 정한다.
제11조(물가변동으로 인한 계약금액의 조정) ① 물가변동으로 인한 계약금액의 조정은 시행령 제64조 및 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률 시행규칙」(이하 “시행규칙”이라 한다) 제74조에 정한 바에 따른다.
② 동일한 계약에 대하여 계약금액의 조정할 때에는 품목조정률 및 지수조정률을 동시에 적용해서는 안 되며, 계약을 체결할 때 계약상대자가 지수조정률 방법을 원하는 경우가 아니면 품목조정률 방법으로 계약금액을 조정하도록 계약서에 명시해야 한다. 이 경우 계약 이행 중 계약서에 명시된 계약금액 조정방법을 임의로 변경해서는 안 된다.
③ 제1항에 따라 계약금액을 증액하는 경우에는 계약상대자가 청구해야 하고, 계약상대자는 제22조에 따른 완납대가(장기계속계약의 경우에는 각 차수별 완납대가) 수령 전까지 조정 신청을 해야 조정금액을 지급받을 수 있으며, 조정된 계약금액은 직전의 물가변동으로 인한 계약금액 조정기준일부터 90일 이내에 이를 다시 조정할 수 없다. 다만, 천재지변 또는 원자재의 가격 급등으로 해당 기간 내에 계약금액을 조정하지 않고는 계약 이행이 곤란하다고 인정되는 경우에는 계약을 체결한 날 또는 직전 조정기준일로부터 90일 이내에도 계약금액을 조정할 수 있다.
④ 계약상대자는 제3항에 따라 계약금액의 증액을 청구하는 경우에는 계약금액 조정내역서를 첨부해야 한다.
⑤ 발주자는 제1항부터 제4항까지에 따라 계약금액을 증액하는 경우에는 계약상대자의 청구를 받은 날부터 20일 이내에 계약금액을 조정해야 한다. 이 경우 예산 배정의 지연 등 불가피한 사유가 있는 경우에는 계약상대자와 협의하여 그 조정기한을 연장할 수 있으며, 계약금액을 증액할 수 있는 예산이 없는 경우에는 제조량 등을 조정하여 그 대가를 지급할 수 있다.
⑥ 발주자는 제4항 및 제5항에 따른 계약상대자의 계약금액 조정 청구 내용이 일부 미비하거나 분명하지 않은 경우에는 지체 없이 필요한 보완 요구를 해야 하며, 이 경우 계약상대자가 보완 요구를 통보받은 날부터 발주자가 그 보완을 완료한 사실을 통지한 날까지의 기간은 제5항에 따른 기간에 산입하지 않는다. 다만, 발주자는 계약상대자의 계약금액 조정 청구 내용이 계약금액 조정 요건을 충족하지 않았거나 관련 증빙서류가 첨부되지 않은 경우에는 그 사유를 명시하여 계약상대자에게 해당 청구서를 반송해야 하며, 이 경우 계약상대자는 그 반송 사유를 충족하여 계약금액 조정을 다시 청구해야 한다.
제11조의2(기타 계약내용의 변경으로 인한 계약금액의 조정) ① 발주자는 물품구매계약에서 제11조에 따른 경우 이외에 다음 각 호의 어느 하나의 사유로 인하여 계약금액을 조정할 필요가 있는 경우에는 그 변경된 내용에 따라 실비를 초과하지 않는 범위에서 이를 조정한다.

1. 「최저임금법」에 따른 최저임금을 시간당 노무비 단가로 정한 경우에 최저임금이 변경된 경우

2. 그 밖의 계약내용이 변경된 경우
② 제1항의 경우에는 시행령 제65조제6항을 준용한다.
③ 발주자는 제1항에 따라 계약금액을 조정하는 경우에는 계약상대자의 계약금액 조정 청구를 받은 날부터 30일 이내에 계약금액을 조정해야 한다. 이 경우 예산 배정의 지연 등 불가피한 경우에는 계약상대자와 협의하여 그 조정기한을 연장할 수 있으며, 계약금액을 조정할 수 있는 예산이 없는 경우에는 업무량 등을 조정하여 그 대가를 지급할 수 있다.
④ 발주자는 제3항에 따른 계약상대자의 계약금액 조정 청구 내용이 부당함을 발견한 경우에는 지체 없이 보완 요구 등의 필요한 조치를 해야 한다. 이 경우 계약상대자가 보완 요구 등의 조치를 통보받은 날부터 발주자가 그 보완을 완료한 사실을 통지받은 날까지의 기간은 제3항의 기간에 산입하지 않는다.
⑤ 제3항에 따른 계약상대자의 계약금액 조정 청구는 제22조에 따른 완료대가(장기계속계약의 경우 각 차수별 완료대가) 수령 전까지 해야 한다.
제11조의3(계약금액 조정 전의 기성대가 지급) ① 발주자는 물가변동, 설계변경 및 기타 계약내용의 변경으로 인하여 계약금액이 당초 계약금액보다 증감될 것이 예상되는 경우로서 기성대가를 지급하려는 경우에는 「국고금관리법 시행규칙」제72조에 따라 당초 산출내역서를 기준으로 산출한 기성대가를 개산급으로 지급할 수 있다. 다만, 감액이 예상되는 경우에는 예상되는 감액금액을 제외하고 지급해야 한다.
② 계약상대자는 제1항에 따라 기성대가를 개산급으로 지급받으려는 경우에는 기성대가 신청 시 개산급 신청사유를 서면으로 작성하여 첨부해야 한다.
제12조(납품) ① 계약상대자는 계약서에 정한 납품기일까지 해당 물품(검사에 필요한 서류, 녹색제품 인증서 등을 포함한다)을 ｢산업표준화법｣ 제24조에 따른 한국산업표준(특별한 사유가 없는 한 ｢물류정책기본법｣ 제24조에 따른 물류표준을 포함한다)을 준수하여 발주자가 지정한 장소에 납품해야 한다.
② 제1항에 따라 납품된 물품을 검사ㆍ수령하기까지 발주자의 책임 없는 사유로 인하여 발생한 물품의 망실ㆍ파손 등은 계약상대자의 부담으로 한다.
③ 발주자가 필요에 따라 분할납품을 요구하거나 계약상 분할납품이 허용된 경우가 아니면 분할납품을 할 수 없다.
제13조(규격) ① 모든 물품의 규격은 계약상 명시된 규격명세, 규격번호 및 발주자가 제시한 견품의 규격을 충족해야 하며, 구매목적에 맞는 신품이어야 한다. 다만, 해당 물품이 「기후위기 대응을 위한 탄소중립ㆍ녹색성장 기본법」 제66조에 따른 녹색제품 구매대상 품목일 경우 녹색제품을 우선적으로 구매해야 한다.
② 계약상 규격이 명시되어 있지 않은 경우에는 상관습과 기술적 타당성 및 구매규격 등에 부합하는 물품이어야 한다.
③ 예비부속품으로서 기계ㆍ기구를 완성하는 데 필요한 조립비는 물품가격에 포함되어 있는 것으로 본다. 다만, 계약에 부속품으로 기계ㆍ기구를 완성하는 데 필요한 조립비가 별도로 표시되어 있는 경우에는 그렇지 않다.
제14조(포장 및 품목표시) ① 포장은 계약조건과 계약규격서에 규정된 포장조건에 따라야 하며 내용물의 보전에 충분해야 한다.
② 기계의 모체와 분리하여 부속품 또는 예비부속품을 포장할 때에는 관련 참조번호 및 기호 등을 명기한 꼬리표를 붙여야 한다.
③ 계약상대자는 대한민국 외에서 제조된 계약물품을 납품하려는 경우에는 관세청장이 고시한 「원산지표시제도 운영에 관한 고시」 및 산업통상부장관이 고시한 「대외무역관리규정」에 따라 원산지를 해당 물품에 표시해야 한다.
제15조(포장명에 표기할 사항) 물품의 포장면에는 다음 각 호의 사항을 명기해야 한다.

1. 제작자 상호 및 계약상대자 상호 2. 계약번호 3. 품명 및 물품저장번호 4. 포장 내용물의 일련번호 및 수량 5. 순무게, 총무게 및 부피 6. 취급 시 주의사항

7. 그 밖의 계약상 요구되는 표기
제16조(표기) ① 납품한 물품에는 계약상 규격서에 규정된 포장 외에 제작자명 또는 상표와 발주자가 정한 관수품 표시를 해야 한다.
② 표지는 물품의 형태 또는 성질에 따라 인쇄, 금속판 첩찰, 꼬리표 또는 그 밖의 방법으로 표시해야 한다.
③ 물품에 표기해야 할 표지는 그 물품의 지구성과 같아야 하며 포장의 표지는 목적된 장소에 도착할 때까지 선명해야 한다.
제17조(포장명세서) ① 계약상대자는 납품할 때 포장내용물에 관하여 상세히 기재한 포장명세서를 제출해야 한다.
② 포장명세서에는 포장번호, 포장수, 포장품명, 수량, 순무게, 부피 등을 기명해야 한다.
③ 포장에는 포장명세서 1통을 첨부해야 한다. 다만, 드럼통 등 명세서를 첨부하기 어려운 경우에는 용기에 기명해야 한다.
제18조(사용 및 취급주의서) 계약상대자는 사용 및 취급상 주의가 필요하다고 생각되는 경우에는 해당 물품의 사용, 보관, 수리 등의 요령과 주의사항을 명기한 주의서를 제출해야 한다.
제19조(검사) ① 계약상대자는 계약이행을 완료한 경우에는 그 사실을 서면으로 발주자에게 통지하고 필요한 검사를 받아야 한다. 기납부분에 대하여 완납 전에 대가의 전부 또는 일부를 지급하려는 경우에도 또한 같다.
② 「산업표준화법」제15조에 따라 인증을 받은 제품, 같은 법 제31조의4제2항에 따라 수상자로 선정된 기업 등이 제조한 물품, 「조달사업에 관한 법률」제3조의4에 따라 조달청장이 고시한 품질관리능력 평가기준에 적합한 자가 제조한 물품에 대하여는 제1항에도 불구하고 검사를 면제해야 한다. 다만, 해당 물품이 국민의 생명 보호, 안전, 보건위생 등을 위하여 검사가 필요하다고 인정되거나, 불량 자재의 사용, 다수의 하자 발생, 관계 기관의 결함보상명령 등으로 품질의 확인이 필요한 것으로 인정되어 계약의 내용에 검사를 실시한다는 사항이 포함되도록 한 경우에는 그렇지 않다.
③ 발주자는 제1항의 통지를 받은 경우에는 검사 관련 규정 및 다음 각호의 요령에 따라 계약서 기타 관계서류에 의하여 그 날로부터 14일 이내에 계약상대자의 입회하에 그 이행을 확인하기 위한 검사를 하여야 한다. 다만, 천재지변 등 불가항력인 사유로 인하여 검사를 완료하지 못한 경우에는 당해 사유가 존속되는 기간과 당해 사유가 소멸된 날로부터 3일까지는 이를 연장할 수 있다.

1. 검사는 발주자가 품질, 수량, 포장, 표기상태, 포장명세서, 품질식별기호 등에 관하여 행한다.

2. 발주자는 물품을 신규로 제조할 필요가 있거나 물품의 성질상 제조과정이 중요한 경우에는 제조과정에서 검사를 할 수 있다.

3. 계약상대자는 검사를 받기 위하여 발주자가 지정하는 장소에 물품을 반입하였을 때에는 발주자에게 즉시 반입통지를 하여야 한다.

4. 검사에 필요한 일체의 비용과 검사를 하기 위한 변형, 소모, 파손 또는 변질로 생기는 손상은 계약상대자의 부담으로 한다.
④ 발주자는 제3항의 검사에서 계약상대자의 계약이행 내용의 전부 또는 일부가 계약에 위반되거나 부당함을 발견한 경우에는 필요한 시정조치를 할 수 있다. 이 경우에는 계약상대자로부터 그 시정을 완료한 사실을 통지받은 날부터 제3항의 기간을 계산한다.
⑤ 제3항에 따른 검사에 합격하지 못하여 계약이행기간이 연장되는 경우에는 발주자는 제24조에 따른 지체상금을 부과한다.
⑥ 계약상대자는 제3항에 따른 검사에 입회하고 협력해야 하며, 계약상대자가 입회를 거부하거나 검사에 협력하지 않음으로써 발생하는 지체에 대해서는 제4항 및 제5항을 준용한다.
⑦ 계약상대자는 제3항 및 제4항에 따른 검사에 이의가 있는 경우에는 재검사를 요청할 수 있다. 이 경우 발주자는 지체 없이 검사를 해야 한다.
⑧ 발주자는 검사를 완료한 경우에는 그 결과를 서면으로 계약상대자에게 통지해야 한다.
⑨ 제3항에도 불구하고 「재난 및 안전관리 기본법」제3조제1호의 재난이나 경기침체, 대량실업 등으로 인한 국가의 경제위기를 극복하기 위해 재정경제부장관이 기간을 정하여 고시한 경우에는 제3항의 14일을 7일로 본다.
제20조(특허권 등의 사용) 계약상대자는 해당 계약을 이행할 때 제3자의 권리 대상인 특허권 등을 사용하는 경우에는 그 사용에 관한 모든 책임을 져야 한다. 다만, 계약문서에 지정되지 않은 특허권 등의 사용을 발주자가 요구한 경우에는 발주자는 소요된 비용을 계약상대자에게 지급해야 한다.
제21조(보증) ① 계약상대자는 검수와는 별도로 납품 후 1년간 납품한 물품의 규격과 품질이 계약내용과 동일함을 보증해야 한다.
② 발주자는 납품 후 1년 이내에 납품한 물품의 규격과 품질이 계약내용과 상이함을 발견한 경우에는 그 사실을 계약상대자에게 통지하고 해당 물품의 대체납품 또는 해당 물품대금을 반환하도록 청구할 수 있다.
③ 계약상대자는 제2항의 통지를 받으면 조속히 해당 물품을 계약조건에 따라 대체납품해야 한다. 이 경우에 모든 대체물품 가격과 이에 따르는 경비는 계약상대자의 부담으로 한다.
④ 제3항의 대체물품에 대해서는 제1항을 적용한다.
⑤ 계약상대자가 발주자가 요구한 물품의 대체를 거부하거나, 발주자가 통지를 한 후 정해진 기일 내에 물품을 대체납품하지 못하는 경우에는 계약상대자는 해당 물품가격을 발주자에게 반납해야 한다.
제22조(대가의 지급) ① 계약상대자는 계약이행을 완료한 후 제19조에 따른 검사에 합격한 경우에는 대가지급청구서(하수급인에 대한 대금지급 계획을 첨부해야 한다)를 제출하는 등 정해진 절차에 따라 대가지급을 청구할 수 있다.
② 발주자는 제1항의 청구를 받은 경우에는 그 청구를 받은 날부터 5일(공휴일 및 토요일은 제외한다. 이하 이 조에서 같다) 이내에 그 대가를 지급(「전자조달의 이용 및 촉진에 관한 법률」 제9조의2제1항에 따른 시스템을 통한 지급 포함. 이하 이 조에서 같다)해야 하며, 해당 대가지급기한에도 불구하고 자금사정 등 불가피한 사유가 없으면 최대한 신속히 대가를 지급해야 한다. 다만, 계약상대자와의 합의에 따라 5일을 초과하지 않는 범위에서 대가의 지급기간을 연장하는 특약을 정할 수 있다.
③ 천재지변 등 불가항력의 사유로 대가를 지급할 수 없게 된 경우에는 발주자는 해당 사유가 존속되는 기간과 해당 사유가 소멸된 날부터 3일까지는 대가의 지급을 연장할 수 있다.
④ 발주자는 기성부분 또는 기납부분에 대한 대가를 지급하는 경우에 제2항에도 불구하고 계약수량, 이행의 전망, 이행기간 등을 고려하여 최소한 매 30일마다 공평하게 지급해야 하며 제19조제3항에 따른 검사를 한 후 계약상대자의 청구를 받은 날부터 5일 이내에 지급해야 한다.
⑤ 발주자는 제2항 및 제4항에 따른 대가 지급 시 제1항의 대금지급 계획상 하수급인에게 대가지급 사실을 통보하고 대금 수령내역(수령자, 수령액, 수령일 등) 및 증빙서류를 제출(「전자서명법」제2조에 따른 전자문서를 통한 제출을 포함한다. 이하 제22조의2제1항에 따른 제출 및 통보에서 같다)하게 해야 한다.
⑥ 발주자는 제1항 또는 제4항의 청구를 받은 후 그 청구내용의 전부 또는 일부가 부당함을 발견한 경우에는 그 사유를 명시하여 계약상대자에게 해당 청구서를 반송할 수 있다. 이 경우에는 반송한 날부터 재청구를 받은 날까지의 기간은 제2항 또는 제4항의 지급기간에 산입하지 않는다.
⑦ 제4항에 따라 기성부분에 대한 대가를 지급하는 경우에는 제3조제1항 단서에 따른 산출내역서의 단가로 계산한다.
⑧ 제2항에도 불구하고 「재난 및 안전관리 기본법」제3조제1호의 재난이나 경기침체, 대량실업 등으로 인한 국가의 경제위기를 극복하기 위해 재정경제부장관이 기간을 정하여 고시한 경우에는 제2항의 5일을 3일로 본다.
제22조의2(하도급대금 지급 확인) ① 계약상대자는 제22조에 따른 대가를 지급받은 경우 15일 이내에 하도급대금을 하수급인에게 현금으로 지급(「전자조달의 이용 및 촉진에 관한 법률」 제9조의2제1항에 따른 시스템을 통한 지급 포함. 이하 이 조에서 같다)해야 하며, 하도급대금의 지급 내역(수령자, 지급액, 지급일 등)을 5일(공휴일 및 토요일은 제외한다) 이내에 발주자에게 통보해야 한다.
② 발주자는 제1항에 따른 대금 지급 내역을 제22조제5항에 따라 하수급인으로부터 제출받은 대금 수령내역과 비교ㆍ확인해야 한다.
③ 「하도급거래 공정화에 관한 법률」 제2조에 따라 같은 법의 적용을 받지 않는 하도급계약에 대해서는 제1항 및 제2항을 적용하지 않는다.(제22조제5항의 경우에도 같다)
제22조의3(국민건강보험료 등의 사후정산) 발주자는 「정부 입찰ㆍ계약 집행기준」 제93조에 따라 국민건강보험료 등을 사후정산하기로 한 계약에 대해서는 제22조에 따른 대가 지급 시 계약예규 「정부 입찰ㆍ계약 집행기준」 제94조에 따라 정산해야 한다.
제23조(대가지급지연에 대한 이자) ① 발주자는 대가지급청구를 받은 경우에 제22조에 따른 대가지급기한(국고채무부담행위에 의한 계약의 경우에는 다음 회계연도 개시 후 ｢국가재정법｣에 따라 해당 예산이 배정된 날부터 20일)까지 대가를 지급하지 못하는 경우에는 지급기한의 다음 날부터 지급하는 날까지의 일수(이하 “대가지급지연일수”라 한다)에 해당 미지급액에 지연 발생 시점의 금융기관 대출평균금리(한국은행 통계월보상 금융기관 대출평균금리를 말한다)를 곱하여 산출한 금액을 이자로 지급해야 한다.
② 천재지변 등 불가항력의 사유로 검사 또는 대가지급이 지연된 경우에는 제19조제3항 단서 및 제22조제3항에 따른 지연기간은 제1항의 대가지급지연일수에 산입하지 않는다.
제24조(지체상금) ① 계약상대자는 계약서에서 정한 납품기한 내에 물품을 납품하지 않은 경우에는 매 지체일수마다 계약서에서 정한 지체상금률을 계약금액(장기계속계약의 경우에는 연차별 계약금액)에 곱하여 산출한 금액(이하 “지체상금”이라 한다)을 현금으로 납부해야 한다. 다만, 납부할 금액이 계약금액(제2항에 따라 기성부분 또는 기납부분에 대하여 검사를 거쳐 인수한 경우에는 그 부분에 상당하는 금액을 계약금액에서 공제한 금액을 말한다)의 100분의 30을 초과하는 경우에는 100분의 30으로 한다.
② 발주자는 제1항의 경우에 기납부분에 대한 검사를 거쳐 해당 부분을 인수(인수하지 않고 관리ㆍ사용하고 있는 경우를 포함한다. 이하 이 조에서 같다)한 경우에는 그 부분에 상당하는 금액을 계약금액에서 공제한다. 기납부분의 인수는 성질상 분할할 수 있는 물품에 대한 완성부분으로서 인수하는 경우로 한정한다.
③ 발주자는 다음 각 호의 어느 하나에 해당되어 납품이 지체되었다고 인정하는 경우에는 그 해당일수를 제1항의 지체일수에 산입하지 않는다.

1. 천재지변 등 불가항력의 사유에 따른 경우

2. 계약상대자가 대체 사용할 수 없는 중요 관급재료의 공급이 지연되어 제조 공정의 진행이 불가능했던 경우

3. 계약상대자의 책임 없이 납품이 지연된 경우로서 다음 각 목의 어느 하나에 해당하는 경우

가. 발주자의 물품 제작을 위한 설계도서 승인이 계획된 일정보다 지연된 경우(관련 서류의 누락 등 계약상대자의 잘못을 보완하는 기간은 제외한다)

나. 계약상대자가 시험기관 및 검사기관의 시험ㆍ검사를 위해 필요한 준비를 완료하였으나 시험기관 및 검사기관의 책임으로 시험ㆍ검사가 지연된 경우

다. 설계도서 승인 후 발주자의 요구에 따른 설계변경으로 제작기간이 지연된 경우

라. 발주자의 책임으로 제조의 착수가 지연되었거나 중단되었을 경우

4. 그 밖의 계약상대자의 책임에 속하지 않은 사유로 인하여 지체된 경우
④ 발주자는 제1항에 따른 지체일수를 다음 각 호에 따라 산정해야 한다.

1. 납품기한 내에 제12조제1항에 따라 물품(검사에 필요한 서류를 포함한다. 이하 이 항에서 같다)을 납품한 경우에는 제19조에 따른 검사에 소요된 기간은 지체일수에 산입하지 않는다. 다만, 납품기한 이후에 제19조제4항에 따른 시정조치를 한 경우에는 시정조치를 한 날부터 최종 검사에 합격한 날까지의 기간(검사기간이 제19조제3항에서 정한 기간을 초과한 경우에는 같은 조에서 정한 기간으로 한정한다. 이하 같다)을 지체일수에 산입한다.

2. 납품기한이 지나 물품과 검사서류를 제출한 경우에는 납품기한 다음 날부터 검사(시정조치를 한 경우에는 최종 검사)에 합격한 날까지의 기간을 지체일수에 산입한다.

3. 납품기한의 말일이 공휴일(관련 법령에 따라 공단의 휴무일이거나 「노동절 제정에 관한 법률」에 따른 노동절(계약상대자가 실제 업무를 하지 아니한 경우에 한함)인 경우를 포함한다)인 경우 지체일수는 공휴일의 다음 날부터 기산한다.
⑤ 발주자는 제1항부터 제4항까지에 따라 산출된 지체상금을 계약상대자에게 지급될 대가, 대가지급지연에 대한 이자 또는 그 밖의 예치금 등과 상계할 수 있다.
제24조의2(불가항력) ① 불가항력이란 태풍ㆍ홍수 그 밖의 악천후, 전쟁 또는 사변, 지진, 화재, 전염병, 폭동 그 밖의 계약당사자의 통제범위를 벗어나는 사태(이하 “불가항력의 사유”라 한다)가 발생하여 계약이행에 직접적인 영향을 미친 경우로서 계약당사자 누구의 책임에도 속하지 않는 경우를 말한다.
② 제1항의 불가항력의 사유로 다음 각 호에 발생한 손해는 발주자가 부담해야 한다.

1. 제19조에 따른 검사를 완료한 기납부분

2. 검사를 완료하지 않은 부분 중 객관적인 자료(감독일지, 사진 또는 비디오테이프 등)로 이미 수행되었음이 판명된 부분
③ 계약상대자는 제1항 및 제2항의 사유가 발생한 경우에는 지체 없이 그 사실을 발주자에게 통지해야 하며, 발주자는 즉시 그 사실을 조사하고 그 손해의 상황을 확인한 후 그 결과를 계약상대자에게 통지해야 한다.
④ 발주자는 제3항에 따라 손해의 상황을 확인한 경우에는 별도의 약정이 없으면 계약금액의 변경 또는 손해액의 부담 등에 대하여 계약상대자와 협의해야 한다. 다만, 협의가 성립되지 않은 경우에는 제31조에 따라 처리한다.
제25조(계약기간의 연장) ① 계약상대자는 제24조제3항 각 호의 어느 하나의 사유가 계약기간 내에 발생한 경우에는 계약기간 종료 전에 지체 없이 발주자에게 서면으로 계약기간의 연장신청과 제4항에 따른 계약금액 조정신청을 함께 해야 한다. 다만, 연장사유가 계약기간 내에 발생하여 계약기간 경과 후 종료된 경우에는 해당 사유가 종료된 후 즉시 계약기간의 연장신청과 제4항에 따른 계약금액 조정신청을 함께 해야 한다.
② 발주자는 제1항에 따른 계약기간 연장 신청이 접수된 경우에는 즉시 그 사실을 조사ㆍ확인하고 계약이 적절히 이행될 수 있도록 계약기간의 연장 등 필요한 조치를 해야 한다.
③ 발주자는 제1항의 연장청구를 승인하였을 경우에는 제24조에 따른 지체상금을 부과해서는 안 된다.
④ 제2항에 따라 계약기간을 연장한 경우에는 그 변경된 내용에 따라 실비를 초과하지 않는 범위에서 계약금액을 조정한다.
⑤ 발주자는 제1항부터 제4항까지에도 불구하고 계약상대자의 의무불이행으로 발생한 지체상금이 시행령 제50조제1항에 따른 계약보증금 상당액에 달한 경우로서 계약목적물이 발주자의 정책사업 대상이거나 계약의 이행이 노사분규 등 불가피한 사유로 인하여 지연된 경우에는 계약기간을 연장할 수 있다.
⑥ 제4항에 따른 계약기간의 연장은 지체상금이 계약보증금 상당액에 달한 경우에 해야 하며, 연장된 계약기간에 대해서는 제24조에도 불구하고 지체상금을 부과해서는 안 된다.
제26조(계약상대자의 책임 있는 사유로 인한 계약의 해제 또는 해지) ① 발주자는 계약상대자가 다음 각 호의 어느 하나에 해당하는 경우에는 해당 계약의 전부 또는 일부를 해제 또는 해지할 수 있다. 다만, 제3호의 경우 계약상대자의 계약이행 가능성이 있고 계약을 유지할 필요가 있다고 인정되는 경우로서 계약상대자가 계약이행이 완료되지 않은 부분에 상당하는 계약보증금(당초 계약보증금에 제24조제1항에 따른 지체상금의 최대금액을 더한 금액을 한도로 한다)을 추가 납부하는 경우에는 계약을 유지한다.

1. 계약서상의 납품기한(또는 연장된 납품기한) 내에 계약상대자가 계약된 규격 등과 같은 물품 납품을 거부하거나 완료하지 못한 경우

2. 계약상대자의 귀책사유로 납품기일 내에 납품할 가능성이 없음이 명백하다고 인정되는 경우

3. 제24조제1항에 따른 지체상금이 시행령 제50조제1항에 따른 해당 계약의 계약보증금 상당액에 달한 경우

4. 장기물품제조 등의 계약에서 제2차 이후의 계약을 체결하지 않는 경우

5. 계약의 수행 중 뇌물수수 또는 정상적인 계약관리를 방해하는 불법ㆍ부정행위가 있는 경우

6. 입찰에 관한 서류 등을 거짓 또는 부정한 방법으로 제출하여 계약이 체결된 경우

7. 선금의 반복적인 목적 외 사용으로 계약이행에 상당한 지장을 초래할 것이 명백한 경우

8. 그 밖의 계약조건을 위반하고 그 위반으로 계약의 목적을 달성할 수 없다고 인정되는 경우
② 발주자는 제1항에 따라 계약을 해제 또는 해지하는 경우에는 그 사실을 해당 계약상대자에게 통지하고 기납부분 검사를 마친 물품을 기납부분으로 인수한 경우에는 해당 부분에 상당하는 대가를 계약상대자에게 지급한다.
③ 계약상대자는 계약상 기한 내에 해당 물품을 납품할 수 없다고 인정되는 경우에는 지체 없이 발주자에게 통지해야 한다.
④ 제1항에 따라 계약이 해제 또는 해지된 경우 계약상대자는 지급받은 선금에 대하여 미정산잔액이 있는 경우에는 그 잔액에 대한 약정이자 상당액[사유 발생 시점의 금융기관 대출평균금리(한국은행 통계월보상 대출평균금리를 말한다)로 산출한 금액]을 더하여 발주자에게 상환해야 한다. 이 경우 발주자는 상환할 금액과 기성부분의 대가를 상계할 수 있다.
제27조(사정변경에 따른 계약의 해제 또는 해지) ① 발주자는 제26조제1항 각 호의 경우 외에 다음 각 호의 사유와 같이 객관적으로 명백한 발주자의 불가피한 사정이 발생한 경우에는 계약을 해제 또는 해지할 수 있다.

1. 정부정책 변화 등에 따른 불가피한 사업취소

2. 관계 법령의 제정ㆍ개정으로 인한 사업취소

3. 과다한 지역 민원 제기로 인한 사업취소

4. 그 밖의 공공복리에 따른 사업의 변경 등에 따라 계약을 해제 또는 해지하는 경우
② 발주자는 제1항에 따라 계약을 해제 또는 해지하는 경우에는 다음 각 호에 해당하는 금액을 해제 또는 해지한 날부터 14일 이내에 계약상대자에게 지급해야 한다. 이 경우 제7조에 따른 계약보증금을 동시에 반환해야 한다.

1. 제22조제4항의 대가 중 지급하지 않은 금액

2. 전체 물품제조의 완성을 위하여 계약의 해제 또는 해지일 이전에 투입된 계약상대자의 인력ㆍ재료 및 장비의 철수비용
③ 계약상대자는 선금에 대한 미정산잔액이 있는 경우에는 이를 발주자에게 상환해야 한다. 이 경우 미정산잔액에 대한 이자는 더하지 않는다.
제28조(부정당업자의 입찰참가자격제한) 계약상대자가 시행령 제76조에 해당하는 경우에는 1개월 이상 2년 이하의 범위에서 입찰참가자격 제한조치를 받게 된다.
제29조(기술지식의 이용 및 비밀엄수의무) ① 발주자는 사업목적 달성 또는 공공의 이익 등을 위해 필요하다고 인정되는 경우, 계약내용에 따라 계약상대자가 제출하는 각종 보고서, 정보, 그 밖의 자료 및 이에 따라 얻은 기술지식(계약목적물의 내용에 포함되는 경우는 제외한다. 이하 이 조에서 “기술지식 등”이라 한다)의 전부 또는 일부를 계약상대자의 승인을 받아 복사, 이용 또는 공개할 수 있다.
② 계약상대자는 해당 계약을 통하여 얻은 모든 정보 또는 발주자의 기밀사항을 계약이행의 전후와 관계없이 외부에 누설할 수 없다.
③ 발주자는 시장에서 거래되는 등 재산적 가치가 있는 기술지식 등을 제1항에 따라 복사ㆍ이용 또는 공개하려는 경우에는 계약상대자에게 정당한 이용대가를 지급해야 한다. 이 경우 기술지식 등의 이용대가는 시장거래가격 등을 기초로 계약상대자와 협의하여 결정한다.
제29조의2(계약목적물의 지식재산권 귀속 등) 해당 계약에 따른 계약목적물의 지식재산권은 발주자와 계약상대자가 별도의 정함이 없는 한 균등한 지분으로 공동 소유하며, 세부사항은 「용역계약일반조건」 제35조의2부터 제35조의4까지의 규정을 준용한다.
제29조의3(비밀유지계약 체결 및 기술자료 임치) ① 발주자는 「대ㆍ중소기업 상생협력 촉진에 관한 법률」(이하 ‘상생협력법’이라 한다) 제2조제9호에 해당하는 기술자료 중 계약상대자가 비밀로 관리하는 기술자료를 제공받을 경우에는 별지 서식의 비밀유지계약서를 계약상대자와 체결해야 한다.
② 발주자와 계약상대자가 서로 협의하여 핵심기술을 임치하려는 경우에는 「상생협력법 시행령」 제15조의2에 따른 전문인력과 설비를 갖춘 전문기관에 임치할 수 있으며, 기술임치 등에 필요한 사항은 상생협력법 등 관련 법령에 따른다.
제30조(적격심사 관련 사항 이행) ① 시행령 제42조제1항 본문에 따른 물품을 제조ㆍ구매할 때 계약상대자는 계약예규 ｢적격심사기준｣(계약규정 제33조에 따른 심사기준을 포함한다) 심사항목에 규정된 사항에 대하여 적격심사 당시 제출한 내용대로 철저하게 이행해야 한다.
② 발주자는 제1항에 규정한 이행상황을 수시로 확인해야 하며, 제출된 내용대로 이행되지 않고 있는 경우에는 즉시 시정하도록 조치해야 한다.
제31조(분쟁의 해결) ① 물품구매계약의 수행 중 계약당사자 간에 발생하는 분쟁은 협의하여 해결한다.
② 제1항에 따른 협의가 이루어지지 않는 경우에는 법원의 판결 또는 ｢중재법｣에 따른 중재로 해결한다. 다만,「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률」제28조에서 정한 이의신청 대상에 해당하는 경우에는 국가계약분쟁조정위원회 조정결정에 따라 분쟁을 해결할 수 있다.
③ 제2항에도 불구하고 계약을 체결할 때 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률」제28조의2에 따라 분쟁해결방법을 정한 경우에는 그에 따른다.
④ 계약상대자는 제1항부터 제3항까지의 분쟁처리절차 수행 기간 중 물품구매계약의 수행을 중지해서는 안 된다.
[별지 서식] 비밀유지계약서

비밀유지계약서

계약상대자의 기술자료 제공과 관련하여 발주자와 계약상대자는
다음과 같이 비밀유지계약을 체결한다.

제1조(계약의 목적) 이 계약은 계약상대가 발주자에게 계약상대자의 기술자료를 제공하는 경우 해당 기술자료를 비밀로 유지하고 보호하기 위하여 필요한 제반 사항을 규정함을 목적으로 한다.

제2조(기술자료의 정의) ① 이 계약에서 ‘기술자료’란 계약상대자에 따라 비밀로 관리되고 있는 것으로서 다음 각 호의 어느 하나에 해당하는 정보ㆍ자료를 말한다.
1. 제조ㆍ수리ㆍ시공 또는 용역수행 방법에 관한 정보ㆍ자료
2. 특허권, 실용신안권, 디자인권, 저작권 등의 지식재산권과 관련된 기술정보ㆍ자료로서 수급사업자의 기술개발(R&D)ㆍ생산ㆍ영업활동에 기술적으로 유용하고 독립된 경제적 가치가 있는 것
3. 시공프로세스 매뉴얼, 장비 제원, 설계도면, 연구자료, 연구개발보고서 등 1호 또는 2호에 포함되지 않는 그 밖에 사업자의 정보ㆍ자료로서 수급사업자의 기술개발(R&D)ㆍ생산ㆍ영업활동에 기술적으로 유용하고 독립된 경제적 가치가 있는 것
② 수급사업자가 기술자료를 제공함에 있어, 비밀임을 알리는 문구(비밀 또는 대외비 등의 국문 또는 영문 표시 등을 의미)가 표시되어 있지 아니하더라도 비밀로 관리되고 있는지 여부에는 영향을 미치지 않는다.
③ 발주자는 계약상대자의 기술자료가 비밀로 관리되고 있는지 여부(기술자료에서 제외되는지 여부)에 대해 의문이 있는 경우에는 계약상대자에게 그에 대한 확인을 요청할 수 있다. 이 경우 계약상대자는 확인 요청을 받은 날로부터 15일 이내에 발주자에게 해당 기술자료가 비밀로 관리되고 있는지 여부를 서면으로 발송해야 한다.

제3조(기술자료의 목적외 사용금지) ① 발주자는 계약상대자의 기술자료를 ⌜비밀유지계약서(별첨) 1-2.⌟에서 정한 목적으로만 사용해야 한다.
② 발주자가 ⌜비밀유지계약서(별첨) 1-2.⌟에서 정한 목적 수행을 위하여 계약상대자의 기술자료를 제3자에게 제공하고자 할 경우에는 사전에 계약상대자로부터 서면에 따른 동의를 얻어야 하며, 그 제3자와의 사이에 해당 기술자료가 비밀로 유지되어야 함을 목적으로 하는 별도의 비밀유지계약을 체결한 이후에 그 제3자에게 해당 기술자료를 제공해야 한다.
③ 발주자는 ⌜비밀유지계약서(별첨) 2.⌟에 적힌 임직원들에 한하여 계약상대자의 기술자료를 보유할 수 있도록 필요한 합리적인 조치를 취해야 하며, 해당 임직원 각자에게 계약상대자의 기술자료에 대한 비밀유지의무를 주지시켜야 한다. 이 경우 계약상대자는 발주자에게 해당 임직원으로부터 비밀유지서약서를 제출받는 등의 방법으로 해당 기술자료의 비밀성을 유지하기 위하여 필요한 합리적인 조치를 취해줄 것을 요구할 수 있다.

제4조(기술자료의 비밀유지 의무) ① 계약상대자가 사전에 서면(전자문서 포함)으로 동의하지 않는 경우, 발주자는 제공받은 기술자료를 타인에게 누설하거나 공개해서는 안 된다.
② 발주자는 계약상대자의 기술자료가 외부로 유출되는 것을 방지하기 위하여 물리적 설비 설치 및 내부비밀관리지침 마련, 정보보안교육 실시 등 기술자료를 보호하고 관리하는 데에 필요한 합리적인 조치를 취해야 한다.

제5조(기술자료의 반환 또는 폐기방법) ⌜비밀유지계약서(별첨) 1-4.⌟에서 정한 기술자료의 반환일까지 발주자는 계약상대자의 기술자료 원본을 즉시 계약상대자에게 반환해야 하며, 일체의 복사본 등을 보유해서는 안 된다. 다만, 계약상대자의 선택에 따라 이를 반환하는 대신 폐기하는 경우에는 ⌜비밀유지계약서(별첨) 1-4.⌟에서 정한 시점까지 이를 폐기하고 발주자는 그 폐기를 증명하는 서류를 계약상대자에게 제공해야 한다.

제6조(권리의 부존재 등) ① 이 계약은 계약상대자의 기술자료를 제공받는 발주자에게 기술자료에 관한 어떠한 권리나 사용권을 부여하는 것으로 해석되지 않는다. 다만, 발주자가 ⌜비밀유지계약서(별첨) 1-2.⌟에서 정한 목적에 따라 사용하는 경우에 대해서는 그렇지 않다.
② 이 계약은 발주자와 계약상대자 간에 향후 어떠한 확정적인 계약의 체결, 제조물의 판매나 구입, 실시권의 허락 등을 암시하거나 이를 강제하지 않는다.
③ 계약상대자는 기술자료를 제공할 적법한 자격이 있음을 발주자에 대하여 보증한다.

제7조(비밀유지의무 위반시 배상) 발주자가 이 계약을 위반한 경우, 이에 따라 발생한 계약상대자의 손해를 배상해야 한다. 다만, 발주자가 고의 또는 과실이 없음을 입증한 경우에는 그렇지 않다.

제8조(권리의무의 양도 및 계약의 변경) ① 계약상대자가 사전에 서면(전자문서 포함)으로 동의하지 않는 경우, 발주자는 이 계약상의 권리의무를 제3자에게 양도하거나 이전할 수 없다.
② 이 계약의 수정이나 변경은 양 당사자의 정당한 대표자가 기명날인 또는 서명한 서면(전자문서 포함) 합의로만 이루어질 수 있다.
③ ⌜비밀유지계약서(별첨) 2.⌟에 적힌 임직원들의 퇴직, 전직, 조직/업무 변경 등으로 명단이 변경되어야 할 경우에는 발주자는 계약상대자의 사전 동의를 받은 후, 해당 명단을 서면으로 계약상대자에게 통지하는 것으로 이 계약의 변경을 갈음할 수 있다.

제9조(일부무효의 특칙) 이 계약의 내용 중 일부가 무효인 경우에도 이 계약의 나머지 규정의 유효성에 영향을 미치지 않는다. 다만, 유효인 부분만으로 계약의 목적을 달성할 수 없는 경우에는 전부를 무효로 한다.

이 계약의 체결사실 및 계약내용을 증명하기 위하여 이 계약서를 2통 작성하여 계약 당사자가 각각 서명 또는 기명날인한 후 각자 1통씩 보관한다.

년
월
일

발주자
계약상대자
상호 또는 명칭 : 한국원자력환경공단
전화번호 :

주
소 :
대표자 성명 :
(인)
사업자(법인)번호 :
상호 또는 명칭 :
전화번호 :
주
소 :
대표자 성명 :
(인)
사업자(법인)번호 :

첨부: 비밀유지계약서 (별첨) 【첨부】 비밀유지계약서(별첨)

1-1. 계약상대자로부터 제공받는 기술자료의 명칭 및 범위
* 요구하는 기술자료의 명칭과 범위 등 구체적 내역을 명시하여 기재

1-2. <1-1. 기술자료>를 제공받는 목적
* 공단이 기술자료를 요구하는 정당한 사유 기재

1-3. <1-1. 기술자료>의 사용기간:

1-4. <1-1. 기술자료>의 반환일 또는 폐기일:

2. 기술자료를 보유할 임직원의 명단
No.
보유자
이메일
부서
이름
1

2 ⋮

* 위 임직원의 명단은 본 계약의 체결 및 이행을 위해서만 사용될 수 있는 것으로서 이를 무단으로 전송ㆍ배포할 수 없으며, 일부의 내용이라도 공개ㆍ복사해서는 안됨
** 본 건 기술자료를 1-3.의 사용기간 중 보유할 임직원 명단을 기재

===== 2-4. 계약 특수조건_F.hwp =====

Ⅱ. 계 약 조 건 제2장 계약 특수조건

목
차

제2.01조
구매개요
1

제2.02조
통지
2

제2.03조
품질보증, 시험 및 검사
4

제2.04조
제작독려
9

제2.05조
코드·표준 및 도량형
10

제2.06조
품질서류
11

제2.07조
포장, 표시 및 납품
12

제2.08조
하자보증 기간
16

제2.09조
인수통보
17

제2.10조
현장 기술지원서비스
18

제2.11조
하도급 관리
20

제2.12조
계약내용 변경으로 인한 계약금액의 조정
21

제2.13조
물가변동으로 인한 계약금액 조정
22

부록 2A‐１
포장, 표시 및 납품 지침
2A-1-23

부록 2A‐2
기술지원 역무 지침
2A-2-32

제2.01조
구매개요

2.01.1 한국원자력환경공단(이하 공단)은 경북 경주시 문무대왕면 봉길리 일대 중저준위사업본부 내에서 중·저준위 방사성폐기물 인수/검사를 위한 방폐물검사건물 건설사업을 추진 중이다.

2.01.2 중·저준위 방사성폐기물 방폐물검사건물 건설 사업기간은 2017.1. ~ 2028.12. 이다.

제2.02조
통지

2.02.1 공단에 대한 통지는 아래와 같이 전달되어야 한다.

2.02.1.1 계약절차, 계약(변경계약 포함)체결 등의 사항은 아래주소로 송부한다.

경북 경주시 충효천길 19 (우 38062)
한국원자력환경공단 경영관리본부 ESG상생팀
전화번호 : (054) 750‐4076

2.02.1.2 기술규격서에 요구되는 기술자료 및 도면, 기타 모든 기술적 사항(아래 2.02.1.3조 기재사항 제외). 단, 제출서한 사본 1부는 2.02.1.3조의 주소로도 송부되어야 한다.

수신 : 경북 경주시 충효천길 19 (우 38062)
한국원자력환경공단 중저준위사업본부 엔지니어링팀
전화번호 : (054) 750‐4318

사본 : 경북 김천시 혁신로 269(우‐61486)
한국전력기술주식회사
방폐물사업책임자
전화번호 : (054) 421‐4260

2.02.1.3 사업일정, 사업진도 보고, 계약상대자 품질보증계획, 품질감독, 품질보증감사, 제작독려, 하도급 승인에 대하여 아래 주소로 송부한다.

2.02.1.4 위 사항 외에 현장에 통보하여야 할 사항은 2.02.1.3조의 주소로 전달되어야 한다.

2.02.1.5 공단은 2.02.1.3조에 명시된 계약사후관리 업무를 시공관리팀에 위임할 수 있다.

2.02.2 계약상대자에 대한 통지는 아래 주소로 전달되어야 한다.

ㅇㅇㅇㅇㅇㅇㅇㅇ(우‐ㅇㅇㅇㅇㅇ)

ㅇㅇㅇㅇㅇㅇㅇ
ㅇㅇ
전화번호 : (ㅇㅇㅇ)

2.02.3 계약서에 달리 규정되어 있지 않는 한, 계약상 모든 통지, 요청, 청구, 승인, 기타의 의사전달은 인편, 등기우편 등으로 상대방에게 도달한 때 그 효력이 발생한다.

2.02.4 주소가 변경되었을 경우에는 상대방에게 서면으로 통지하여야 한다.

제2.03조
품질보증, 시험 및 검사

2.03.1 품질보증
이 조항은 제Ⅳ편 기술규격서에 규정된 품질등급이 AQ 표시된 품목에 적용된다. 계약상대자는 NQ품목에 대하여 계약요건, 설계 및 제작, 품질요구 수준을 만족하도록 물품특성에 맞게 품질활동을 수행하여야 한다.

2.03.1.1 계약상대자는 계약에 의하여 요구되는 업무품질의 수준을 보증하기 위하여 이 조항과 제Ⅳ편 기술규격서에서 정한 요건에 따라 품질보증계획을 수립·시행하여야 한다.

2.03.1.2 계약상대자는 아래 기준에 맞는 품질보증활동을 수행할 책임이 있으며, 외국 기준과 국내 기준이 상치되는 경우에는 국내 기준을 우선하여 적용한다.

1. 원안위고시(방사성폐기물 폐기시설 품질보증기준)
2. 전력산업기술기준(KEPIC), QAP(원자력 품질보증)
3. 기술규격서 등에 명시된 품질보증기준
4. 공단 품질보증규정 및 품질보증계획서
5. 기타 공인 규격 등

2.03.1.3
계약상대자는 계약발효일로부터 4주 이내에 공단의 품질보증계획서를 기준으로 작성된 품질보증계획서 관리본 1부를 공단에 제출하여 검토를 받아야 한다. 이때 품질보증계획 요건을 선별적으로 차감하여 적용하거나 다른 기준을 참조하여 작성할 경우에는 요건별 대비표와 그 사유를 첨부하여 제출하여야 한다. 다만, 공단이 검토되어 동일 품질등급품목에 적용중인 품질보증계획서를 보유하고 있는 계약상대자는 관련 증빙서류제출로 품질보증계획서의 제출을 대체할 수 있다. 이때 계약상대자는 공급품목에 적용할 품질보증계획서의 명칭, 개정번호, 개정일자 등을 공단에게 알려야 한다.

2.03.1.4 공단이 제시한 검토의견은 20일 이내에 품질보증계획서에 반영하여 공단의 검토를 받아야 하며 또한, 품질보증계획서 개정의 경우에도 원본과 동일한 방법으로 공단의 검토를 받아야 한다. 또한 공단이 계약상대자의 품질보증계획서를 검토한 후에도 그 내용에 미흡한 부분이 발견되면 공단은 이에 대한 보완을 요구할 권한을 갖는다.

2.03.1.5 계약의 일부를 다른 업체에 하도급 할 경우에는 계약상대자가 검토, 인정한 협력업체의 품질보증계획서 1부를 참조용으로 공단에게 제출하여야 한다.

2.03.1.6 계약상대자는 협력업체의 품질보증계획서를 검토 및 필요시 검토의견을 반영토록 하고 이행상태를 확인하며 계약상대자와 동등이상의 품질보증활동을 수행토록 한다.

2.03.1.7 공단은 계약상대자의 계약 이행 중 중대한 품질상의 문제점이 발견된 경우에는 작업중지를 요청할 권리가 있으며, 계약상대자는 공단으로부터 작업중지요청서를 접수 시에는 작업을 중지하고 필요한 조치를 취한 후 결과를 공단에게 알려야 한다. 이러한 작업중지에 따른 제반 책임은 계약상대자에게 있다.

2.03.1.8 계약상대자는 작업 완료 시 품질보증기록을 수집·분류·색인 및 편철하여 공단에 제출하여야 하며, 품질보증기록은 실제 작업과정 또는 구조물, 계통 및 기기의 이력이 명확히 추적될 수 있도록 사전에 관리체계가 수립되어야 한다.

2.03.1.9 계약상대자는 공단에게 제출하지 않은 품질보증기록에 대해서는 품질보증기록 관련 요건에 따라 기록 보존기간을 설정하고 보존기간 동안 보관하여야 하며 계약상대자는 기록 보관 중 계약상대자의 불가피한 사정으로 자체 기록보관이 곤란한 경우가 발생시에는 계약상대자 자체비용으로 공단에게 해당 품질보증기록을 인계하여야 한다.

2.03.1.10 계약상대자는 국내법령과 적용 기술기준에서 법정검사 또는 공인검사가 요구될 시 해당 검사에 합격해야 한다.

2.03.2 품질보증감사, 품질감독 및 검사 요건

2.03.2.1 공단 또는 그 대리인(규제기관 포함)은 계약상대자 또는 그 협력업체의 품질보증계획서 이행상태를 확인하기 위하여 정기 또는 수시로 품질보증감사, 품질감독 및 품질검사 등을 시행할 권한이 있다.

2.03.2.2 계약상대자는 공단 또는 그 대리인이 감사, 감독 및 검사를 위하여 계약상대자 및 협력업체의 공장이나 설비, 현장, 서류 등을 자유롭게 출입, 검토, 열람, 확인할 수 있도록 협조하여야 하고, 필요한 설비(사무실, 전화 등)를 별도의 비용부담 없이 제공하여야 한다.

2.03.2.3 계약상대자는 공단이 품질보증계획의 이행상태 확인 시 사용할 수 있도록 품질보증계획서, 절차서 및 각종 계약관련 서류를 현장에 비치하여야 한다. 공단 또는 그의 대리인에 의한 감사, 감독 및 검사를 수행하였더라도 품질보증계획 이행에 대한 계약상대자의 책임이 면제되는 것은 아니다.

2.03.2.4 계약상대자는 공단의 감사, 감독 및 검사결과의 지적 사항에 대한 시정조치 결과를 공단에 제출하여야 하며, 즉각적인 조치가 어려운 경우에는 시정조치계획을 제출하여야 한다.

2.03.3 공장시험 및 검사

2.03.3.1 계약상대자는 제Ⅳ편 기술규격서에 정해진 기한 내에 제작 또는 작업공정에 대한 품질검사계획서를 공단에 제출하여 공단의 입회점 및 필수확인점을 지정받아야 한다. 계약상대자는 입회점 및 필수확인점으로 지정받는 작업공정에 대하여 국내 공급분은 작업 개시 5일전, 국외 공급분은 작업 개시 ３주전에 공단에 입회요청을 하여야 하고, 검사일정을 변경하여야 할 경우 이를 공단에 통지하여야 한다.

2.03.3.2 계약상대자는 계약이행과 관련하여 기술규격, 설계기준, 제작, 시공관계상 필요한 시험 및 검사와 본 계약서에 공단이 요구되는 시험 및 검사를 계약상대자의 비용으로 시행하여야 한다.

2.03.3.3 계약상대자는 자체의 설비로 수행하지 못하는 시험이 있을 경우, 자신의 비용으로 공인기관 또는 공단이 인정하는 전문기관에서 시험을 실시할 수 있다.

2.03.3.4 계약상대자는 검사결과 불합격 또는 보완이 필요한 경우 자신의 비용으로 시정 및 보완 후 재검사를 받아야 한다.

2.03.4 현장시험 및 검사
현장시험이 제Ⅳ편 기술규격서에 명시된 경우는 아래에 따른다.

2.03.4.1 계약상대자는 현장시험/검사계획서를 제Ⅳ편 기술규격서에 정해진 기한 내에 공단에 제출하여 승인을 받아야 하며 설비를 현장에 설치한 후 제Ⅳ편 기술규격서에 명시한 성능을 확인하기 위하여 계약상대자의 책임 있는 기술자를 파견하여 현장시험 및 검사를 시행하거나 또는 시행에 필요한 기술지원을 하여야 한다.

2.03.4.2 현장시험은 시험조건이 구비되어 시험준비가 완료되었음을 쌍방이 확인한 후 시행되며 계약상대자의 사정으로 지연되는 경우에는 상호 합의하여 연기될 수 있다.

2.03.4.3 계약상대자는 예비점검 및 시운전 중 기기, 계기, 계통, 제어장치 및 회로 등에 요구되는 조정 및 수정을 하여야 한다.

2.03.4.4 공단은 물품의 점검 및 현장시험에 필요한 전력, 연료, 용수를 계약상대자에게 공급한다.

2.03.4.5 계약상대자는 공단의 요청에 따라 기동, 최초부하시험, 부하변동시험, 부하차단시험, 신뢰도 운전 및 성능시험에 필요한 기술자와 계측설비 등 필요한 장비를 지원하여야 한다.

2.03.4.6 계약상대자는 검사결과 불합격 또는 보완이 필요한 경우 자신의 비용으로 시정 및 보완 후 재검사를 받아야 한다.

2.03.5 중대결함의 통지
계약상대자는 다음과 같은 중대결함을 인지할 시에는 공단에 구두로 즉시 통보하고, ７일 이내에 결함내용, 기술적 검토결과 및 조치계획 등을 문서로 작성하여 공단의 최종 처리방안 검토를 위해 공단에 제출하여야 한다.

1. 품질보증프로그램의 일부에 있어서의 중대한 하자

2. 안전성분석보고서에 명시된 기준에 부합되지 않는 건설용으로 승인 배포된 최종설계상의 주요 결함

3. 광범위한 평가, 재설계나 보수가 요구되는 구조물, 계통 또는 기기의 건설 중의 중대한 결함이나 손상

4. 성능요건과의 중대한 불일치로 인하여 구조물, 계통 또는 기기가 계획된 안전기능을 달성하기 위하여 광범위한 평가나 또는 재설계가 필요한 경우

2.03.6 일반규격품(CGI : Commercial Grade Item) 관리

2.03.6.1 계약상대자는 일반규격품(CGI)을 품질검증(Dedication)하여 안전성 관련품목에 사용하고자 하는 경우에는 “계약상대자 불일치사항 처리 요청서(SDDR)”를 공단에 제출하여 승인을 득해야 한다. 이때 일반규격품 품질검증요건에 따라 일반규격품 품질검증계획(CGI Dedication Plan/Conformance for CGI Dedication)를 작성하여 첨부하여야 한다.

2.03.6.2 기자재 납품 시 일반규격품 품질검증과 관련한 품질검증계획, 품질검증확인서 및 보고서(Report)는 품질증명서류로서 공단에게 제출되어야 한다.

제2.04조
제작 독려

2.04.1 공단 또는 그 대리인은 계약상대자와 협력업체의 공장, 기타 시설물에 파견하는 등의 방법으로 계약서에 명시된 업무의 이행을 독려할 권한을 가진다.

2.04.2 계약상대자는 공단 또는 그 대리인이 제작 독려를 위하여 계약상대자 및 협력업체의 공장이나 설비, 현장, 서류 등을 자유롭게 출입, 검토, 열람, 확인할 수 있도록 협조하여야 하고, 별도의 비용부담 없이 필요한 설비 (사무실, 전화 등)를 제공하여야 한다.

2.04.3 계약상대자는 계약체결 후 1개월 이내에 단위업무별 가중치와 월별 공정률이 표시된 예정공정표를 제출하여 공단의 승인을 받아야 한다.

2.04.4 계약상대자는 공단이 계약이행 진도를 실제적으로 파악할 수 있도록 상세한 내용의 월별 진도보고서를 매월 공단에 제출하여야 한다. 진도보고서에는 주요 협력업체의 작업진도가 포함되어야 한다.

2.04.5 계약상대자는 이 계약의 원활한 수행을 위하여 필요시 사업관리조직을 구성하고 사업관리책임자, 공사현장대리인 및 담당자를 임명하여야 하며, 그 내용을 계약 후 30일 이내에 공단에 통보하여야 한다.

제2.05조
코드, 표준 및 도량형

2.05.1 계약상대자는 제Ⅳ편 기술규격서에 달리 명시되어 있지 않는 한, 법규 및 규격, 표준을 준수하여야 한다. 계약상대자는 필요한 경우 그러한 요건적합성에 대한 증명서를 획득하여야 한다.

2.05.2 계약상대자는 도면, 자료, 운전설명서 등에 국제단위계(SI unit)를 사용하여야 한다. 필요한 때에는 미국단위계(푸트‐파운드법)와 병행하여 사용할 수 있다.

2.05.3 계약상대자가 계약에 따라 제공하여야 하는 모든 설계, 엔지니어링, 인허가 및 제작은 제Ⅳ편 기술규격서에 규정된 모든 요건을 충족하여야 한다. 계약상대자는 계약이후 새로 공표되거나 개정된 규격의 적용이 공단에 유익한 경우 이를 공단에 제안하여야 하며, 공단의 사전승인 하에 새로운 규격 및 표준을 사용할 수 있다.

제2.06조
품질서류

2.06.1
계약서에서 요구하는 모든 품질관련서류는 제４장 기술규격서 부록 4E 품질 증명서류 목록(QVDL)에 따라 정확히 작성되어야 하며, 매 납품시마다 물품과 함께 공단에 제출되어야 한다.

2.06.2 모든 품질서류는 공단 또는 그 대리인(SQR)에 의하여 검토되어야 한다. 공단의 검사가 요구될 경우, 일체의 품질서류에 대하여 만족스런 것으로 검토가 완료되기 전에는 선적지시가 나갈 수 없다. 매 품질증명서류 목록은 표지에 아래와 같이 상업송장번호, 계약서 번호 및 수신인이 명시되어야 한다.

“품질증명서류”

계약서 번호:
상업송장번호:
수신:

2.06.3 품질서류 묶음은 반드시 방수봉투로 포장하여 물품과 함께 선적되어야 하며, 운송 중 분실되지 않도록 물품 포장단위 내에 단단하게 부착되어야 한다. 물품이 하나 이상의 포장단위로 선적될 경우, 품질서류 묶음은 일련번호 1번의 포장단위에 포함되어야 하며, 포장단위 표면에 “품질서류 재중”이라고 붉은 색으로 굵게 표시하여야 한다. 위와 같은 조치가 불가할 경우 납품서 및 품목명세서와 함께 제출되어야 한다.

제2.07조
포장, 표시 및 납품

2.07.1 계약상대자는 계약문서에 규정된 납품조건, 절차 및 일정에 따라 물품 (납품서류 등을 포함한다)을 납품하고 기술인력을 지원한다.

2.07.2
물품의 납품은 계약문서에 규정된 조건에 따라 시험 및 검사에 합격한 물품을 공단이 지정된 장소에서 계약상대자로부터 수령한 때에 완료된다. 다만, 계약서상 설치 및 성능시험 등의 조건이 계약상대자 공급범위에 포함되어 있는 경우에는 이를 완전히 수행한 때에 완료된다.

2.07.3 계약상대자가 공단의 귀책사유로 인해 물품을 납품할 수 없을 경우에는 계약상대자는 공단이 지정하는 창고에 물품을 보관할 수 있다. 이 경우에는 공단 및 공단이 지정하는 자를 수하인으로 하여 발행된 창고증권을 공단이 수령한 때에 계약상의 납품이 이루어진 것으로 본다. 계약상대자는 보험을 포함하여 보관된 물품의 안전을 위해서 필요하다고 생각되는 모든 조치를 다 하여야 한다. 공단의 요청이 있을 때에는 계약상대자는 보관창고로부터 계약서에 규정된 납품장소로 물품을 이송하여야 한다. 공단은 이 조항에 의한 납품과정에서 발생한 비용과 정상적인 납품 시 발생했을 비용간의 차액은 상대방에게 정산 지급되어야 한다.

2.07.4 이 계약에 의거 공급되는 물품은 부록 2A‐1, [포장, 표시 및 납품지침]에 따라 포장, 표시 및 납품되어야 한다.

제2.08조
하자보증기간

2.08.1 물품 및 기술지원서비스에 대한 하자보증은 제2.10조에 따라 인수통보일로부터 3년간 유효하다.

2.08.2 인수통보일이 계약상대자의 귀책사유가 아닌 다른 사유로 예정일로부터 ６개월 이상 지연될 경우, 양 당사자는 그러한 지연에 따른 하자보증기간의 연장에 대한 보상방안을 협의하여 결정한다.

2.08.3 2.08.1조에 규정된 하자보증기간이 경과되었을지라도 하자보증기간 내에 하자보수를 요청한 경우에는 하자보수완료에 대하여 공단이 확인된 시점에 하자보증기간이 종료된다. 또한, 하자부분이 단위기기 내에서 매우 중요하거나 업무의 다른 부분에 영향을 미친 경우에 하자보증은 단위기기 전체 또는 영향을 받은 업무까지 적용된다.

제2.09조
인수 통보

2.09.1 해당 물품 설치후 성능확인이 성공적으로 완료되고 하자보수보증 의무를 제외한 계약상대자의 계약상 의무가 모두 이행되었을 때에 공단은 계약상대자에게 인수통보서를 발급한다.

2.09.2 성능시험 결과가 성능 보증치 미달로 최종 확정되는 경우, 공단은 인수를 거절하거나 적정금액의 배상 또는 계약금액 감액 조건으로 인수할 수 있다. 계약상대자가 인수거절 또는 계약금액 감액으로 인하여 환급할 금액이 있거나 배상을 하여야 할 경우 계약상대자는 공단의 청구서를 접수한 후 20일 이내에 해당금액을 공단에 지급하여야 한다.

2.09.3 계약상대자의 의무 이행상의 경미한 누락이나 하자가 있을 경우, 공단은 양 당사자가 상호 합의한 기간 이내에 계약상대자가 이를 시정하는 조건으로 인수할 수 있다.

2.09.4 공단은 현장에 도착된 물품을 인수할 수 있으나, 이러한 잠정인수가 계약상대자의 계약상의 의무와 책임이 면제되거나 공단이 계약상대자에게 대한 손해배상 청구권 또는 원상회복조치를 요구할 수 있는 권리를 포기하는 것은 아니다.

제2.10조
현장기술지원서비스

계약상대자는 이 계약에 의거 납품되는 물품의 인수, 하역, 검사, 저장, 설치, 현장시험 및 운전과 관련하여 공단의 요청시 부록 2A‐2 [기술지원역무지침]에 의거 현장기술지원을 제공하여야 한다.

제2.11조
하도급의 관리

2.11.1 계약상대자는 계약된 일부를 제3자에게 하도급 하고자 할 때에는 하도급 부분에 해당하는 계약금액 산출내역서를 포함하여 공단의 승인을 받아야 한다.

2.11.2 2.12.1조의 규정에 의하여 하도급한 경우에도 계약에 의한 계약상대자의 의무는 면제되지 아니한다.

2.11.3 계약상대자는 하도급 계약을 체결하고자 할 때에는 하도급심사 기준에 따라 하수급인의 공정관리능력, 품질관리능력, 기술능력, 가격의 적정성 등을 검토하여 적격한 업체를 선정하여야 한다.

2.11.4 공단은 하수급인의 제작실적을 정기적으로 평가하여 하수급인의 교체를 요구할 수 있으며, 계약상대자는 특별한 사유가 없는 한 이를 교체하여야 한다.

제2.12조
계약내용 변경으로 인한 계약금액의 조정

2.12.1 계약서에 명시된 기술규격(도면 포함) 또는 물품 수량의 변경으로 인하여 계약금액을 조정하는 경우에는 다음 기준에 의한다. 다만, 계약상대자의 책임이 있는 사유로 인한 경우에는 계약금액을 증액할 수 없다.

1. 증감된 물량의 단가는 제Ⅲ편 물품 및 가격명세의 단가(이하 “계약단가”라 한다)에 의한다.

2. 계약단가가 없는 신규비목의 단가는 계약변경 당시 기준으로 산정된 단가에 낙찰률(예정가격에 대한 낙찰금액 또는 계약금액의 비율을 말한다. 이하 같다)을 곱한 금액으로 한다.

3. 제1호 및 제2호에도 불구하고 공단의 책임 있는 사유로 인한 경우에는 증가된 물량 또는 신규비목의 단가는 계약변경 당시를 기준으로 하여 산정한 단가와 동단가에 낙찰률을 곱한 금액의 범위 안에서 계약상대자 간에 협의하여 결정한다. 다만, 계약상대자간에 협의가 이루어지지 아니하는 경우에는 설계변경 당시를 기준으로 하여 산정한 단가와 동단가에 낙찰률을 곱한 금액을 합한 금액의 100분의 50으로 한다.

2.12.2 위 2.13.1조의 경우를 제외한 기타 계약내용의 변경으로 인하여 계약금액을 조정하는 경우에는 변경된 내용에 따라 실비를 초과하지 않는 범위 안에서 이를 조정한다. 2.13.1조 단서의 규정은 이 경우에도 준용한다.

2.12.3 공단은 불가피한 경우를 제외하고는 이 조항에 의한 계약상대자의 계약금액 조정 청구를 받은 날부터 30일 이내에 계약금액을 조정한다. 이 경우 조정청구 내용의 보완에 소요되는 기간은 위 조정기간에 산입하지 않는다.

제2.13조
물가변동으로 인한 계약금액 조정

2.13.1 제Ⅲ편 물품 및 가격명세에 명시된 계약금액에 대하여는 아래 규정된 조건에 의하여 물가변동에 따라 계약금액 또는 계약단가를 조정한다.
단, 국외공급분 및 미합중국 달러화로 표시된 국내 공급분은 전 계약기간 동안 물가변동에 따른 가격조정을 하지 아니한다.

2.13.2 물가변동으로 인한 계약금액 조정은 품목조정 또는 지수조정 방법 중 하나의 방법에 의하여야 하며, 계약체결 시 협의하여 조정방법을 확정한다.

2.13.3 물가변동으로 인한 계약금액의 증액은 계약상대자의 청구에 의한다.

2.13.4 선금급을 지급하였을 경우에는 계약금액 증감액에서 다음 산식에 의하여 산출된 금액을 공제한다.

공제금액 = 물가변동 적용대가 × 조정률 × 선금급률

2.13.5
계약상대자는 계약체결 후 1개월 이내에 제조공정예정표를 공단에 제출하여 승인을 받아야 한다.

2.13.6 공단은 불가피한 경우를 제외하고는 이 조항에 의한 계약상대자의 계약금액 조정 청구를 받은 날부터 20일 이내에 계약금액을 조정한다. 이 경우 조정청구 내용의 보완에 소요되는 기간은 위 조정기간에 산입하지 않는다.

부록 2A ‐１ 포장, 표시 및 납품 지침

목
차

1.0
일반사항
2A-1-25

2.0
보존처리
2A-1-26

3.0
포장 및 묶음
2A-1-26

4.0
중량물 및 활대품
2A-1-27

5.0
표시
2A-1-28

6.0
납품
2A-1-29

부록 2A‐1 포장, 표시 및 납품 지침 1.0 일반사항

1.01 이 지침은 제Ⅳ편 기술규격서에 특별히 규정되지 않는 한, 이 계약에 의거 공급되는 물품의 포장, 표시 및 납품에 적용된다. 이 지침에 규정된 조건이 제Ⅳ편 기술규격서에 규정된 포장 및 표시조건보다 더 상세할 경우에는 이 지침을 우선 적용한다.

1.02 계약상대자는 이 지침을 하도급업체에게도 적용하도록 하여야 한다.

1.03 모든 기자재 및 포장단위는 기계적으로 조작할 수 있는 특성을 가져야 하며, 필요할 경우 걸쇠, U링크 등이 물품에 장착되거나 활재(skid)를 갖추어야 한다.

1.04 기자재는 가능한 한 최대단위로 조립되어 납품되어야 한다. 납품여건상 분해되어 납품될 경우에는 각 부품에 연계표시가 있어야 하며, 성능보증에 어떠한 영향도 미치지 않아야 한다. 모든 물품 및 그 용기는 계약번호, 품목번호 등이 표시되어야 하고, 식별번호가 표시된 꼬리표를 최소 두 군데 이상 각 물품에 부착하여야 한다.

1.05 꼬리표는 비철금속이나 견고한 플라스틱으로 만들어 져야 하고, 꼬리표 이음줄은 비철금속 또는 스테인리스스틸이어야 한다.

1.06 가연성 자재나 위험한 자재는 해당 규제법령이나 국제규격 또는 관습에 따라 포장, 표기 및 운송되어야 한다.

1.07 모든 기자재는 현장 또는 선적지에서 어떠한 손상 없이 옥외 보관을 할 수 있도록 포장되어야 한다.

1.08 계약상대자는 필요하다고 판단할 경우 물품의 현장저장, 보관, 사용 및 취급상의 주의사항 및 요령을 제공하여야 한다.

1.09 계약상대자는 공급범위에 대하여 계약상대자의 부주의 또는 부적절한 조치로 인하여 발생된 손상 또는 망실에 대하여 책임을 져야 한다.

2.0 보존처리

2.01 염해 또는 염습에 부식되기 쉬운 물품은 운송중이거나 옥외저장 또는 충격보호를 위하여 적정한 임시 보호제로 포장되어야 한다. 임시보호제로 사용된 컴파운드는 사용전 쉽게 제거되거나, 제거되지 않아도 사용상 문제가 없어야 한다.

2.02 기계류의 모든 내부는 녹 또는 산화방지를 위하여 윤활제로 처리되어야 하며, 운전중 계속 사용하는 제품과 호환성이 있어야 하고 사용상 주의사항이 적절한 꼬리표에 명시되어야 한다.

2.03 비교적 장기간 사용하지 않을 경우 손상되기 쉬운 제품은 특별차단제, 끼움조각 (shim), 모조 베어링 (dummy bearings)등으로 포장되어야 한다.

2.04 습기 또는 수분에 의하여 손상되기 쉬운 물품은 방수제로 내부 포장한 후 박스 내에 포장되어야 한다.

2.05 건조제 또는 휘발성 부식방지제는 봉함용기, 차단제 등에서만 사용되어야 한다. 휘발성 부식방지제는 황동, 납 또는 동 금속의 합금이 노출된 곳에서는 사용되지 않아야 한다.

2.06 배관류는 양단에 마개를 끼우는 등의 적절한 방법으로 찌그러짐과 이물질 또는 습기가 들어가는 것을 방지해야 한다.

2.07 수용성 부식방지제는 사용하지 않아야 한다. 석유류 계통 부식방지제를 사용할 수 없는 금속제품은 최소 6㎜ 두께의 폴리에틸렌 시트로 포장되어야 한다.

3.0 포장 및 묶음

3.01 계약상대자는 산업 및 국제표준에 따라 모든 물품을 자신의 비용으로 수송과 현장에서의 취급 및 일시적인 저장에 적합하고, 습기, 강우, 이상 저온·고온, 염해, 염습, 먼지, 마찰 및 충격 등에 의한 손상을 방지하며, 수송 또는 저장 중 자연재해와 도난, 조작상의 손상·파괴를 피할 수 있도록 포장하여야 한다.

3.02 예비품과 특수공구는 관련 계약번호 및 기호 등을 명기한 꼬리표를 부착하고, 별도로 포장하며 포장의 외부에 ‘예비품’ 또는 ‘특수공구’라고 명기하여야 한다.

3.03 스풀(Spool)이나 조립용 부품(Fittings), 볼트와 너트 등의 부속품과 분해된 부품은 관련 계약번호 및 기호 등을 명기한 꼬리표를 붙여 별도로 포장하며, 포장 외부에 `부속품과 분해된 부품'이라고 명기하여야 한다.

3.04 매 포장에는 포장명세서 １부를 첨부하여야 하며, 드럼통 등 명세서를 첨부하기 어려운 것에는 용기에 기명하여야 한다. 포장명세서에는 계약번호, 포장번호, 포장수량, 포장품명, 수량, 순무게, 총무게, 부피 등이 명시되어야 한다.

3.05 계약상대자가 적절한 포장시설이나 경험이 없는 경우에는 전문업체에 이를 의뢰하여야 한다.

3.06 계약문서에 특별히 규정되지 않는 한, 납품후 모든 포장재는 공단의 소유가 된다.

4.0 중량물 및 활대품

4.01 단일포장단위의 중량이 40톤을 초과할 때에는, 굴림이동(roll‐on/roll‐off) 또는 들어올림(pulling)에 의한 안전수송 및 취급에 적합하도록 적절한 활재(skid) 와 손잡이(pulling eyes), 재킹보스(jacking boss)등을 갖추어야 한다.

4.02 중량물 및 활대품의 경우에는 통상적으로 사용되는 거양기에 의한 작업이 가능하도록 적절한 들어올림 장치, 가로막대(spreader bars) 또는 특수장치 등을 계약상대자 책임으로 현장까지 제공하여야 하며, 이는 공단의 재산이 된다.

5.0
표시

5.01 납품되는 물품에는 제작자명 또는 상표, 모델번호, 크기, 계약번호, 품목번호 등을 표시한 표지를 부착하여야 하며, 표지는 그 물품의 내용 년수와 같아야 하고, 물품의 형태 또는 성질에 따라 인쇄, 금속판첩찰, 꼬리표 또는 기타 방법에 의하여야 한다.

5.02 포장의 외부표지는 5센티미터 이상 크기의 글자로 읽을 수 있고 지워지지 않도록 각 포장단위의 양쪽 면이나 묶음(bundle)의 양단에 견고하게 묶인 꼬리표에 페인트나 스텐슬(stencil)로 다음 기재사항과 공단이 요구하는 사항을 표시하여야 한다.

한국원자력환경공단 방폐물검사건물
계약번호 :
선적승인번호 :
포장일련번호 : (예 1of3, 2of3, 3of3 등)
총중량(kg) :
순중량(kg) :
용적(㎥) : 가로(m) X 세로(m) X 높이 (m)
계약상대자 성명 및 주소 :

5.03 필요한 경우, ‘취급주의’, ‘깨지는 물건 : 떨어뜨리지 마시오’, ‘바로 세우시오’, ‘이 면을 위로’, ‘무게중심’, ‘이 곳을 매다시오’ (화살표와 함께 표시), ‘갈고리 사용금지’ 등과 같은 특별표시를 포장단위의 표면에 표시하여야 한다.

5.04 배관자재와 같이 묶음(bundle)단위로 납품되는 벌크자재의 경우 각 자재마다 “한국원자력환경공단 방폐물검사건물”표기를 하여야 한다.

5.05 하자품의 교체 또는 수량부족분 보충자재일 경우에는 포장단위 표면에 “대체품 또는 누락품”임을 명시하여야 한다.

5.06 계약상대자는 공단의 로고 또는 CI가 표시된 물품을 타인에게 판매할 수 없다.

6.0 납품

6.01 계약상대자는 납품예정일로부터 최소 14일 이전에 납품장소, 납품품목 명세, 총중량 및 용적, 가장 큰 화물의 중량과 치수, 송장금액, 예정 납품일, 검수입회자 인적사항, 기타 공단이 요청하는 정보를 팩스전송이나 전신으로 공단에 통보하여야 한다.

6.02 계약상대자는 계약서 또는 납품요청서상에 규정된 납품기일까지 지정장소에 물품반입을 완료한 후(국외공급분의 경우 물품통관완료 포함) 또는 설치·성능시험조건 등이 포함된 경우에는 이를 완료한 후 공단에 서면(납품서 또는 설치·성능시험완료보고서 등)으로 검사요청 하여야 한다. 계약상 기납부분에 대하여 완납 전에 대가의 전부 또는 일부를 지급하는 경우에도 또한 같다.

6.03 공단은 제6.02조의 통지를 받은 때에는 공단 검사관계규정 및 다음 각 호의 요령에 따라 계약서 및 기타 관계서류에 의하여 그 날로부터 14일 이내에 계약상대자의 입회하에 그 이행을 확인하기 위한 검사를 하여야 한다. 다만, 천재지변 등 불가항력적인 사유로 인하여 검사를 완료하지 못한 경우에는 당해 사유가 존속되는 기간과 당해 사유가 소멸된 날로부터 3일 까지는 이를 연장할 수 있다.

1.검사는 품질, 규격, 수량, 포장, 표기상태, 포장명세서 등에 관하여 행한다. 설치·성능시험조건부 계약인 경우에는 기술규격서 및 관련법규에 규정된 설치요건·성능 등을 포함한다.

2.계약상대자는 검사에 필요한 시험품의 납품을 요청 받은 경우 지체없이 이를 제공하여야 하며, 시험품의 제공과 검사를 하기 위한 변형, 소모, 파손 또는 변질로 생기는 손상은 계약상대자의 부담으로 한다.

6.04 공단은 제6.03조의 검사에 있어서 계약상대자의 계약이행 내용의 전부 또는 일부가 계약에 위반되거나 부당함을 발견한 때에는 필요한 시정조치를 요구할 수 있다. 이 경우에는 계약상대자로부터 그 시정을 완료한 사실을 통지 받은 날로부터 제6.03조의 기간을 계산한다.

6.05 제6.04조의 경우에 계약이행기간이 연장된 때에는 공단은 제Ⅱ편 계약일반조건 제24조(지체상금)의 규정에 의한 지체상금을 부과한다. 지체상금의 부과대상이 되는 지체일수는 다음 각 호의 1에 따라 산정된다.

1.납품기한 내에 물품 (검사에 필요한 서류를 포함한다)을 납품한 때에는 제6.03조의 규정에 의한 검사에 소요된 기간은 지체일수에 산입하지 아니한다.

2.납품기한을 경과하여 물품과 검사서류를 제출한 때(제6.04조에 의한 시정조치를 요구한 때 포함)에는 납품기한 다음날부터 최종검사에 합격한 날까지의 기간을 지체일수에 산입한다. 다만, 다시 납품검사를 요청한 경우로서 공단의 귀책사유로 14일을 초과하여 검사한 경우에는 그 초과일수를 지체일수에서 차감한다.

6.06 계약상대자는 제6.03조의 규정에 의한 검사에 입회·협력하여야 한다. 계약상대자가 입회를 거부하거나 검사에 협력하지 아니함으로써 발생하는 지체에 대하여는 제6.04조 및 제6.05조의 규정을 준용한다.

6.07 계약상대자는 제6.03조 및 제6.04조의 규정에 의한 검사에 이의가 있을 때에는 재검사를 요청할 수 있다. 이 경우 공단은 지체 없이 재검사를 하여야 한다.

6.08 공단은 검사를 완료한 때에는 그 결과를 서면으로 계약상대자에게 통지하여야 한다.

6.09 ２개 이상의 장소에 납품하는 조건 (납품장소별 납품조건)으로 계약체결 및 납품요청을 하였을 경우에는 계약상대자는 납품장소별로 검사요청 하여야 한다. 다만, 공단이 필요시 또는 불가피할 경우에는 일괄하여 검사할 수 있다.

6.10 산업표준화법에 의한 KS표시품 또는 품질경영 및 공산품안전관리법에 의하여 등급이 사정된 물품에 대하여는 제6.02조의 규정에 불구하고 검사를 면제할 수 있다. 다만, 특약조건이 있거나 당해 물품이 성질상 인명피해 또는 화재발생의 원인이 될 수 있다고 판단되는 경우에는 그러하지 아니하다.

6.11 계약상대자는 관계법령 또는 기술규격서에 의하여 시험 또는 형식승인 등을 필하여야 할 물품에 대하여는 물품 납품시에 시험성적서 또는 형식승인서를 공단에 제출하여야 한다.

6.12 계약상대자가 수입승인·통관 등의 수입절차를 이행하는데 있어 필요한 경우, 공단은 계약상대자의 비용부담으로 필요한 협조를 계약상대자에게 제공한다.

6.13 계약상대자는 납품시에 다음 각 호의 서류를 물품과 함께 공단에 제출하여야 한다. 납품서류를 물품과 같이 포장하는 경우에는 포장 겉면에 이를 표시하여야 하며, 포장단위가 여러 개일 경우에는 일련번호 １번의 포장단위에 이를 위치하도록 한다.

‐ 납품서 ５부
‐ 상세 포장명세서 ５부
‐ 품질증명서류 ２부
‐ 수입면장 사본 １부 (원본제시) 및 수입세금계산서 원본 １부
(국외 공급분만 해당)
‐ 복합운송서류, 운송화물상환증 등 원본 (화물상환에 필요한 경우)
‐ 기타 공단이 요구하는 서류

6.14 납품서류는 계약조건에 따라 정확히 작성되어야 한다.

6.15 공단이 필요에 따라 분할납품을 요구하거나, 계약상 분할납품이 허용된 경우를 제외하고는 분할납품을 할 수 없으며, 분할납품이 허용된 경우에도 납품횟수는 지정된 횟수범위 내에 한한다.

부록 2A‐2 기술지원역무지침

목
차

1.0
범위
2A-2-34

2.0
수행자 관리
2A-2-34

3.0
대가 지급
2A-2-35

4.0
공단의 지원사항
2A-2-37

5.0
이행확인서
2A-2-37

부록 2A‐2 1.0 범위

1.01 계약서에 별도로 규정되지 않는 한, 계약상대자는 공단의 요청이 있는 경우 제Ⅲ편 물품 및 가격명세 또는 제Ⅳ편 기술규격서에 규정된 기술지원서비스 (이하 "기술서비스"이라 함)를 이 조항에 따라 제공하여야 한다.

1.02 기술서비스의 일반범위는 다음과 같다.

1. 물품의 인수, 하역, 검사, 저장, 설치와 현장시험을 위한 감리 및 기술지원

2. 공단 직원에 대한 기술 및 절차 교육

3. 물품 문제에 대한 적절한 현장조치 및 현장 활동에 대한 업무조정

4. 공단이 정당하게 요청하는 기타 업무

1.03 기술지원서비스수행자(이하 ‘수행자’라 함)는 도면 및 기술규격서를 면밀히 검토하여 불일치나 차이점이 있을 경우, 이를 업무진행 이전에 공단에 통보하여야 한다.

1.04 수행자는 기술서비스의 원활한 수행에 필요한 공구를 갖추어야 한다.

1.05 기술서비스는 설치된 물품이 계약서에 규정된 대로 방폐물 처분시설의 정상운전상태에 적합하도록 적절하고 완전하게 수행되어야 한다.

2.0 수행자 관리

2.01 공단이 기술서비스를 요청하면 계약상대자는 즉시 수행자 각각의 직무명세, 경력 및 직능등급이 기재된 이력서를 포함한 인력표를 제출하여 공단의 승인을 받아야 하며, 승인 받은 수행자를 요청기간 또는 합의된 기간 동안 지원하여야 한다.

2.02 계약상대자가 기술서비스를 수행하도록 파견한 수행자는 공단으로부터 독립하여 업무를 수행하며 계약상대자를 대리하여 구속력 있는 결정을 할 수 있는 권한을 가져야 한다. 수행자가 2인 이상인 경우 계약상대자는 책임자를 지명하여야 한다.

2.03 수행자는 필요한 능력을 갖추어야 한다. 공단은 수행자의 능력부족으로 제공받는 기술서비스의 성과가 계약조건을 충족하지 못할 것으로 판단되는 경우 수행자의 교체를 요청할 수 있는 권한을 가지며, 이 경우 계약상대자는 즉시 자기비용으로 공단의 승인을 받은 수행자로 교체하여야 한다.

2.04 공단과의 업무협조, 시공사와의 협동작업 또는 기술감리를 위하여 필요한 경우 수행자의 업무수행 시간은 공단 또는 시공사의 업무시간 계획에 따라 조정되어야 하며, 수행자의 기술서비스 제공기간 중 휴가는 양 당사자의 상호합의에 의한다.

2.05 공단의 책임 있는 사유로 기술서비스가 ２주 이상 정지되고 단기간 내에 재개될 전망이 없는 경우, 계약상대자는 공단의 동의를 얻어 기술서비스가 재개될 때까지 수행자 전부 또는 일부를 철수시킬 수 있다.

2.06 공단이 정당하게 요청하는 경우, 계약상대자는 공급조건의 변경 없이 기술서비스 제공기간을 연장하여야 한다.

2.07 수행자는 공단의 현장 운영규정, 절차 및 모든 의무적용 법규를 준수해야 한다. 또한 공단의 지시에 따라 재난방지절차를 준수해야 하며 기술서비스수행과 관련하여 현장에서 발생하는 사고에 대해 즉시 문서로 공단과 지방경찰 및 지방노동감독관에게 보고해야 한다.

3.0 대가 지급

3.01 계약상대자는 제Ⅲ편 물품 및 가격명세에 규정된 항목별 가격에 따라 기술서비스에 대한 대가를 지급 받는다.

3.02 제Ⅲ편 물품 및 가격명세에 규정된 각 항목별 가격의 적용조건은 다음과 같다.

1. 정상근무수당은 일당으로 지급하며 초과근무(휴일근무 포함)수당은 시간급으로 지급한다. 실근무시간은 공단의 현장책임자가 승인한 작업시간표로 확인한다.

2. 정상근무시간은 월요일부터 금요일까지 ８시간(１시간의 점심시간은 제외)이다.

3. 초과근무수당은 정상근무시간을 초과한 근무시간에 적용한다. 일요일을 포함한 공휴일은 현장의 공단 직원과 동일하게 적용한다. 수행자의 초과근무는 공단의 현장책임자에 의해 요청을 받거나 승인된 경우에 한한다. 수행자는 공단이 정당하게 요청하는 초과근무 또는 교대근무를 거부하여서는 아니 되며, 휴일근무는 ８시간을 초과하지 못한다. 계약상대자의 귀책사유로 인한 초과근무에 대하여는 공단이 대가를 지급하지 아니한다.

4. 기술서비스 수행과 관련된 숙박, 식사, 지역 교통비 등은 실비로 지급한다. 일당은 한국엔지니어링협회가 공표한「엔지니어링 사업대가 기준」에 의거하여 산정된 금액을 초과할 수 없다.

5. 수행기간은 기술서비스가 수행되기 시작한 날로부터 완료일까지로 하며, 휴가와 결근일수는 제외한다.

3.03 계약서에 노무 투입량이나 기술서비스금액의 최고한도가 규정된 경우, 기술서비스가 이를 초과하여 소요되는 때에는, 계약상대자는 공단의 추가부담 없이 초과 기술서비스를 제공하여야 한다. 그러나 초과 기술서비스가 공단 측의 책임 있는 사유로 소요되는 경우에는 계약서에 규정된 것과 동일한 요율 및 조건으로 대가를 지급하여야 한다.

3.04 대가지급을 위하여, 계약상대자는 상업송장, 공단에 의하여 승인된 이행확인서, 근무시간표 및 비행기 탑승증 또는 비행기요금영수증 등을 첨부하여 공단에 제출하여야 한다.

3.05 기술서비스에 대한 대가지급이 전부 완료된 후 계약금액과 실제 지급액과의 차이가 발생될 경우, 양당사자는 별도 계약변경 절차 없이 총 계약금액이 변경된 것으로 간주하며, 이에 따라 계약이행보증금 조정이 요구될 경우에는 계약상대자는 관련조항에 따라 이를 조정하여야 한다.

4.0 공단의 지원사항

4.01 기술서비스 수행인력의 도면 및 개인장비 보관장소 등이 필요할 때에는 공단은 계약상대자의 비용부담없이 이를 제공할 수 있다.

5.0 이행확인서

계약상대자는 기술서비스를 종료한 후 공단의 현장책임자 또는 대리인에게 아래와 같은 이행확인서를 제출, 승인을 득한다.

“(계약상대자명)은 귀사의 요청에 따라 틀림없이 기술서비스를 이행하였으며, 계약조건에 따라 요구되는 보고서 또는 절차서를 제출하였음을 확인합니다.”

20
년
월
일

확인자 (공단)
계약상대자

[R26BK01744001] [재공고/기술입찰서 제출 공고] 방폐물검사건물 건설기자재 480V 저압차단기반 및 전동기제어반(E208) 구매

상세 정보

📄 공고문 전문 첨부 「2-1. 기술제안서 제출 안내 공고문.hwp」에서 추출 · 원문 파일이 우선합니다

📎 첨부파일